WLAN Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide PDF

WLAN
Hardware Installation and

Maintenance Guide
Issue 06
Date 2019-12-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://e.huawei.com
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide About This Document
About This Document
Overview
This document describes hardware features of the following WLAN devices and
provides basic installation methods.
● WLAN access controllers (ACs)
● Wi-Fi 5 and Wi-Fi 6 access points (APs)
Intended Audience
This document is intended for network engineers responsible for WLAN
installation and maintenance. You should have experience in network device
installation and maintenance.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide About This Document
Symbol Description

situation which, if not avoided, could
result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices
not related to personal injury.
NOTE Calls attention to important

information, best practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information
not related to personal injury,
equipment damage, and environment
deterioration.
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide Contents
Contents
About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Access Controllers....................................................................................................................1
1.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AC6005 and AC6605).............................................................. 1
1.1.1 Device Overview................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1.1 AC6003................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1.2 AC6005................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
1.1.1.3 AC6605.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
1.1.2 Device Installation............................................................................................................................................................. 36
1.1.2.1 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................................................36
1.1.2.2 Preparing for Installation............................................................................................................................................ 36
1.1.2.2.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Cautions................................................................................................................36
1.1.2.2.2 Checking the Installation Site.................................................................................................................................38
1.1.2.2.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack..................................................................................................................................... 39
1.1.2.2.4 Checking the Power Supply System..................................................................................................................... 39
1.1.2.2.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories.................................................................................................... 39
1.1.2.3 Unpacking a Device.......................................................................................................................................................42
1.1.2.4 Installing the Device......................................................................................................................................................43
1.1.2.4.1 Scenario 1: Installing a Device in a Cabinet/Rack........................................................................................... 43
1.1.2.4.2 Scenario 2: Installing a Device on a Desk.......................................................................................................... 48
1.1.2.4.3 Scenario 3: Installing the Device on a Wall....................................................................................................... 50
1.1.2.5 Connecting the Ground Cable................................................................................................................................... 53
1.1.2.6 Installing Modules......................................................................................................................................................... 55
1.1.2.6.1 Installing Power Modules........................................................................................................................................ 55
1.1.2.6.2 Installing Optical Modules...................................................................................................................................... 57
1.1.2.7 Connecting the Cable................................................................................................................................................... 58
1.1.2.7.1 Connecting Power Cables........................................................................................................................................ 59
1.1.2.7.2 Connecting Signal Cables........................................................................................................................................ 61
1.1.2.8 Checking the Device After Installation................................................................................................................... 63
1.1.2.9 Powering on a Device for the First Time............................................................................................................... 64
1.1.3 Logging In to the AC........................................................................................................................................................ 66
1.1.4 Hardware Failures............................................................................................................................................................. 66
1.1.4.1 Power Supply Failures...................................................................................................................................................66
1.1.4.1.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On.......................................................................................................................... 66
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

WLAN
1.1.4.1.2 The PWR Indicator Is Steady On........................................................................................................................... 67

1.1.4.2 Memory Failures............................................................................................................................................................. 68
1.1.4.2.1 Failed to Write Data to the SD Card or USB Flash Drive..............................................................................68
1.1.4.3 Interface Faults............................................................................................................................................................... 68
1.1.4.3.1 An Optical Interface Cannot Turn Up.................................................................................................................. 68
1.1.5 Maintaining the Device................................................................................................................................................... 70
1.1.5.1 Replacing a Power Module or Fan Module.......................................................................................................... 70
1.1.5.2 Replacing an Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 72
1.2 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AC6508, AC6507S and AirEngine 9700S-S)...................75
1.2.1 Device Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 75
1.2.1.1 AC6508/AC6507S/AirEngine 9700S-S..................................................................................................................... 75
1.2.2 Device Installation............................................................................................................................................................. 82
1.2.2.1 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................................................82
1.2.2.2 Preparing for Installation............................................................................................................................................ 83
1.2.2.2.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Cautions................................................................................................................83
1.2.2.2.2 Checking the Installation Site.................................................................................................................................85
1.2.2.2.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack..................................................................................................................................... 85
1.2.2.2.4 Checking the Power Supply System..................................................................................................................... 86
1.2.2.2.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories.................................................................................................... 86
1.2.2.3 Unpacking a Device....................................................................................................................................................... 88
1.2.2.4 Device Installation......................................................................................................................................................... 89
1.2.2.4.1 Scenario 1: Installing a Device in a Cabinet/Rack........................................................................................... 90
1.2.2.4.2 Scenario 2: Installing a Device on a Desk.......................................................................................................... 92
1.2.2.4.3 Scenario 3: Installing a Device on a Wall........................................................................................................... 94
1.2.2.5 Connecting the Ground Cable................................................................................................................................... 97
1.2.2.6 Installing Modules......................................................................................................................................................... 99
1.2.2.6.1 Installing Optical Modules...................................................................................................................................... 99
1.2.2.7 Connecting the Cable................................................................................................................................................. 100
1.2.2.7.1 Connecting a Power Adapter............................................................................................................................... 100
1.2.2.7.2 Connecting an Ethernet cable............................................................................................................................. 101
1.2.2.7.3 Connecting an Optical Fiber.................................................................................................................................103
1.2.2.8 Checking the Device After Installation.................................................................................................................104
1.2.2.9 Powering on a Device for the First Time............................................................................................................. 106
1.2.3 Logging In to the AC...................................................................................................................................................... 107
1.2.4 Hardware Failures........................................................................................................................................................... 107
1.2.4.1 Power Supply Failures................................................................................................................................................ 107
1.2.4.1.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On........................................................................................................................ 108
1.2.4.1.2 The PWR Indicator Is Steady On......................................................................................................................... 108
1.2.4.2 Memory Failures.......................................................................................................................................................... 109
1.2.4.2.1 Failed to Write Data to the USB Flash Drive.................................................................................................. 109
1.2.4.3 Interface Faults............................................................................................................................................................. 109
1.2.4.3.1 An Optical Interface Cannot Turn Up............................................................................................................... 109
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

WLAN
1.2.5 Maintaining the Device................................................................................................................................................. 111

1.2.5.1 Replacing an Optical Module.................................................................................................................................. 111
1.3 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AC6805)...................................................................................114
1.3.1 Device Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 114
1.3.1.1 AC6805............................................................................................................................................................................ 114
1.3.1.2 Power Modules............................................................................................................................................................. 121
1.3.2 Device Installation.......................................................................................................................................................... 126
1.3.2.1 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................................ 126
1.3.2.2 Preparing for Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 127
1.3.2.2.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Cautions............................................................................................................. 127
1.3.2.2.2 Checking the Installation Site.............................................................................................................................. 129
1.3.2.2.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack................................................................................................................................... 129
1.3.2.2.4 Checking the Power Supply System...................................................................................................................130
1.3.2.2.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories..................................................................................................130
1.3.2.3 Unpacking a Device.................................................................................................................................................... 133
1.3.2.4 Device Installation....................................................................................................................................................... 133
1.3.2.4.1 Scenario 1: Installing a Device in a Cabinet/Rack.........................................................................................133
1.3.2.5 Connecting the Ground Cable................................................................................................................................. 138
1.3.2.6 Installing Modules....................................................................................................................................................... 140
1.3.2.6.1 Installing Power Modules...................................................................................................................................... 140
1.3.2.6.2 Installing Optical Modules.................................................................................................................................... 142
1.3.2.7.1 Connecting Power Cables...................................................................................................................................... 143
1.3.2.7.2 Connecting Signal Cables...................................................................................................................................... 146
1.3.4.2 Memory Failures.......................................................................................................................................................... 151
1.3.5.1 Replacing a Power Module or Fan Module........................................................................................................ 154
1.3.5.3 Replacing a Fan Module............................................................................................................................................158
1.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AirEngine 9700-M).............................................................. 159
1.4.1 Device Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 159
1.4.1.1 AirEngine 9700-M........................................................................................................................................................159
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

WLAN
1.4.1.2 Power Modules............................................................................................................................................................. 167

1.4.2 Device Installation.......................................................................................................................................................... 169
1.4.2.1 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................................ 169
1.4.2.2.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Cautions............................................................................................................. 170
1.4.2.2.2 Checking the Installation Site.............................................................................................................................. 172
1.4.2.2.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack................................................................................................................................... 172
1.4.2.2.4 Checking the Power Supply System...................................................................................................................173
1.4.2.2.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories..................................................................................................173
1.4.2.3 Unpacking a Device.................................................................................................................................................... 175
1.4.2.4 Device Installation....................................................................................................................................................... 176
1.4.2.4.1 Installing a Device in a Cabinet/Rack................................................................................................................177
1.4.2.5 Connecting the Ground Cable................................................................................................................................. 181
1.4.2.6 Installing Modules....................................................................................................................................................... 183
1.4.2.6.1 Installing Power Modules...................................................................................................................................... 183
1.4.2.6.2 Installing Optical Modules.................................................................................................................................... 184
1.4.2.7.1 Connecting Power Cables...................................................................................................................................... 186
1.4.2.7.2 Connecting Signal Cables...................................................................................................................................... 187
1.4.4.2 Memory Failures.......................................................................................................................................................... 193
1.4.5.1 Replacing a Power Module or Fan Module........................................................................................................ 196
1.4.5.3 Replacing a Fan Module............................................................................................................................................200
1.5 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (ACU2).......................................................................................200
1.5.1 Hardware Structure of the ACU2.............................................................................................................................. 200
1.5.1.1 Appearance and Structure........................................................................................................................................ 201
1.5.1.2 Interface Attributes..................................................................................................................................................... 201
1.5.1.3 Indicator Description.................................................................................................................................................. 202
1.5.1.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 203
1.5.1.5 Ordering Information................................................................................................................................................. 203
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

WLAN
1.5.3 Replacing an ACU2......................................................................................................................................................... 204
2 Indoor Access Points........................................................................................................... 207

2.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP1050DN-S)........................................................................ 208
2.1.1 Product Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 208
2.1.1.1 Device Structure........................................................................................................................................................... 209
2.1.1.3 Basic Specifications..................................................................................................................................................... 211
2.1.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 212
2.1.2.2 Installation Flowchart................................................................................................................................................ 214
2.1.2.3 Unpacking the Equipment........................................................................................................................................ 214
2.1.2.4 Determining the Installation Position.................................................................................................................. 215
2.1.2.5 Installing the AP........................................................................................................................................................... 216
2.1.2.5.1 Installing the Device on a Wall........................................................................................................................... 216
2.1.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Ceiling....................................................................................................................... 218
2.1.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a T-rail.......................................................................................................................... 220
2.1.2.5.4 Removing an AP....................................................................................................................................................... 221
2.1.2.6 Cable Connection......................................................................................................................................................... 222
2.1.2.7 Connecting the Security Lock.................................................................................................................................. 224
2.1.2.9 Powering on the AP.................................................................................................................................................... 226
2.1.3 Logging In to the AP...................................................................................................................................................... 226
2.1.4.1 A Device Fails to Be Powered On........................................................................................................................... 226
2.2 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2030DN)............................................................................ 228
2.2.1 AP2030DN Overview..................................................................................................................................................... 228
2.2.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 233
2.2.2.5 Installing the Device................................................................................................................................................... 236
2.2.2.5.1 Installing the Device into an 86-Type Box....................................................................................................... 236
2.2.2.5.2 Installing the Device into Other Junction Boxes............................................................................................237
2.2.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a Wall or Ceiling....................................................................................................... 239
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

WLAN
2.2.2.8 Powering on the Device............................................................................................................................................ 245

2.3.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 251
2.3.2.5.1 Installing the AP on a Wall or Ceiling............................................................................................................... 255
2.3.2.5.2 Installing the AP in an 86-type Box................................................................................................................... 258
2.3.4.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On........................................................................................................................... 261
2.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E).........................................262
2.4.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 266
2.4.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Desk...........................................................................................................................271
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

WLAN

2.5.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 289
2.5.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Desk...........................................................................................................................295
2.6 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E).........................................309
2.6.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 313
2.6.2.5.1 Wall Mounting.......................................................................................................................................................... 317
2.6.2.5.3 Desktop Mounting................................................................................................................................................... 322
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

WLAN
2.6.2.5.4 Junction Box (86 mm) Mounting....................................................................................................................... 322

2.6.2.5.5 Junction Box (118 mm) Mounting..................................................................................................................... 324
2.7.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 337
2.7.2.5.1 Wall Mounting.......................................................................................................................................................... 341
2.7.2.5.3 Desktop Mounting................................................................................................................................................... 346
2.7.2.5.4 Junction Box (86 mm) Mounting....................................................................................................................... 347
2.8 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2051DN-L-S).....................................................................358
2.8.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 361
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

WLAN

2.8.4.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On........................................................................................................................... 371
2.9 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP3010DN-V2)......................................................................371
2.9.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 376
2.9.2.5.1 Wall Mounting.......................................................................................................................................................... 381
2.9.2.5.2 Ceiling Mounting...................................................................................................................................................... 383
2.9.2.5.3 T-rail Mounting......................................................................................................................................................... 384
2.9.2.5.4 Removing an AP....................................................................................................................................................... 386
2.9.2.7 Connecting the Security Lock.................................................................................................................................. 389
2.10 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP3030DN).......................................................................... 393
2.10.1 Product Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 393
2.10.1.1 Device Structure.........................................................................................................................................................393
2.10.1.2 Indicator Description................................................................................................................................................ 394
2.10.1.3 Basic Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 397
2.10.1.4 Ordering Information...............................................................................................................................................398
2.10.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 398
2.10.2.1 Preparing for Installation........................................................................................................................................398
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

WLAN
2.10.2.2 Installation Flowchart.............................................................................................................................................. 399

2.10.2.3 Unpacking the Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 400
2.10.2.4 Determining the Installation Position................................................................................................................ 401
2.10.2.5 Installing the AP........................................................................................................................................................ 402
2.10.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 402
2.10.2.5.2 Ceiling Mounting................................................................................................................................................... 404
2.10.2.5.3 T-rail Mounting....................................................................................................................................................... 405
2.10.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 407
2.10.2.6 Cable Connection...................................................................................................................................................... 407
2.10.2.7 Connecting the Security Lock............................................................................................................................... 410
2.10.2.8 Checking the Device After Installation.............................................................................................................. 410
2.10.2.9 Powering on the AP..................................................................................................................................................411
2.10.3 Logging In to the AP................................................................................................................................................... 411
2.10.4 Hardware Failures.........................................................................................................................................................411
2.10.4.1 A Device Fails to Be Powered On........................................................................................................................ 411
2.11.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 418
2.11.2.5.1 Installing the Device on a Wall......................................................................................................................... 422
2.11.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Ceiling.................................................................................................................... 424
2.11.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a T-rail........................................................................................................................ 425
2.11.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 427
2.11.2.7 Installing the Security Lock....................................................................................................................................431
2.12 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4030DN-E)......................................................................435
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

WLAN

2.12.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 439
2.12.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 444
2.12.2.5.3 T-rail Mounting....................................................................................................................................................... 448
2.12.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 450
2.13 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4030TN)...........................................................................457
2.13.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 460
2.13.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 470
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

WLAN

2.14.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 481
2.14.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 490
2.15.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 502
2.15.2.5 Installing an IoT Card.............................................................................................................................................. 506
2.15.2.6.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 516
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

WLAN

2.15.2.10 Powering on the AP............................................................................................................................................... 521
2.16 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4050DN-HD)..................................................................524
2.16.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 528
2.16.2.5.4 Installing the Device on a Pole......................................................................................................................... 543
2.16.2.5.5 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 545
2.17 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4050DN-S)...................................................................... 552
2.17.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 556
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

WLAN

2.17.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 565
2.18 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4050DE-M)..................................................................... 572
2.18.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 576
2.18.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 586
2.19 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide ( AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-B-S, and AP3050DE).592
2.19.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 596
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

WLAN

2.19.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 606
2.20 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4051DN and AP4151DN).......................................... 612
2.20.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 617
2.20.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 627
2.21 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and AP7052DE)................... 635
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xviii

WLAN

2.21.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 644
2.21.2.5.4 Installing an AP into a Ceiling........................................................................................................................... 653
2.21.2.5.5 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 655
2.22.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 670
2.22.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 680
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix

WLAN
2.23 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP430-E)...............................................................................688

2.23.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 693
2.23.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 702
2.24.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 715
2.24.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 725
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xx

WLAN

2.25 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP5030DN-C)..................................................................... 733
2.25.2 Installation Flowchart................................................................................................................................................. 736
2.25.3 Installation Precautions.............................................................................................................................................. 737
2.25.4 Preparing for Installation........................................................................................................................................... 738
2.25.5 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 739
2.25.5.3.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 747
2.25.6 Troubleshooting Methods for Common Faults...................................................................................................751
2.25.6.1 Power-on Failure of the Device............................................................................................................................ 751
2.26.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 758
2.26.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 762
2.26.2.5.3 T-rail Mounting....................................................................................................................................................... 766
2.26.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 767
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi

WLAN

2.27 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP5510-W-GP)................................................................... 775
2.27.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 782
2.27.2.5 Installing the Device................................................................................................................................................. 785
2.27.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 785
2.27.2.5.2 Desktop Mounting.................................................................................................................................................788
2.27.2.5.4 Junction Box (118 mm) Mounting...................................................................................................................791
2.27.2.8 Powering on the Device.......................................................................................................................................... 797
2.27.4 Logging In to the ONT................................................................................................................................................797
2.27.5.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On......................................................................................................................... 798
2.28.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 804
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxii

WLAN

2.28.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 814
2.29 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP6750-10T)....................................................................... 821
2.29.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 825
2.29.2.5.3 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 834
2.30 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP7030DE and AP9330DN)........................................... 840
2.30.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 846
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii

WLAN

2.30.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 856
2.31 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP7050DE)...........................................................................865
2.31.1.5 Removing an AP........................................................................................................................................................ 869
2.31.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 870
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiv

WLAN

2.32.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 891
2.32.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a U-rail....................................................................................................................... 900
2.32.2.6 Installing an AP and a Pico Base Station Together....................................................................................... 903
2.33.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 919
2.33.2.5 Installing an IoT Card.............................................................................................................................................. 923
2.33.2.6.4 Installing an AP into a Ceiling........................................................................................................................... 930
2.33.2.6.5 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 932
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv

WLAN

2.34.1.2 IoT Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 944
2.34.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 949
2.34.2.5 Installing an IoT Card (MT600)............................................................................................................................ 953
2.34.2.6 Installing an IoT Module.........................................................................................................................................957
2.34.2.7.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 963
2.34.2.10 Checking the Device After Installation............................................................................................................ 969
2.35 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AirEngine 5760-10)...........................................................972
2.35.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 976
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvi

WLAN

2.35.2.5.3 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 985
3 Outdoor Access Points....................................................................................................... 991

3.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP8030DN and AP8130DN).............................................991
3.1.2 AP Installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 999
3.1.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 1005
3.1.2.5.2 Pole Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 1010
3.1.2.6 Connecting Cables.................................................................................................................................................... 1014
3.1.2.6.1 Connecting RF Cables........................................................................................................................................... 1015
3.1.2.6.2 Connecting Optical Fibers and Network Cables......................................................................................... 1018
3.1.2.6.3 Connecting Ground Cables................................................................................................................................. 1021
3.1.2.6.4 Installing Outdoor Antennas............................................................................................................................. 1023
3.1.2.8 Checking the AP After Installation...................................................................................................................... 1026
3.1.4.2 An Optical Interface Cannot Turn Up................................................................................................................ 1028
3.1.5 Maintaining the Device.............................................................................................................................................. 1030
3.1.5.1 Replacing an Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 1030
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvii

WLAN

3.2.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1041
3.3.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1080
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxviii

WLAN

3.3.2.9 Powering on the AP.................................................................................................................................................. 1097
3.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP8050TN-HD).................................................................. 1103
3.4.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1110
3.5.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1141
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxix

WLAN

3.5.2.5.3 Installing an Enclosure for an AP..................................................................................................................... 1156
3.6 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP8130DN-W).................................................................... 1179
3.6.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1185
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxx

WLAN

4 Rail Transit Access Points................................................................................................ 1216

4.1.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1221
4.1.2.5.1 Rack Mounting on a Train.................................................................................................................................. 1226
4.1.2.6.1 Making Power and Signal Cables.....................................................................................................................1229
4.1.3.1 Logging In to the Device Using STelnet/Telnet...............................................................................................1234
4.1.3.2 Logging In to the Device Through the Web System..................................................................................... 1236
4.1.3.3 Logging In to the Device Through the Console Port.................................................................................... 1237
4.2.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1249
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxi

WLAN

4.2.2.5.1 Installing an AP on a Vehicle............................................................................................................................. 1253
4.2.2.5.2 Installing an AP in a Trackside Network Cabinet....................................................................................... 1255
4.2.2.6.1 Connecting Cables................................................................................................................................................. 1256
4.2.2.6.2 Assembling M12 Connectors............................................................................................................................. 1260
5 Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Access Points.......................................................................... 1269

5.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AD9430DN-12)...................................................................1269
5.1.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1275
5.1.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 1285
5.2 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AD9430DN-24)...................................................................1294
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxii

WLAN

5.2.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1300
5.2.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 1303
5.2.2.5.2 Installing the Device in a Cabinet/Rack......................................................................................................... 1305
5.2.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a Desk........................................................................................................................ 1306
5.3 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AD9431DN-24X)................................................................ 1319
5.3.1.2 RPS1800 Power Supply............................................................................................................................................1320
5.3.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1331
5.3.2.5.2 Installing the Device in a Cabinet/Rack......................................................................................................... 1336
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiii

WLAN

5.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (R230D).................................................................................. 1349
5.4.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1353
5.4.2.5.1 Installing the AP on a Wall or Ceiling............................................................................................................ 1357
5.4.2.5.2 Installing the AP in an 86-type Box.................................................................................................................1359
5.5.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1367
5.5.2.5.1 Installing the Device into an 86-Type Box..................................................................................................... 1371
5.5.2.5.2 Installing the Device into Other Junction Boxes......................................................................................... 1372
5.5.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a Wall or Ceiling.....................................................................................................1374
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiv

WLAN

5.6.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1386
5.6.2.5.1 Installing the Device on a Wall or Ceiling.....................................................................................................1390
5.7 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (R250D-E).............................................................................. 1396
5.7.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1400
5.7.2.5.5 Installing the Device into Other Junction Boxes......................................................................................... 1412
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxv

WLAN

5.8 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (R251D and R251D-E)....................................................... 1420
5.8.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1425
5.8.2.5.1 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................................................................ 1428
5.8.2.5.3 Desktop Mounting.................................................................................................................................................1434
5.9.2 AP Installation............................................................................................................................................................... 1449
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvi

WLAN
5.9.2.5.4 Removing an AP..................................................................................................................................................... 1459

6 Appendix............................................................................................................................. 1467
6.1 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation......................................................................................... 1467
6.1.1 Cable Assembly Precautions..................................................................................................................................... 1467
6.1.2 Assembling Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................... 1468
6.1.2.1 Assembling a DC 2-Pin Round Connector (A)................................................................................................ 1469
6.1.2.2 Assembling a DC 2-Pin Round Connector (B).................................................................................................1473
6.1.2.3 Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable.............................................................................................. 1479
6.1.2.4 Assembling the JG Terminal and Power Cable............................................................................................... 1483
6.1.2.5 Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.......................................................................... 1485
6.1.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables..................................................................................................................................... 1488
6.1.3.1 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable................................................................. 1488
6.1.3.2 Assembling an Optimized Shielded RJ45 Connector and SFTP Network Cables................................1494
6.1.3.3 Assembling an Integrated Shielded RJ45 Connector and SFTP Network Cables................................ 1499
6.1.3.4 Assembling a Shielded RJ45 Connector and an FTP Network Cable...................................................... 1503
6.1.3.5 Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable............................................................. 1508
6.1.3.6 Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips.................................................................................................... 1511
6.1.3.7 Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables................................................................................................. 1513
6.1.3.8 Common Network Cable Faults and Preventive Measures........................................................................ 1517
6.1.4 Assembling Feeders..................................................................................................................................................... 1518
6.1.4.1 Assembling the Straight Male Coaxial N Connector and the 1/2'' Feeder............................................1519
6.1.4.2 Assembling a Straight Male Coaxial N Connector and an RG8U Feeder.............................................. 1522
6.1.5 Installing Cable Accessories...................................................................................................................................... 1528
6.1.5.1 Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories.................................................................................................... 1528
6.1.5.2 Installing Power Adapters...................................................................................................................................... 1529
6.1.5.2.1 Installing the OT Terminal.................................................................................................................................. 1529
6.1.5.2.2 Installing the Cord End Terminal...................................................................................................................... 1532
6.1.5.2.3 Installing a 2-Pin Round Connector and a DC Power Cable...................................................................1533
6.1.5.3 Installing Ethernet Adapters..................................................................................................................................1536
6.1.5.3.1 Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector...................................................................................................... 1536
6.1.5.3.2 Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector.............................................................................................. 1538
6.1.5.4 Installing Fiber Connectors.................................................................................................................................... 1540
6.1.5.4.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors..................................................................................................................................1540
6.1.5.4.2 Installing an FC Fiber Connector...................................................................................................................... 1540
6.1.5.4.3 Installing an LC Fiber Connector...................................................................................................................... 1542
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvii

WLAN
6.1.5.4.4 Installing the SC Fiber Connector.....................................................................................................................1544

6.1.5.4.5 Installing an MPO Connector............................................................................................................................ 1545
6.1.6 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool............................................................................................................ 1547
6.2 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation.....................................................................1550
6.2.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room.................................................................................. 1550
6.2.1.1 Requirements for Selecting a Site for an Equipment Room.......................................................................1550
6.2.1.2 Equipment Room Layout........................................................................................................................................ 1552
6.2.1.3 Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room................................................................................. 1552
6.2.1.4 Equipment Room Environment............................................................................................................................ 1554
6.2.1.5 Requirements for Corrosive Gases.......................................................................................................................1555
6.2.1.6 Requirements for ESD Prevention....................................................................................................................... 1555
6.2.1.7 Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room.......................................................................1556
6.2.1.8 Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding................................................................................................. 1556
6.2.2 Requirements for Power Supply.............................................................................................................................. 1558
6.2.2.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 1558
6.2.2.2 Recommendations for AC Power Supply.......................................................................................................... 1559
6.2.2.3 Requirements for DC Power Supply....................................................................................................................1560
6.2.2.4 Recommendations for DC Power Supply.......................................................................................................... 1561
6.3 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications................................................................................................ 1561
6.3.1 General Grounding Specifications...........................................................................................................................1561
6.3.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room...........................................................................................1562
6.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices.................................................................................................................... 1562
6.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power Supply...................................................................... 1563
6.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables......................................................................................................... 1564
6.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables............................................................................................... 1564
6.4 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables.............................................................................................................. 1565
6.4.1 Introduction to Labels................................................................................................................................................. 1565
6.4.1.1 Label Materials.......................................................................................................................................................... 1565
6.4.1.2 Type and Structure....................................................................................................................................................1565
6.4.1.3 Label Printing............................................................................................................................................................. 1567
6.4.1.4 Writing Labels............................................................................................................................................................ 1569
6.4.1.5 Attaching Labels........................................................................................................................................................ 1570
6.4.1.6 Contents of Engineering Labels........................................................................................................................... 1572
6.4.1.7 Precautions for Using Engineering Labels........................................................................................................ 1573
6.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers....................................................................................................................1573
6.4.2.1 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices......................................................................................... 1573
6.4.2.2 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF.......................................................... 1574
6.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables................................................................................................................1576
6.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables........................................................................................................................ 1578
6.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables.................................................................................................................... 1579
6.4.5.1 Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables.......................................................................................................... 1579
6.4.5.2 Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables.......................................................................................................... 1580
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxviii

WLAN
6.5 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules......................................................................................................... 1582

6.6 Appendix G Fault Tag..................................................................................................................................................... 1585
6.7 Installation Checklist....................................................................................................................................................... 1586
6.8 Guide to Making Drip Loops........................................................................................................................................ 1595
6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.......................................................................................................................................... 1597
6.10 Installation Guide for Power Supply Surge Protectors..................................................................................... 1604
6.10.1 Installing an AC Surge Protector...........................................................................................................................1604
6.10.2 Installing a PoE Surge Protector........................................................................................................................... 1608
6.11 AC Login............................................................................................................................................................................1610
6.11.1 Logging In to the AC Through the Console Port............................................................................................. 1610
6.11.2 Logging In to the ACU2 from the MPU Through the Console Port..........................................................1611
6.11.3 Logging In to the AC Using STelnet..................................................................................................................... 1614
6.11.4 Logging In to the AC Using Telnet....................................................................................................................... 1616
6.11.5 Logging In to the AC Using a Web Browser..................................................................................................... 1619
6.11.6 Logging In Through a Mini USB Port.................................................................................................................. 1620
6.12 AP Login............................................................................................................................................................................ 1626
6.12.1 Overview of AP Login............................................................................................................................................... 1626
6.12.2 AP First-Time Login....................................................................................................................................................1627
6.12.2.1 Logging In to an AP Through STelnet............................................................................................................. 1628
6.12.2.2 Logging In to an AP Through the Console Port........................................................................................... 1630
6.12.2.3 Switching the AP Working Mode...................................................................................................................... 1631
6.12.2.4 Follow-up Procedure.............................................................................................................................................. 1632
6.12.3 AP Regular Login........................................................................................................................................................ 1632
6.12.3.1 Logging In to an AP Through the Web Platform.........................................................................................1633
6.12.3.2 Logging In to an AP Through STelnet............................................................................................................. 1635
6.12.3.3 Logging In to an AP Through the Console Port........................................................................................... 1638
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxix

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 1 Access Controllers
1 Access Controllers
About This Chapter
1.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AC6005 and AC6605)

1.2 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AC6508, AC6507S and
AirEngine 9700S-S)
1.3 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AC6805)
1.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AirEngine 9700-M)
1.5 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (ACU2)
1.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide

(AC6005 and AC6605)
1.1.1 Device Overview
1.1.1.1 AC6003
Appearance and Structure

Currently, the AC6003 series only has one model AC6003-8 (AC6003 for short).
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the appearance of the AC6003.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the AC6003 (front view)

1 2 3 3 4 5
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PWR
SYS
STAT
SPED
7 8
CONSOLE
MODE
AC6003-8
Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

WLAN
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the AC6003 (rear view)

6 7
~100-240V;50/60Hz;2A
No. Description
1 MODE button: switches the working mode of service port indicators.
2 Six 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports.

Support 10M/100M/1000M auto-sensing.
3 Two pairs of combo ports.

When being used as an electrical port, it supports 10M/100M/1000M
auto-sensing.
4 Console port.
5 USB port.
6 Ground point.
7 AC power jack.
Port Description
10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Electrical Port
A 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical port receives and sends service data at

10/100/1000 Mbit/s, and must use a network cable. Table 1-1 lists attributes of a
10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical port.
Table 1-1 Attributes of a 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical port
Attribute Description
Connector type RJ45
Standards IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, and IEEE 802.3ab

compliance
Electrical port MDI/MDIX

attributes NOTE
● The ports of most network cards are medium dependent
interfaces (MDIs).
● An MDIX is a version of MDI. MDIX ports are usually used on hubs
or LAN switches.

WLAN
Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, and Ethernet_SNAP
Network IP
protocol
Working mode 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing

Full-duplex
Combo Port
A pair of combo port consists of an optical Ethernet port and an electrical
Ethernet port on the panel. Each combo port matches only one internal
forwarding port. A combo port is a multiplexing port, and you can use either the
optical port or electrical port at one time. When one of the Ethernet ports is used,
the other port is disabled.
You can configure a combo port as an electrical or optical port using the combo-port
command. By default, a combo port works in auto mode.
The port mode is determined as follows:
● If the optical port has no optical module installed and the electrical port has no network
cable connected, the port type depends on which port is connected first. If the electrical
port is connected by a network cable first, the electrical port is used for data switching. If
the optical port has an optical module installed first, the optical port is used for data
switching.
● If the electrical port has a network cable connected and is in Up state, the electrical port is
still used for data switching even when the optical port has an optical module installed.
● If the optical port, no matter in Up or Down state, has an optical module installed, the
optical port is still used for data switching even when the electrical port has a network
cable connected.
● If the optical port has an optical module installed and the electrical port has a network
cable connected, the optical port is used for data switching after the device restarts.
Console Port
The console port is connected to an operation terminal for on-site configuration.
The port must use a console cable. To configure the device after the first power-
on, log in to the device through the console port. Table 1-2 lists attributes of a
console port.
Table 1-2 Attributes of a console port
Connector type RJ45
Standards RS-232
compliance
Working mode Full-duplex universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter

(UART)

WLAN
Baud rate 9600 bit/s to 115200 bit/s

The default value is 9600 bit/s.
Data equipment Data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)

type
USB Port
The USB port is used to connect USB disks for configuration file transfer and file
upgrade. The USB flash drive must comply with USB 2.0 and support the Linux
operating system.
To ensure compatibility between USB flash drives and devices, use Huawei-certified USB flash
drives (listed in the following table) to configure the Huawei devices.
Table 1-3 Huawei-certified USB flash drives

Capacity Vendor Model Remarks
4 GB Netac U208 You can buy Netac USB 4 GB flash

drives from Huawei or other
vendors.
SanDisk Cruzer Blade Huawei does not offer this USB flash
drive, and you need to buy it from
other vendors.
Hewlett- v218G Huawei does not offer this USB flash

Packard drive, and you need to buy it from
other vendors.
PNY M1 Huawei does not offer this USB flash

other vendors.
8 GB Netac U208 Huawei does not offer this USB flash

other vendors.
Hewlett- v225w Huawei does not offer this USB flash

other vendors.
STEC SLUFD8GU2T Huawei does not offer this USB flash

UI drive, and you need to buy it from
other vendors.

WLAN
Indicator Description
Figure 1-3 shows the indicators on the AC6003 front panel.
Figure 1-3 Indicators on the AC6003 front panel
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5
1 PWR
2 SYS
STAT
SPED
34 MODE
AC6003-8
6 6
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PWR
SYS
STAT
SPED
7 8
CONSOLE
MODE
AC6003-8
Table 1-4 describes indicators on the AC6003 front panel.
Indicator colors may vary slightly at different temperature.
Table 1-4 Description of indicators on the AC6003 front panel
No. Indicator/ Status Description

Button
1 PWR: Off The device is powered off.

power
indicator Steady The power supply is working properly.
green
2 SYS: Off The system is not running.

system
status Green ● Fast blinking: The system is starting.
indicator ● Slow blinking: The system is
running properly.
Steady red The system cannot start normally, or

an overheat alarm or fan alarm is
generated.
3 STAT: state Off The state mode is not selected.

mode
indicator

WLAN

Button
Steady The service port indicator works in the

green default mode (STAT). In this mode, the
indicator indicates the port status.
4 SPED: Off The speed mode is not selected.

speed
mode Steady The service port indicator indicates the
indicator green port speed. After 45 seconds, the
service port indicator automatically
restores to the default mode (STAT).
5 MODE: – ● When you press the button once,

mode the SPED indicator turns green and
switch the service port indicators indicate
button the speed of the ports.
● When you press the button for a
second time, the STAT indicator
turns green.
If you do not press the button within
45 seconds, the indicators restore to
the default mode. That is, the STAT
indicator turns green, and the SPED
indicator is off.

WLAN

Button
6 Service Meanings of service port indicators vary in different

port modes. For details, see Table 1-5.
indicator
● GE
electrica
l ports:
The first
indicato
r
indicate
s the
status
of the
bottom
left
port.
The
indicato
rs
correspo
nd to
the
ports
from
bottom
to top
and
from
left to
right.
● GE
optical
ports:
Each
optical
port has
a
correspo
nding
indicato
r above
it.

WLAN
Table 1-5 Description of service port indicators in different modes

Mode Status Description
STAT Off No link has been

established to the port
or the port has been
shut down.
Green ● Steady on: A link has

been established to
the port.
● Blinking: The port is
sending or receiving
data.
SPED Off No link has been

shut down.
Green ● Steady on: The port is

working at 10 or 100
Mbit/s.
working at 1000
Mbit/s.
Physical Specifications
Table 1-6 Physical specifications

Item Description
Dimensio Dimensions (H x W x D) 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 233.6 mm

ns and
weight Maximum weight 2.9 kg
(standard configuration)
Power Maximum power 25.6 W

specificati consumption
ons
AC input voltage ● Rated voltage range: 100 V AC to
240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
● Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to
264 V AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Environm Operating temperature ● -60 m to +1800 m: -5°C to +50°C

ent and altitude ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
specificati decreases by 1°C every time the
ons altitude increases 300 m.

WLAN
Item Description
Relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, noncondensing
Operating altitude -60 m to +5000 m
Ordering Information
Part Number Description
AC6003-8 Bundle(Including AC6003-8,Resource

02350HND
License 8AP,AC power support)
1.1.1.2 AC6005

The AC6005 series has two models: AC6005-8 and AC6005-8-PWR.
Table 1-7 and Table 1-8 show the appearance of the AC6005.
Table 1-7 Appearance of the AC6005 (front view)

Model Appearance
AC6005-8
2 3
1 3 4 5
AC6005-8-
PWR 2 3
1 3 4 5

WLAN
Table 1-8 Appearance of the AC6005 (rear view)

Model Appearance
AC6005-8
6 7
AC6005-8-
PWR 6 7
No. Description
2 Six 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports.

● Support 10M/100M/1000M auto-sensing.
● The AC6005-8-PWR supports PoE power supply on six ports.
3 Two pairs of combo ports. When used as electrical ports:

● They support 10M/100M/1000M auto-sensing.
● The AC6005-8-PWR supports PoE power supply on two ports.
4 Console port.
5 USB port.
6 Ground point.
7 AC power jack.
Port Description

Connector type RJ45

WLAN

compliance

attributes NOTE
interfaces (MDIs).
or LAN switches.
Network IP
protocol

Full-duplex
Combo Port

● If the optical port has no optical module installed and the electrical port has no network
cable connected, the port type depends on which port is connected first. If the electrical
port is connected by a network cable first, the electrical port is used for data switching. If
the optical port has an optical module installed first, the optical port is used for data
switching.
● If the electrical port has a network cable connected and is in Up state, the electrical port is
still used for data switching even when the optical port has an optical module installed.
cable connected.
● If the optical port has an optical module installed and the electrical port has a network
cable connected, the optical port is used for data switching after the device restarts.
Console Port

console port.

WLAN

Connector type RJ45
Standards RS-232
compliance

(UART)


type
USB Port
The USB port is used to connect USB disks for configuration file transfer and file
upgrade. The USB flash drive must comply with USB 2.0 and support the Linux
operating system.


vendors.
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

WLAN

other vendors.

other vendors.
The AC6005-8-PWR has the same indicators on the front panel as the AC6005-8
except that the AC6005-8-PWR has a PoE indicator. The following uses the
appearance of the AC6005-8-PWR as an example. Figure 1-4 shows the indicators
on the AC6005-8-PWR front panel.
Figure 1-4 Indicators on the AC6005-8-PWR front panel
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5
1 PWR
2 SYS
STAT
SPED
PoE
345 MODE
AC6005-8-PWR
7 7
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PWR
SYS
STAT
SPED
7 8
PoE CONSOLE
MODE
AC6005-8-PWR

Button
1 PWR: Off The AC6005-8-PWR is powered off.

power
indicator

WLAN

Button
Steady The power supply is working properly.

green
Yellow The PoE power supply is faulty.

NOTE
Only the
PWR
indicator
on the
AC6005-8-
PWR
displays
yellow.
2 SYS: Off The system is not running.

system
status Green ● Fast blinking: The system is starting.
indicator ● Slow blinking: The system is
running properly.
Steady red The system cannot start normally, or

an overheat alarm or fan alarm is
generated.
3 STAT: state Off The state mode is not selected.

mode
indicator Steady The service port indicator works in the
green default mode (STAT). In this mode, the
indicator indicates the port status.
4 SPED: Off The speed mode is not selected.

speed
mode Steady The service port indicator indicates the
indicator green port speed. After 45 seconds, the
service port indicator automatically
restores to the default mode (STAT).
5 PoE: PoE Off The PoE mode is not selected.

mode
indicator Steady The service port indicator indicates the
green PoE status of each port. After 45
NOTE
Only the
seconds, the service port indicator
AC6005-8- automatically restores to the default
PWR has mode (STAT).
this
indicator.

WLAN

Button
6 MODE: – AC6005-8-PWR:
mode ● When you press the button once,
switch the SPED indicator turns green and
button the service port indicators indicate
the speed of the ports.
second time, the PoE indicator turns
green and the service port
indicators indicate the PoE status of
the ports.
third time, the STAT indicator turns
green.
AC6005-8:
● When you press the button once,
the SPED indicator turns green and
the service port indicators indicate
the speed of the ports.
second time, the STAT indicator
turns green.
If you do not press the button within
45 seconds, the indicators restore to
the default mode. That is, the STAT
indicator turns green, and the SPED
and PoE indicators are off.

WLAN

Button
7 Service Meanings of service port indicators vary in different

port modes. For details, see Table 1-13.
indicator
● GE
electrica
l ports:
The first
indicato
r
indicate
s the
status
of the
bottom
left
port.
The
indicato
rs
correspo
nd to
the
ports
from
bottom
to top
and
from
left to
right.
● GE
optical
ports:
Each
optical
port has
a
correspo
nding
indicato
r above
it.

WLAN

STAT Off No link has been

shut down.
Green ● Steady on: A link has

been established to
the port.
sending or receiving
data.
SPED Off No link has been

shut down.
Green ● Steady on: The port is

working at 10 or 100
Mbit/s.
working at 1000
Mbit/s.
PoE Off The port is not providing

NOTE PoE power.
Only the AC6005-8-PWR
has this mode. Steady green Steady on: The port is
providing PoE power.
Yellow ● Steady on: The PoE

function is disabled
on the port.
● Blinking: The port
stops providing PoE
power because a fault
occurs, for example,
an incompatible
powered device (PD)
is connected to the
port.

WLAN
Blinking green and The port cannot provide

yellow PoE power due to any of
the following reasons:
● The power of the PD
exceeds the power
supply capability of
the port or exceeds
the threshold.
● The total power
consumption of PDs
has reached the
maximum power of
the device.
● The PoE power
function is not
enabled on the
interface in manual
power-management
mode.

Item Description
Dimensions Dimensions (H x W x 43.6 mm x 320 mm x 233.6 mm

and weight D)
Maximum weight ● AC6005-8-PWR: 2.30 kg

(standard ● AC6005-8: 2.05 kg
configuration)
Power Maximum power ● AC6005-8-PWR: 163.6 W (device

specification consumption power consumption: 39.6 W, PoE:
s 124 W)
● AC6005-8: 25.6 W

240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
● Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC
to 264 V AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Environment Operating temperature ● -60 m to +1800 m: -5°C to +50°C

specification and altitude ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
s decreases by 1°C every time the
altitude increases 300 m.

WLAN
Item Description
Operating altitude -60 m to +5000 m
AC6005-8-PWR Bundle(Including AC6005-8-

02356813
PWR,Resource License 8AP,AC power support)
AC6005-8 Bundle(Including AC6005-8,Resource

02356816
License 8AP,AC power support)
1.1.1.3 AC6605

Currently, the AC6605 series has only one model AC6605-26-PWR (AC6605 for
short).
2 3 4 5 6
1 3 7
9 10

WLAN
No. Description
2 Twenty 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports.

● Support PoE power supply on 20 ports.
3 Four pairs of combo ports. When used as electrical ports:

● Support PoE power supply on four ports.
4 ETH management port.
5 Mini USB port.
6 Console port.
7 Two 10GE SFP+ uplink optical ports.
8 Ground point.
9 Filler panel.
10 Two slots for the power modules. The AC6605 supports three types of
power modules:
● 150 W DC power module
● 150 W AC power module
● 500 W AC PoE power module
150 W DC Power Module

Function
A 150 W DC power module provides +12 V DC output. It has the following
functions:
● EMC filtering, surge protection, and short circuit protection.
● Various alarms, for example, the alarm triggered when there is no power
input, the alarm for the circuit breaker status, the alarm for ineffective surge
protection, and the alarm for undervoltage input.
Appearance, Switch, and Indicator
Figure 1-7 shows the appearance of a 150 W DC power module.

WLAN
Figure 1-7 Appearance of a 150 W DC power module
1 2 3 4
1: Handle 2: Indicator 3: Switch 4: DC power socket
Table 1-15 describes the indicator on the 150 W DC power module.
Table 1-15 Description of the indicator on the 150 W DC power module
Name Status Description
STATUS Off ● The input

power is
out of
range for
some
reasons,
for
example,
no DC
input
power, DC
input
overvoltag
e, and DC
input
undervolta
ge.
● The output
power is
out of
range for
some
reasons,
for
example,
undervolta
ge or
overtempe
rature.

WLAN
Steady green The DC input

power is
within the
allowed
range.
Blinking green The output

power is out
of range for
some reasons,
for example,
overvoltage,
overcurrent,
or short
circuit.
Technical Specifications
Table 1-16 describes technical specifications of the 150 W DC power module.
Table 1-16 Technical specifications of the 150 W DC power module
Item Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 43 mm x 100 mm x 220 mm
Weight 0.84 kg
Rated input voltage -48 V DC to -60 V DC
Maximum input voltage -36 V DC to -72 V DC
Maximum input current 6A
Maximum output current 12.5 A
Maximum output power 150 W
150 W AC Power Module

Function
A 150 W AC power module provides the EMC filtering function and protects the
device against:
● Output overcurrent
● Output overvoltage
● Output undervoltage
● Input overvoltage

WLAN
● Input undervoltage
● Overtemperature
● Short circuit
● Surge
Figure 1-8 shows the appearance of a 150 W AC power module.
Figure 1-8 Appearance of a 150 W AC power module
1 2 3 4
1: Handle 2: Indicator 3: Switch 4: AC power socket
Table 1-17 describes the indicator on the 150 W AC power module.

WLAN
Table 1-17 Description of the indicator on the 150 W AC power module

STATUS Off ● The input

power is
out of
range for
some
reasons,
for
example,
no AC
input
power, AC
input
overvoltag
e, and AC
input
undervolta
ge.
● The output
power is
out of
range for
some
reasons,
for
example,
undervolta
ge or
overtempe
rature.
Steady green The AC input

power is
within range.
Blinking green The output

power is out
of range for
some reasons,
for example,
overvoltage,
overcurrent,
or short
circuit.
Table 1-18 describes technical specifications of the 150 W AC power module.

WLAN
Table 1-18 Technical specifications of the 150 W AC power module
Item Value
Weight 0.84 kg
Rated input voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Maximum input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC, 47/63 Hz
Maximum output current 12.5 A
500 W AC PoE Power Module

Function
Power over Ethernet (PoE) refers to power supply over a 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, or
1000Base-T twisted pair cable.
PoE provides power for terminals such as IP phones, APs, portable device chargers,
point-of-sale (POS) machines, cameras, and data collectors. These terminals are
powered when they access the network, so the indoor power supply systems are
not required. Complying with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at, the PoE is able to
remotely provide power for the devices of different vendors. IEEE 802.3af supports
a maximum of 15.4 W power and IEEE 802.3at supports a maximum of 30 W
power.
The PoE function transmits power together with data to terminals over cables or
transmits power without data over idle lines. The AC6605 can transmit power
together with data at a rate of up to 1000 Mbit/s.
Figure 1-9 shows the appearance of a 500 W AC PoE power module.
Figure 1-9 Appearance of a 500 W AC PoE power module
1 2 3 4 5
1: Indicators 2: Handle 3: Fan 4: Switch 5: AC power socket

WLAN
Table 1-19 describes indicators on the 500 W AC PoE power module.
Table 1-19 Description of indicators on the 500 W AC PoE power module

INPUT Steady green The input

power is
within range.
Steady red The input

power is out
of range for
some reasons,
for example,
undervoltage
or
overvoltage.
Off The power

cable is loose
or no input
AC power is
provided.
OUTPUT Steady green The AC

output power
is within
range.
Steady red The output

power is out
of range for
some reasons,
for example:
● Abnormal
power fan
operation
● Output
overvoltag
e
● Output
overcurren
t
● Short
circuit
● Overtempe
rature

WLAN
Off The power

cable is loose
or no input
AC power is
provided.
Table 1-20 describes technical specifications of the 500 W AC PoE power module.
Table 1-20 Technical specifications of the 500 W AC PoE power module
Item Value
Weight 1 kg
Maximum input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC, 47/63 Hz
Maximum input current 3.5 A to 7 A
Maximum output current ● +12 V: 10 A

● -53.5 V: 7.11 A
Maximum output power PoE: 380 W

Total: 500 W
A PoE power module provides 12 V voltage for the entire device and -53.5 V voltage for
PDs.
Port Description

Connector type RJ45

WLAN

compliance

attributes NOTE
interfaces (MDIs).
or LAN switches.
Network IP
protocol

Full-duplex
Combo Port

● If the optical port has no optical module installed and the electrical port has no
network cable connected, the port type depends on which port is connected first. If
the electrical port is connected by a network cable first, the electrical port is used for
data switching. If the optical port has an optical module installed first, the optical port
is used for data switching.
● If the electrical port has a network cable connected and is in Up state, the electrical
port is still used for data switching even when the optical port has an optical module
installed.
cable connected.
● If the optical port has an optical module installed and the electrical port has a
network cable connected, the optical port is used for data switching after the device
restarts.
ETH Management Port
An ETH management port is connected to the network port of a configuration

terminal or network management workstation to set up the on-site or remote
configuration environment. The port must use a network cable. Table 1-22
describes the attributes of an ETH management port.

WLAN
Table 1-22 Attributes of an ETH management port

Connector type RJ45
Standards IEEE 802.3

compliance
Working mode 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing

Full-duplex
Mini USB Port

The Mini USB port can connect to a console for onsite configuration of the system.
The Mini USB port and console port cannot be used together. Select one as
required. The Mini USB port is recommended.
Console Port
console port.

Connector type RJ45
Standards RS-232
compliance

(UART)


type
10GE SFP+ Ethernet Optical Port

A 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical port supports 10GE/GE auto-sensing and can send
and receive service data at 1000 Mbit/s or 10 Gbit/s. It must be used with an
optical module and optical fiber. Table 1-24 describes the attributes of a 10GE
SFP+ Ethernet optical port.

WLAN
Table 1-24 Attributes of a 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical port

Connector type LC/PC
Standards IEEE 802.3ae

compliance
Network IP
protocol
Working mode GE/10GE auto-sensing

Full-duplex
Figure 1-10 shows the indicators on the AC6605 front panel.
10
9 11
32 1
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5 ETH CONSOLE
PWR1
PWR2
SYS
STAT
SPED
PoE
456 MODE
AC6605-26-PWR 1 2
7
8
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ETH CONSOLE

PWR1
PWR2
SYS
STAT
21 22 23 24
SPED
PoE
MODE
AC6605-26-PWR 1 2

WLAN

Numbe Indicator Color Description
r
1 PWR1: power - Off: The PWR1 slot has no power

supply module installed, or the power
indicator module is faulty when a single
power module is used.
Green Steady on: The power module is

working properly.
Yellow Steady on: Any of the following

conditions may exist:
● Dual power modules are
installed, but not switched on.
installed, but receive no input
power.
● The power modules are faulty.
2 PWR2: power - Off: The PWR2 slot has no power

supply module installed, or the power
indicator module is faulty when a single
power module is used.

working properly.
Yellow Steady on: Any of the following

conditions may exist:
installed, but not switched on.
installed, but receive no input
power.
● The power modules are faulty.
3 SYS: system - Off: The system is not running.

status
indicator Green ● Fast blinking: The system is
starting.
● Slow blinking: The system is
running properly.
Yellow ● Steady on: The temperature or

functions of the device become
abnormal.
● Blinking: The device has entered
the dormancy mode.

WLAN

r
Red Steady on: After registering, the

system does not operate properly, or
a fan or temperature alarm has
been generated.
4 STAT: status Green ● Off: The status mode is not

indicator selected.
● Steady on: The service port
indicators are in the status mode
(default).
5 SPED: speed Green ● Off: The speed mode is not

indicator selected.
indicators show the port speed.
After 45 seconds, the service port
indicators automatically restore
to the status mode.
6 PoE: PoE Green ● Off: The PoE mode is not

indicator selected.
indicators show the PoE status.
to the status mode.
7 MODE: mode - ● When you press this button once,

switch button the service port indicators change
to speed mode and show the
speed of service ports.
● When you press this button a
third time, the service port
indicators change to PoE mode
and show the PoE status of ports.
fourth time, the STAT indicator
turns green and the service port
indicators restore to the default
mode.
If you do not press the MODE
button within 45 seconds, the
service port indicators restore to the
default mode. In this case, the STAT
indicator is steady green, the SPED
and PoE indicators are off.

WLAN

r
8 Service port Meanings of service port indicators vary in different

indicator modes. For details, see Table 1-26.
● GE
electrical
ports: The
ports are
numbered
from
bottom to
top and left
to right,
starting
with 1.
● GE/10GE
optical
ports: Each
port has an
indicator
above it.
9 ETH indicator Green ● Off: No link is established on the

port.
● Steady on: The port is connected.
● Blinking: The port is sending or
receiving data.
10 Mini USB Green ● Off: The Mini USB port is not

indicator active, and the console port is
active.
● Steady on: The Mini USB port is
active.
When this indicator is on, the
console port indicator is off.
11 Console Green ● Off: The console port is not

indicator active, and the Mini USB port is
active.
● Steady on (default): The console
port is active.
When this LED is on, the Mini USB
port indicator is off.

WLAN

Display Mode Color Description
Status Green ● Off: The port is not connected or

has been shut down.
● Steady on: A link has been
established to the port.
receiving data.
Speed Green ● Off: The port is not connected or

has been shut down.
● Steady on:
10M/100M/1000M port: The port
is operating at 10/100 Mbit/s.
1000M/10GE port: The port is
operating at 1000 Mbit/s.
● Blinking:
10M/100M/1000M port: The port
is operating at 1000 Mbit/s.
1000M/10GE port: The port is
operating at 10 Gbit/s.
PoE - Off: The port does not provide PoE

power.
Green Steady on: The port is providing PoE

power.
Yellow ● Steady on: The PoE function is

disabled on the port.
● Blinking: A PoE fault has
occurred. For example, an
incompatible PD is connected to
the port.
Green and Blinking green and yellow

yellow alternately:
● The power of the PD exceeds the
maximum power or power
threshold of the port.
● The total power consumption of
PDs has reached the maximum
power of the device.
● The manual power management
mode is used and the port is not
enabled to provide power to the
PD.

WLAN

Item Description
Dimensions Dimensions (H x W x 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 420 mm

and weight D)
Weight ● Net weight: 5.48 kg

● Fully configured with 150 W power
modules: 7.16 kg
● Fully configured with 500 W power
modules: 7.48 kg
Power Maximum power 85 W

specificatio consumption
ns
DC input voltage ● Rated voltage range: -48 V DC to -60
V DC
● Maximum voltage range: -36 V DC
to -72 V DC

240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
● Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to
264 V AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Environmen Operating temperature ● -60 m to +1800 m: -5°C to +50°C

t and altitude ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
specificatio decreases by 1°C every time the
ns altitude increases 300 m.
Operating altitude of ● 150 W DC power module: 0 m to

the power modules 3000 m
● 150 W AC power module: 0 m to
5000 m
● 500 W AC power module: 0 m to
5000 m
AC6605-26-PWR Bundle(Including AC6605-26-

02357916
PWR,Resource License 16AP)

WLAN
1.1.2 Device Installation
1.1.2.1 Installation Procedure
Figure 1-11 shows the AC installation procedure.
Figure 1-11 Installation flowchart
Start
Prepare for
installation
Unpack the device
Install the device
Connect the ground

cable
Install modules
Connect the device
Check the device
Power on the device
End
1.1.2.2 Preparing for Installation
1.1.2.2.1 Reading Carefully the Safety Cautions

WLAN
Read and follow all the safety cautions and instructions on the chassis or
described in this document to protect personal and equipment safety during
installation, operation, and maintenance.
WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE items in this document do not cover all the
safety cautions and are only supplementary to the safety cautions.
Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained to perform operations
correctly and safely.
General Safety Guidelines
In case of fire, immediately leave the building or equipment deployment site and
press the fire alarm button or call the fire department. Never enter the building
on fire again in any situation.
● Before performing any operation on a device, wear ESD clothing and ESD
gloves or an ESD wrist strap. Remove conductive objects like jewelry and
watches.
● After installing the device on the cabinet/rack, connect the ground cable to the
chassis before any operations on the chassis and remove the ground cable only
after you remove all the other components and cables from the chassis.
Environmental Safety
Do not place or operate the device in an environment with flammable or explosive

gases or smoke.
● Keep the device away from water or damp to prevent damages to circuits.
● The device heats during operation. The installation site must be well ventilated
to ensure normal operation of the device.

WLAN
Electric Safety
● Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through

damp objects can be fatal. Misoperations on high-voltage facilities may result
in fire, electric shock, or other accident.
● Never install or remove the device or power cables while the power is on. The
electric arc or spark generated between a power cable and conductor may
cause fire or eye damage.
● To protect personal and equipment safety, ground the device before powering it
on.
Laser Safety
● Invisible laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into open optical
ports without eye protection.
● After unplugging an optical fiber, cover the fiber connectors with dust caps.
Mechanical Safety
● Wear gloves to protect your hands from sharp edges when you are moving the
chassis.
● Before carrying a heavy object, use appropriate tools to protect yourself from
bruise or sprain.
● Before pulling the chassis out of the cabinet, check whether there are any
unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. Be careful not to make the objects
fall, which may cause body injuries.
● Do not drill holes on a cabinet without permission. Unqualified holes on a
cabinet affect the electromagnetic filter performance of the cabinet and cause
damages to the cables in the cabinet. In addition, metal scraps may fall into
the cabinet when you are drilling holes, causing short circuit on printed circuit
boards (PCBs).
1.1.2.2.2 Checking the Installation Site
The devices are used indoors. The requirements for the installation site are as
follows:
● The devices must be installed in a clean, dry, well ventilated site with stable
temperature. The installation site must be free from leaking or dripping water,
heavy dew, and humidity.

WLAN
● Dustproof measures must be taken in the site. Dust will cause static charges
on the chassis and affect connections of metal connectors and joints. This
shortens service life of the device and may cause failures of the device.
● The temperature and humidity in the site must be within acceptable ranges.
For the operating temperature and relative humidity ranges required by the
devices, see Physical Parameters in Device Structure. If the relative humidity
exceeds 70%, use dehumidifiers or air conditioners with dehumidification
features.
● There are no acidic, alkaline, or other corrosive gases in the installation site.
● There should be sufficient space around the device for heat dissipation. Leave
at least 50 mm clearance at two sides and rear of the device.
1.1.2.2.3 Checking the Cabinet/Rack
Requirements for the cabinet/rack are as follows:

● The device has an industry-standard width. It can be installed in a standard 19
inch cabinet/rack.
● The cabinet/rack must have reliable ground points to ground the device.
● A separately purchased non-standard cabinet/rack must have sufficient space
for chassis installation and cabling.
1.1.2.2.4 Checking the Power Supply System
Requirements for the power supply system are as follows:

● The power supply system must be available in the equipment room before
you install the device.
● The voltage provided to the device must be within the operating voltage. For
the voltage range required by the device, see Physical Parameters in Device
Structure.
● The AC power cable must be connected to an AC power outlet that provides
at least 10 A of output current. If a country-specific standard power outlet is
used, connect the switch to the power outlet using an AC power cable
complying with the local standards. If a C13 straight power outlet is used,
connect the switch to the power outlet using an AC power cable with a C13
straight female connector and a C14 straight male connector.
1.1.2.2.5 Preparing Installation Tools and Accessories
Table 1-28 shows the tools required for installing the series devices.
Table 1-28 Installation tools
Tool Description Picture
ESD Prevent
gloves electrostatic
charges.

WLAN
ESD Prevents
wrist electrostatic
strap charges. Wear
the strap on
your wrist and
insert the other
end into the
ESD jack on the
cabinet.
Utility Cuts cartons or

knife paper.
Measuri Measures
ng tape distances.
Marker Marks
component
installation
positions and
draws lines.
Flat- Fastens or
head loosens small-
screwdri sized screws
ver and bolts. It is
(M4/M6 seldom used to
) fasten nuts.
Phillips Fastens or
screwdri loosens small-
ver sized screws
(M4/M6 and bolts. It is
) seldom used to
fasten nuts.
Diagon Cuts insulation

al pliers tubes and
cable ties.
Networ Tests network

k cable cable
tester connectivity.

WLAN
Multim Tests cabinet

eter insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.
Hamme Drills holes on

r drill a wall to install
(φ8) expansion
screws when
installing the
device against
the wall.
Table 1-29 shows the installation accessories required for installing the series
devices.
Table 1-29 Installation accessories

Accesso Description Picture
ry
Cable Bundles cables.

tie
Fiber Bundles optical

binding fibers.
tape

WLAN

ry
Insulati Insulates power

on tape wires or other
conductors.
Corruga Protects optical

ted fibers.
tube
1.1.2.3 Unpacking a Device
Context
If you find the package of a device is damaged, stop unpacking and contact the supplier. If
all packages are intact and the number of packages is correct, unpack the packages to
check the equipment and components.
● Take ESD protection measures to protect the equipment from electrostatic
charges.
● It is recommended that you move the carton of a device near the installation
position before unpacking (if space is sufficient). Moving an unpacked device
over a long distance may cause damages to the device.
● If a device is found eroded or damped, stop unpacking, check for the reason,
and contact the supplier.
● Wear gloves or take other protection measures to prevent hand injuries when
unpacking a carton.
● When cutting the adhesive tape on a carton, do not insert the utility knife too
deep; otherwise, the utility knife may cut the components in the carton.
● Keep the cartons safe for future transpiration of the devices.
Tools
The following tools are used:
● ESD gloves
● Utility knife

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 View the label on the carton to confirm the device model and learn about
precautions to take.
Step 2 Use a utility knife to cut the pressure-sensitive adhesive tape around the cover of
the carton.
Step 3 Open the carton and take out the package of installation accessories.
Step 4 Remove the foam materials and take out the device.
Step 5 Take the device out of the plastic bag and check whether the nameplate on the
chassis is consistent with the label on the carton.
----End
1.1.2.4 Installing the Device
1.1.2.4.1 Scenario 1: Installing a Device in a Cabinet/Rack
NOTICE
● The AC series products are class A products. Customers should take

preventative measures as the operating devices may cause radio interference.
● Before the installation, take ESD protection measures, for example, wear ESD
gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
● When fixing the chassis onto a cabinet/rack with mounting brackets, ensure
that the mounting brackets are kept in a horizontal line in the mounting holes
on the left and right mounting rails. If the mounting brackets are not in a
horizontal line, do not install the chassis with force. Or the chassis may be
distorted.
Tools and Accessories

● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver
● Flat-head screwdriver
● Floating nuts
● M4 screws
● M6 screws
● Mounting brackets
Procedure
Step 1 Install the AC6005.

WLAN
1. Install front mounting ears. Install the front mounting ears on two sides of
the panel with ports.
The AC6005 requires only front mounting ears which are delivered with the chassis.
M4
1.2N•m
2. Install floating nuts.

Install floating nuts on front supports, two on the left and two on the right.
The AC6005 chassis is 1 U high, so the two mounting holes for floating nuts
on one side must have one hole between them. The floating nuts on the left
and right sides must be on the same horizontal line.
3. Install the chassis in the cabinet.
NOTICE
The distance between two chassis must be at least 1 U.

WLAN
>=1U M6
M6
3N•m
4. Connect the M4 connector of the PGND cable to the chassis and the M6
connector to a ground point. The PGND cable is in yellow and green.
M4
1.2N•m
When installing the AC6605 in a cabinet or rack, you can:

● Fix the chassis with front and rear mounting ears. Guide rails or trays are not necessary in
this scenario. This section uses this scenario as an example to describe the installation
procedure.
● Fix the chassis with guide rails or trays (purchased separately). Front and rear mounting ears
are not necessary in this scenario.
1. Install two front and two rear mounting ears on the AC6605. Install the front
mounting ears near the front panel with interfaces and the rear mounting
ears near the rear panel with power supplies.

WLAN
2. Install the floating nuts.

– Install floating nuts on front supports, two on the left and two on the
right. Ensure that the distance between two nuts on each side is 1 U
(height of the AC6605 chassis). That is, there is an installation hole
between the two nuts. Align the holes on the mounting ears with the
floating nuts.
– Install four floating nuts on the rear supports following the above guide.
Align the floating nuts on the rear supports with those on the front
supports.
3. Install the guide rails on the rear supports.

WLAN
When installing a device in a cabinet/rack, install guide rails for rear

mounting ears depending on the distance between front and rear mounting
rails. For details, see Table 1-30.
Table 1-30 Installing guide rails for rear mounting ears

Distance Guide Rail Installation
Between
Front and
Rear
Mounting
Rails
375 mm to
454 mm
507 mm to
566 mm
4. Align the rear mounting ears with guide rails and insert the chassis in the
cabinet or rack among the guide rails.

WLAN
5. Hold the chassis while secure the front mounting ears to the supports using a
screwdriver. Then fix the rear mounting rears to the guide rails.
----End
1.1.2.4.2 Scenario 2: Installing a Device on a Desk

WLAN
NOTICE
● Ensure that the desk is flat and properly grounded.
● Do not place other objects on the device.

● Rubber pads
● Security lock (Optional. Customers must prepare the security lock
themselves.)
The rubber pads are included in the installation accessory package delivered with the
device.
Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is grounded and in a close contact with your wrist.
Step 2 Attach the rubber pads to the bottom of the device.
Slowly turn the device upside down, and then attach four rubber pads in the
imprinted round areas at the bottom of the chassis. See a in Figure 1-12.
Step 3 Place the device on the desk.
Turn the chassis over and gently place the chassis on the desk. See b in Figure
1-12.
Step 4 (Optional) Install the security lock.

The device provides a security slot on the left side. Users can use the security lock
to fix the device on a desk. See c in Figure 1-12.

WLAN
Figure 1-12 Installing the device on a desk
a
b
----End
1.1.2.4.3 Scenario 3: Installing the Device on a Wall
NOTICE
● Only the AC6005 series products support wall mounting installation.

● Take ESD protection measures before the installation, for example, wear ESD
● Ensure that the equipment room is dry, well-ventilated, and has good heat
dissipation.
● When installing multiple fan-free or intelligent-heat-dissipation devices in a
cabinet or rack, leave at least 1 U distance between each two.
● Leave at least 50 mm clearance at two sides and rear of each chassis for heat
dissipation.
● A wall for installing the device needs to meet the following requirements:
● The wall can bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device
and mounting bracket without damage. When the total weight of the
device and mounting bracket is less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing
capability of the wall must be greater than or equal to 5 kg.
● When the tightening torx of a screw reaches 3.5 N m, the screw still
properly works, without crack or damage on the wall.

WLAN

● Marker
● Hammer drill
● M4 screws
● Expansion screws
Procedure
Step 1 Fix mounting ears to both sides of the panel with ports using M4 screws.
M4
1.2N•m
Step 2 Use a marker to mark the positions of mounting holes according to the size of the
chassis and positions of the mounting ears. You are advised to install the device at
a position that is 1700 mm higher above the floor but lower than 2500 mm to
facilitate maintenance and observation of indicators.

WLAN
1700mm ≤ h ≤ 2500mm
Step 3 Install expansion bolts in the wall.

1. Use a φ8 drill bit to drill holes in the marked positions.
φ8 drill bit
90°
2. Insert expansion bolts into the holes and screw the nuts to fasten the
expansion bolts.
3. Remove the nut, flat washer, and spring washer.

WLAN
Step 4 Install the device on the wall.

M6
5N•m
----End
1.1.2.5 Connecting the Ground Cable
Context
Grounding is a key step in device installation. The ground cable of a device must
be correctly connected to protect the device from lightning, electromagnetic
interference, and electrostatic charges.
The ground cable can be connected to a ground point on the cabinet/rack or a

ground bar, depending on the situations in the installation site. The following
procedure connects the ground cable to a ground point on the cabinet/rack.

WLAN
If a cabinet or rack has anti-rust coating, scrape off the paint around the ground point to
ensure reliable grounding.

● Ground cable (one for each device)
● M4 screw (already installed on the ground point on the device)
● M6 screw (one, separately purchased)
The rubber pads are included in the installation accessory package.
Procedure
Step 2 Remove the M4 screw from the ground point on the device.
Loosen the M4 screw counterclockwise with the Phillips screwdriver, as shown in
Figure 1-13. Keep the M4 screw for later use.
Figure 1-13 Removing the M4 screw
Step 3 Connect the ground cable to the ground point on the device.
Fix the M4 lug (with a smaller hole) of the ground cable to the ground point on
the device with the M4 screw you removed in step 2, and use the Phillips
screwdriver to fasten the M4 screw clockwise. See Figure 1-14.

WLAN
Figure 1-14 Connecting the ground cable to the ground point on the device
Step 4 Connect the ground cable to a ground point on the cabinet.

Connect the M6 lug (with a larger hole) of the ground cable to a ground point on
the cabinet. See Figure 1-15.
Figure 1-15 Connecting the ground cable to a ground point on the cabinet
----End
1.1.2.6 Installing Modules
1.1.2.6.1 Installing Power Modules

WLAN
Context
The power modules must be installed onsite. They are hot swappable. The
procedure for installing a DC power module is the same as that for installing an
AC power module. The following provides installation of an AC power module.
NOTICE
● Only the AC6605 supports power modules.

● When installing a battery, battery charger module, or power module, slowly
push it into the slot. If you feel resistance or find the module inclined, pull the
module out and push it into the slot again. Do not push the module with force;
otherwise, the connectors on the module and backplane may be damaged.
● If the battery slot is empty, install a filler panel to ensure efficient heat
dissipation.
● The batteries and power modules for the device are hot swappable. Before
removing the battery or power module from a device, ensure that the internal
power supply unit of the device is working normally. Otherwise, services on the
device will be interrupted due to a power failure after the battery or power
module is removed.
● Do not put your fingers into the battery slot when installing or removing a
battery or power module.

● Lithium battery
Procedure
Step 2 Take out a power module from the box.
Verify that the delivered power module is the model you need.
Step 3 Remove the filler panel from the battery slot at the rear of the device, as shown in
Figure 1-16.
1. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screw on the filler panel
counterclockwise.
2. Pill the filler panel out by the handle.
Keep the filler panel for future use.

WLAN
Figure 1-16 Removing the filler panel from the battery slot
Step 4 Install the power module in the battery slot, as shown in Figure 1-17.
1. Hold the handle on the power module with one hand and support the bottom
of the power module with the other hand. Horizontally push the power
module into the slot until it is completely in the slot.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to fasten the captive screw on the power module
clockwise.
Figure 1-17 Installing a lithium battery
----End
1.1.2.6.2 Installing Optical Modules
Context
NOTICE
● When installing the optical module, do not touch the gold finger of the optical
module without wearing gloves.
● Do not insert the optical module with optical fibers directly into the optical
interface. You need to install the optical module first and then the optical
fibers.
● Cover idle optical interfaces with dust plugs.

WLAN

● Dust plug
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is grounded and in a close contact with your wrist.
Step 2 Take out an optical module from the ESD bag and verify that the optical module
is the model you need.
Step 3 Install the optical module on the optical interface.
Insert the optical module into the optical interface smoothly until you hear a crack
sound.
NOTICE
If an optical module cannot be completely inserted into an optical interface, do
not push it with force. Turn the optical module over and try again.
Figure 1-18 Installing an optical module
Step 4 Check that the optical module is installed correctly.

Keep the release handle closed and try pulling the optical module by pressing the
optical module with your forefinger and thumb to see if the optical module can
be removed.
● If not, the optical module is installed correctly.
● If so, the optical module is installed incorrectly and must be reinstalled.
Step 5 Remove the dust plugs from the optical module.
● Install dust plugs on optical modules not connected to optical fibers.

● Keep the dust plugs properly for future use.
----End
1.1.2.7 Connecting the Cable

WLAN
1.1.2.7.1 Connecting Power Cables
Context
NOTICE
● Power cables must be buried underground or routed indoors and cannot be led
into the equipment room aerially.
● Do not install power cables while the power is on.
● Do not power on a device before you finish installing the device and connecting
cables.
● Each device has an AC power cable delivered as an accessory. The AC power
cable can only be used on the device in the same package and cannot be used
on any other device.

● AC power cables
● (Optional) AC terminal locking latch
The AC power cable parameters vary in different countries or regions. The figures in this
section are provided only for reference. The AC terminal locking latch is not delivered with
the device and needs to be purchased separately if needed.
Procedure
Step 2 Turn off the external power supply system.
Step 3 Connect the power cable to the power module or battery.
● If an AC power module is used, perform the following steps to connect the AC
power cables.
a. Insert the socket of the AC power cable into the AC power socket of the
AC power module.

WLAN
b. Lock the AC power cable with the AC terminal locking latch.
c. Connect the other end of the AC power cable to the external power
supply system.
● If a DC power module is used, perform the following steps to connect the DC
power cables.
a. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the protection cover
of the DC terminals and remove the protection cover.
b. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws on the two DC

terminals.

WLAN
c. Attach the DC power cables to the DC power module and use the screws
you just removed to secure the power cables. The black cable is the -48 V
return ground cable and must be connected to the RTN(+) terminal on
the DC power module. The blue cable is the -48 V power cable and must
be connected to the NEG(-) terminal of the DC power module.
d. Cover the DC terminals with the protection cover and fasten the screw on
the protection cover with the Phillips screwdriver.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Complete post-installation check before powering on the device. For the post-
installation checklist, see 1.1.2.8 Checking the Device After Installation. For the
procedure for powering on the device, see 1.1.2.9 Powering on a Device for the
First Time.
1.1.2.7.2 Connecting Signal Cables
Context
Invisible laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into open optical ports
without eye protection.

WLAN
NOTICE
● Keep signal cables more than 10 cm away from power cables.
● To prevent damages to wires in cables or fibers, do not over bend cables or
optical fibers.
● Optical fibers routed in a cabinet must be protected by a corrugated pipe. The
bend radius of an optical fiber must be 20 times larger than its diameter.
Generally, the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than 40 mm.
● Before connecting an optical fiber, check whether its connector is
contaminated. If so, use an air-laid cotton or a fiber cleaner to clean the fiber
connector.

● Network cables or optical fibers
● Cable ties
● Fiber binding tape
● Diagonal pliers
Operation Suggestions
Pay attention to the following points when binding cables or optical fibers:
● Cables or optical fiber must be bundled at equal intervals. Bundle cables or
optical fibers in a cabinet at less than 250 mm intervals.
● Do not bundle cables especially optical fibers too tight.
● Cover idle fiber connectors with dust caps and cover idle optical ports with
dust plugs.
● Wrap redundant optical fibers, power cables, and network cables neatly so
that you can find required cables easily during maintenance.
● Cable connectors made onsite must be securely attached, reliable, neat, and
comply with related regulations.
When a large number of cables need to be connected, arrange the cables in the
cabinet, and then install cable connectors. Figure 1-19 shows connected cables
and optical fibers.

WLAN
Figure 1-19 Cables and optical fibers in a cabinet
This figure is only for reference. The actual layout of cables and optical fibers in a cabinet
depends on the installation scenario and interfaces used in the device.
1.1.2.8 Checking the Device After Installation
After installing a device, check the device against Table 1-31.
Table 1-31 Post-installation checklist
No. Check Item Method
1 The installation position of the device meets the View

requirement in the associated engineering design
document.
2 The surfaces of the device are clean and smooth, View

without fingerprints, stains, or scratches.
3 Components are correctly installed in the cabinet. View

No component loosens or is damaged.
4 All the screws are correctly fixed. View
5 There are no other objects on the chassis. View
6 There is at least 50 mm clearance at the left and Measure

right sides of the chassis for heat dissipation.
7 Signal cables are not damaged or broken and View

have no splices.

WLAN
8 Signal cable connectors are clean and intact, and View

correctly connected. Wires of each signal cable
are securely cramped in the connectors.
9 Each signal cable has labels attached at both View

ends, with clear text facing the same direction.
10 The power cables and ground cable are all View

copper wires, and are not spliced or damaged.
The cables are reliably connected in compliance
with regulations.
11 The power cables and ground cable are routed in View

compliance with the associated engineering
design document, meeting the power distribution
requirements.
12 The power cables and ground cable are reliably View

connected. The spring washers of the ground
cable lugs are on the flat washers.
13 The power cables and ground cable are View

separated from the signal cables.
14 The power cables and ground cable are routed View

straightly and bundled neatly. Leave sufficient
slack at the bent part of the cables.
15 Protection measures are taken for the optical View

fibers routed out of the cabinet. For example, the
optical fibers are routed in a corrugated pipe or
trough.
16 The bend radius of optical fibers is 20 times Measure

larger than their diameter. Generally, the bend
radius is larger than 40 mm.
17 Optical fibers are bundled by binding tape with View

appropriate force.
18 No signal cables are near the heat vents on the View

cabinet.
19 Cables in the cabinet are not crossed and cables View

outside the cabinet are bundled.
1.1.2.9 Powering on a Device for the First Time


WLAN
● Multimeter
● Console cable
Procedure
Step 1 Check the device before powering it on.
1. Check that the external power supply system connected to the device and the
power module or battery installed on the device are both turned off.
2. Check that the power cables are correctly connected.
3. Use a multimeter to check that there is no short-circuit condition between the
phase wire (also called the live wire), ground cable, and neutral wire.
4. Use the multimeter to check that the input voltage provided by the external
power supply system is within the operating voltage range for the device. For
the operating voltage range required by the series devices, see Physical
Parameters in Device Structure.
Step 3 Connect the console cable.
Connect the DB-9 connector (with holes) of the console cable to the 9-pin serial
port on the maintenance terminal, and connect the RJ45 connector of the console
cable to the console port on the device. See Figure 1-20.
Figure 1-20 Console cable connection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PWR
BAT
SYS
STAT
SPED
25 26 27 28
STCK CONSOLE
MODE
S5700-28P-LI-BAT 1G/STACK-5G
RJ-45
DB-9
You can connect the device to the maintenance terminal using the console cable. For
details, see 6.11.1 Logging In to the AC Through the Console Port. When the device is
starting, you can choose whether to enter the BIOS menu. The BIOS menu and the
procedure for entering the BIOS menu vary according to software versions. For details
about the BIOS menu, see BIOS Menu in the CLI-based Configuration Guide.
Step 4 Turn on the external power supply system.

Step 5 Turn on the power module.
Step 6 Check the device after powering it on.
Check the following items after powering on the device:

WLAN
● Whether the sound of fans can be heard and air is exhausted from the air
vent.
● Whether the indicators on the device and power module are in normal state.
Normally, the PWR indicator on the device and the STATUS indicator on the
power module are steady green.
● To check whether the device is running properly after it is powered on, check the
STATUS indicator on the power module and the PWR and SYS indicators on the device.
● For the indicator states and meaning of each state, see Indicator Description in Device
Structure.
● After the device is powered on and completes the startup, the command line interface
(CLI) is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
To power off the device, perform the following steps:
NOTICE
Powering off the device will interrupt all the services on the device. Exercise
caution when you perform this operation.
1. Turn off the power module.

2. Turn off the external power supply system connecting to the device.
3. Check that the device and all its modules are powered off.
1.1.3 Logging In to the AC
For details about how to log in to the AC, see 6.11 AC Login.
1.1.4 Hardware Failures
This section describes common methods for troubleshooting typical hardware

faults.
1.1.4.1 Power Supply Failures
1.1.4.1.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On
Fault Description
The SYS and PWR indicators of a device are both off.

WLAN
Possible Causes
● The device is powered off.
● The power switch on the device is turned off.
● The power cable is not securely connected to the device.
● The power supply unit has failed.
– If the device uses a pluggable power supply, the pluggable power supply
may fail.
– If the device connects to an external power source, its power adapter
may fail.
– If the device has a built-in power supply, the device itself may be faulty.
Troubleshooting Procedure
1. Check whether the device is powered on.
2. Check that the power switch is on.
3. Check that the power cable is securely connected to the device.
4. Check whether the power supply is normal.
– If the device uses a pluggable power supply, replace the pluggable power
supply with a normal one. If the device is powered on, the original
pluggable power supply is faulty. Contact technical support personnel or
Huawei agent and ask them to replace the pluggable power supply.
– If the device uses a power adapter, replace the power adapter with a
normal one. If the device is powered on, the original power adapter is
faulty. Contact technical support personnel or Huawei agent and ask
them to replace the power adapter.
5. If the device still cannot be powered on, the device itself is faulty. Contact
technical support personnel or Huawei agent and ask them to replace the
device.
1.1.4.1.2 The PWR Indicator Is Steady On
Fault Description
The PWR indicator is steady on.
Possible Causes
● The power module of the device is not properly installed.
● The pluggable power supply module on the device becomes faulty.
● The external power supply module of the device becomes faulty.
1. Install the power module properly.
2. Replace the faulty pluggable power supply module.
3. Replace the external power supply module.

WLAN
1.1.4.2 Memory Failures
1.1.4.2.1 Failed to Write Data to the SD Card or USB Flash Drive
Fault Description
The system cannot write data to the SD card or USB flash drive.
Possible Causes
● The SD card or USB flash drive is not securely installed.
● The SD card or USB flash drive is corrupted.
1. Reinstall the SD card or USB flash drive.
2. Replace the SD card or USB flash drive.
NOTICE
Use a Huawei-certified SD card or USB flash drive.
If the system still fails to write data to the Huawei-certified SD card or USB flash
drive, contact technical support personnel.
1.1.4.3 Interface Faults
1.1.4.3.1 An Optical Interface Cannot Turn Up
Fault Description
After an optical interface is connected to a remote device through an optical fiber,
its LINK indicator is off.
Possible Causes
● The optical fiber is faulty.
● The optical module on the optical interface cannot meet the requirements.
● The optical attenuator used cannot meet the requirements.
● A combo interface is used but the interface type is not set to optical interface.
● There are four combo interfaces GE0/0/21, GE0/0/22, GE0/0/23 and GE0/0/24 on the
main control board of the AC6605, and the four interfaces function independently.
● There are two combo interfaces GE0/0/7 and GE0/0/8 on the main control board of
the AC6005, and the two interfaces function independently.

WLAN
1. Replace the optical fiber and optical module and check whether the optical
interface can turn Up. Ensure that the optical module meets the following
requirements.
2. Determine optical module attributes.
– The optical module has passed Huawei certification.
– The transmission speed of the optical module is the same as the interface
speed.
– Check whether the wavelength of the optical module is the same as that
of the remote optical module.
– The transmission distance of the optical module is suitable for the actual
distance between the two devices.
● The transmission distance of an optical module is 10 km, 15 km, 20 km, 40

km, or 80 km. The optical modules with a longer transmission distance have a
higher transmit power. If an optical module with a long transmission distance
is used for short-distance transmission, the optical interface cannot turn Up
because the transmit power is too high. The high transmit power may even
burn the receiver of the remote optical module. To reduce the transmit power
in this situation, use an optical attenuator between the optical module and
optical fiber.
● Optical modules with different speeds are available, for example, 155 Mbit/s,
622 Mbit/s, and 1.25 Gbit/s. You must use an optical module with the same
speed as the optical interface to ensure efficient optical transmission.
3. If the interface is a combo interface, run the display this command in the
interface view to check whether the interface type has been set to auto or
optical interface.
<HUAWEI> system-view
Enter system view, return user view with Ctrl+Z
[HUAWEI] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/24
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/24] display this
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/24
combo-port copper
#
Return
If the combo interface type is electrical interface, run the combo-port auto or
combo-port fiber command to configure it as auto or optical interface.
If the interface type is set to auto, check that the electrical interface is not Up. If the
electrical interface is Up, remove the network cables and then install the optical module.
[HUAWEI-GigabitEthernet0/0/24] combo-port fiber
4. Run the display transceiver command to check whether any alarms about
the optical module have been generated. If such alarms are displayed, handle
the problem according to the alarms. For example, if an alarm shows that the
receive signal strength is too high, use an optical attenuator between the
remote optical module and the optical fiber.
<HUAWEI> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 0/0/24 verbose
GigabitEthernet0/0/24 transceiver information:

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Transceiver Type :OC3_INTER_REACH_SFP
Connector Type :LC
Wavelength(nm) :1310
Transfer Distance(m) :15000(9um)
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring :YES
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Vendor Part Number :34060358
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Manufacture information:
Manu. Serial Number :EH1048220807
Manufacturing Date :2010-12-06
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Diagnostic information:
Temperature(¡ãC) :26.00
Temp High Threshold(¡ãC) :85.00
Temp Low Threshold(¡ãC) :-40.00
Voltage(V) :3.29
Volt High Threshold(V) :3.64
Volt Low Threshold(V) :2.95
Bias Current(mA) :4.57
Bias High Threshold(mA) :9.00
Bias Low Threshold(mA) :2.00
RX Power(dBM) :-40.00
RX Power High Threshold(dBM) :0.00
RX Power Low Threshold(dBM) :-16.99
TX Power(dBM) :-5.03
TX Power High Threshold(dBM) :-2.22
TX Power Low Threshold(dBM) :-6.99
-------------------------------------------------------------
The attenuation coefficients of single-mode fibers with 1310 nm and 1550 nm

wavelengths are 0.4 dB/km and 0.25 dB/km respectively.
5. If the interface remains Down, contact technical support personnel.
1.1.5 Maintaining the Device
1.1.5.1 Replacing a Power Module or Fan Module
Context
You can replace a power module only on a device with two independent pluggable
power modules.

WLAN
NOTICE
● Before replacing a power module, ensure that the device is powered by the
other power module. Replacing the only power module of a device will
interrupt services.
● Get the replacement module ready before replacing a power module.
● If two power modules are installed in a device, they work in 1+1 backup mode.
Replacing one power module will not interrupt services. If you are replacing
both power modules, replace the second one only after the first replaced one
starts to work (its indicator is steady green).

Procedure
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap,
ensure that it is in close contact with your wrist and grounded properly.
3. Remove the power cable from the power module. The procedure for removing
a power cable is the reverse of the procedure for installing the power cable.
For details, see 1.1.2.7.1 Connecting Power Cables.
4. Remove the power module from the device.
a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screw on the power
module.
b. Holding the handle, gently pull out the power module.
b
a
5. Install the replacement power module in the device. For details, see 1.1.2.6.1
Installing Power Modules.
6. Connect the power cable to the new power module. For details, see 1.1.2.7.1
Connecting Power Cables.
7. Turn on the power module.
8. Use either of the following methods to check whether the new power module
is working normally:
● Observe the STATUS indicator on the panel. If the indicator is steady green,
the power module works normally.

WLAN
● Run the display device command to check the running status of the new
power module.
Follow-up Procedure
If the new power module does not work normally, contact the equipment supplier
or local maintenance personnel for technical support.
1.1.5.2 Replacing an Optical Module
Context
Never look directly into an optical module or the ends of optical fibers. Optical
modules and connected fibers emit laser radiation that will cause eye damage.
NOTICE
● Use optical modules certified for Huawei. Using other optical modules may
affect service stability and Huawei can accept no liability for the outcome.
● Install or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid damages to fiber connectors.
● Optical modules are electrostatic-sensitive components. Take ESD protection
measures when replacing optical modules.
● If an optical module cannot be completely inserted into an optical port, turn
the optical module over (180 degrees) and try again.
Observe the following rules when replacing an optical module:
● Take ESD measures.

● Ensure that the new optical module has the same center wavelength and
complies with the same standards as the old one.
● Cover unconnected optical modules with dust plugs.
● Unplug the optical fibers from the optical module before removing it. Install
or remove optical fibers carefully to avoid damages to fiber connectors.
Applying too much force to the optical fibers may damage the optical
module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab

WLAN
Procedure
1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Ensure that the ESD wrist strap is
grounded and in a close contact with your wrist.
2. Record the location of each optical fiber on the old optical module and check
whether the labels on the optical fibers are correct and clear. If any labels are
unclear, replace them and ensure that the details are correct.
3. Release the locking clip on the fiber connector, gently push the fiber
connector inward, and then pull out the optical fiber. After removing the
optical fibers from the optical module, cover the connectors with dust caps.
The locking clip varies on different fiber connectors.
– Figure 1-21 shows the locking clips on an LC/PC connector. Hold down
the locking clips when pulling the optical fibers.
– Figure 1-22 shows the locking clip on an MPO connector. The locking clip
is released automatically when you pull the MPO connector.
– Figure 1-23 shows the locking clip on an SC/PC connector. The locking
clip is released automatically when you pull the SC/PC connector.
Figure 1-21 LC/PC connector
Figure 1-22 MPO connector
Figure 1-23 SC/PC connector

WLAN
4. Remove the optical module and cover the bores with dust plugs. Store optical
module safely.
The latch varies on different optical modules. Figure 1-24 shows an optical
module with a clasp latch. To release the clasp latch, rotate it down. Figure
1-25 shows an optical module with a tab latch. The tab latch is released when
you pull it.
Figure 1-24 Optical module with a clasp latch
Figure 1-25 Optical module with a tab latch
You can use the tweezers (part number: 63120166) to remove an optical module.
5. Take out the new optical module from the package. Ensure that the optical
module is correctly oriented and gently push it into the optical port until you
hear a click.
The new optical module must have the same optical parameters as the remote optical
module connected to it.
6. Identify the optical fibers to be connected to the optical module. Remove the
dust caps from the optical fibers and insert the optical fibers to the bores of
the optical module.
If the optical module does not work, use an alcohol swab to swap the fiber connectors
in one direction, and reconnect the optical fibers to the optical module.

WLAN
Follow-up Procedure
If the new optical module does not work, contact the equipment supplier or local
maintenance personnel for technical support.

(AC6508, AC6507S and AirEngine 9700S-S)
1.2.1.1 AC6508/AC6507S/AirEngine 9700S-S

Figure 1-26 and Figure 1-27 show the appearance of the AC6508/AC6507S/
AirEngine 9700S-S.
Figure 1-26 Appearance of the AC (front view)
Figure 1-27 Appearance of the AC (rear view)
No. Description
1 DC input port.
2 Ten 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports.
3 Two 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical ports.
4 USB 2.0 port.

WLAN
No. Description
5 Reset button.
● Press the reset button for no more than 3 seconds to reset the AC
manually. Resetting the AC will cause service interruption. Exercise
caution when using this button.
● Press and hold down the reset button for more than 5 seconds to
restore the AC configuration.
6 Console port.
7 Ground point.
Port Description
10/100/1000 Mbit/s, and must use a network cable. The following table lists
attributes of a 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical port.
Connector type RJ45

compliance

attributes NOTE
interfaces (MDIs).
or LAN switches.
Network IP
protocol

Full-duplex
USB Port
A USB port connects to a USB flash drive to transfer configuration and upgrade
files. The USB flash drive used on the AC6508, AC6507S or AirEngine 9700S-S
needs to support USB 2.0 and be compatible with the Linux operating system.

WLAN
To ensure compatibility between USB flash drives and devices, use Huawei-certified USB
flash drives (listed in the following table) to configure the Huawei devices.
4GB Netac U208 You can buy Netac USB 4 GB flash

drives from Huawei or other vendors.
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.
8GB Netac U208 Huawei does not offer this USB flash
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.
Console Port
on, log in to the device through the console port. The following table lists
attributes of a console port.
Connector type RJ45
Standards RS-232
compliance

(UART)

The default value is 9600 bit/s

WLAN
Data Data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)

equipment type

optical module and optical fiber. The following table describes the attributes of a
10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical port.
Standards IEEE802.3ae
compliance
Network IP
protocol

Full-duplex
36 W Power Adapter
Function
The following table describes the functions of a 36 W power adapter.
Item Description
Input overcurrent protection In this protection state, the power

adapter stops supplying power and
cannot automatically resume power
supply when the input current restores
to the normal range.
Output current limiting protection In this protection state, the power

adapter supplies power intermittently.
When the output current is limited
within a range, the power adapter
automatically resumes power supply.

WLAN
Item Description
Output overvoltage protection In this protection state, the power

adapter stops supplying power
intermittently. When the output
voltage restores to the normal range,
the power adapter automatically
resumes power supply.
Output short-circuit protection In this protection state, the power

adapter supplies power intermittently.
When the short circuit is removed, the
power adapter automatically resumes
power supply.
Heat dissipation The power adapter does not have

built-in fans and uses natural heat
dissipation.
Appearance
Figure 1-28 shows the appearance of a 36 W power adapter.
Figure 1-28 36 W power adapter
The following table lists technical specifications of a 36 W power adapter.
Item Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 53.95mm×99.45mm×32mm
Weight 0.205kg

WLAN
Item Value
Maximum input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz

range
Rated output voltage 12V DC
Maximum output voltage 11.4 V DC to 12.6 V DC

range
Maximum output current 3A
Maximum output power 36W
Figure 1-29 shows the indicators on the AC6508/AC6507S/AirEngine 9700S-S
front panel.
Figure 1-29 Indicators on the AC6508/AC6507S/AirEngine 9700S-S front panel
The following table describes the indicators on the AC6508/AC6507S/AirEngine

9700S-S front panel.
No. Indicator Color Description
1 PWR: power - Off: The system is powered off or

supply faulty.
indicator
working properly.

status
indicator Green ● Steady on: The system is powering
on or restarting.
● Fast blinking(4 Hz): The system is
starting.
● Slow blinking(0.5 Hz): The system
is running properly.
Red The system is faulty.
3 USB indicator - No USB flash drive is connected to

the AC.

WLAN
Green Steady on: The USB flash drive is

inserted and working properly.
4 CLOUD Green ● Off: The device is not connected

indicator or lost the connection to the Agile
Controller-Campus.
● Steady on: The connection to the
Agile Controller-Campus is
normal.
● Fast blinking(4 Hz): The device is
connecting to the Agile
Controller-Campus.
GE electrical service port Green ● Off: The port is not connected or

indicator has been shut down.
Yellow Blinking: The port is sending or

receiving data.
10GE optical service port Green ● Off: The port is not connected or
indicator has been shut down.
receiving data.
The following table describes the physical specifications of the AC6508, AC6507S
and AirEngine 9700S-S.
Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H x W x ● Basic: 43.6 mm x 250 mm x 210 mm

specifications D) ● Maximum: 43.6 mm x 250 mm x 215
mm
Weight 1.57kg
Power Maximum power 22.3W

specifications consumption
Power input DC: 12 V ± 5%

WLAN
Item Description
Environment Operating ● -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to +45°C

parameters temperature ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
decreases by 1°C every time the
Storage temperature -60 m to +5000 m: -40°C to +70°C

and altitude
Part Number Part Description
02352PLX AirEngine 9700S-S mainframe (10*GE ports, 2*10GE

SFP+ ports, with the AC/DC adapter)
02352QVE AC6507S mainframe (10*GE ports, 2*10GE SFP+

ports, with the AC/DC adapter)
02352QVG AC6508 mainframe (10*GE ports, 2*10GE SFP+ ports,

with the AC/DC adapter)
For power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.


WLAN


WLAN
watches.

gases or smoke.
Electric Safety

on.

WLAN
Laser Safety
Mechanical Safety
chassis.
bruise or sprain.
boards (PCBs).

follows:
devices, see Basic Specifications in AP Overview. If the relative humidity
features.


WLAN

inch cabinet/rack.

the voltage range required by the device, see Basic Specifications in AP
Overview.

ESD Prevent
charges.
ESD Prevents
wrist electrostatic
strap charges. Wear
the strap on
your wrist and
insert the other
end into the
ESD jack on
the cabinet.

knife paper.
Measur Measures
ing distances.
tape

WLAN
Marker Marks
component
installation
positions and
draws lines.
Flat- Fastens or
head loosens small-
screwdr sized screws
iver and bolts. It is
(M4/M seldom used to
6) fasten nuts.
Phillips Fastens or
screwdr loosens small-
iver sized screws
(M4/M and bolts. It is
6) seldom used to
fasten nuts.

al pliers tubes and
cable ties.

k cable cable

eter insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.
Hamm Drills holes on

er drill a wall to install
(φ8) expansion
screws when
installing the
device against
the wall.

WLAN
devices.
Access Description Picture

ory

tie

binding fibers.
tape
Insulati Insulates
on tape power wires or
other
conductors.
Corrug Protects optical

ated fibers.
tube
Context

WLAN

charges.
unpacking a carton.
Tools
● ESD gloves
● Utility knife
Procedure
the carton.
----End
1.2.2.4 Device Installation

WLAN
NOTICE

distorted.

● Floating nuts
● M4 screws
● M6 screws
Ensure that the following prerequisites are met before the installation:
● The cabinet has been well fixed.
● The AC's installation position in the cabinet has been determined and
arranged properly.
● There is at least 1 U clearance from the AC to other devices above and below
and a 150 mm clearance to other devices on the right or left side in the
cabinet.
● The AC to be installed has been moved near the cabinet for convenient
movement.
Procedure
Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to fix the mounting brackets to both sides of the AC
with M4 screws.

WLAN
Step 2 Install two floating nuts on each front mounting rail. Leave a mounting hole
between the two floating nuts on the same mounting rail.
Figure 1-31 Mounting positions of floating nuts
Figure 1-32 Installing floating nuts
Step 3 Install the AC in the cabinet.

1. Move the AC slowly into the cabinet.

WLAN
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to fix the mounting brackets of the AC to the

cabinet with M6 screws, as shown in Figure 1-33.
Figure 1-33 Installing the AC in the cabinet
----End
1.2.2.4.2 Scenario 2: Installing a Device on a Desk
NOTICE
● Ensure that the desk is flat and properly grounded.
● Do not place other objects on the device.

● Rubber pads
● Security lock (Optional. Customers must prepare the security lock
themselves.)

WLAN
The rubber pads are included in the installation accessory package delivered with the
device.
Procedure
Step 2 Attach the rubber pads to the bottom of the device.
Slowly turn the device upside down, and then attach four rubber pads in the
imprinted round areas at the bottom of the chassis.
Step 3 Place the device on the desk.
Turn the chassis over and gently place the chassis on the desk.
Step 4 (Optional) Install the security lock.
The device provides a security slot on the left side. Users can use the security lock
to fix the device on a desk.

WLAN
----End
1.2.2.4.3 Scenario 3: Installing a Device on a Wall

● Ruler
● Marker
● Hammer drill
● Vacuum cleaner
● Hammer
● Expansion bolt (separately prepared)
Procedure
Step 1 Fix mounting ears to both sides of the port-side panel using M4 screws.
Figure 1-35 Installing mounting ears
Step 2 Use a ruler to determine positions of two mounting holes, keep the two positions
aligned, and mark the positions with a marker.
● The wall must be a bearing wall. Otherwise, the wall is not suitable for mounting.
● Install the device at an appropriate height to ensure that the indicators can be observed
easily.

WLAN
Figure 1-36 Distance between two mounting positions
Step 3 Drill holes and install expansion bolts in the wall.
NOTICE
● Screw tubes must be installed solid in the wall; otherwise, the wall-mounted
device may fall down after cables are connected.
1. Use a φ8 drill bit to drill holes in the marked positions.
No object is placed within 10 cm of the AC for the sake of heat dissipation.

expansion bolts.
M6X60 expansion bolts (part number: 26010179) are recommended.

3. Remove the nut, flat washer, and spring washer.

WLAN
Figure 1-37 Drilling holes and installing expansion bolts in the wall
Step 4 Tighten the device on the wall using the expansion bolts and install a power
adapter nearby.
● The device supports upward and downward mounting mode. To prevent water from
entering into ports and causing device damage, you are advised to mount the with ports
facing downward.

WLAN
Figure 1-38 Installing the device on the wall
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Check the following items after the device is installed:
● The AC is securely mounted on the wall.
● No object is placed within 10 cm of the AC for the sake of heat dissipation.
Context

WLAN

● Multimeter
Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the screw from the ground terminal on the rear panel of the AC.
Step 2 Align the M4 end of the ground cable with the screw hole on the ground terminal,
and tighten the screw with a torque of 1.4 N·m.
Step 3 Connect the M6 end of the ground cable to the ground terminal on the cabinet,
workstation, or wall, tighten the M6 screw with a torque of 4.8 N·m.
Step 4 Connect the ground cable to a ground point.
Figure 1-39 Connecting the ground cable
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Perform the following check operations after connecting the ground cable:

WLAN
● Ensure that the ground terminal is securely connected to the ground cable.
● Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the ground terminal and
the ground point. The resistance must be smaller than 0.1 ohm.
Context
NOTICE
fibers.

● Dust plug
Procedure
sound.
NOTICE


WLAN

be removed.

----End
1.2.2.7.1 Connecting a Power Adapter

The AC6508, AC6507S and AirEngine 9700S-S can be powered using a power
adapter. Before connecting a power adapter to the AC, prepare an AC power cable
for connecting the power adapter to a power source in an equipment room.
Context
NOTICE
Before connecting a power adapter, ensure that the power supply in the
equipment room complies with the input requirements of power modules on the
AC6508, AC6507S or AirEngine 9700S-S.
Procedure
Step 1 Make sure that the PGND cable is properly grounded.
Step 2 Insert the power cable locking latch into the jack next to the power jack on the
AC.

WLAN
Step 3 Connect the power adapter.

1. Connect the plug of the AC power cable into the socket of the power adapter.
2. Insert the tuning fork plug of the power adapter into the power socket on the
AC's rear panel, and adjust the locking latch to a proper position.
3. Lock the cable of the power adapter with the locking latch, and adjust the
locking latch to fasten the power adapter.
4. Connect the other end of the AC power cable to an AC power socket or the
output socket of an AC power supply device.
The AC6508, AC6507S and AirEngine 9700S-S do not have a power switch. The power
supply for the AC6508, AC6507S and AirEngine 9700S-S is controlled by the power switch of
the external power supply system.
Figure 1-41 Connecting a Power Adapter
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the AC power cable is connected, check the following items:
● Check whether the power cable is securely connected to the power socket.
● If multiple ACs are installed, attach labels to both ends of each power cable
and write numbers on the labels to identify them.
1.2.2.7.2 Connecting an Ethernet cable

Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the AC6508,
AC6507S or AirEngine 9700S-Sand the other end to an Ethernet port on the peer
device.

WLAN
Context
Perform the following tasks before connecting an Ethernet cable to an AC:
● Checking construction conditions
The peer device to be connected has been installed properly in the equipment
room, with a port reserved for the cable connection.
● Checking the cabling routes
The cabling routes from the cabinet to the peer device have been specified in
the construction document. Based on the cabling routes, calculate the cable
length required.
● Filling in cable labels
Fill in cable labels before connecting the cable.
Ethernet cables are classified into two types: straight-through and crossover
cables. Currently, ports on most Huawei ACs are dynamically adaptive to both
straight-through and crossover cables. Select proper network cables if ports on an
AC are not adaptive to the cable types.
Based on the electromagnetic compatibility, Ethernet cables are divided into
shielded and unshielded cables. Shielded Ethernet cables deliver better
electromagnetic compatibility and are preferred.
NOTICE
Pay attention to the identifier on the port when connecting an Ethernet cable.
Ensure that the cable is inserted into the correct port. Incorrect connections may
cause damage to the port module or the AC.
Procedure
Step 1 Before connecting Ethernet cables, attach temporary labels at both ends of the
cables to identify them.
Step 2 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the AC and the other
end to an Ethernet port on the peer device.
Figure 1-42 Connecting an Ethernet cable

WLAN
Step 3 Lead an Ethernet cable into the cabinet from the top cable inlet (for overhead
cabling) or bottom cable inlet (for on-ground cabling), and route the cable along
one side of the cabinet.
Step 4 Remove the temporary labels from the cable, and then attach formal labels 2 cm
away from the connectors of the cable at both ends.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the cable is connected, check the following items:
● Check whether the labels are correctly filled and securely attached to cables
at both ends, with texts facing the same direction.
● Check whether the cable and connectors are complete, intact, and tightly
connected.
1.2.2.7.3 Connecting an Optical Fiber

This section describes how to install optical modules on the SFP or SFP+ ports and
connect them to the ports of the peer device using optical fibers according to the
network plan.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the protection caps from the optical fiber connector and insert the optical
fiber into the optical module, and connect the optical fiber to the remote device.
Ensure that the Tx end and Rx end of a port are correctly connected.
Step 2 Ensure that the TX and RX ports on one end of the optical fiber are connected to
the RX and TX ports (respectively) on the other end.

WLAN
Figure 1-43 Installing an optical fiber
Step 3 Repeat the preceding steps to install all the required optical modules and optical
fibers.
----End


document.


WLAN



have no splices.


10 The power cables and ground cable are all copper View
wires, and are not spliced or damaged. The cables
are reliably connected in compliance with
regulations.

requirements.

13 The power cables and ground cable are separated View

from the signal cables.


trough.


appropriate force.

cabinet.

WLAN


● Multimeter
● Console cable
Procedure
1. Check that the external power supply system connected to the device.
Step 3 Connect the console cable.
Connect the DB-9 connector (with holes) of the console cable to the 9-pin serial
port on the maintenance terminal, and connect the RJ45 connector of the console
cable to the console port on the device. See Figure 1-44.
Figure 1-44 Console cable connection

WLAN
You can connect the device to the maintenance terminal using the console cable. For
details, see Logging In to the AC Through the Console Port. When the device is starting, you
can choose whether to enter the BIOS menu. The BIOS menu and the procedure for
entering the BIOS menu vary according to software versions. For details about the BIOS
menu, see BIOS Menu in the CLI-based Configuration Guide.
● To check whether the device is running properly after it is powered on, check the PWR
and SYS indicators on the device.
Structure.
(CLI) is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
NOTICE

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
may fail.
may fail.
1. Check whether the device is powered off.
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

WLAN

1.2.4.2.1 Failed to Write Data to the USB Flash Drive
Fault Description
The system cannot write data to the USB flash drive.
Possible Causes
● The USB flash drive is not securely installed.
● The USB flash drive is corrupted.
1. Reinstall the USB flash drive.
2. Replace the USB flash drive.
NOTICE
Use a Huawei-certified USB flash drive.
If the system still fails to write data to the Huawei-certified USB flash drive,
contact technical support personnel.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.

WLAN

speed.
● The transmission distance of an optical module is 10 km, 15 km, 20 km, 40 km, or

80 km. The optical modules with a longer transmission distance have a higher
transmit power. If an optical module with a long transmission distance is used for
short-distance transmission, the optical interface cannot turn Up because the
transmit power is too high. The high transmit power may even burn the receiver of
the remote optical module. To reduce the transmit power in this situation, use an
optical attenuator between the optical module and optical fiber.
● Optical modules with different speeds are available, for example, 155 Mbit/s, 622
Mbit/s, and 1.25 Gbit/s. You must use an optical module with the same speed as
the optical interface to ensure efficient optical transmission.
<AC6605> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 0/0/24 verbose
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29

WLAN

-------------------------------------------------------------

Context
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs

WLAN
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.
hear a click.
the optical module.
If the optical module does not work, use an alcohol swab to swap the fiber connectors in
one direction, and reconnect the optical fibers to the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

WLAN

(AC6805)
1.3.1.1 AC6805

Currently, the AC6805 series has only one model AC6805.
No. Description
1 Reset button.
● Press the reset button (for no more than 3 seconds) to reset the AC
● Press and hold down the reset button (for more than 5 seconds) to
2 Twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports.

WLAN
No. Description
3 Combo port: can be used as one 40GE QSFP+ optical port or four 10GE
SFP+ optical ports. By default, the QSFP+ optical works, and SFP+ ports 1
through 4 are unavailable. When any SFP+ port is configured to work,
the QSFP+ port becomes unavailable.
4 Twelve 10GE SFP+ optical ports.
5 Two 40GE QSFP+ optical ports.
6 Standard USB 3.0 port.
7 ETH management port and console port.
8 Ground point.
9 Pluggable fan module.
10 Power module slot.
11 Filler panel for the backup power module.
Port Description
Combo Port
● If the optical port has no optical module installed and the electrical port has no
network cable connected, the port type depends on which port is connected first. If
the electrical port is connected by a network cable first, the electrical port is used for
data switching. If the optical port has an optical module installed first, the optical port
is used for data switching.
● If the electrical port has a network cable connected and is in Up state, the electrical
port is still used for data switching even when the optical port has an optical module
installed.
cable connected.
● If the optical port has an optical module installed and the electrical port has a
network cable connected, the optical port is used for data switching after the device
restarts.
ETH Management Port


WLAN
Connector type RJ45

compliance

Full-duplex
USB Port
A USB port connects to a USB flash drive to transfer configuration files and
upgrade files. The USB flash drive used on the AC6805 needs to support USB 3.0
and be compatible with the Linux operating system.

vendors.
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

WLAN

other vendors.
Console Port

console port.
Connector type RJ45
Standards RS-232
compliance

(UART)


type
10GE SFP+ Optical Port

compliance
Network IP
protocol

WLAN

Full-duplex
Figure 1-52 shows the indicators on the AC6805 front panel, and Figure 1-53
shows the fan indicator.
Figure 1-53 Fan indicator on the AC6805
Table 1-39 describes the meanings of indicators on AC6805 front panel.

WLAN

1 PWR: power supply - Off: The system is powered off or

indicator faulty.

working properly.
2 SYS: system status - Off: The system is not running.

indicator
Green ● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The
system is starting.
● Slow blinking (0.5 Hz): The
system is running properly.
● Steady on: The system is
being powered on or
restarted.
Red Steady on:

● The system is faulty.
● The power module does not
work properly.
NOTE
When the AC supports two
power modules:
1. If only one power module is
available and is running
properly, the SYS indicator
blinks green.
2. If two power modules are
present in the power supply
slots and one or two of them
are faulty, the SYS indicator
blinks red.
● The fan module does not
work properly.
3 USB indicator - Off: No USB flash drive is

connected to the AC.
Green Steady on: A USB flash drive is

connected and works properly.
4 CLOUD indicator Green ● Off: The AC is not connected

or lost the connection to SDN
controller.
● Steady on: The connection to
SDN controller is normal.
● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The AC is
connecting to SDN controller.

WLAN
5 ETH indicator Green ● Off: No link is established on

the ETH port.
● Steady on: The ETH port is
connected.
● Blinking: The ETH port is
sending or receiving data.
6 GE electrical service Green ● Off: No link is established on

port indicator the port.
(Indicators correspond ● Steady on: The port is
to ports 1 through 12 connected.
from left to right.) ● Blinking: The port is sending
or receiving data.
7 GE/10GE optical Green ● Off: No link is established on

service port indicator the port.
● A down arrow ● Steady on: The port is
indicates a lower connected.
port, while an up
arrow indicates an Yellow Blinking: The port is sending or
upper port. receiving data.
● Four indicators
(arrows) are
located between
two ports vertically,
with two yellow
indicators on the
left, and two green
indicators on the
right.
8 40GE optical service Green ● Off: No link is established on

port indicator the port.
● Steady on: The port is
connected.
● Blinking: The port is sending
or receiving data.
9 Fan indicator - Off: No fan module is installed.
Green Blinking: The fan module is

working properly.
Red Blinking: The fan is not running

at a proper speed or stops
rotating.

WLAN

Item Description
Dimensions Dimensions (H x W x ● Basic: 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 420

and weight D) mm
● Maximum: 43.6 mm x 442 mm x
444 mm
Weight 5.83 kg

specification consumption
s
Rated input voltage ● AC power input: 100 V AC to 240 V
AC, 50/60 Hz
● DC power input: -48 V DC to -60 V
DC
Environment Operating temperature ● - 60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to +45°C

specification and altitude ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
s decreases by 1°C every time the
Storage temperature -60 m to +5000 m: -40°C to +70°C

and altitude
Operating altitude of 0 m to 5000 m

the power modules
AC6805 mainframe (12*GE ports, 12*10GE SFP+

02351YUA
ports, 2*40GE QSFP+ ports, no power)
1.3.1.2 Power Modules
350 W DC Power Module

Table 1-41 describes functions of a 350 W DC power module.

WLAN
Table 1-41 Functions of a 350 W DC power module

Item Description
Input undervoltage protection The power module can automatically

resume power supply from this
protection state.
Input overvoltage protection The power module can automatically

protection state.
Input overcurrent protection The power module cannot

automatically resume power supply
from this protection state.
Output overvoltage protection The power module cannot

Output current limiting protection The power module cannot

Output short-circuit protection The power module can automatically

protection state.
Overtemperature protection When the temperature of the power

module exceeds a specified threshold,
the power module stops supplying
power. When the temperature falls
into the normal range, the power
module automatically resumes power
supply.
Hot swap Supported
Appearance and Indicators

Figure 1-54 shows the appearance of a 350 W DC power module.

WLAN
Figure 1-54 Appearance of a 350 W DC power module
1. Handle 2. DC input power socket 3. Power status indicator
Table 1-42 describes the meanings of indicators on a 350 W DC power module.
Table 1-42 Indicators on a 350 W DC power module
STATUS Off The DC power input is out of range for

some reasons (for example, no input,
overvoltage, or undervoltage) or the
DC power output is out of range for
some reasons (for example,
overvoltage or overtemperature).
On The DC power output is within the

normal range.
Table 1-43 describes the technical specifications of a 350 W DC power module.
Table 1-43 Functions of a 350 W DC power module
Item Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 39.8 mm x 90 mm x 215 mm
Weight 0.69 kg
Rated input voltage -48 V DC to -60 V DC
Maximum input voltage range -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC
Maximum input current 11 A
Rated output voltage 12 V DC

WLAN
Item Value
600 W AC power module

Table 1-44 describes functions of a 600 W AC power module.
Table 1-44 Functions of a 600 W AC power module
Item Description

protection state.

protection state.




protection state.

power. When the temperature falls
into the normal range, the power
module automatically resumes power
supply.
Hot swap Supported

WLAN
1. Handle 2. AC input power 3. Jack reserved for power cable 4. Power status
socket locking latch indicator
Table Indicators on a 600 W AC power module describes the meanings of

indicators on a 600 W AC power module.
Table 1-45 Indicators on a 600 W AC power module
STATUS Off The AC power input is out of range for some

reasons (for example, no input, overvoltage, or
undervoltage) or the AC power output is out of
range for some reasons (for example,
overvoltage or overtemperature).
On The AC power output is within the normal range.
Table 1-46 describes the technical specifications of a 600 W AC power module.
Item Value
Dimensions (H x W x D) 39.8 mm x 90 mm x 215 mm
Weight 0.97 kg
Maximum input voltage range 90 V AC to 290 V AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz

WLAN
Item Value
Maximum output current 50 A
Function Module,DC PSU,PDC350S12-CB,350W DC

02312GCH Power Module(Back to Front,Power panel side
exhaust)
Function Module,AC PSU,PAC600S12-B,600W AC

02312DUP Power Module(Back to Front, Power panel side
exhaust)

WLAN
Start
Prepare for
installation
Unpack the device
Install the device
Connect the ground

cable
Install modules
Connect the device
Check the device
Power on the device
End


WLAN
watches.

gases or smoke.
Electric Safety

on.

WLAN
Laser Safety
Mechanical Safety
chassis.
bruise or sprain.
boards (PCBs).
follows:
devices, see Physical Parameters in Device Structure. If the relative humidity
features.

WLAN

inch cabinet/rack.

the voltage range required by the device, see Physical Parameters in Device
Structure.
ESD Prevent
charges.
ESD Prevents
wrist electrostatic
strap charges. Wear
the strap on
your wrist and
insert the other
end into the
ESD jack on the
cabinet.

knife paper.

WLAN
Measuri Measures
ng tape distances.
Marker Marks
component
installation
positions and
draws lines.
Flat- Fastens or
head loosens small-
screwdri sized screws
ver and bolts. It is
(M4/M6 seldom used to
) fasten nuts.
Phillips Fastens or
screwdri loosens small-
ver sized screws
(M4/M6 and bolts. It is
) seldom used to
fasten nuts.

al pliers tubes and
cable ties.

k cable cable

eter insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.

WLAN
Hamme Drills holes on

r drill a wall to install
(φ8) expansion
screws when
installing the
device against
the wall.
devices.

ry

tie

binding fibers.
tape
Insulati Insulates power

on tape wires or other
conductors.
Corruga Protects optical

ted fibers.
tube

WLAN
Context
charges.
unpacking a carton.
Tools
● ESD gloves
● Utility knife
Procedure
the carton.
----End

WLAN
NOTICE

distorted.

● Floating nuts
● M4 screws
● M6 screws
Procedure
When installing the AC6805 in a cabinet or rack, you can:

● Fix the chassis with front and rear mounting ears. Guide rails or trays are not necessary in
this scenario. This section uses this scenario as an example to describe the installation
procedure.
● Fix the chassis with guide rails or trays (purchased separately). Front and rear mounting ears
are not necessary in this scenario.
1. Install two front and two rear mounting ears on the AC6805. Install the front
mounting ears near the front panel with interfaces and the rear mounting
ears near the rear panel with power supplies.

WLAN

(height of the AC6805 chassis). That is, there is an installation hole
between the two nuts. Align the holes on the mounting ears with the
floating nuts.
supports.
Figure 1-58 Installation positions of the floating nuts

WLAN
3. Install guide rails for rear mounting ears on the rear mounting rails.
M6 M6
4.8 N•m Rear of the

cabinet
Front of the
cabinet
When the AC6805 is installed in a cabinet or rack, the rear mounting ears and
guide rails are installed in different modes. Therefore, the distances between
the front and rear mounting rails are different. For details, see Table 1-49.

WLAN
Table 1-49 Rear mounting ears and guide rails
Mounti Distan Applic Selected Rear Mounting Ears and Guide

ng ce able Rails
Compo Betwe Cabine
nent en t Type
Front
and
Rear
Mounti
ng
Rails
Rear 310 600

mounti mm to mm to
ng ear 538 800
(part mm mm
number
:
212404
92)
Rear 638 1000

mounti mm to mm to
ng ear 835 1200
(part mm mm
number
:
212405
37)
Guide 370 600

rail mm to mm to
(part 585 800
number mm mm
:
212422
47)
Guide 500 1000

rail mm to mm to
(part 850 1200
number mm mm
:
212422
46)
4. Hold the bottom of the device with one hand and slide the rear mounting
ears to the rear guide rails. Then use a screwdriver with the other hand to fix

WLAN
the front mounting ears onto the front supports. Go to the rear side of the
cabinet or rack, and fix the rear mounting ears onto the guide rails.
----End
Context



WLAN
Procedure

WLAN
If the device is installed on a desktop, connect the ground cable on the device following
steps 1 to 3, and then connect the other end of the ground cable to a ground point on a
wall.
----End
Context
The power modules must be installed onsite. They are hot swappable.

WLAN
NOTICE

dissipation.
module is removed.

● Lithium battery
Procedure
Step 3 Remove the filler panel from the battery slot at the rear of the device.
1. Press and hold the locking latch on the filler panel.

WLAN
Step 4 Install the power module in the battery slot.

1. Grasp the power module handle with one hand and hold the bottom of the
power module with the other hand. Push the power module horizontally into
the slot.
2. When you hear a click, the power module is completely seated in the slot.
----End
Context
NOTICE
fibers.

● Dust plug
Procedure

sound.
NOTICE

WLAN

be removed.

----End
Context
NOTICE
cables.

WLAN

● AC power cables
Procedure
Step 3 Connect the power cable to the power module or battery.

● If an AC power module is used, perform the following steps to connect the AC
power cables.
a. Insert the socket of the AC power cable into the AC power socket of the
AC power module.
b. Lock the AC power cable with the AC terminal locking latch.
c. Connect the other end of the AC power cable to the external power
supply system.
● If a DC power module is used, perform the following steps to connect the DC
power cables.

WLAN
a. Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the protection cover
of the DC terminals and remove the protection cover.
b. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws on the two DC

terminals.
c. Attach the DC power cables to the DC power module and use the screws
you just removed to secure the power cables. The black cable is the -48 V
return ground cable and must be connected to the RTN(+) terminal on
the DC power module. The blue cable is the -48 V power cable and must
be connected to the NEG(-) terminal of the DC power module.
d. Cover the DC terminals with the protection cover and fasten the screw on
the protection cover with the Phillips screwdriver.

WLAN
----End
Follow-up Procedure
installation checklist, see 1.1.2.8 Checking the Device After Installation. For the
procedure for powering on the device, see 1.1.2.9 Powering on a Device for the
First Time.
Context
NOTICE
optical fibers.
connector.


WLAN
● Cable ties
● Diagonal pliers
dust plugs.
and optical fibers.

WLAN


document.




have no splices.


10 The power cables and ground cable are all View

copper wires, and are not spliced or damaged.
The cables are reliably connected in compliance
with regulations.

requirements.

13 The power cables and ground cable are View

separated from the signal cables.


trough.

WLAN


appropriate force.

cabinet.


● Multimeter
● Console cable
Procedure

Step 4 Turn on the power module.
vent.

WLAN
Structure.
(CLI) is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
NOTICE
1. Turn off the power.



faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

WLAN

may fail.
may fail.
2. Check that the power switch is on.
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
1. Reinstall the USB flash drive.
2. Replace the USB flash drive.
NOTICE
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.

WLAN

speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC

WLAN
Vendor Name :HUAWEI

Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------

Context
power modules.
NOTICE
interrupt services.

WLAN

Procedure
For details, see 1.1.2.7.1 Connecting Power Cables.
4. Remove the power module from the device. Holding the power module
handle and pressing the locking latch, gently pull out the power module.
5. Install the replacement power module in the device. For details, see 1.1.2.6.1
Installing Power Modules.
6. Connect the power cable to the new power module. For details, see 1.1.2.7.1
power module.
Follow-up Procedure
Context

WLAN
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure
1.3.5.3 Replacing a Fan Module

Procedure
2. Turn off the power supply.
3. Remove the fan module from the device. Holding the fan module handle and
pressing the locking latch, gently pull out the fan module.

WLAN
4. Install the spare fan module into the device. When you hear a click, the
locking latch securely locks the fan module.
5. Turn on the power supply.
6. Check whether the new power module is working normally.
Follow-up Procedure
If the new fan module does not work, contact the equipment supplier or local

(AirEngine 9700-M)
1.4.1.1 AirEngine 9700-M

Figure 1-71 and Figure 1-72 show the appearance of the AirEngine 9700-M.
Figure 1-71 Appearance of the AirEngine 9700-M (front view)
Figure 1-72 Appearance of the AirEngine 9700-M (rear view)

WLAN
No. Description
1 Reset button.
● Press the reset button (for no more than 3 seconds) to reset the AC
● Press and hold down the reset button (for more than 5 seconds) to
2 Sixteen 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports.
3 Combo port: can be used as one 40GE QSFP+ optical port or four 10GE
SFP+ optical ports. By default, the one 40GE QSFP+ optical works, and
SFP+ ports 1 through 4 are unavailable. After these SFP+ ports are
configured to work, the QSFP+ port becomes unavailable.
4 Twelve 10GE SFP+ uplink optical ports.
5 Two 40GE QSFP+ Ethernet optical ports.

If an MPO connector is used, select the Type B fiber.
6 Standard USB 2.0 port.
7 Console port.
8 ETH management port.
9 Ground point.
10 Pluggable fan module. Houses a FAN-023A-B fan module. (Part Number:

02312DKW)
11 Power module slot.
12 Filler panel for the backup power module.
Port Description
Combo Port
ETH Management Port

WLAN
Connector type RJ45
Standards IEEE802.3
compliance

Full-duplex
USB Port
A USB port connects to a USB flash drive to transfer configuration and upgrade
files. The USB flash drive used on the AirEngine 9700-M needs to support USB 2.0
and be compatible with the Linux operating system.
To ensure compatibility between USB flash drives and devices, use Huawei-certified USB
flash drives (listed in the following table) to configure the Huawei devices.
4GB Netac U208 You can buy Netac USB 4 GB flash

drives from Huawei or other vendors.
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.
8GB Netac U208 Huawei does not offer this USB flash
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

WLAN
Console Port
console port.

Connector type RJ45
Standards RS-232
compliance

(UART)

The default value is 9600 bit/s
Data Data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)

equipment type

A 10GE SFP+ Ethernet optical port supports GE/10GE auto-sensing and can send


compliance
Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, Ethernet_SNAP
Network IP
protocol

Full duplex
Figure 1-73 shows the indicators on the AirEngine 9700-M front panel, and
Figure 1-74shows the fan indicator.

WLAN
Figure 1-73 Indicators on the AirEngine 9700-M front panel
Figure 1-74 Fan indicator on the AirEngine 9700-M
Table 1-55 describes the indicators on AirEngine 9700-M front panel.
Table 1-55 Description of indicators on AirEngine 9700-M front panel

r
1 PWR: power - Off: The system is powered off or

supply faulty.
indicator
working properly.

WLAN

r

status
indicator Green ● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The system is
starting.
● Steady on: The system is powering
on or restarting.
Red Steady on:

● The system is faulty.
● The power module does not work
properly.
NOTE
When the device supports two power
modules:
1. If only one power module is available
and is running properly, the SYS
indicator blinks green.
2. If two power modules are present in
the power supply slots and one or
two of them are faulty, the SYS
indicator blinks red.
● The fan module does not work
properly.
NOTE
When the red indicator is on, the reasons
are one or more of the preceding ones.
Locate faults in sequence.
3 USB indicator - Off: No USB flash drive is connected

to the AC.
Green Steady on: A USB flash drive is

connected and works properly.
4 CLOUD Green ● Off: The device is not connected

indicator or lost the connection to the Agile
Controller-Campus.
● Steady on: The connection to the
Agile Controller-Campus is
normal.
● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The device is
connecting to the Agile
Controller-Campus.

WLAN

r
5 ETH indicator Green ● Off: No link is established on the

ETH port.
● On: The ETH port is connected.
● Blinking: The ETH port is sending
or receiving data.
6 GE electrical Green ● Off: No link is established on the

service port port.
indicator ● Steady on: The port is connected.
Indicators ● Blinking: The port is sending or
correspond to receiving data.
ports 1
through 12
from left to
right.
7 GE/10GE Green ● Off: No link is established on the

optical service port.
port indicator ● Steady on: The port is connected.
● A down
arrow Yellow Blinking: The port is sending or
indicates a receiving data.
lower port,
while an
up arrow
indicates
an upper
port.
● Four
indicators
(arrows)
are located
between
two ports
vertically,
with two
yellow
indicators
on the left,
and two
green
indicators
on the
right.

WLAN

r
8 40GE optical Green ● Off: No link is established on the

service port port.
indicator ● Steady on: The port is connected.
receiving data.
9 Fan indicator - Off: The fan module is not installed.
Green Blinking: The fan module is working

properly.
Red Blinking: The fan is not running at a

proper speed or stops rotating.

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H x ● Basic: 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 420 mm

specificat W x D) ● Maximum: 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 444 mm
ions
Weight 5.65 kg

specificat consumption
ions
Rated input ● AC power input: 100 V AC to 240 V AC,
voltage 50/60 Hz
● DC power input: 240 V DC
Environm Operating ● - 60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to +45°C

ent temperature and ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature decreases
specificat altitude by 1°C every time the altitude increases 300
ions m.
Storage -60 m to +5000 m: -40°C to +70°C

temperature and
altitude
Operating altitude 0 m to 5000 m

of the power
modules

WLAN
02352RDR AirEngine 9700-M mainframe (16*GE ports, 12*10GE

SFP+ ports, 2*40GE QSFP+ ports, no power)
1.4.1.2 Power Modules
600 W AC power module

Table 1-57 describes functions of a 600 W AC power module.
Item Description

protection state.

protection state.




protection state.

power. When the temperature falls into
the normal range, the power module
automatically resumes power supply.
Hot swap Supported

WLAN
1. Handle 2. AC input power 3. Jack reserved 4. Power status

socket for power cable indicator
locking latch
Table 1-58 describes the meanings of indicators on a 600 W AC power module.
Table 1-58 Indicators on a 600 W AC power module

STATUS Off The AC power input is

out of range for some
reasons (for example, no
input, overvoltage, or
undervoltage) or the AC
power output is out of
range for some reasons
(for example,
overvoltage or
overtemperature).
On The AC power output is

within the normal range.
Table 1-59 describes the technical specifications of a 600 W AC power module.

WLAN

Item Description
Dimensions (H x W x D) 39.6 mm x 90 mm x 214.5 mm
Weight 0.95 kg
AC power input Rated input voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Maximum input 90 V AC to 290 V AC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz

voltage range
Maximum input 8 A (110 V AC to 240 V AC input, with

current the rated load)
DC power Rated input voltage 240 V DC

input
Maximum input 4 A (240 V DC input, with the rated
current load)
Maximum output current 50 A
02312FFU Function Module,AC PSU,PAC600S12-CB,600W AC

Power Module(Back to Front, Power panel side
exhaust)


WLAN


WLAN
watches.

gases or smoke.
Electric Safety

on.

WLAN
Laser Safety
Mechanical Safety
chassis.
bruise or sprain.
boards (PCBs).

follows:
devices, see Basic Specifications in AP Overview. If the relative humidity
features.


WLAN

inch cabinet/rack.

the voltage range required by the device, see Basic Specifications in AP
Overview.

ESD Prevent
charges.
ESD Prevents
wrist electrostatic
strap charges. Wear
the strap on
your wrist and
insert the other
end into the
ESD jack on
the cabinet.

knife paper.
Measur Measures
ing distances.
tape

WLAN
Marker Marks
component
installation
positions and
draws lines.
Flat- Fastens or
head loosens small-
screwdr sized screws
iver and bolts. It is
(M4/M seldom used to
6) fasten nuts.
Phillips Fastens or
screwdr loosens small-
iver sized screws
(M4/M and bolts. It is
6) seldom used to
fasten nuts.

al pliers tubes and
cable ties.

k cable cable

eter insulation,
cable
connectivity,
and device
electrical
performance
indicators
including
voltage,
current, and
resistance.
Hamm Drills holes on

er drill a wall to install
(φ8) expansion
screws when
installing the
device against
the wall.

WLAN
devices.
Access Description Picture

ory

tie

binding fibers.
tape
Insulati Insulates
on tape power wires or
other
conductors.
Corrug Protects optical

ated fibers.
tube
Context

WLAN

charges.
unpacking a carton.
Tools
● ESD gloves
● Utility knife
Procedure
the carton.
----End

WLAN
1.4.2.4.1 Installing a Device in a Cabinet/Rack
NOTICE

distorted.

● Floating nuts
● M4 screws
● M6 screws
The following table lists the mounting ears and their matching guide rails. Select
proper mounting ear installation combinations based on the distance between
front and rear mounting rails of the cabinet, as listed in the following.

WLAN

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Install the AirEngine 9700-M.
When installing the AirEngine 9700-M in a cabinet or rack, you can:

● Fix the chassis with front and rear mounting ears. Guide rails or trays are not necessary
in this scenario. This section uses this scenario as an example to describe the installation
procedure.
● Fix the chassis with guide rails or trays (purchased separately). Front and rear mounting
ears are not necessary in this scenario.
1. Install mounting ears.

(height of the AirEngine 9700-M chassis). That is, there is an installation
hole between the two nuts. Align the holes on the mounting ears with
the floating nuts.
supports.
Figure 1-78 Installation positions of the floating nuts

WLAN
3. Install guide rails for rear mounting ears on the rear mounting rails.
4. Hold the bottom of the device with one hand and slide the rear mounting
ears to the rear guide rails. Then use a screwdriver with the other hand to fix
the front mounting ears onto the front supports. Go to the rear side of the
cabinet or rack, and fix the rear mounting ears onto the guide rails.

WLAN
----End
Context

Procedure

WLAN


WLAN
----End
Context
The power modules must be installed onsite. They are hot swappable.
NOTICE

dissipation.
module is removed.

● Lithium battery

WLAN
Procedure
Step 3 Remove the filler panel from the battery slot at the rear of the device.
1. Press and hold the locking latch on the filler panel.
Step 4 Install the power module in the battery slot.

1. Grasp the power module handle with one hand and hold the bottom of the
power module with the other hand. Push the power module horizontally into
the slot.
2. When you hear a click, the power module is completely seated in the slot.
----End
Context

WLAN
NOTICE
fibers.

● Dust plug
Procedure
sound.
NOTICE


WLAN
be removed.


----End
Context
NOTICE
cables.

● AC power cables

WLAN
Procedure
Step 3 Connect the power cable to the power module.
1. Insert the socket of the AC power cable into the AC power socket of the AC
power module.
2. Lock the AC power cable with the AC terminal locking latch.
3. Connect the other end of the AC power cable to the external power supply
system.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
installation checklist, see Checking the Device After Installation. For the procedure
for powering on the device, see Powering on a Device for the First Time.
Context

WLAN
NOTICE
optical fibers.
connector.

● Cable ties
● Diagonal pliers

dust plugs.
and optical fibers.

WLAN


document.




have no splices.

WLAN


10 The power cables and ground cable are all copper View
wires, and are not spliced or damaged. The cables
are reliably connected in compliance with
regulations.

requirements.

13 The power cables and ground cable are separated View

from the signal cables.


trough.


appropriate force.

cabinet.


● Multimeter

WLAN
● Console cable
Procedure
the operating voltage range required by the series devices, see Table 1-56.
vent.
Structure.
(CLI) is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
NOTICE
Step 1 Turn off the external power supply system connecting to the device.
Step 2 Check that the device and all its modules are powered off.
----End

WLAN

Fault Description
The SYS and PWR indicators of an device are both off.
Possible Causes
may fail.
may fail.
Step 1 Check whether the device is powered off.
Step 2 Check that the power switch is on.
Step 3 Check that the power cable is securely connected to the device.
Step 4 Check whether the power supply is normal.

● If the device uses a pluggable power supply, replace the pluggable power
supply with a normal one. If the device is powered on, the original pluggable
power supply is faulty. Contact technical support personnel or Huawei agent
and ask them to replace the pluggable power supply.
● If the device uses a power adapter, replace the power adapter with a normal
one. If the device is powered on, the original power adapter is faulty. Contact
power adapter.
Step 5 If the device still cannot be powered on, the device itself is faulty. Contact
technical support personnel or Huawei agent and ask them to replace the device.
----End

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
Step 1 Install the power module properly.
Step 2 Replace the faulty pluggable power supply module.
Step 3 Replace the external power supply module.
----End
Fault Description
Possible Causes
Step 1 Reinstall the USB flash drive.
Step 2 Replace the USB flash drive.
NOTICE
----End

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
Step 1 Replace the optical fiber and optical module and check whether the optical
requirements.
Step 2 Determine optical module attributes.

● The optical module has passed Huawei certification.
● The transmission speed of the optical module is the same as the interface
speed.
● Check whether the wavelength of the optical module is the same as that of
the remote optical module.
● The transmission distance of the optical module is suitable for the actual
● The transmission distance of an optical module is 10 km, 15 km, 20 km, 40 km, or 80

km. The optical modules with a longer transmission distance have a higher transmit
power. If an optical module with a long transmission distance is used for short-distance
transmission, the optical interface cannot turn Up because the transmit power is too
high. The high transmit power may even burn the receiver of the remote optical
module. To reduce the transmit power in this situation, use an optical attenuator
between the optical module and optical fiber.
● Optical modules with different speeds are available, for example, 155 Mbit/s, 622
Mbit/s, and 1.25 Gbit/s. You must use an optical module with the same speed as the
optical interface to ensure efficient optical transmission.
Step 3 If the interface is a combo interface, run the display this command in the
interface view to check whether the interface type has been set to auto or optical
interface.
<AC6605> system-view
[AC6605] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/12
[AC6605-GigabitEthernet0/0/12] display this
#
combo-port copper
#
Return

WLAN
<AC6605> system-view
[AC6605] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/12
[AC6605-GigabitEthernet0/0/12] combo-port fiber
Step 4 Run the display transceiver command to check whether any alarms about the
optical module have been generated. If such alarms are displayed, handle the
problem according to the alarms. For example, if an alarm shows that the receive
signal strength is too high, use an optical attenuator between the remote optical
module and the optical fiber.
<AC6605> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 0/0/12 verbose
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------
The attenuation coefficients of single-mode fibers with 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths
are 0.4 dB/km and 0.25 dB/km respectively.
Step 5 If the interface remains Down, contact technical support personnel.
----End

WLAN
Context
power modules.
NOTICE
interrupt services.

Procedure
For details, see Connecting Power Cables.
4. Remove the power module from the device. Holding the power module
handle and pressing the locking latch, gently pull out the power module.
5. Install the replacement power module in the device. For details, see Installing
Power Modules.
6. Connect the power cable to the new power module. For details, see
power module.

WLAN
Follow-up Procedure
Context
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.

WLAN
you pull it.
hear a click.
the optical module.
If the optical module does not work, use an alcohol swab to swap the fiber connectors in
one direction, and reconnect the optical fibers to the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

WLAN
1.4.5.3 Replacing a Fan Module

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. When wearing an ESD wrist strap, ensure
that it is in close contact with your wrist and grounded properly.
Step 2 Turn off the power supply.
Step 3 Remove the fan module from the device. Holding the fan module handle and
pressing the locking latch, gently pull out the fan module.
Step 4 Install the spare fan module into the device. When you hear a click, the locking
latch securely locks the fan module.
Step 5 Turn on the power supply.
Step 6 Check whether the new power module is working normally.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the new fan module does not work, contact the equipment supplier or local

(ACU2)
1.5.1 Hardware Structure of the ACU2

This section describes hardware information about the ACU2.

WLAN
1.5.1.1 Appearance and Structure

This section describes appearance and structure of ACU2.
Figure 1-91 shows ACU2 appearance.
Figure 1-91 ACU2 appearance
1 2 3 4
Table 1-63 Description of ACU2 buttons and interfaces

No. Interface Quantity Description
1 RST - The Reset button is used for resetting

cards manually. Resetting a card
interrupts services. Confirm the action
before you press this button.
2 USB 1 Connects to a USB flash drive to

interface transfer configuration files.
3 Console 1 Provides a serial interface. To configure

interface the ACU2 locally, you can log in to the
local ACU2 by connecting a cable
between the serial interface on the
host and the console interface on the
ACU2.
4 Ethernet 1 Provides a GE interface. To configure

interface the ACU2, you can log in to the ACU2
through Telnet.
5 GE 3 Reserved interface
interface
1.5.1.2 Interface Attributes

This section describes connector types, attributes, operation modes, and
compliance standards of the serial interfaces and ETH interfaces on the ACU2
panel.
Table 1-64 and Table 1-65 describe attributes of the interfaces on the ACU2.

WLAN
Table 1-64 Serial interface attributes
Connector type RJ45
Interface attribute RS232
Standards EIA/TIA-232
compliance
Table 1-65 Ethernet interface attributes
Connector type RJ45
Interface attribute 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
Operation mode Full duplex

compliance
1.5.1.3 Indicator Description

This section describes indicators on the panel of ACU2, including its colors,
blinking states, and state meanings.
Figure 1-92 shows indicators on the ACU2 panel.
Figure 1-92 Indicators on the ACU2 panel

5
1 2 3 4
Table 1-66 describes indicators on the ACU2.
Table 1-66 Indicators on the ACU2
No. Indicator/ Color Description

Button
1 USB Off In the current version, the USB

indicator remains off.

WLAN

Button
2 ACT yellow When the indicator blinks, data is

being transmitted or received.
When the indicator is off, no data is
being transmitted or received.
3 LINK Green When the indicator is on, the link is

connected.
When the indicator is off, the link is
blocked.
4 RUN/ALM Green When the indicator is on, the board is

powered on but the software is not
running.
When the indicator blinks once every
2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running
properly.
When the indicator blinks once every
0.25s (4 Hz), the system is starting.
Red When the indicator is on, the board is

faulty.
yellow When the indicator is on, the board is

installed in the slot and is powered on.
1.5.1.4 Technical Specifications

This section describes technical specifications of the ACU2, including board
dimensions, maximum power consumption, and board weight.
Table 1-67 describes technical specifications of the ACU2.
Table 1-67 Technical specifications of the ACU2
Parameter Description
Board dimensions 35.56 mm x 380.00 mm x 378.45 mm

(height x width x depth)
Maximum power consumption 168 w
Board weight 3.2 kg
1.5.1.5 Ordering Information

To place an order, contact technical support personnel.

WLAN
03030TPP Finished Board,ACU2,ACU2,WLAN

ACU2 Access Controller Unit(128 AP
Control Resource Included)

1.5.3 Replacing an ACU2

This section describes precautions and procedures for replacing an ACU2.
NOTICE
● Before you replace an ACU2, prepare an ACU2 with the same specifications of
the ACU2 to be replaced.
● The ACU2 is hot swappable.
Tools
● ESD wrist straps or gloves
● ESD bag
Procedure
Step 1 Check the position of the ACU2 to be replaced.
Before removing the ACU2 to be replaced, check the position of the cabinet,
chassis, and slot where the ACU2 is installed.
● An S7712 has 12 LPU slots, which are numbered from 1 to 12.
In the chassis, locate the ACU2 to be replaced and attach a label to identify this
ACU2.
Step 2 Ensure that there is no bent pin in the connector of the new ACU2.
Step 3 Remove the cable from the ACU2.

WLAN
Step 4 Remove the ACU2 to be replaced from the chassis.

1. Wear ESD wrist straps and connect the grounding terminal to the ESD jack on
the chassis.
2. Hold the left and right ejector levers of the board with your hands, as shown
in (1) of Figure 1-93. Press the springs of the ejector levers to loosen the
ejector levers. Rotate the ACU2 ejector levers outward. When the ejector
levers and the panel form a 45-degree angle, the ACU2 is released from the
backplane.
NOTICE
– To prevent the ACU2 from colliding with other boards during this operation
and causing failure of the boards that are running, remove the ACU2
slowly and smoothly.
– To prevent the ACU2 from damage, when swapping the ACU2, do not
touch the parts on the ACU2.
3. Hold the two ejector levers and smoothly pull out the ACU2 from the chassis
along the guide rail of the slot, as shown in (2) of Figure 1-93.
4. Place the removed board in the ESD bag.
Figure 1-93 Removing an ACU2
Step 5 Install the new ACU2 into the chassis.

1. Take the new ACU2 out of the ESD bag.
NOTICE
– To prevent the ACU2 from colliding with other boards during this operation
and causing failure of the boards that are running, install the ACU2 slowly
and smoothly.
– To prevent the ACU2 from damage, when swapping the ACU2, do not
touch the parts on the ACU2.

WLAN
2. Hold the two ejector levers and smoothly insert the ACU2 into the chassis
along the guide rail of the slot, as shown in (1) of Figure 1-94. Push the
ACU2 until the bayonets of the ejector levers touch the edges of the chassis.
3. Align the bayonets of the ejector levers on the edges of the chassis, and then
push the ejector levers inward until you hear a click, as shown in (2) of Figure
1-94.
Figure 1-94 Installing an ACU2
Step 6 Connect the cables to the corresponding interfaces in the original sequence.
Step 7 Check the running status of the new ACU2.
In normal situations, after the new ACU2 is installed into the chassis, the ACU2
automatically communicates with the MPU. Check the running status of the new
ACU2.
● If the RUN/ALM indicator on the ACU2 panel is green and blinks at the
frequency of 0.5 Hz, the ACU2 is running properly.
● Check the alarms. In normal situations, the system does not generate any
alarm related to the new ACU2.
● To view the running status of the new ACU2 after logging in to the ACU2, run
the display device command on the ACU2. If the following command output
is displayed, the ACU2 in the corresponding slots is running properly.
Step 8 Check service operations.
----End

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 2 Indoor Access Points
2 Indoor Access Points
About This Chapter
2.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP1050DN-S)

2.2 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2030DN)
2.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E)
2.6 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E)
2.8 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP2051DN-L-S)
2.9 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP3010DN-V2)
2.12 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4030DN-E)
2.13 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4030TN)
2.16 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4050DN-HD)
2.18 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4050DE-M)
2.19 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide ( AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-
B-S, and AP3050DE)
2.20 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4051DN and AP4151DN)

WLAN
2.21 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and

AP7052DE)
2.23 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP430-E)
2.25 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP5030DN-C)
2.27 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP5510-W-GP)
2.29 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP6750-10T)
2.30 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP7030DE and AP9330DN)
2.31 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP7050DE)
2.35 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AirEngine 5760-10)

(AP1050DN-S)
2.1.1 Product Overview
The AP1050DN-S have the following advantages:

● 1x1 MIMO
● Good service support capabilities
● High reliability
● High security
● Simple network deployment
● Automatic AC discovery and configuration
● Real-time management and maintenance
In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP1050DN-S can provide gigabit access for
wireless users, greatly improving wireless user experience.
The AP1050DN-S provides 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for indoor settled
scenarios such as education and mobile office in medium- to large-sized
enterprises. It can be flexibly deployed in different environments.
A cloud AP must be used together with a cloud server.

WLAN
2.1.1.1 Device Structure
Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the AP1050DN-S.
Figure 2-1 Appearance of the AP1050DN-S
1 2 3 4
Table 2-1 describes ports on the AP1050DN-S.
Table 2-1 Interface description
No. Name Description
1 Default Restores factory settings and restarts the device

when you hold down the button more than 3
seconds.
2 CONSOLE Connects to a maintenance terminal for AP

configuration and management.
3 GE/PoE_IN 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

Ethernet and supports PoE input.
4 DC 12V Connects a 12 V power adapter to the AP.
5 Security slot Connects to a security lock.
● The AP supports the following power supply modes: PoE power supply and DC power
supply.
● Use the selected power adapter for power supply; otherwise, the AP may be damaged.
● For power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.

WLAN
The AP1050DN-S provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Indicator
Indicator
Table 2-2 Description about the single indicator
Indicat Name Color Status Description

or
- Green Steady Default status after power-on.

on The AP is just powered on and the
software is not started yet.
- Green Steady Software startup status.

on after After the system is reset and starts
blinking uploading the software, the indicator
once blinks green once. Until the software is
uploaded and started, the indicator
remains steady green.
Indicato - Green Blinking Running status.
r once ● The system is running properly, the
every Ethernet connection is normal, and
2s (0.5 STAs are associated with the AP.
Hz)
● The system enters the Uboot CLI.
Blinking Running status.

once The system is running properly, the
every Ethernet connection is normal, and no
5s (0.2 STA is associated with the AP. The
Hz) system is in low power consumption
state.

WLAN

or
- Green Blinking Alarm.

once ● The software is being upgraded.
every
0.25s (4 ● After the software is loaded and
Hz) started, the AP requests to go
online if it works in Fit AP or cloud-
based management mode. The
indicator remains in this state
before the AP successfully goes
online.
● The AP works in Fit AP or cloud-
based management mode and fails
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

on A fault that affects services has
occurred, such as a DRAM detection
failure or system software loading
failure. The fault cannot be
automatically rectified and must be
rectified manually.
2.1.1.3 Basic Specifications
Table 2-3 provides basic specifications of the AP1050DN-S.
Table 2-3 Basic specifications
Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 35 mm × 170 mm × 170 mm

specification x W x D)
s
Weight 0.41 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory
FLASH 64 MB NOR FLASH
Power Power input ● DC: 12 V ± 10%

specification ● PoE power supply: in compliance with IEEE
s 802.3af/at
Maximum 8.1 W
power NOTE
consumption The actual maximum power consumption depends
on local laws and regulations.

WLAN
Item Description
Environment Operating ● -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C to +50°C

specification temperature ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature decreases
s by 1°C every time the altitude increases 300
m.
Storage -40°C to +70°C

temperature
Operating 5% to 95% (non-condensing)

humidity
IP rating IP41
Atmospheric 53 kPa to 106 kPa

pressure
50083116 AP1050DN-S Mainframe(11ac wave2,indoor,1X1Dual

Band,Built-in Antenna,1*GE Port)
2.1.2 AP Installation
This section describes safety precautions and tool preparations for AP installation.
Safety Precautions
● Take proper measures to prevent injuries and device damage.
● Place the device in a dry and flat position away from any liquid and prevent
the device from slipping.
● Keep the device clean.
● Do not put the device and tools in the aisles.
Only the qualified personnel are permitted to install and remove the device and its
accessories. Before installation and operation, read the safety precautions
carefully.

WLAN
Tool Preparation
To install APs, prepare tools listed in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Tools
Phillips screwdriver Protective gloves ESD gloves
Slip-proof glove Marker Hammer drill
Claw hammer Torque spanner Diagonal pliers
Wire stripper RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter
Network cable tester Multimeter Ladder
Safety helmet Safety belt Anti-skid shoes
Torque screwdriver - -

WLAN
2.1.2.2 Installation Flowchart
The following figure shows the process for installing an AP.
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the
installation location
Install the device and

connect cables
Connect the security lock

to the lock hole
Check after installation
Power on the device
End
2.1.2.3 Unpacking the Equipment
Before unpacking the carton, ensure that the packing carton is intact and not
damaged or soaked. Stop unpacking if the equipment is rusted or soggy. Then,
investigate causes and contact the supplier.
After unpacking, check items in the carton against the packing list. If any item is
missing, contact the supplier or agent.
Usually, the packing list contains the following items.
● AP device
● Sheet metal mounting bracket
● Quick start guide
● Warranty card
● MAC address label
● SN label
If a PoE adapter or a DC power adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For PoE
and DC power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.

WLAN
2.1.2.4 Determining the Installation Position
Indoor APs are usually mounted on a wall or ceiling using sheet metal mounting
brackets. The installation position is determined by the site survey. There must be
at least 200 mm clearance between the cabling end of the AP and the wall. Figure
2-4 shows space requirements.
Figure 2-4 Mounting an AP
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
When determining the AP installation position, comply with the following rules:
● Try to reduce the number of obstacles, such as walls, between the AP and
user terminals.
● Place the AP far away from electronic devices that may produce radio
interference, such as microwave ovens, other APs, antennas, and other radio
communication devices. For details, see Table 2-5.
● Install the AP in a hidden position that does not affect daily lives and work of
residents.
● Install the AP in a site that is free from leaking or dripping water, heavy dew,
and humidity, and take protective measures to prevent water from flowing
into the equipment along the cable.
● Do not install the AP in an environment with high temperature, dust,
poisonous gases, flammable or explosive objects, electromagnetic interference
(from a radar station, radio station, or substation), unstable voltage, violent
shakes, or strong noise.

WLAN
Table 2-5 General anti-interference requirements

Scenario Deployment Distance Requirement
Indoor ● There should be at least a 7 m distance between antennas.

installation ● The antennas should be placed at least 5 m from the 4G
antennas of the carrier.
● The antennas should be placed far away from electronic
devices that may produce interference, such as microwave
ovens.
If antennas are embedded into APs, the deployment distance requirements on the antennas are
those on APs.
2.1.2.5 Installing the AP
Remove the protective film on the surface before installation to prevent electrostatic discharge.
2.1.2.5.1 Installing the Device on a Wall
A wall for installing the device needs to meet the following requirements:
● The wall can bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and
mounting bracket without damage. When the total weight of the device and
mounting bracket is less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the wall must be
greater than or equal to 5 kg.
● When the tightening torx of a screw reaches 3.5 N m, the screw still properly works,
without crack or damage on the wall.
Mounting kits and expansion bolts are required to install the AP on a wall. The
procedures are as follows:
When fixing the sheet metal mounting bracket, ensure that the arrows point
upwards on the label.

1. Fix a mounting bracket to the wall against the wall and mark the drilling
positions through holes of the bracket.

WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
2. Use a 6 mm drill bit to drill 35 mm to 40 mm deep holes in the drilling
positions. Hammer the expansion tubes into the holes until the expansion
tubes are completely embedded into the wall.
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
3. Fix the mounting bracket to the wall and use the Phillips screwdriver to fasten
three tapping screws into the expansion tubes.
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Connect the cables. For details, see 2.1.2.6 Cable Connection.

WLAN
5. Align the rubber feet of the device over the mounting slots on the mounting
bracket and vertically push the AP to secure it. When the spring clip is popped
up, push the AP downward until it snaps into place (you can hear a click).
In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using M4x30 screws.
This prevents the AP from falling off due to vibrations. In normal scenarios, you do not need to
install these screws.
2.1.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Ceiling
A ceiling needs to bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and
mounting bracket without damage. When the total weight of the device and mounting
bracket is less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the ceiling must be greater than
or equal to 5 kg.
1. Remove a ceiling tile, determine locations of mounting holes based on the

distance between two installation holes on the mounting bracket, use a
hammer drill to drill holes on the ceiling tile, and fix the mounting bracket to
the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque of 1.4 N m).

WLAN
The screws provided for ceiling-mounting of APs are 30 mm long and can be
used to fix an AP on a ceiling no thicker than 15 mm. To install APs on thicker
ceilings, you need to purchase longer screws.
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3
1. Ceiling tile 2. Adjustable buckle 3. M4x30 screw

up, push the AP horizontally until it snaps into place (you can hear a click).
a
b
● Ensure that the AP is correctly installed on the mounting bracket and there is at least
200 mm space above and around the AP for maintenance.
● In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using
M4x30 screws. This prevents the AP from falling off due to vibrations. In normal
scenarios, you do not need to install these screws.

WLAN
2.1.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a T-rail
A T-rail needs to bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and
mounting bracket is less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the T-rail
must be greater than or equal to 5 kg. Figure 2-5 shows the T-rail dimensions
requirements (t: thickness; w: width).
Figure 2-5 Section of a T-rail
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
1. Remove two ceiling tiles around the T-rail, use screws to fix the adjustable
buckle to the mounting bracket, hook the adjustable buckle to the T-rail, and
secure the screw on the adjustable buckle to fasten the mounting bracket and
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m
1. T-rail 2. M4x8 screw 3. Adjustable buckle 4. Sheet metal mounting

bracket


WLAN
a
b
● Before fixing the adjustable buckle with a screw, adjust the buckle to a proper position
based on the T-rail width.
2.1.2.5.4 Removing an AP
Flip the spring clip on the mounting bracket and slip the AP towards the spring
clip. Release the spring clip until the rubber feet of the AP enter the mounting
keyholes. Remove the AP from the mounting bracket.

WLAN
Figure 2-6 Removing an AP

c
If a captive screw is installed, remove the screw and then follow the preceding steps to uninstall
the AP.
2.1.2.6 Cable Connection
Table 2-6 describes the cable connections.
1 2

WLAN
Table 2-6 Cable connections

No. Cable or Description
Device
1 Network cable ● CAT5e cables or higher must be used.

● The length of a cable cannot exceed 100 m.
● The service network cable and PoE input cable
cannot be connected to the console port.
Otherwise, the AP may be damaged when
using PoE power supply.
● If the AP needs to connect to the Ethernet,
ensure that the Ethernet cable is working
properly. If the Ethernet cable is not working
properly, for example, RJ45 connectors are
short-circuited, the AP may fail to be powered
on or fail to work. Before connecting an
Ethernet cable to the AP, use the cable test tool
to check whether the cable is qualified. If the
cable is unqualified, replace it.
2 DC power When the AP uses the DC power supply, use a

adapter power adapter for power supply; otherwise, the AP
may be damaged.
The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply. The two power supply
modes serve as hot standby for each other. DC power supply has a higher priority.
When installing a cable, you must make a drip loop to prevent water from flowing
into devices along the cable. For the method of making the drip loop, see 6.8
Guide to Making Drip Loops.
Pay attention to the following points when bundling the cables:
● Different types of cables must be separately routed with the minimum
spacing of 30 mm and cannot be entangled or crossed. Cables should be
parallel or separated using dedicated separators.
● Bundled cables are closely arranged, straight, tidy, and undamaged.
● Cable ties are bound neatly facing the same direction, and those at the same
horizontal line must be in a straight line. Cable tie tails should be cut
smoothly and evenly.
● Labels or nameplates must be attached to the cables after they are installed.
● If the power supply is prepared separately, ensure that it meets Limited Power
Supply (LBS) requirements to prevent damage to APs due to power overload.

WLAN
Connecting the Ground Cable
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
ground bar 4.8 N•m
Use ground screws and ground cables to ground the mounting bracket. The
ground cables need to be prepared on site. The M4 OT terminal is used to connect
to the mounting bracket and M6 OT terminals to the ground bar. The type of OT
terminals can also be determined according to site surveys. Cut the cable into the
required length according to site conditions.
Tighten the OT terminal for the mounting bracket with a torque of 1.4 N m. The
tightening torque for the ground bar varies according to the OT terminals used.
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
Ground cable deployment requirements are as follows:
● The ground cables must be connected to a group of ground bars.

● The bend radius of the ground cables must be larger than or equal to five
times the cable diameter.
● The ground cables must be buried underground or routed indoors and cannot
be led into the equipment room aerially.
● Both ends of the external conductor of the coaxial cable and those of the
shield layer of the shielded cable should have good electric contact with the
metal shell of the equipment they connect to.
● Ground cables must be separated from signal cables to reduce interference
between them.
● Do not add any switch or fuse on the ground cable.
● Do not use another device for an electrical connection with the ground cable.
● All metal components in the shell must be securely connected to the ground
terminal.
2.1.2.7 Connecting the Security Lock
There is a security slot on the device. You can lock the device to an immovable
object to prevent theft. The detailed procedures are as follows:

WLAN
1. Fasten the cable of the security lock to an immovable object around.

2. Insert the security lock into the security slot and lock it.
Lock hole Security lock
You need to purchase the security lock separately.

The security slot is 7 mm long and 3 mm wide. The maximum radius of its four round corners is
1 mm.
Table 2-7 shows the items to be checked after installation is complete. For more
details, see 6.7 Installation Checklist in the appendix.
Table 2-7 Installation checklist
No. Check Item
1 The device is installed by strictly following the design draft. The

installation position meets space requirements, with
maintenance space reserved.
2 The device is securely installed.
3 The power cables are intact and not spliced.
4 Terminals of the power cables are welded or cramped firmly.
5 All power cables are not short-circuited or reversely connected

and must be intact with no damage.
6 The power cables and ground cables are separated from other
cables and bundled separately.
7 Connectors of signal cables are complete, intact, and tightly

connected. The signal cables are not damaged or broken.

WLAN
No. Check Item
8 Labels on cables are clear and correct.
2.1.2.9 Powering on the AP
After the AP is powered on, observe the indicator on the AP to check the system
running status. For details, see 2.1.1.2 Indicator Description.
Do not frequently power on and off the device.
2.1.3 Logging In to the AP

For details about how to log in to the AP, see 6.12 AP Login.

faults.
2.1.4.1 A Device Fails to Be Powered On
Fault Description
The SYS indicator of a device is off.
Possible Causes
Power Supply Mode Possible Cause
Power supply using a power module ● The device is powered off.

● The power cable is not securely
connected to the device.
– If the device connects to an
external power source, its power
adapter may fail.
– If the device has a built-in power
supply, the device itself may be
faulty.

WLAN
PoE power supply ● The power sourcing equipment

does not support the PoE function
or is faulty.
● The power sourcing equipment
does not support the required
power supply mode.
does not provide sufficient power.
● The power sourcing equipment is
incorrectly configured (the PoE
function is disabled or the power-
off time range is improperly set).
● The line is faulty (the network
cable or distribution frame is
damaged).
● The device is faulty.
Power Supply Mode Troubleshooting Procedure
Power supply using a power module 1. Check whether the device is

powered on.
2. Check that the power cable is
securely connected to the device.
3. Check whether the power supply is
normal.
Replace the power adapter with a
normal one. If the device is
powered on, the original power
adapter is faulty. Contact technical
support personnel or Huawei agent
and ask them to replace the power
adapter.
4. If the device still cannot be
powered on, the device itself is
faulty. Contact technical support
personnel or Huawei agent and ask
them to replace the device.

WLAN
PoE power supply 1. Check whether the power sourcing

equipment supports PoE or is faulty.
2. Check whether the power output
mode of the power sourcing
equipment is supported by the
powered device.
3. Check whether the peer switch is
grounded. If not, ground it properly.
4. Check whether the power sourcing
equipment can support the
maximum power consumption of
the device.
5. Check whether the configuration on
the power sourcing equipment
causes PoE power supply errors,
such as the PoE function is disabled
or the power-off time range is
incorrectly set.
6. Check whether the network cable
or distribution frame is faulty.
The output power of an 802.3af PSE port is 15.4 W, that of an 802.3at PSE port is 30 W, and
that of an 802.3bt PSE port is 60 W.

(AP2030DN)
2.2.1 AP2030DN Overview

Huawei AP2030DN is an enterprise-level wall plate AP. It uses an 86 mm plate and
can be easily installed in an 86-type box. The AP2010DN is beautifully designed,
with built-in antennas, a hidden indicator, and a sliding panel. The AP2030DN can
connect to wireless terminals through wireless connections or to wired terminals
using wired cables.

Figure 2-8 show the appearance of AP2030DN.

WLAN
Figure 2-8 Appearance of AP2030DN
Top view Side view
1 2
DC 12V
Bottom view
3 4
Table 2-8 describes interfaces on AP2030DN.
Table 2-8 Interfaces on AP2030DN
1 Phone Phone interface:

connects to a traditional
PSTN.
2 GE/PoE 10/100/1000 Mbit/s

interface: connects to the
wired Ethernet and
supports PoE power
input.
3 ETH0~ETH3 10/100 Mbit/s interface:

connects to the wired
Ethernet.

connects to a POTS
phone or modem device.

WLAN
5 Default Reset button: restores

factory settings and
restarts the device if you
hold down the button
more than 3 seconds.
6 DC 12V Connects a 12 V power

adapter to the AP.
supply.

AP2030DN provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Indicator on the AP2030DN
Indicator
ETH0 ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 Phone
● The indicator is located inside the panel, which turns on after the AP is powered on.
● Indicator colors may vary slightly at different temperature.

WLAN

Type Name Color Status Description


- Green Blinking Running status.

Hz)

Indicato Hz) system is in low power consumption
r state.

Alarm
Green ● After the software is uploaded and
every started, the AP working in Fit AP
0.25s (4 mode requests to go online on the
Hz) AC and maintains this state until it
goes online successfully on the AC
(before the CAPWAP link is
established).
● The AP registration fails (the
CAPWAP link is disconnected).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-10 Basic specifications of the AP2030DN

Item Description
Technical specifications Dimensions outside the 25 mm x 140 mm x 86

wall (H x W x D) mm
Dimensions inside the 16.5 mm x 51.5 mm x

wall (H x W x D) 63.5 mm
Weight 0.2 kg
System memory ● 128 MB DDR2

● 32 MB Flash
Power specifications Power input 12 V ± 10%

PoE power: in
compliance with IEEE
802.3af/at
Maximum power 8.7 W

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
depends on local laws and
regulations.
Environment Operating temperature -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C

specifications and altitude to +40°C
1800 m to 5000 m:
Temperature decreases
by 1°C every time the
Storage temperature -40°C to +70°C
Operating humidity 5% to 95% (non-

condensing)
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
50082640 Broadband Network Terminal-

AP2030DN-5*RJ45, 2*RJ11-11ac, 2.2 Double
Frequency

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-11 Tools
Phillips screwdriver ESD gloves Diagonal pliers
RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter Wire stripper
Network cable tester Multimeter Torque spanner

WLAN
The following figure shows the process.
Start
Check before installation
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

● AP device
● Screws
● Quick Start Guide
● Warranty card
● SN label
If a PoE adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For PoE adapter models, see 6.9
Power Adaptation Solution.

Figure 2-11 shows dimensions of the AP2030DN.

WLAN
Figure 2-11 Dimensions of an AP2030DN (unit: mm)
When determining the device installation position, comply with the following
rules:
● Do not deploy the device in places with high temperature, dust, noxious gas,
unstable voltage, much vibrations, or strong noise, or in places near
flammable or explosive materials and interference sources such as a large
radar station, radio station, and transformer station.
● Install the device in a site that is free from leaking or dripping water, heavy
dew, and humidity, and take protective measures to prevent water from
flowing into the equipment along the cable.
● Install the device in hidden places and ensure that the device does not disturb
daily work and life of residents.
● Make the engineering design by fully considering such factors as hydrology,
geology, earthquake, electric power, and traffic. The selected site should
comply with the environment design specifications of communications
equipment.
● Indoor devices are usually mounted on a wall or ceiling using sheet metal
mounting brackets. The installation position is determined by the site survey.
Leave at least 200 mm of clearance around the device.

ovens.

WLAN
those on APs.
NOTICE
● The device should be isolated from strong electricity to ensure personal security
and prevent device damages.
● Remove the protective film on the surface before installation to prevent
electrostatic discharge.
In most cases, the device is installed into an 86-type box in China. To install the device in
another way, purchase mounting brackets.
2.2.2.5.1 Installing the Device into an 86-Type Box

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the 86-type panel from the wall (skip this step if
no 86-type panel is installed on the wall).
2. Connect the network cable to the GE/PoE interface and the phone cable to
the phone interface.
3. Install the device that has cables properly connected to the 86-type box, as
shown in the following figure.

WLAN
It is recommended that the length of the cable in the 86-type box should be smaller
than 130 mm. You are advised to connect cables according to the figure.
4. Align the screw holes at the right and left of the device with the screw holes
on the box and secure the device on the box with a screwdriver.
5. Close the panel to complete installation.
2.2.2.5.2 Installing the Device into Other Junction Boxes

WLAN
Installing the device into a junction box (excluding an 86-type box) requires sheet
metal mounting brackets (delivered with screws), which need to be purchased
separately. The procedure is as follows:
1. Determine locations of mounting holes on the sheet metal mounting bracket
based on the distance between screw holes on the junction box. (In the
following example, the screw holes on the junction box are 83.5 mm distant
from each other.)
60mm
83.5mm
2. Use screws to fix the mounting bracket to the junction box. Ensure that the
UP arrowhead points upwards. If the screw holes on the junction box do not
match the M4 screws, customers need to prepare the fastening screws by
themselves.
M4
0.2 N•m
3. Connect the network cable to the GE/PoE interface and the telephone line to

WLAN
4. Open the front panel of the device, align the screw holes at the right and left
of the AP with the screw holes on the mounting bracket, and secure theAP on
the mounting bracket with machine screws.
M4
1 N•m
5. Close the panel.
2.2.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a Wall or Ceiling

WLAN
Installing the Device on a wall or ceiling requires sheet metal mounting brackets
(delivered with screws), which need to be purchased separately. The procedure is
as follows:
1. Determine the target area on a wall or ceiling, attach the sheet metal
mounting bracket against the wall, and mark positions of the mounting holes
with a marker.
2. Drill holes at the marked positions and install the plastic expansion tubes.

WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
a. Use a 6 mm drill bit to drill holes at the marked positions.

b. Hammer the plastic expansion tubes into the holes.
3. Use the flat washer and self-tapping screws to fasten the mounting bracket to
the wall or ceiling. If the device is installed against the wall, ensure that UP
arrowhead faces upwards.
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
of the AP with the screw holes on the mounting bracket, and secure the AP
on the mounting bracket with machine screws.
M4
0.2 N•m
6. Close the panel.

Figure 2-12 shows interfaces of the AP2030DN.

WLAN
Figure 2-12 Interfaces of the AP2030DN

1 2
Upper layer
network
Table 2-13 shows cable connections of the AP2030DN.

No. Cable Description
1 Phone cable Connects the uplink

phone interface to the
traditional PSTN.
2 Ethernet cable Connects the Ethernet

interface to the
upstream PSE Ethernet
interface.
CAT5e cables or higher
must be used.

interface to the terminal.
CAT5 cables or higher
must be used.
4 Phone cable Connects the

downstream phone
interface to the
traditional phone (POTS
phone) or modem
equipment.

WLAN
● The Ethernet cable must work properly; otherwise, the device may fail to be powered on
or cannot run properly. Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the AP, use the cable test
tool to check whether the cable is qualified. If not, replace the cable.
● The cable cannot exceed 100 meters.
● When PoE and power adapter power supplies are available, the device is preferentially
powered by the PoE.

No. Check Item



2.2.2.8 Powering on the Device
After the installation is complete, observe indicators on the device to determine

the system running status. For details, see 2.2.1.2 Indicator Description.

WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP2030DN-S)

The AP2030DN-S uses an 86 mm x 86 mm plate design and can be easily installed
in a junction box of 86 mm. The AP is beautifully designed, with built-in antennas,
a hidden indicator, and a sliding panel. It provides comprehensive service support
capabilities, and feature high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC
discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance. The
AP2030DN-S is ideal for constructing an indoor distributed Wi-Fi network.
The AP2030DN-S is applicable to hotels, apartments, and offices.
1
2
Table 2-15 describes interfaces on the AP2030DN-S.

WLAN
1 Default Restores factory settings

and restarts the device
when you hold down the
button more than 3
seconds.
2 ETH/PoE 10/100M auto-sensing

network port that
connects to the central
AP and supports PoE
input. Use Cat5e or
higher cables. The length
of the cables cannot
exceed 100 m.
The AP2030DN-S provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-14.
Indicator

WLAN




once ● The system is running properly, the
Hz)

r state.

every
0.25s (4 ● After the software is uploaded and
Hz) started, the AP working in Fit AP
mode requests to go online on the
AC and maintains this state until it
established).
● The AP works in Fit AP and fails to
go online (the CAPWAP link is
disconnected).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-17 Basic specifications of the AP2030DN-S

Item Description
Physical specifications Dimensions (H x W x D) 26 mm x 86 mm x 120

mm
Weight 0.1 kg
System memory 128 MB DDR2
Flash 32 MB NOR flash
Power specifications Power input PoE power supply: in

802.3af
Maximum power 5.1 W

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.
Environment parameters Operating temperature -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C

and altitude to 40°C
1800 m to 5000 m:

condensing)
50083605 AP2030DN-S mainframe(11ac,2x2 dual

bands,built-in antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-18 Tools

WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote radio unit
● Screws (including the plastic expansion tubes)
● Warranty card
● SN label
brackets. The installation position is determined by the site survey. Reserve at least
200 mm space around the AP. Figure 2-16 shows space requirements.
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor

WLAN
user terminals.
residents.
● Make the engineering design by fully considering such factors as climate,
hydrology, geology, earthquake, electric power, and traffic. The selected site
should comply with the environment design specifications of communications
equipment.
● To install an IoT module on the AP, reserve at least 300 mm space.

ovens.
those on APs.
2.3.2.5.1 Installing the AP on a Wall or Ceiling

WLAN
Installing the AP on a wall or ceiling requires expansion screws delivered with the
AP. The procedure is as follows:
1. Determine the installation area on the wall or ceiling and use a marker to
mark the drilling positions (the distance between the two drilling positions
should be 60 mm).
60mm
2. Drill holes in the marked positions and install the plastic expansion tubes.

WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
a. Use a 6 mm drill bit to drill holes in the marked positions.

3. Insert the network cable into the ETH/PoE interface at the rear of the device.
(Category 5 enhanced cables or higher must be used. The length of the cables
cannot exceed 100 m.) Open the front cover of the device and align screws on
both sides with the plastic expansion tubes. Secure the device using the
Phillips or torx security self-tapping screws (a torx security screw has a
security pin in the center to prevent theft and can be tightened by a T20 torx
security screwdriver which needs to be prepared separately by customers).
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Close the cover.
2.3.2.5.2 Installing the AP in an 86-type Box
Installing the R230D in an 86-type box requires expansion screws delivered with
the AP. The procedure is as follows:

WLAN
2. Connect the network cable to the ETH/PoE interface.
3. Open the front cover of the device and align screws on both sides with the
screw holes in the 86-type box. Secure the device using Phillips or torx
security machine screws (a torx security screw has a security pin in the center
to prevent theft and can be tightened by a T20 torx security screwdriver which
needs to be prepared separately by customers).
M4 M4
1N•m 1N•m
4. Close the cover.

WLAN

No. Check Item




WLAN

faults.
2.3.4.1 A device Fails to Be Powered On
Fault Description
Possible Causes
● The power sourcing equipment does not support the PoE function or is faulty.
● The power sourcing equipment does not support the required power supply
mode.
● The power sourcing equipment does not provide sufficient power.
● The power sourcing equipment is incorrectly configured (the PoE function is
disabled or the power-off time range is improperly set).
● The line is faulty (the network cable or distribution frame is damaged).
1. Check whether the power sourcing equipment supports PoE or is faulty.
2. Check whether the power output mode of the power sourcing equipment is
supported by the powered device.
3. Check whether the peer switch is grounded. If not, ground it properly.
4. Check whether the power sourcing equipment can support the maximum
power consumption of the device.
5. Check whether the configuration on the power sourcing equipment causes
PoE power supply errors, such as the PoE function is disabled or the power-off
time range is incorrectly set.
6. Check whether the network cable or distribution frame is faulty.
device.

WLAN

(AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E)

The AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E use an 86 mm x 86 mm plate design and can be
easily installed in standard 86-type boxes. The APs are equipped with a built-in
antenna, a hidden indicator, and a slide panel; therefore, installation of the
AP2050DN and AP2050D does not affect indoor decorations and designs. The
AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E also have a built-in IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2
wireless module and can provide wired connections through network cables and
phone lines as well as wireless connections. This makes the AP2050DN and
AP2050DN-E the ideal choice of customers to construct indoor distributed
networks in hotel, apartment, and office scenarios.
Figure 2-17 shows the appearance of the AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E.
Figure 2-17 Appearance of the AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E
Pass Through GE0/PoE_IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 2-21 describes ports on the AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E.

WLAN

2 USB Connects to a USB flash drive or other storage

devices to extend the storage space of the AP. The
USB2.0 standard is supported.
3 Default Reset button: restores factory settings and restarts

the device if you hold down the button more than 3
seconds.
4 Pass Pass Through port: connects to a network cable or

Through phone cable for transparent transmission.
5 GE2 to GE4 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.
6 AP2050DN:G 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.

E1
AP2050DN- 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet

E:GE1/ and supports PoE output.
PoE_OUT
7 GE0/PoE_IN 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet

and supports PoE input.
supply.
The AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E provide only a single indicator, as shown in

Figure 2-18.

WLAN
Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-23 provides basic specifications of the AP2050DN and AP2050DN-E.

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 36 mm x 86 mm x 140 mm

s
Weight 0.26 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3af/at

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum ● AP2050DN: 11.5 W (excluding the output

power power of the USB port)
consumption ● AP2050DN-E: 11.5 W (excluding the output
power of the USB port and PoE_OUT port)
NOTE
The actual maximum power consumption depends

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50082924 AP2050DN-E Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double

Frequency,Built-in Antenna)
50082925 AP2050DN Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double

Safety Precautions

WLAN

carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-24 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote Unit
● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label
interference, such as microwave ovens, antennas, and other radio
equipment.

ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN
Installing the device in an 86-type box requires expansion screws delivered with
the device. The procedure is as follows:
2. Insert a network cable into the GE0/PoE_IN port and a phone cable into the
Pass Through port.
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT

4. Open the front cover of the device, align screws on both sides with the screw
holes in the 86-type box, and use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two
screws.

WLAN
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
UT GE2
GE1/PoE_O
5. Close the cover. If torx security screws are used to prevent theft, use a T9 torx
security screwdriver to tighten the torx security screws into the device.
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
You need to separately purchase T9 torx security screwdriver.
2.4.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Desk
Installing an AP on a desk requires a desktop stand. The procedures are as follows:

2. Align the top of the desktop stand with the grooves on the bottom cover of
the AP. Slide the AP along the rail until the stand reaches the end of the
grooves. Place the stand with the AP on the desk steadily.

WLAN
You need to separately purchase a desktop stand.
Installing the Device on a Wall requires sheet metal mounting brackets (delivered
with screws), which need to be purchased separately. The procedure is as follows:
60 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Route the cables through the reserved installation hole to connect to the
device. For details, see 2.4.2.6 Cable Connection.

WLAN
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
5. Align the grooves on the bottom cover of the AP with the protection gaps on
the mounting bracket. Slide the AP downwards to hang the AP on the
mounting bracket.
b
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/PoE_O
UT
M4×35 screws.

WLAN
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
ST2.5
rou gh
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
You need to separately prepare the T9 torx security screwdriver.

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.
Installing the Device on a Ceiling requires sheet metal mounting brackets

as follows:
the ceiling tile.
1 2
60 mm
the mounting bracket. Slide the AP horizontally to hang the AP on the
mounting bracket.

WLAN
M4×35 screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
ST2.5
GE1/P
oE_O
UT
GE2
GE3
GE4
Pass
Throug
h
0.16 N•m
● Ensure that the AP is correctly installed on the mounting bracket and there is at least 200
mm space above and around the AP for maintenance.
● You need to separately prepare the T9 torx security screwdriver.

WLAN
from each other.)
60 mm
83.5 mm
match the M4x20 screws, customers need to prepare the fastening screws by
themselves.
M4
1 N•m

WLAN
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
mounting bracket.
b
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
M4×35 screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE

WLAN
ST2.5
rou gh
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
1 2 3 4 5

WLAN

Device

may be damaged.
2 USB cable Connects to a USB flash drive or other storage

USB port supports the USB 2.0 standard and a
maximum output power of 2.5 W.
3 Phone cable or The cable is inserted into a Pass Through port for
Network cable transparent transmission.
4 Network cable ● Connects to STAs through downlink network

ports.
● CAT5e cables or higher must be used.
● The length of a network cable cannot exceed
100 m.
● The GE1/PoE_OUT port of the AP2050DN-E
supports PoE output and provides a maximum
of 10 W power output.
NOTICE
● When the GE1/PoE_OUT port is used for PoE output,
the network cable inserted in this port cannot be
longer than 20 m.
● The GE1/PoE_OUT port complies with the category
detection mechanism of 802.3af.
● Do not insert a PoE input cable into the GE1/
PoE_OUT port.
5 Network cable ● Connects to the Ethernet port of an upper-layer

PSE through the uplink network port.
● The GE0/PoE_IN port supports PoE input.

WLAN
● If the AP needs to connect to the Ethernet, ensure that the Ethernet cable is working
properly. If the Ethernet cable is not working properly, for example, RJ45 connectors are
short-circuited, the AP may fail to be powered on or fail to work. Before connecting an
Ethernet cable to the AP, use the cable test tool to check whether the cable is qualified.
If the cable is unqualified, replace it.
● The device is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply.
● AP2050DN: When it works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port has no power
output; when it works in 802.3at or DC power supply mode, the USB port has power
output.
● AP2050DN-E: When it works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port and PoE_OUT
port have no power output; when it works in 802.3at or DC power supply mode, the
USB port and PoE_OUT port have power output.

No. Check Item



WLAN
No. Check Item

After the AP is powered on, observe indicator on the device to determine the
system running status. For details, see 2.4.1.2 Indicator Description.

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

(AP2050DN-S)

The AP2050DN-S use an 86 mm x 86 mm plate design and can be easily installed
in standard 86-type boxes. The APs are equipped with a built-in antenna, a hidden
indicator, and a slide panel; therefore, installation of the AP2050DN-S does not
affect indoor decorations and designs. The AP2050DN-S also have a built-in IEEE
802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2 wireless module and can provide wired connections
through network cables and phone lines as well as wireless connections. This
makes the AP2050DN-S the ideal choice of customers to construct indoor
distributed networks in hotel, apartment, and office scenarios.

WLAN
1 2 3 4 5 6
Table 2-28 describes ports on the AP2050DN-S.


seconds.



WLAN
supply.
The AP2050DN-S provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-22.
Indicator
GE1 GE2 GE3 GE4 Pass Through

or

Indicato - Green Steady Software startup status.

r on after After the system is reset and starts

WLAN

or

Hz)

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Item Description

s
Weight 0.26 kg

WLAN
Item Description
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3af/at
Maximum 11.5 W (excluding the output power of the

power USB port)
consumption NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50083061 AP2050DN-S Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double


WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-31 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote Unit
● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label
equipment.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.
Pass Through port.

WLAN
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT

screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
GE1
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
GE1
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
GE2
GE1
You need to separately purchase T9 torx security screwdriver.

WLAN


WLAN
60 mm

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/PoE
_OUT
mounting bracket.

WLAN
b
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/PoE_O
UT
M4×35 screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE

WLAN
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
or equal to 5 kg.

as follows:
the ceiling tile.

WLAN
1 2
60 mm
mounting bracket.
M4×35 screws.

WLAN
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
ST2.5
GE1/P
oE_O
UT
GE2
GE3
GE4
Pass
Throug
h
0.16 N•m
from each other.)

WLAN
60 mm
83.5 mm
themselves.
M4
1 N•m
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
mounting bracket.

WLAN
b
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
M4×35 screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE

WLAN
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
1 2 3 4 5

WLAN

Device

may be damaged.

USB port supports the USB 2.0 standard and a
4 Network cable Connects to STAs through downlink network ports.


● The length of a network cable cannot exceed 100 m.
● When the AP works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port has no power output;
when the AP works in 802.3at or DC power supply mode, the USB port has power
output.


WLAN

No. Check Item



After the AP is powered on, observe indicator on the device to determine the


faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E)

The AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E are wall plate APs that can be easily installed in
junction boxes (86 mm/120 mm/118 mm) without damaging indoor decoration.
The hidden indicator design and the optimized indicator luminance of the
AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E reduce the light impact on users. The indicator can
also be shut down through the software as required. The built-in smart antennas
of the AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E help achieve better coverage in bathrooms,
balconies, and scenarios with obstacles. The APs provide comprehensive service
support capabilities, and feature high security, simple network deployment,
automatic AC discovery and configuration, and real-time management and
maintenance. The APs can connect to wireless terminals through wireless
connections or to wired terminals using wired cables. This makes the APs ideal
choice for constructing indoor distributed Wi-Fi networks.
The AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E offer both wired and wireless network
connections, and are applicable to hotels, apartments, and offices.
Figure 2-25 shows the appearance of the AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

WLAN
Table 2-35 describes ports on the AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E.

1 Anti-theft Accommodates a captive screw.

screw


seconds.
5 Pass Connects to a network cable or phone cable for

Through transparent transmission.
AP2051DN: 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

GE4 Ethernet.
6 AP2051DN- 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

E: GE4/ Ethernet and supports PoE output.
PoE_Out
7 GE3 to GE1 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

Ethernet.
8 GE0/PoE_In 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

supply.
LED Indicator
The AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E provide only a single indicator, as shown in
Figure 2-26.

WLAN
Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-37 provides basic specifications of the AP2051DN and AP2051DN-E.

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 32.5 mm x 86 mm x 150 mm

s
Weight 0.25 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory
Power Power input ● DC: 45.6 V to 57 V

s 802.3af/at

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum ● AP2051DN: 11.5 W (excluding the output

power power of the USB port)
consumption ● AP2051DN-E: 11.5 W (excluding the output
power of the USB port and PoE_OUT port)
NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50083572 AP2051DN Mainframe(11ac Wave 2, 2x2 dual bands,

smart antenna, USB port)
50083573 AP2050DN-E Mainframe(11ac Wave 2, 2x2 dual bands,

smart antenna, USB port)
Safety Precautions

WLAN

carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-38 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote Unit
● Screws
● mounting bracket
● Warranty card
● SN label
equipment.

ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN
2.6.2.5.1 Wall Mounting
60 mm

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
two expansion screws into the expansion tubes.

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Remove the plastic rear baffle and connect cables. For details, see 2.6.2.6
Cable Connection.
5. Align the grooves on the bottom cover of the device with the upper end of
the clip on the mounting bracket (86 mm). Slide the device downward to
hang it on the mounting bracket.

WLAN
a
b
6. Tighten an M3x4 crosshead screw into the device to prevent the device from
dropping. If the anti-theft function is required, tighten an M3x4 torx screw
(instead of an M3x4 crosshead screw) into the device using a T9 torx security
screwdriver. The tightening torques of the two screw types are both 0.15 N•m.
The T9 torx security screwdriver is separately purchased.

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

as follows:
1. Remove a ceiling tile and determine locations of mounting holes based on the
distance between two installation holes on the mounting bracket (purchased
separately). Use a hammer drill to Ф5 mm drill holes on the ceiling tile and
fasten the mounting bracket with the ceiling tile. The tightening torques of
the two screw types are both 1.18N m.
2. Use M3x6 screws to secure the default mounting bracket to the other side of
the optional mounting bracket. The tightening torques of the two screw types
are both 0.54N m.

WLAN
1. Ceiling-mounting 2. Mounting bracket 3. M3x6 screws

bracket (86 mm)
the clip on the mounting bracket (86 mm). When the device reaches the right
place, the spring clip automatically falls back to secure the device.

WLAN
2.6.2.5.3 Desktop Mounting
Desktop mounting requires a desktop stand. The installation procedure is as

follows:
1. Connect cables. For details, see 2.6.2.6 Cable Connection.

the clip on the desktop stand. Slide the device downward to hang it on the
desktop stand.
b
a
The desktop stand is separately purchased.
2.6.2.5.4 Junction Box (86 mm) Mounting
1. Using a screwdriver, remove the panel of the junction box (86 mm) from the
wall (skip this step if no panel is installed).

WLAN
2. Secure the mounting bracket (86 mm) to the junction box using two M4x25
screws.
M4
1 N•m
Pass Through port of the device.

a
b

WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m

WLAN

b
a
6. Mount a decoration frame to the device and ensure that the frame aligns
with the bottom cover of the device.

WLAN
● The mounting bracket (118 mm) and decoration frame are separately purchased.
● You need to separately prepare a T9 torx security screwdriver.
Depending on the junction box type, a device can be installed in a 1 gang

junction box or 2 gang junction box.
Installing a Device on a 1 Gang Junction Box


WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m
3. Install the cables, device, and anti-theft screws. For details, see Steps 3
through 6 in 2.6.2.5.4 Junction Box (86 mm) Mounting.

2. Secure the mounting bracket (118 mm) to the junction box using four M4x25
screws.

WLAN
M4
0.2 N•m
3. Install the cables, device, decoration frame, and anti-theft screws. For details,
see Steps 3 through 7 in 2.6.2.5.5 Junction Box (118 mm) Mounting.
The mounting bracket (118 mm) is separately purchased.
1 2 3 4 5

Device
1 USB flash drive Connects to a USB flash drive or other storage

or USB cable devices to extend the storage space of the AP. The

WLAN

Device
2 DC 48V When the AP uses the DC power supply, use a

power adapter for power supply; otherwise, the AP
may be damaged.
3 Pass Through Connects to a network cable or phone cable for

transparent transmission.

ports.
100 m.
● The GE4/PoE_Out port of the AP2051DN-E
supports PoE output and provides a maximum
of 13.6 W power output.
NOTICE
● When the GE4/PoE_Out port is used for PoE output,
longer than 40 m.
● The GE4/PoE_Out port complies with the category
● Do not insert a PoE input cable into the GE4/PoE_Out
port.

● The GE0/PoE_In port supports PoE input.
100 m.
● RJ45 connectors without a jacket are required to connect to the Pass Through and GE0/
PoE_In ports on the rear of the device.
● AP2051DN: When it works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port has no power
output; when it works in 802.3at or DC power supply mode, the USB port has power
output.
● AP2051DN-E: When it works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port and PoE_OUT
USB port and PoE_OUT port have only one power output.

WLAN

No. Check Item



After the device is powered on, observe indicator on the device to determine the

WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP2051DN-S)

The AP2051DN-S can be easily installed in a junction box (86 mm/120 mm/118
mm) without damaging indoor decoration. The hidden indicator design and the
optimized indicator luminance of the AP2051DN-S reduce the light impact on
users. The indicator can also be shut down through the software as required. The
built-in smart antennas of the AP help achieve better coverage in bathrooms,
balconies, and scenarios with obstacles. It provides comprehensive service support
capabilities, and feature high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC
discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance. The
AP2051DN-S can connect to wireless terminals through wireless connections or to
wired terminals using wired cables. This makes it the ideal choice for customers to
construct indoor distributed Wi-Fi networks.
The AP2051DN-S is applicable to hotels, apartments, and offices.
When working in cloud mode, the AP2051DN-S needs to cooperate with the Agile
Controller-Campus.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN

1 Security Accommodates a captive screw.

screw hole


seconds.


Ethernet.

supply.
LED Indicators

WLAN
Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 32.5 mm x 86 mm x 150 mm

s
Weight 0.25 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory
Flash 64 MB NOR flash

s 802.3af/at

WLAN
Item Description
In this scenario, 11.5 W (excluding the output power of the

BLE tags are USB port)
used, and NOTE
tablet kiosks The actual maximum power consumption depends
are installed on on local laws and regulations.
the shelves.
Data on the
BLE tags is
uplinked to the
smart shopping
guide server
through the
tablet kiosks
for Big Data
analytics and
statistics.
Environment Operating ● -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to 40°C

parameters temperature ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature decreases
and altitude by 1°C every time the altitude increases 300
m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50083574 AP2051DN-S mainframe(11ac Wave 2,2x2 dual

bands,built-in smart antenna,USB)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-45 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote Unit
● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label
equipment.

WLAN

ovens.
those on APs.
60 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
Cable Connection.

WLAN
a
b

WLAN
The T9 torx security screwdriver is prepared by the customer.
or equal to 5 kg.

as follows:

WLAN
are both 0.54N m.

WLAN

follows:
desktop stand.

WLAN
b
a
screws.
M4
1 N•m
Pass Through port of the AP.

WLAN

a
b

WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m
Pass Through port of the AP.

WLAN

b
a
6. Align and mount a decoration frame to the AP.

WLAN
● The T9 torx security screwdriver is prepared by the customer.



WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m

2. Secure the mounting bracket (118 mm) to the junction box using four M4x25
screws.

WLAN
M4
0.2 N•m
1 2 3 4 5

Device


WLAN

Device
2 DC 48V When the AP uses the DC power supply, use a

power adapter for power supply; otherwise, the AP
may be damaged.


ports.
● Cat5e cables or higher must be used.
100 m.

● Cat5e cables or higher must be used.
100 m.
● The AP is powered by either the DC or PoE power supply.
● When the AP works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port has no power output;
when the AP works in 802.3at or DC power supply mode, the USB port has power
output.

WLAN

No. Check Item





faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP2051DN-L-S)
The AP2051DN-L-S in Huawei Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Solution is applicable to

scenarios with high-density rooms and complex wall structures, such as schools,
hotels, hospitals, and office meeting rooms. Huawei AP2051DN-L-S uses an 86
mm plate in compliance with international standards and can be easily installed
into an 86–type box in a room. It is equipped with a built-in antenna and a hidden
indicator; therefore, installation of the AP2051DN-L-S does not affect indoor
decorations or designs. It also has an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2 wireless
module and can work on both 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz frequency bands. It supports
PoE power supply.The AP2051DN-L-S also have a built-in IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac
Wave 2 wireless module and can provide wired connections through network
cables and phone lines as well as wireless connections. This makes the AP2051DN-
L-S the ideal choice of customers to construct indoor distributed networks in hotel,
apartment, and office scenarios.
Figure 2-33 shows the appearance of the AP2051DN-L-S.
Figure 2-33 Appearance of the AP2051DN-L-S
1 2 3
Table 2-49 describes ports on the AP2051DN-L-S.

WLAN
Table 2-49 Ports on the AP2051DN-L-S

1 Default Reset button: restores factory settings and restarts the

device if you hold down the button more than 3
seconds.
2 ETH 10/100M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.
3 GE/ 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet and

PoE_IN supports PoE input.
Indicator
The AP2051DN-L-S provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-34.
ETH
Indicator

WLAN




Hz)

r state.

Alarm
established).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-51 provides basic specifications of the AP2051DN-L-S.

WLAN

Item Description

s
Weight 0.2 kg
System ● 256 MB DDR3L

memory ● 64 MB Flash
Power Power input PoE power supply: in compliance with IEEE

specification 802.3af/at
s
Maximum 6.63 W
power NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50083851 AP2051DN-L-S Mainframe(11ac Wave

2,2.4G 2x2 + 5G 1x1 dual bands, built-in
antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-52 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● AP device
● Screw
● Warranty card
● SN label
equipment.

ovens.

WLAN
those on APs.
Installing the device on a wall requires expansion screws. The procedures are as
follows:
1. Determine the installation area on the wall and use a marker to mark the
drilling positions (the distance between the two drilling positions should be
60 mm).
60mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

4. Open the front cover of the device, align screws on both sides with the plastic
expansion tubes, and use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two screws.
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
GE1

WLAN
ST2.5
GE1
0.16N•m
GE1
2. Connect the network cable to the GE/PoE_IN interface.

WLAN

screws.
M4
1N•m
GE1
ST2.5
GE1
0.16N•m
GE1

WLAN
Figure 2-36 Appearance of the AP2051DN-L-S

Device
1 Network ● CAT5e cables or higher must be used.

cable ● The length of a cable cannot exceed 100 m.
● The Ethernet cable must work properly; otherwise,
the device may fail to be powered on or cannot run
properly. Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the
AP2051DN-L-S, use the cable test tool to check
whether the cable is qualified. If not, replace the
cable.
NOTICE
Do not insert a PoE input cable into the ETH port.


WLAN

No. Check Item





faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.
device.

(AP3010DN-V2)

The AP3010DN-V2 supports 2x2 MIMO, and provides comprehensive service
support capabilities. It features high reliability, high security, simple network
deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration, and real-time
management and maintenance.

WLAN
The AP3010DN-V2 provides basic 802.11n/ac WLANs for scenarios with a simple
structure, a small area, and a high density of users, for example, small- to
medium-sized enterprises and enterprise branches. The AP3010DN-V2 can be
flexibly deployed in different environments and can work in hybrid mode (AP +
bridge).

Figure 2-37 shows the appearance of the AP3010DN-V2.
Figure 2-37 Appearance of the AP3010DN-V2
Table 2-56 describes interfaces on the AP3010DN-V2.
1 GE/PoE 10/100/1000M port that

Ethernet and supports
PoE input.

adapter to the AP.
3 Security slot Fastens the device to an

immovable object
around through a cable
by inserting the security
lock into the security slot
and locking it.
4 Console Connects to a
maintenance terminal
for device configuration
and management.

WLAN

button for more than 3
seconds.

The AP3010DN-V2 provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38 Indicator on the AP3010DN-V2

Type Color Status Description
Default status Green Steady on The AP is just

after power-on powered on and
the software is
not started yet.

WLAN
Software startup Green Steady on after After the system

status blinking once is reset and starts
loading the
software, the
indicator blinks
green once. The
indicator remains
steady green until
the software is
started.
Running status Green Blinking once ● The system is

every 2s (0.5 Hz) running
properly, the
Ethernet
connection is
normal, and
the AP has
users
associated.
● The system
enters the
Uboot CLI.
Blinking once The system is

every 5s (0.2 Hz) running properly,
the Ethernet
connection is
correct, and no
STA is associated
with the AP. The
system is in low
power
consumption
state.

WLAN
Alarm Green Blinking once ● The software is

every 0.25s (4 Hz) being
upgraded.
● After the
software is
loaded and
started, the AP
working in Fit
mode requests
to go online.
The indicator
remains in this
state before
the AP
successfully
goes online
(CAPWAP link
setup).
● The AP
working in Fit
mode fails to
go online
(CAPWAP link
disconnection).
Fault Red Steady on The device fault

affects services
and cannot be
automatically
restored (such as
DRAM detection
failure and
software loading
failure). Manual
intervention is
required.

Item Description
Physical specifications Dimensions (H x W x D) 39.5 mm x 180 mm x

180 mm
Weight 0.4 kg

WLAN
Item Description

● 32 MB flash
Power specifications Power input ● DC: 12 V ± 10%

● PoE power supply: in
802.3af/at
Maximum power 10.2 W

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.
Environment parameters Operating temperature -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C

and altitude to +50°C
1800 m to 5000 m:

condensing)
IP rating IP41

50082759 Broadband Network Terminal,AP3010DN-

V2-DC,11n, 2*2 Double Frequency

V2-FAT-DC,11n, 2*2 Double Frequency

V2,AP3010DN-V2,11ac, 2*2 Double
Frequency

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-59 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

● AP
● Mounting bracket
● (Optional) Power adapter
● Warranty card
● Quality certificate
● SN label

WLAN

Figure 2-40 shows dimensions of the AP3010DN-V2.
Figure 2-40 Dimensions of an AP3010DN-V2 (unit: mm)
must comply with the environment design specifications of communications
equipment.
● In most cases, indoor APs are deployed on the wall or ceiling through
mounting brackets. Determine the AP installation positions based on the site
survey result and leave at least 200 mm of clearance around each AP.

ovens.

WLAN
those on APs.

56 mm
85 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Connect the cables. For details, see 2.9.2.6 Cable Connection

b
a

WLAN
2.9.2.5.2 Ceiling Mounting
or equal to 5 kg.

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

WLAN
a
c
2.9.2.5.3 T-rail Mounting

0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm

WLAN
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m
1. T-rail 2. M4x8 screw 3. Adjustable buckle 4. Mounting bracket

a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.

Figure 2-43 shows the appearance of the AP3010DN-V2. Table 2-61 describes the
cable connections.
Figure 2-43 Appearance of the AP3010DN-V2

WLAN
1 Network cable ● Supports PoE power

supply.
● CAT5e cables or
higher must be used.
● If the AP needs to
connect to the
Ethernet, ensure that
the Ethernet cable is
working properly. If
not working properly,
for example, RJ45
connectors are short-
circuited, the AP may
fail to be powered on
or fail to work. Before
connecting an
Ethernet cable to the
AP, use the cable test
tool to check whether
the cable is qualified.
If the cable is
unqualified, replace it.
2 DC power adapter ● APs support PoE and

DC power supply
modes.
● If DC power supply is
used, use the power
adapter. Otherwise,
the device may be
damaged.
When the power adapter and PoE power supply are both available, the device is preferentially
powered by PoE.
Pay attention to the following points when installing network cables:
● Before connecting a network cable to the AP, use the cable test tool to check
whether the cable is qualified. If the cable is unqualified (for example, RJ45
connectors are short-circuited), replace it.
● Do not connect the service network cable to the console port. Otherwise, the
AP may be damaged when the PoE power supply is used.
● Before removing network cables or power cables, remove the AP from the
mounting bracket first to prevent damage to the cables.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN

There is a security slot on the AP. You can lock the AP to an immovable object to
prevent theft. The detailed procedures are as follows:


The security slot is 7 mm long and 3 mm wide. The maximum radius of its four round
corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item

2 The device is securely installed. Verify that the AP is securely

mounted to the mounting bracket.
3 The power cables and PGND cables are intact and not spliced.
4 Terminals of the power cables and PGND cables are welded or

cramped firmly.

WLAN
No. Check Item
5 All power cables or PGND cables are not short-circuited or

reversely connected and must be intact with no damage.
7 The working ground, protection ground, and surge protection

ground share the same group of ground bars.

9 Labels on cables, feeders, or jumpers are clear and correct.

Do not frequently power on and off the AP.


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP3030DN)

● The cost-effective AP3030DN complies with the next-generation 802.11ac
protocol, supports 2x2 MIMO, and provides comprehensive service support
capabilities. It features high reliability, high security, simple network
management and maintenance.
● The AP3030DN provides basic 802.11n/ac wireless networks for scenarios with
a simple building structure, a small area, densely located users, and high-
capacity demands, for example, small- to medium-sized enterprises and
enterprise branches. The AP3030DN can be flexibly deployed in different
environments and can work in hybrid mode (AP + bridge).

Figure 2-44 shows the appearance of the AP3030DN.
Figure 2-44 Appearance of the AP3030DN
Table 2-63 describes interfaces on the AP3030DN.

WLAN

1 GE/PoE 10/100/1000M port that

Ethernet and supports
PoE input.

adapter to the AP.
3 Security slot Fastens the device to an

immovable object
around through a cable
by inserting the security
lock into the security slot
and locking it.
4 Console Connects to a
for device configuration
and management.

button for more than 3
seconds.
supply.

The AP3030DN provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-45.

WLAN


the software is
not started yet.

loading the
software, the
indicator blinks
green once. The
indicator remains
steady green until
the software is
started.

WLAN

properly, the
Ethernet
connection is
normal, and
the AP has
users
associated.
● The system
enters the
Uboot CLI.

the Ethernet
connection is
correct, and no
STA is associated
with the AP. The
system is in low
power
consumption
state.

upgraded.
● After the
software is
loaded and
started, the AP
working in Fit
mode requests
to go online.
The indicator
remains in this
state before
the AP
successfully
goes online
(CAPWAP link
setup).
● The AP
working in Fit
mode fails to
go online
(CAPWAP link
disconnection).

WLAN
Fault Red Steady on The device fault

affects services
and cannot be
automatically
restored (such as
DRAM detection
failure and
software loading
failure). Manual
intervention is
required.

Item Description

180 mm
Weight 0.4 kg

● 32 MB flash

● PoE power supply: in
802.3af/at

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.
Environment parameters Operating temperature -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C

and altitude to +50°C
1800 m to 5000 m:

condensing)

WLAN
Item Description
IP rating IP41

DC,11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency

FAT-DC,11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency
50083630 Broadband Network

Terminal,AP3030DN,AP3030DN,11ac, 2*2
Double Frequency
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation

WLAN
Table 2-66 Tools


WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

● AP
● Warranty card
● Quality certificate
● SN label

WLAN

must comply with the environment design specifications of communications
equipment.
● In most cases, indoor APs are deployed on the wall or ceiling through
mounting brackets. Determine the AP installation positions based on the site
survey result and leave at least 200 mm of clearance around each AP.

ovens.

WLAN
those on APs.

56 mm
85 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

b
a

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

WLAN
a
c

0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm

WLAN
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.

Figure 2-50 shows the appearance of the AP3030DN. Table 2-68 describes the
cable connections.

WLAN
1 Network cable ● Supports PoE power

supply.
● CAT5e cables or
● If the AP needs to
connect to the
Ethernet, ensure that
working properly. If
not working properly,
for example, RJ45
connecting an
If the cable is
2 DC power adapter ● APs support PoE and

DC power supply
modes.
● If DC power supply is
used, use the power
adapter. Otherwise,
the device may be
damaged.
powered by PoE.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN

prevent theft. The detailed procedures are as follows:


corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item



cramped firmly.

WLAN
No. Check Item






faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4030DN)

● The cost-effective AP4030DN supports 2 x 2 MIMO and provides
comprehensive service support capabilities. It is deployed indoors and features
high reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC
discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance.
● The AP4030DN provides 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for places with
simple building structure, small size, dense users, and high capacity demands,
such as small and medium enterprises and branches. The AP4030DN can be
flexibly deployed and work in both fit AP and bridge mode.

Figure 2-51 show the appearance of AP4030DN
Table 2-70 describes interfaces on AP4030DN.

WLAN

1 GE/PoE 10/100/1000M bit/s

wired Ethernet. The
interface can connect to
a PoE power supply to
provide power for the AP.

adapter to the AP.
3 Security slot Connects to a security

lock.
4 Console Console interface:

connects to a
for AP configuration and
management.

factory settings if you
more than 3s.
supply.

The AP4030DN provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-52.

WLAN



Hz)

state.

WLAN

every
established).
disconnected).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

Item Description
Technical specifications Dimensions (H x W x D) 39.5 mm x 180 mm x

180 mm
Weight 0.4 kg

● 32 MB Flash

● PoE power: in
802.3af/at

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.

WLAN
Item Description
Environment Operating temperature -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C

specifications to +50°C
1800 m to 5000 m:

condensing)
IP rating IP41
50082641 Broadband Network Terminal,AP4030DN,

11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency

DC,11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency

FAT-DC,11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency
50083138 AP4030DN Bundle(11ac,General AP Indoor,

2x2 Double Frequency,Built-in
Antenna,AC/DC adapter(US),United States
dedicated)
Safety Precautions

WLAN

carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-73 Tools


WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End


WLAN
● AP device
● Power adapter (optional)
● Warranty card
● Qualification card
● SN label

user terminals.
residents.
● Indoor APs are usually mounted on a wall or ceiling using sheet metal

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.

56 mm
85 mm

WLAN

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c


WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
c

c

WLAN
the AP.


WLAN
1 Network cable ● CAT5e cables or

● Ensure that the AP is
connected to the
Ethernet using the
Ethernet cable that
works properly. If the
Ethernet cable is not
working properly, for
example, RJ45
connecting an
If the cable is
2 DC power adapter ● The AP supports the

PoE power supply and
DC power supply.
● To connect the AP to
a DC power source,
use the power
adapter delivered
with the AP;
otherwise, the AP
maybe damaged.
When PoE and power adapter power supplies are available, the devices are preferentially
powered by the PoE.
Pay attention to the following points when installing network cables
● Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the AP, use the cable test tool to check
whether the cable is qualified. If the cable is unqualified, replace it.
mounting bracket first to prevent damage to the network cables or power
cables.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN
2.11.2.7 Installing the Security Lock

prevent the AP against theft. The detailed procedures are as follows:


corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item



cramped firmly.

WLAN
No. Check Item




You can check the power-on status by observing indicators on the AP. For details,
see 2.11.1.2 Indicator Description.
Do not frequently power on and off an AP.


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4030DN-E)

The AP4030DN-E provides comprehensive service support capabilities and meets
indoor settled network deployment requirements. It features high reliability, high
security, simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration,
and real-time management and maintenance.
The AP4030DN-E is applicable to scenarios with a simple building structure, small
size, dense users, and high capacity demands, such as small-size conference
rooms, bars, and leisure centers. It can be flexibly deployed in different
environments.
Figure 2-58 shows the appearance of the AP4030DN-E.
Figure 2-58 Appearance of the AP4030DN-E
Console GE1 GE0/PoE DC 12V
2 5 4 3 1 6
Table 2-77 describes interfaces on the AP4030DN-E.

WLAN

1 DC 12V Connects a 12 V power adapter to the

AP.
2 Default Restores factory settings and restarts

the device when you hold down the
button for more than 3 seconds.
3 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000M port that connects to

the wired Ethernet and supports PoE
input.
4 GE1 10/100M port that connects to the

wired Ethernet.
5 Console Connects to a maintenance terminal

for device configuration and
management.
supply.
The AP4030DN-E provides only a single indicator, as shown in the following figure.

WLAN



Indicato once blinks green once. Until the software is
r uploaded and started, the indicator

Hz)

WLAN

state.

every
established).
disconnected).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-79 Basic specifications of the AP4030DN-E

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H x 53 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm

specifications W x D)
Weight 0.8 kg

● 32 MB flash

specifications ● PoE power supply: in compliance
with IEEE 802.3af/at

WLAN
Item Description

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum power consumption
depends on local laws and regulations.
Environment Operating -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C to +50°C

parameters temperature and 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
altitude decreases by 1°C every time the

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
Part Description
Number
50082800 Broadband Network Terminal,AP4030DN-E,11ac, Double

Frequency,Built-in Antenna
50082770 Broadband Network Terminal,AP4030DN-E-DC,11ac, Double

Frequency,Built-in Antenna
Safety Precautions
● •Place the device in a dry and flat position away from any liquid and prevent

WLAN

carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-80 Tools


WLAN
The following figure shows the process for installing an AP4030DN-E.
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● AP
● Warranty card
● SN label
As shown in Figure 2-61, there are mounting holes on the four corners of the
mounting bracket.
Figure 2-61 Mounting bracket

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

WLAN

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.
1 2

WLAN
Table 2-82 describes the cable connections on the AP4030DN-E.

1 Network cable ● Cat5e cables or higher must be

used.
● The GE0/PoE port supports PoE
input.
● If the AP needs to connect to the
Ethernet, ensure that the Ethernet
cable is working properly. If the
Ethernet cable is not working
properly, for example, RJ45
connectors are short-circuited, the
AP may fail to be powered on or
fail to work.
2 DC power adapter If DC power supply is used, use the

power adapter. Otherwise, the device
may be damaged.
powered by the power adapter.

● When installing a cable, you must make a drip loop to prevent water from
flowing into devices along the cable. For the method of making the drip loop,
see 6.8 Guide to Making Drip Loops.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN

corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item


WLAN
No. Check Item


The AP4030DN-Esupports the DC and PoE power supply modes. You can select the
power supply mode based on your network requirements.
Check Before Power-on

After the AP installation is complete, check the following items before powering
on the AP:
● The AP is correctly connected to the power adapter if it uses the DC power
supply.
● Ensure that the PoE power supply device is well grounded if the AP uses PoE
power supply.
You can check the power-on status by observing the indicator on the device. For
details, see 2.12.1.2 Indicator Description.


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4030TN)

The AP4030TN supports 2 x 2 MIMO, provides comprehensive service support
capabilities, and features high reliability, high security, simple network
deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration, as well as real-time
management and maintenance, which meets network deployment requirements.
The AP complies with the 802.11ac protocol and can provide gigabit access for
wireless users, greatly improving user experience.
The AP4030TN is applicable to e-classrooms, high-density scenarios, shopping
malls, and supermarkets for providing basic 802.11n/ac wireless access networks.
The AP can be deployed flexibly based on site environments.
Figure 2-66 shows the appearance of the AP4030TN.
Figure 2-66 Appearance of the AP4030TN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 2-84 describes interfaces on the AP4030TN.

WLAN


seconds.
2 USB port Connects to a USB flash drive to extend the storage

space of the AP, and provides a maximum of 2.5 W
power.
3 Console Connects to a maintenance terminal for AP

4 GE1 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.
5 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.

The port can connect to a PoE power supply device
to provide power for APs.
6 DC 12V DC power socket: connects a 12 V power adapter to

the AP.
supply.

The AP4030TN provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-67.

Indicator

WLAN




Hz)

r state.

every
established).
disconnected).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-86 provides basic specifications of the AP4030TN.

Item Description

s
Weight 0.86 kg
System ● 256 MB DDR2

memory ● 64 MB NOR FLASH

s 802.3at

power USB port)
consumption NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50082941 AP4030TN Mainframe(11ac,three Radio,Dual band,Built-in

Antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-87 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
c

c

WLAN
the AP.
Figure 2-72 Appearance of the AP4030TN
1 2 3

Device
1 USB flash drive Connects to a USB flash drive to extend the

storage space of the AP, and provides a maximum
of 2.5 W power.

using PoE power supply. The network cable
length cannot exceed 100 m.

WLAN

Device

may be damaged.
The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply that backs up each other.

M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the

WLAN
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.


WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item



After the AP installation is complete, observe the indicator on the AP to check the

WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4050DN)

The AP4050DN have the following advantages:
● 2x2 MIMO
● High security
In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP4050DN can provide gigabit access for
The AP4050DN provides 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for indoor settled
enterprises. It can be flexibly deployed in different environments.
1 2 3 4

WLAN
Table 2-91 describes ports on the AP4050DN.

seconds.


supply.
Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-93 provides basic specifications of the AP4050DN.
Item Description

s
Weight 0.41 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3af/at
Maximum 12.1 W
power NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50083102 AP4050DN Mainframe(11ac wave2,indoor,2X2Dual


WLAN
02351MDU AP4050DN-BUNDLE Mainframe Bundle (AP4050DN

Mainframe*16)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-94 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
b

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
b

WLAN

c
the AP.
1 2

WLAN

Device


may be damaged.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN


1 mm.
No. Check Item




WLAN
No. Check Item


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

(AP4050DN-E)

The AP4050DN-E has the following advantages:
● 2x2 MIMO
● High security

WLAN

In compliance with 802.11ac Wave 2, the AP4050DN-E can provide gigabit access
for wireless users, greatly improving wireless user experience.
The AP4050DN-E provides basic 802.11n/ac WLANs for scenarios that can
integrate enhanced applications (such as Bluetooth and RFID), such as shopping
malls, supermarkets, healthcare, warehouse, manufacturing, and logistics. It
provides flexible distribution options in different environments.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN
Table 2-98 describes ports on the AP4050DN-E.


seconds.

power.

4 GE1/ 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet

PoE_OUT and supports PoE output.

8 Radio port Connects an antenna to an IoT card through a radio

cable.
supply.
The AP4050DN-E provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-81.

WLAN

Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-100 provides basic specifications of the AP4050DN-E.
Item Description

s
Weight 0.84 kg


s 802.3at

power USB port, IoT card, or PoE_OUT port)
consumption NOTE

WLAN
Item Description

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50082944 AP4050DN-E Mainframe(11ac wave2,Dual Band,Built-in

Antenna,BT,USB,PSE,IoT Slot)
50083055 AP4050DN-E Mainframe Bundle (AP4050DN-E

Mainframe*8)
Safety Precautions

WLAN
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-101 Tools

WLAN
Start
Determine the
Installing IoT Card
Install an AP and connect

cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.

WLAN
residents.


ovens.
those on APs.
2.15.2.5 Installing an IoT Card
An AP4050DN-E has three IoT slots supporting ANT and RFID cards. An ANT card
has only one radio port while an RFID card has two radio ports. Depending on
card characteristics, IoT cards can be installed in one-cable per card or two-cable
per card mode. Users need to install IoT cards onsite as required.
One-Cable per Card

In this mode, one to three ANT or RFID cards can be installed.
1. Remove the front cover of an AP.

WLAN
2. Remove rubber plugs based on the number of IoT cards to be installed. One
rubber plug maps one IoT card.
Rubber plugs
3. Place IoT cards in the slots and tighten the cards using M2x7 screws (with a
tightening torque of 0.08 N•m). You are advised to start installation from the
card1 slot.

WLAN
3
1
1. AP4050DN-E 2. IoT card 3. M2x7 screws
4. Install RF cables and sort cables following the instruction shown in the figure.
● The diagonal size of a hexagon SMA connector (with a tightening torque of 0.8 N•m)
must be less than or equal to 8 mm; otherwise, the cable cannot be installed.
5. Slide the cover back.
Two-Cable per Card

In this mode, only one RFID card can be installed. The card1 slot is preferentially
used.
1. Remove the front cover of an AP.

WLAN
2. Remove the two rubber plugs.
Rubber plugs
3. Place the card in the card1 slot and tighten the card using M2x7 screws (with
a tightening torque of 0.08 N•m).

WLAN
3
1
1. AP4050DN-E 2. IoT card 3. M2x7 screws
4. Install RF cables and sort cables following the instruction shown in the figure.
● The diagonal size of a hexagon SMA connector (with a tightening torque of 0.8 N•m)
must be less than or equal to 8 mm; otherwise, the cable cannot be installed.
5. Slide the cover back.

WLAN

56 mm
85 mm

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

WLAN

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.

WLAN
1 2 3

Device

of 2.5 W power.

WLAN

Device
2 Network cable ● The service network cable and PoE input cable
NOTICE
PoE_OUT port.
● The length of a cable in the GE0/PoE_IN interface
cannot exceed 100 m.
● The length of a cable cannot exceed 40 m when the
GE1/PoE_OUT port has PoE output and cannot
exceed 100 m when there is no PoE output.
● The GE1/PoE_OUT port of an AP can provide power
output only works in 802.3at PoE mode. The output
power varies at different connection status:
● The maximum output power is 7 W when no IoT
card is connected to the AP and the USB port is
not used.
● The maximum output power is 5.5 W when only
one IoT card is connected to the AP and the USB
port is not used.
● The PoE_OUT function is automatically disabled
when two or more IoT cards are connected to the
AP or the USB port is used.

may be damaged.
4 RF cable Connects to an IoT card or an antenna.
The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply that backs up each other.

WLAN


Security lock Lock hole

1 mm.

WLAN
Table 2-104 shows the items to be checked after installation is complete. For
more details, see 6.7 Installation Checklist in the appendix.

No. Check Item





faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4050DN-HD)

The AP4050DN-HD has the following advantages:
● 2x2 MIMO
● High security
In compliance with 802.11ac Wave 2, the AP4050DN-HD can provide gigabit
access for wireless users, greatly improving wireless user experience.
The AP4050DN-HD provides basic 802.11n/ac WLANs for high-density scenarios of
indoor stadiums. It provides flexible distribution options in different environments
and can work in hybrid mode (AP+bridge).
Figure 2-87 shows the appearance of the AP4050DN-HD.

WLAN
Figure 2-87 Appearance of the AP4050DN-HD
1 2 3 4 5 6
Table 2-105 describes ports on the AP4050DN-HD.

seconds.


4 GE0/PoE_IN 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.

The port can connect to a PoE power supply to
supply.

WLAN
The AP4050DN-HD provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-88.
Indicator

or



Hz)

WLAN

or

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-107 provides basic specifications of the AP4050DN-HD.

Item Description

s
Weight 1.5 kg


WLAN
Item Description

s 802.3af/at
Maximum ● 11.8 W (in 802.3af PoE or DC mode)

power ● 13.9 W (in 802.3at PoE mode, excluding the
consumption output power of the PoE_OUT port)
NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50082947 AP4050DN-HD Mainframe(11ac wave2,Dual Band,Built-in

HD Antenna,PSE)
50082948 AP4050DN-HD-USA Mainframe(11ac wave2,indoor,Dual

Band,Built-in HD Antenna,PSE)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-108 Tools


WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Indoor fixed sheet metal mounting bracket
● Screw
● Adjustable buckle
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
● If a PoE adapter or a DC power adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For
PoE and DC power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.
● The angle-adjustable mounting kits need to be purchased separately.
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN



ovens.
those on APs.
AP4050DN-HD can be installed on a wall using an indoor fixed or angle-
adjustable mounting bracket.
● The indoor fixed mounting bracket is delivered together with the AP, but the angle-
adjustable mounting bracket is optional and needs to be purchased separately.
● A wall for installing the device needs to meet the following requirements:
mounting bracket is less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the wall must
be greater than or equal to 5 kg.
● When the tightening torx of a screw reaches 3.5 N m, the screw still properly
works, without crack or damage on the wall.
Indoor Fixed Mounting Bracket


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
Angle-Adjustable Mounting Bracket

1. Place a base bracket against the wall and mark the drilling positions through
holes of the bracket, as shown in the following figure.

WLAN
118mm
2. Use an 8 mm drill bit to drill 35 mm to 40 mm deep holes in the drilling

1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
3. Place the base bracket against the wall and use a wrench to fasten two
expansion screws into the expansion tubes.
M6
5 N•m
4. Remove the topmost screw from the base bracket, hang the AP-side
mounting bracket onto the topmost screw, and tighten the screw until the
screw passes through the hole of the horizontal scale plate.

WLAN
M6
M8
5N•m
12N•m

6. Align the mounting screws at the rear of the AP with the mounting holes on
the bracket and hang the AP on the bracket. Push the AP downward to secure
the AP.
7. Loosen the two screws at the horizontal direction, adjust the AP's angle at the
horizontal and vertical directions, and tighten the hex socket screws. Use
M4x35 cruciform slot screws to tighten the AP and mounting bracket from
the side.
M6
5N•m

WLAN
● The angle-adjustable mounting bracket can adjust the AP's angle within ±60° at the
vertical and horizontal directions.
● If customers have anti-theft requirements, tighten the AP and mounting bracket from
the side using the T20 torx security screws that are delivered together with the AP. A
T20 torx security screwdriver that is used to tighten the torx security screws needs to be
prepared separately by customers.
or equal to 5 kg.
The AP4050DN-HD can be installed on a ceiling using an indoor fixed or angle-

adjustable mounting bracket.
Indoor Fixed Mounting Bracket

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3


WLAN
a
c
In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using M4x30
screws. This prevents the AP from falling off due to vibrations. In normal scenarios, you do
not need to install these screws.
Angle-Adjustable Mounting Bracket

distance between two installation holes on the mounting bracket. Use a
hammer drill to drill holes on the ceiling tile and fasten a base bracket with
the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque of 3 N m).
1
2
118mm

WLAN
1. Ceiling tile 2. U-shaped mounting 3. M6x35 screw

bar
M6
M8
5N•m
12N•m

the bracket and horizontally push the AP to secure it.
a
b
5. Loosen the screws, adjust the AP's position as required, and tighten the hex
socket screws. Use M4x35 cruciform slot screws to tighten the AP and
mounting bracket from the side.

WLAN
M6
5N•m
● Ensure that the AP is securely installed on the mounting bracket and there must be 200
● The angle-adjustable mounting bracket can adjust the AP's angle within ±60° at the
vertical and horizontal directions.
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
The AP can be installed on a T-rail indoors using a fixed mounting bracket.


WLAN
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

b
a
c

WLAN
2.16.2.5.4 Installing the Device on a Pole
● The pole must have a diameter of 48 mm to 114 mm and a thickness of at least 2.5
mm. This mounting method is applicable to only indoor scenarios.
● The AP can be installed on a pole using an angle-adjustable mounting bracket, with it
angle adjustable within ±60° at the vertical and horizontal directions.
1. Determine the AP installation position and attach a base bracket on the pole
using the hose clamp.
a. Use an M6 inner hex torque screwdriver to loosen the screw on the hose
clamp to open it.
b. Lead the hose clamp through the mounting bracket and secure the
mounting bracket to the pole.
c. Tighten and close the hose clamp.
d. Use an M6 inner hex torque screwdriver to tighten the screw.

WLAN
b
c
M6
5 N•m
M6
M8
5N•m
12N•m

the bracket and hang the AP on the bracket. Push the AP downward to secure
the AP.
5. Loosen the two screws at the horizontal direction, adjust the AP's angle at the
horizontal and vertical directions, and tighten the hex socket screws. Use

WLAN
M4x35 cruciform slot screws to tighten the AP and mounting bracket from
the side.
M6
5N•m

c
● The indoor fixed mounting bracket is used as an example here. When an angle-adjustable
mounting bracket is used, the procedure for removing an AP is opposite to that for installing
the AP.
● If a captive screw is installed, remove the screw and then follow the preceding steps to
uninstall the AP.

WLAN
Figure 2-93 Appearance of the AP4050DN-HD
1 2

Device
NOTICE
PoE_OUT port.
● The length of a cable in the GE0/PoE_IN interface
● The length of a cable cannot exceed 40 m when the
GE1/PoE_OUT port has PoE output and cannot
exceed 100 m when there is no PoE output.
● The GE1/PoE_OUT port of an AP can provide power
output only works in 802.3at PoE mode. The
maximum output power of the GE1/PoE_OUT port is
12 W.

WLAN

Device

may be damaged.
● The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply that backs up each
other.

M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the

WLAN
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
between them.
terminal.
Security lock Lock1hole

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item




WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4050DN-S)

The AP4050DN-S has the following advantages:
● 2x2 MIMO
● High reliability and security
In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP4050DN-S can provide gigabit access for
The AP4050DN-S provide 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for indoor settled
enterprises. They can be flexibly deployed in different environments.
Table 2-112 describes the appearances of the AP4050DN-S.

WLAN
Table 2-112 Appearances of the AP4050DN-S
Model Appearance
AP405
0DN-S
1 2 3 4

seconds.


supply.
The AP4050DN-S provide only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-94.

WLAN
Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H 35 mm x 170 mm x 170 mm

s
Weight 0.41 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3af/at
Maximum 12.1 W
power NOTE

WLAN
Item Description

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50083115 AP4050DN-S Mainframe(11ac wave2,indoor,Dual

Safety Precautions
carefully.

WLAN
Tool Preparation
Table 2-116 Tools

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
b

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
b

WLAN

c
the AP.
Table 2-118 Appearance of the AP4050DN-S

Model Appearance
AP405
0DN-S
1 2

WLAN

Device


may be damaged.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN


1 mm.
No. Check Item




WLAN
No. Check Item


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

(AP4050DE-M)

The AP4050DE-M has the following advantages:
● 2.4G 2x2 MIMO + 5G 2x2 MIMO
● High security

WLAN

In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP4050DE-M can provide gigabit access for
wireless users, greatly improving wireless user experience. Additionally, the
AP4050DE-M supports Bluetooth location with the built-in Bluetooth module.
The AP4050DE-M provide basic 802.11n/ac access through 2.4G + 5G for

electronic classrooms in elementary education, high-density scenarios, shopping
malls, and supermarkets. The AP4050DE-M can be flexibly deployed in different
environments and can work in hybrid mode (AP + bridge).
Figure 2-99 shows the appearance of the AP4050DE-M.
Figure 2-99 Appearance of the AP4050DE-M
Table 2-121 describes interfaces on the AP4050DE-M.

seconds.

WLAN

supply.
The AP4050DE-M provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-100.
Indicator

or

Indicato on
r The AP is just powered on and the

WLAN

or


Hz)

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-123 provides basic specifications of the AP4050DE-M.

WLAN

Item Description

s
Weight 0.7 kg

memory ● 4 MB NOR FLASH + 128 MB NAND FLASH

s 802.3at/af
Maximum 16.40 W
power NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
02352BSE AP4050DE-M mainframe (11ac Wave 2, indoor, 2X2 dual

bands, Built-in Antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-124 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● OT terminal
● DC power adapter (optional)
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3


WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
the AP.

WLAN
Figure 2-105 Appearance of the AP4050DE-M

Device

The length of a network cable cannot exceed
100 m.

may be damaged.
The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply.

WLAN


1 mm.

WLAN

No. Check Item



cramped firmly.



After the AP is powered on, observe indicator on the AP to determine the system


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

( AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-B-S, and AP3050DE)

The AP4050DE-M-S/AP4050DE-B-S/AP3050DE has the following advantages:
● High security
In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP4050DE-M-S/AP4050DE-B-S/AP3050DE can
provide gigabit access for wireless users, greatly improving wireless user
experience. Additionally, the AP4050DE-M-S/AP4050DE-B-S supports Bluetooth
location with the built-in Bluetooth module.
The AP4050DE-M-S/AP4050DE-B-S/AP3050DE provide basic 802.11n/ac access
through 2.4G + 5G for electronic classrooms in elementary education, high-density
scenarios, shopping malls, and supermarkets. The AP4050DE-M-S/AP4050DE-B-S/
AP3050DE can be flexibly deployed in different environments and can work in
hybrid mode (AP + bridge).
Figure 2-106 shows the appearance of the AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-B-S, and

AP3050DE.

WLAN
Figure 2-106 Appearance of the AP
Table 2-128 describes ports on the AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-B-S, and

AP3050DE.

seconds.

supply.

WLAN
The AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-B-S, and AP3050DE provides only a single

indicator, as shown in Figure 2-107.
Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-130 provides basic specifications of the AP4050DE-M-S, AP4050DE-B-S,

and AP3050DE.

Item Description

s
Weight 0.7 kg


s 802.3at/af

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum ● AP4050DE-M-S: 16.40 W

power ● AP4050DE-B-S: 14.05 W
consumption
● AP3050DE: 11.48 W
NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
02352CXW AP4050DE-M-S mainframe(11ac Wave 2, indoor, 2X2 dual

bands, Built-in Antenna)
02352FMP AP4050DE-B-S mainframe(11ac Wave 2, indoor,2x2 dual

bands,built-in smart antenna, GE, BLE)
02352CXM AP3050DE mainframe(11ac Wave 2, indoor, 2x2 dual

bands, built-in smart antenna, GE)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-131 Tools

Claw hammer Diagonal pliers Wire stripper
RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter Network cable tester

WLAN
Jig saw Multimeter Torque spanner
Ladder Safety helmet Safety belt
Anti-skid shoes Torque screwdriver -

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.

56 mm
85 mm

WLAN

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3


WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m
1. T-rail 2. M4x8 screw 3. Adjustable 4. Sheet metal

buckle mounting bracket


WLAN
uninstall the AP.
● An AP is secured to the mounting bracket using a self-locking mechanism. Therefore, before
installing an enclosure for an AP, remove all screws. Remove the AP and mounting bracket
together from the ceiling, and then remove the AP from the mounting bracket.

WLAN
Figure 2-112 Appearance of the AP

Device

The length of a network cable cannot exceed
100 m.

may be damaged.
No priorities are distinguished for DC and PoE power supply modes.

WLAN


1 mm.

WLAN
No. Check Item




faults.
Fault Description
The indicator of a device is off.

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4051DN and AP4151DN)

The AP4051DN and AP4151DN have the following advantages:
● 2x2 MIMO
● High reliability and security
● PoE input on two GE ports
In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP4051DN and AP4151DN can provide gigabit
access for wireless users, greatly improving wireless user experience.
The AP4051DN and AP4151DN provide 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for
indoor settled scenarios such as education and mobile office in medium- to large-
sized enterprises. They can be flexibly deployed in different environments.
Table 2-135 describes the appearances of the AP4051DN and AP4151DN.

WLAN
Table 2-135 Appearances of the AP4051DN and AP4151DN

Model Appearance
AP405
1DN
6
0
1 2 3 4 5
AP415
1DN
0
6 7
1 2 3 4 5
Table 2-136 describes interfaces on the AP4051DN and AP4151DN.


seconds.
2 USB port Connects to a USB flash drive or other storage



WLAN

7 Antenna Connects an antenna to the AP to send and receive

port wireless signals. The port type is RP-SMA-K. The port
is applicable only to an AP that supports external
antennas.
supply.
The AP4051DN and AP4151DN provide only one indicator, as shown in Figure
2-113.
Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-138 provides basic specifications of the AP4051DN and AP4151DN.

Item Description

s
Weight ● AP4051DN: 0.43 kg
● AP4151DN: 0.45 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3af/at

power USB port)
consumption NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure

WLAN

Band,Built-in Antenna,2*GE Ports)
50083114 AP4051DN-USA Mainframe(11ac wave2,indoor,2X2Dual

Band,Built-in Antenna,2*GE Ports)

Band,External Antenna,2*GE Ports)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-139 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Antennas
● Warranty card
● SN label
● •Antennas are provided only in the carton of the AP4151DN.

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.
● Remove the protective film on the surface before installation to prevent electrostatic
discharge.
● The installation of the AP4151DN is used as an example.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
a
0
or equal to 5 kg.

WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
b
0
0

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

a
b
0
0

WLAN

c
a
0
the AP.

WLAN
Table 2-141 Appearance of the AP4051DN and AP4151DN

Model Appearance
AP405
1DN
1 2 3
AP415
1DN
0
4
1 2 3

Device


WLAN

Device


may be damaged.
4 Antenna Connects an antenna to the AP to send and

receive wireless signals. The port type is RP-SMA-
K. The port is applicable only to an AP that
supports external antennas.
● The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply. The two power
supply modes serve as hot standby for each other. DC power supply has a higher priority.
● Two PoE channels have no priority and serve as cold standby for each other.
● When the AP works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port has no power output; when
it works in 802.3at or DC power supply mode, the USB port has power output.
● To power an AP using a non-standard PoE adapter, ensure that the output power of the
adapter supports the maximum power consumption of the AP. Otherwise, the AP may restart
due to insufficient power.
● If the power supply is prepared separately, ensure that it meets Limited Power Supply (LBS)
requirements to prevent damage to APs due to power overload.


WLAN
Connecting Antennas
Connect the antennas delivered in the installation accessory package of the AP to
the RF ports on the AP, tighten the nuts (with a torque of 0.8 N m), and adjust
antenna angles as required.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
between them.

WLAN

terminal.
Lock hole
Security lock

1 mm.
No. Check Item


WLAN
No. Check Item




faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and AP7052DE)
Table 2-144 Product overview

Product Model Product Description Application Scenario
AP4051TN The AP4051TN has the The AP4051TN provides

following advantages: basic 802.11n/ac access
● 2.4G 2x2 MIMO + 5G through 2.4G + dual-5G
4x4 MIMO + 5G 2x2 for electronic classrooms
MIMO in elementary education,
high-density scenarios,
● Good service support shopping malls, and
capabilities supermarkets. The
● High reliability AP4051TN can be
● High security flexibly deployed in
different environments
● Simple network and can work in hybrid
deployment mode (AP + bridge).
● Automatic AC
discovery and
configuration
● Real-time
management and
maintenance
In compliance with
802.11ac, the AP4051TN
can provide gigabit
access for wireless users,
greatly improving
wireless user experience.
Additionally, the
AP4051TN supports dual
GE ports for PoE input,
and Bluetooth location
with the built-in
Bluetooth module.

WLAN
AP6052DN The AP6052DN has the The AP6052DN provides

following advantages: highest-quality wireless
● 4x4 MU-MIMO services for mobile office,
high-density scenarios,
● Good service support elementary education,
capabilities and higher education. It
● High reliability can be flexibly deployed
● High security in different
environments.
● Simple network
deployment
● Automatic AC
discovery and
configuration
● Real-time
management and
maintenance
In compliance with IEEE
802.11ac, it supports a
theoretical rate of up to
3.46 Gbit/s, greatly
improving wireless user
experience.

WLAN
AP7052DE The AP7052DE has the The AP7052DE provides

following advantages: high quality wireless
● 4x4 MU-MIMO services for medium- to
large-sized enterprises in
● Smart antennas high-density scenarios,
● Good service support such as mobile office,
capabilities elementary education,
● High reliability and higher education. It
can be flexibly deployed
● High security in different
● Simple network environments.
deployment
● Automatic AC
discovery and
configuration
● Real-time
management and
maintenance
In compliance with IEEE
802.11ac, the AP7052DE
supports a theoretical
rate of up to 2.53 Gbit/s,
greatly improving user
experience. Additionally,
it supports Bluetooth
location with the built-in
Bluetooth module.
Table 2-145 shows the appearance of the AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and AP7052DE.

WLAN
Table 2-145 Appearance of the AP

Model Appearance
AP405
1TN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AP605
2DN
GE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN
Model Appearance
AP705
2DE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 2-146 describes ports on the AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and AP7052DE.



seconds.

5 AP4051TN: 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

GE1/PoE_IN Ethernet and supports PoE input.
AP6052DN: 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

GE Ethernet.
AP7052DE: 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

GE/PoE_IN Ethernet and supports PoE input.
6 AP4051TN: 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

GE0/PoE_IN Ethernet and supports PoE input.

WLAN
AP6052DN& 100M/1000M/2.5G/5G port that connects to the

AP7052DE: wired Ethernet and supports PoE input.
5/2.5GE/
PoE_IN
7 DC 48V Connects a power adapter to the AP.
supply.
The AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and AP7052DE provides only a single indicator, as

shown in Figure 2-118.
Indicator

or

Indicato on

WLAN

or


Hz)

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-148 provides basic specifications of the AP4051TN, AP6052DN, and

AP7052DE.

WLAN

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H ● AP4051TN: 52 mm × 220 mm × 220 mm

specification x W x D) (2.05 in. x 8.66 in. x 8.66 in.)
s ● AP6052DN: 52 mm × 220 mm × 220 mm
(2.05 in. x 8.66 in. x 8.66 in.)
● AP7052DE: 74.5 mm × 220 mm × 220 mm
(2.93 in. x 8.66 in. x 8.66 in.)
Weight ● AP4051TN: 1.35 kg

● AP6052DN: 1.66 kg
● AP7052DE: 1.75 kg
System 512 MB DDR3L

memory
FLASH ● AP4051TN: 4 MB NOR FLASH + 128 MB

Nand FLASH
● AP6052DN&AP7052DE: 16 MB NOR FLASH
+ 128 MB NAND FLASH

specification ● PoE power supply:
s
– AP4051TN: in compliance with IEEE
802.3at/af
– AP6052DN&AP7052DE: in compliance
with IEEE 802.3at/bt

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum ● AP4051TN:
power – DC/802.3at power supply: 22 W
consumption (excluding the output power of the USB
port)
– 802.3af power supply: 12.95 W (The USB
function is unavailable.)
● AP6052DN:
– DC/802.3bt power supply: 32 W
(excluding the output power of the USB
port)
– 802.3at power supply: 25.5 W (The USB
function is unavailable. The port rate of
5/2.5GE/PoE_IN decreases to 2.5 Gbit/s.)
● AP7052DE:
– DC/802.3bt power supply: 35.7 W
(excluding the output power of the USB
port)
– 802.3at power supply: 25.5 W (The USB
5/2.5GE/PoE_IN decreases to 2.5 Gbit/s.)
NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure

WLAN
02351NUG AP4051TN Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Triple-Radio,Indoor,

Dual-Band,Built-in Antenna)
02351KDY AP6052DN Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual-

Band,Built-in Antenna)
02351QCW AP7052DE Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual-

Band,Built-in Smart Antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-149 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.

56 mm
85 mm

WLAN

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m
1. T-rail 2. M4x8 screw 3. Adjustable 4. Sheet metal

buckle mounting bracket


WLAN
a
c
2.21.2.5.4 Installing an AP into a Ceiling
An AP can be installed in a removable or irremovable ceiling. For details, see

Installing an AP in a Removable Ceiling and Installing an AP in an
Irremovable Ceiling.
● This mode is applicable to the AP4051TN, and AP6052DN.

● You need to purchase a plastic enclosure, mounting bracket, and other accessories
separately. The part number is 21242880.
● A ceiling needs to bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and mounting
bracket without damage. When the total weight of the device and mounting bracket is less
than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the ceiling must be greater than or equal to 5
kg.
● The screws provided for ceiling-mounting of APs are 30 mm long and can be used to fix an
AP on a ceiling no thicker than 15 mm. To install APs on thicker ceilings, you need to
purchase longer screws.
Installing an AP in a Removable Ceiling

1. Remove a ceiling tile, draw the AP mounting position on the ceiling tile using
an opening mold, and cut an opening.

WLAN
2. Use M4x30 screws to tighten the mounting bracket, ceiling tile, and clamp 1
to the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm).
1
2
3 4
1. Ceiling tile 2. Clamp 1 3. Mounting bracket 4. M4x30 screw
3. Install the ceiling tile. For details, see Connect the cables. For details, see
2.21.2.6 Cable Connection.
b a
Ensure that the AP's network interfaces point to the same direction as the spring clip of the
mounting bracket. Otherwise, installation cannot continue.
5. Install the plastic enclosure. Ensure that the clamping hook of the enclosure
points to the same direction as the AP's network interfaces. Push the
enclosure vertically until the enclosure surface is aligned with that of the AP
(you can hear a click).

WLAN
Installing an AP in an Irremovable Ceiling

1. Draw the AP mounting position on the ceiling tile using an opening mold and
cut an opening.
2. Use clamp 1 to align with the dent of the opening on the ceiling tile and
mark the two holes in the middle of clamp 1. Drill two holes with a diameter
of 5 mm on both sides of the opening on the ceiling tile. Use four M4x30
screws to tighten clamps 1 and 2 to the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque
of 1.2 Nm).
1 2
1. Ceiling tile 2. Clamp 1 3. Clamp 2 4. M4x30 screw
3. Install the mounting bracket, cables, AP, and enclosure. For details, see steps
2, 3, 4, and 5 in Installing an AP in a Removable Ceiling.

WLAN

c
uninstall the AP.

Model Appearance
AP405
1TN
1 2 3

WLAN
Model Appearance
AP605
2DN
GE
1 2 3
AP705
2DE
1 2 3

Device


WLAN

Device
● For the supported network cable types and
length requirements, see Connecting Network
Cables.

may be damaged.
No priorities are distinguished for DC and PoE power supply modes. The power supply backup
mode is described as follows:
● AP4051TN: DC and GE1/PoE_IN support hot standby (HSB). Two PoE channels can serve as
HSB for each other when they have the same input power type.
● AP6052DN: DC and PoE power supplies do not support HSB.
● AP7052DE: DC and GE/PoE_IN support HSB. Two PoE channels can serve as HSB for each
other when they have the same input power type.

WLAN
Connecting Network Cables
Table 2-153 Network cable types supported by Ethernet interfaces and maximum
transmission distances
Interface Rate Network Cable Type Maximum Transmission
Distance
GE CAT5E or higher 100 m
2.5GE CAT5E or higher 100 m

unshielded twisted pair
(UTP)
CAT5E or higher shielded 200 m

twisted pair (STP) When the transmission
distance is greater than
100 m, this network
cable can only be used
to connect the following
switches:
● S5720-28X-PWH-LI-
AC
● S6720-32C-PWH-SI-
AC
● S6720-32C-PWH-SI
NOTE
On the S6720-32C-PWH-
SI-AC and S6720-32C-
PWH-SI, only the eight
2.5GE ports on the rear of
the device support a
transmission distance of
200 m.
5GE CAT5E UTP ● 100 m (Only the first

30 m of cables is
bundled in 6-a-1
mode.)
● 55 m (All cables are
bundled.)
● 100 m (Each cable is
bundled separately.)
CAT5E STP 100 m
CAT6 or higher 100 m

WLAN
● 6-a-1 stands for the six-around-one cable bundle mode, with one cable in the center and six
cables bundled evenly around it.
● Connecting UTP network cables to 5GE interfaces poses high risks and is not recommended.
The causes are as follows:
● 802.3bz requires that the ALSNR value for alien crosstalk between network cables be
greater than 0, but the standards for CAT5E and CAT6 unshielded twisted pairs do not
specify the required ALSNR value. Therefore, such cables may not meet the crosstalk
requirement in 802.3bz, causing severe problems such as continuous packet loss.
● According the cabling specification TIA TSB-5021, using CAT5E and CAT6 cables for 5G
poses high risks.
● Currently, no clear onsite testing or evaluation method is available for checking
whether ALSNR of cables conforms to 802.3bz.
● If CAT5E and CAT6 unshielded twisted pairs do not meet the 5G requirement, you are
advised to replace them with shielded twisted pairs or reduce the rate of interfaces to 2.5G.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m


WLAN
between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item




WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP4130DN)

● The cost-effective AP4130DN supports 2 x 2 MIMO and provides
comprehensive service support capabilities. It is deployed indoors and features
high reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC
discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance.
● The AP4130DN provides 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for places with
such as small and medium enterprises and branches. The AP4130DN can be
flexibly deployed and work in both fit AP and bridge mode.


WLAN

1 2.4G/5G dual-band Connects a 2.4GHz/5GHz

antenna interface dual-band antenna to
the AP to send and
receive wireless signals.
The port type is RP-SMA-
K.
2 GE/PoE 10/100/1000M bit/s

wired Ethernet. The
interface can connect to
a PoE power supply to

adapter to the AP.

lock.
5 Console Console interface:

connects to a
management.

factory settings if you
more than 3s.
supply.


WLAN
Table 2-156 Description of the indicator on the AP4130DN


the software is
not started yet.

uploading the
software, the
indicator blinks
green once. Until
the software is
uploaded and
started, the
indicator remains
steady green.

WLAN

properly, the
Ethernet
connection is
normal, and
STAs are
associated with
the AP.
● The system
enters the
Uboot CLI.

the Ethernet
connection is
normal, and no
STA is associated
with the AP. The
system is in low
power
consumption
state.

Alarm Green being
every 0.25s (4 Hz) upgraded.
● After the
software is
uploaded and
started, the AP
requests to go
online on the
AC and
maintains this
state until it
goes online
successfully on
the AC (before
the CAPWAP
link is
established).
● The AP fails to
go online on
the AC (the
CAPWAP link
disconnects).

WLAN
Fault Red Steady on A fault that

affects services
has occurred, such
as a DRAM
detection failure
or system
software loading
failure. The fault
cannot be
automatically
rectified and must
be rectified
manually.

Item Description
Technical specifications Dimensions (H x W x D) 39.5 mm x 180 mm x

180 mm
Weight 0.4 kg

● 32 MB Flash

● PoE power: in
802.3af/at

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.

1800 m to 5000 m:

WLAN
Item Description

condensing)
IP rating IP41
50082644 Broadband Network Terminal,AP4130DN,

2*2 Double Frequency, External Antenna

DC, 2*2 Double Frequency, External
Antenna
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation

WLAN
Table 2-158 Tools


WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

● AP device
● Antennas
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN

user terminals.
residents.

ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN

56 mm
85 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN

0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.

WLAN


1 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz dual- Connects a 2.4GHz/5GHz

band antenna dual-band antenna to
the AP to send and
receive service signals.

WLAN

connected to the
Ethernet using the
Ethernet cable that
example, RJ45
connecting an
If the cable is

DC power supply.
a DC power source,
use the power
adapter delivered
with the AP;
otherwise, the AP
maybe damaged.
powered by the PoE.
cables.

WLAN
To power an AP using a non-standard PoE adapter, ensure that the output power
of the adapter supports the maximum power consumption of the AP. Otherwise,
the AP may restart due to insufficient power.
Install antennas to RF ports of APs and fasten nuts with a torque of 0.8 N*m.
Then, adjust angles as required. Figure 2-130 shows the appearance of an
installed device.
Figure 2-130 Installing the AP4130DN antenna
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m

WLAN
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.



corners is 1 mm.

WLAN
No. Check Item



cramped firmly.






faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP430-E)

● The cost-effective AP430-E supports 2 x 2 MIMO and provides comprehensive
service support capabilities. It is deployed indoors and features high reliability,
high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and
configuration, and real-time management and maintenance.
● The AP430-E provides 802.11n/ac wireless access networks for places with
such as small and medium enterprises and branches. The AP430-E can be
flexibly deployed and work in both Fit AP and bridge modes.
Figure 2-131 shows the appearance of the AP430-E.
Figure 2-131 Appearance of the AP430-E
Table 2-162 describes ports on the AP430-E.

WLAN

1 GE/PoE 10/100/1000M port used

to connect to the wired
Ethernet. The port can
connect to a PoE power
supply to provide power
for the AP.

adapter to the AP.

lock.
4 Console Console port: connects to

a maintenance terminal
management.

restart the device if you
supply.
The AP430-E provides only one single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-132.

WLAN
Figure 2-132 Indicator on the AP430-E
Table 2-163 Description of the indicator on the AP430-E


the software is
not started yet.

loading the
software, the
indicator blinks
green once. Until
the software is
loaded and
started, the
indicator remains
steady green.

WLAN

properly, the
Ethernet
connection is
normal, and
STAs are
associated with
the AP.
● The system
enters the
Uboot CLI.

the Ethernet
connection is
normal, and no
STA is associated
with the AP. The
system is in low
power
consumption
state.

upgraded.
● After the
software is
loaded and
started, the AP
requests to go
online on the
AC and
maintains this
state until it
goes online
successfully on
the AC (before
the CAPWAP
link is
established).
● The AP fails to
go online on
the AC (the
CAPWAP link
disconnects).

WLAN
Fault Red Steady on A fault that

affects services
has occurred, such
as a DRAM
detection failure
or system
software loading
failure. The fault
cannot be
automatically
rectified and must
be rectified
manually.

Item Description

180 mm
Weight 0.4kg

● 32 MB Flash
Power specifications Power input ● DC 12 V ± 10%

● PoE power: in
802.3af/at

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.

1800 m to 5000 m:

WLAN
Item Description

condensing)
IP rating IP41
50082994 AP430-E Mainframe(11ac,for education

scenarios,2X2 Dual band,Built-in Antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation

WLAN
Table 2-165 Tools


WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Figure 2-134 shows dimensions of the AP430-E.
Figure 2-134 Dimensions of an AP430-E (unit: mm)
STAs.
residents.


ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN

56 mm
85 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

b
a

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

WLAN

a
c

WLAN
must be greater than or equal to 5 kg. Figure Section of a T-rail shows the T-rail
dimensions requirements (t: thickness; w: width).
0.6mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0mm
24mm ≤ w ≤ 29mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4N•m

bracket

3. Hang the AP on the mounting holes by aligning the mounting screws at the
rear of the AP with the mounting holes on the bracket and push the AP
horizontally to secure the AP.

WLAN
a
c
In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using M4x30

WLAN
the AP.
Figure 2-137 shows the appearance of AP430-E.
Figure 2-137 Appearance of AP430-E

WLAN

connected to the
Ethernet using the
Ethernet cable that
example, RJ45
connecting an
If the cable is

DC power supply.
a DC power source,
use the power
adapter delivered
with the AP;
otherwise, the AP
maybe damaged.
powered by the PoE.
● If the AP needs to connect to the Ethernet, ensure that the Ethernet cable is
working properly. If the Ethernet cable is not working properly, for example,
RJ45 connectors are short-circuited, the AP may fail to be powered on or fail
to work. Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the AP, use the cable test tool
to check whether the cable is qualified. If the cable is unqualified, replace it.
● The service network cable and PoE input cable cannot be connected to the
console port. Otherwise, the AP may be damaged when using PoE power
supply.

WLAN
cables.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
between them.

WLAN
terminal.



corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item



WLAN
No. Check Item

cramped firmly.




After the AP installation is complete, observe the indicator on the AP to check the


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

The AP5030DN and AP5130DN support 3x3 MIMO and provide comprehensive
service support capabilities. They are deployed indoors and feature high reliability,
high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and
configuration, and real-time management and maintenance. Huawei AP5030DN
and AP5130DN comply with IEEE 802.11ac and can provide gigabit access for
wireless users. This high capacity greatly improves user experience on wireless
networks.
The AP5030DN and AP5130DN are applicable to places with simple building
structure, small size, dense users, and high capacity demands, such as small and
medium enterprises and branches. The AP5030DN and AP5130DN can be flexibly
deployed and work in hybrid mode (Fit AP+bridge).
Table 2-169 shows the appearance of the AP5030DN and AP5130DN.
Table 2-169 Appearance of the P5030DN and AP5130DN
Model Appearance
AP503
0DN
1 2 3 4 5 6

WLAN
Model Appearance
AP513 7
0DN
1 2 3 4 5 6
Table 2-170 describes ports on the AP5030DN and AP5130DN.


seconds.

3 GE1 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

Ethernet.
4 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

7 Dual-band Connects a 2.4GHz/5GHz dual-band antenna to the

antenna port AP to send and receive wireless signals. The port
type is RP-SMA-K. The port is applicable only to an
AP that supports external antennas.

WLAN
supply.
The AP5030DN and AP5130DN provide only a single indicator, as shown in Figure
2-138.

Indicator

or



WLAN

or

Hz)

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 53 mm × 220 mm × 220 mm (2.09 in. x 8.66

specification x W x D) in. x 8.66 in.)
s
Weight 0.8 kg

WLAN
Item Description
System 256 MB DDR2

memory
FLASH 32 MB NOR FLASHH
Power Power input ● DC 12 V±10%

s 802.3af/at
Maximum 12.95 W
power NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50082660 AP5030DN Mainframe(11ac,General AP Indoor,3x3 Double

Frequency,Built-in Antenna,No AC/DC adapter)
50082701 AP5030DN Bundle(11ac,General AP Indoor,3x3 Double

Frequency,Built-in Antenna,AC/DC adapter)
50082703 AP5030DN Bundle(FAT AP,11ac,General AP Indoor,3x3

Double Frequency,Built-in Antenna,AC/DC adapter)
50082704 AP5130DN Mainframe(11ac,General AP Indoor,3x3 Double

Frequency,External Antenna,No AC/DC adapter)
50082705 AP5130DN Bundle(11ac,General AP Indoor,3x3 Double

Frequency,External Antenna,AC/DC adapter)

WLAN
50082706 AP5130DN Bundle(FAT AP,11ac,General AP Indoor,3x3

Double Frequency,External Antenna,AC/DC adapter)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-173 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Power adapter
● Dual-band antenna (Only the AP5130DN carton contains dual-band
antennas.)
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.

56 mm
85 mm

WLAN

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
b
elos
noC
a
1EG
/0EG
EoP
CD
V21
noC
elos
1EG
/0EG
EoP
CD
V21
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c
Co
Co
nso
nso
le
le
GE
GE
1
1
GE
GE
0/P
0/P
oE
oE
DC
DC
12V
12V

WLAN
Cons
ole
GE1
GE0/P
oE
DC
12V
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

a
c
Co
Co
nso
nso
le
le
GE
GE
1
1
GE
GE
0/P
0/P
oE
oE
DC
DC
12V
12V

WLAN
Cons
ole
GE1
GE0/P
oE
DC
12V

c
1EG
elos
noC
a
/0EG
EoP
CD
V21
the AP.

WLAN

Model Appearance
AP503
0DN
1 2
AP513 3
0DN
1 2

WLAN

Device
● The network cable length cannot exceed 100 m.

may be damaged.
4 Antenna Connects a 2.4GHz/5GHz dual-band antenna to

the AP to send and receive wireless signals. The
port type is RP-SMA-K. The port is applicable only
to an AP that supports external antennas.
The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply. DC power supply has a
higher priority.

WLAN

the Dual-band antenna ports on the AP, tighten the nuts (with a torque of 0.8 N
m), and adjust antenna angles as required.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

WLAN

between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item




WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP5030DN-C)
The AP5030DN-C provides comprehensive service support capabilities, and

features high reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC
discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance,
meeting indoor deployment requirements.
The AP5030DN-C is especially applicable to places with simple building structure,

small size, dense users, and high capacity demands, such as small-size conference
rooms, bars, and leisure centers. It can be flexibly deployed according to
surrounding environment.
Figure 2-143 shows the appearance of the AP5030DN-C.
Figure 2-143 Appearance of the AP5030DN-C
Table 2-178 describes ports on the AP5030DN-C.

WLAN

1 Default Reset button: restores factory settings

and restarts the device if you hold
down the button more than 3 seconds.
2 Console Connects to a maintenance terminal

management.
3 GE1 10/100/1000M port: connects to the

wired Ethernet.
4 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000M port: connects to the

wired Ethernet and supports PoE input.

AP.
supply.
The AP5030DN-C provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 2-144.

Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-180 provides basic specifications of the AP5030DN-C.

Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H x 53 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm

Weight 0.8 kg

● 64 MB flash memory
Power Power input ● DC 12 V ± 10%

specifications ● PoE power: -48 V DC (in compliance
with IEEE 802.3af/at)

consumption NOTE

specifications temperature and 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
altitude decreases by 1°C every time the

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
2.25.2 Installation Flowchart


WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
2.25.3 Installation Precautions
Table 2-181 describes precautions for installing the AP5030DN-C.
Table 2-181 Precautions for installing the AP5030DN-C
No. Installation Precaution

Procedure
1 Unpacking ● Before unpacking the carton, ensure that the packing

the carton is intact and not damaged or soaked.
Equipment
2 Determining ● There must be at least 200 mm clearance between the

the cabling end of the AP and the wall.
Installation ● Install the AP in a site that is free from leaking or
location dripping water, heavy dew, and humidity, and take
protective measures to prevent water from flowing
● Do not install the AP in an environment with high
temperature, dust, poisonous gases, flammable or
explosive objects, electromagnetic interference (from a
radar station, radio station, or substation), unstable
voltage, violent shakes, or strong noise.

WLAN
3 Installing ● The screws provided for ceiling-mounting of APs are 30

the AP mm long and can be used to fix an AP on a ceiling not
thicker than 15 mm. To install APs on thicker ceilings,
you need to purchase longer screws.
● Ensure that the AP is correctly installed on the
mounting bracket.
4 Cable ● When the AP uses the DC power supply, use a power

Connection adapter for power supply; otherwise, the AP may be
damaged.
● The service network cable and PoE input cable cannot
be connected to the console port. Otherwise, the AP
may be damaged when using PoE power supply.
● If the AP needs to connect to the Ethernet, ensure that
the Ethernet cable is working properly.If the cable is
5 Connecting ● You need to purchase the security lock separately.

the Security
Lock
6 Powering on ● Do not frequently power on and off the device.

the Device
2.25.4 Preparing for Installation
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation

WLAN
Table 2-182 Tools


WLAN
● AP device
● Adjustable buckle
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
a b
V
DC 12
oE
GE0/P
GE1
ole
Cons
V
DC 12
oE
GE0/P
GE1
ole
Cons
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c
Cons
ole
GE1
Cons
GE0/
ole
PoE
GE1
DC
12V
GE0/
PoE
DC
12V
Console
GE1
GE0/P
oE DC
12V

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
c
Cons
ole
GE1
Cons
GE0/
ole
PoE
GE1
DC
12V
GE0/
PoE
DC
12V
Console
GE1
GE0/P
oE DC
12V

WLAN

c
V
DC 12
oE
GE0/P
GE1
ole
Cons
the AP.
Figure 2-149 Appearance of the AP5030DN-C
1 2

WLAN

Device

may be damaged.
The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply. DC has a higher priority.


WLAN

1 mm.
Table 2-185 shows the items to be checked after installation is complete.
No. Check Item


WLAN
No. Check Item


The AP supports the DC power supply and PoE power supply. You can select the
power supply mode as required.
Checking Before Power-on

on the AP:
supply.
● The PoE power supply device is well grounded if the AP uses the PoE power
supply.
Indicator Status
2.25.6 Troubleshooting Methods for Common Faults
2.25.6.1 Power-on Failure of the Device
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP5050DN-S)
The AP7052DE supports 3x3 MIMO on the 2.4 GHz band and 4x4 MU-MIMO on
the 5 GHz band, and provides comprehensive service support capabilities. It
features high reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC
discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance. In
compliance with IEEE 802.11ac, the AP5050DN-S supports a theoretical rate of up
to 2.33 Gbit/s, greatly improving user experience.
The AP5050DN-S provides highest-quality wireless services for mobile office, high-
density scenarios, elementary education, and higher education. It provides flexible
distribution options in different environments.
When working in cloud mode, the AP5050DN-S needs to cooperate with a cloud
server.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN



seconds.


Ethernet.

supply.

Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 56 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm (2.20 in. x 8.66

s
Weight 1.3 kg
System 512 MB DDR3L

memory
Flash 16 MB NOR flash + 128 MB NAND flash

s 802.3at

power USB port)
consumption NOTE

parameters temperature ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature decreases
and altitude by 1°C every time the altitude increases 300
m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
02351VQN AP5050DN-S mainframe (11ac Wave 2, indoor, 2.4G 3x3

+ 5G 4x4 dual bands, built-in antenna, USB)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-189 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m


WLAN
a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.
1 2 3

WLAN

Device


● Do not connect the service network cable or
PoE input cable to the console port. Otherwise,
the AP may be damaged when the PoE power
supply is used. The length of a network cable

may be damaged.
● The AP is powered by either the DC or PoE power supply. The two power supply modes serve
as hot standby for each other.
● The USB interface is shut down by default. You can open it using the command line (by
referring to the configuration guide in the product documentation) or on the web platform.

spacing of 30 mm and cannot be entangled or crossed. Cables are parallel or
separated using dedicated separators.
horizontal line must be in a straight line. Cable tie tails are cut smoothly and
evenly.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.

WLAN
No. Check Item




faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP5510-W-GP)

The AP5510-W-GP is a wall plate AP that can be easily installed in junction boxes
(86 mm/120 mm/118 mm) without damaging indoor decoration. The hidden
indicator design and the optimized indicator luminance of the AP5510-W-GP
reduce the light impact on users. The indicator can also be shut down through the
software as required. The built-in smart antennas of the AP5510-W-GP help
achieve better coverage in bathrooms, balconies, and scenarios with obstacles. The
AP provides comprehensive service support capabilities, and features high security,
simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration, and real-
time management and maintenance. The AP can connect to wireless terminals
through wireless connections or to wired terminals using wired cables. This makes
the AP5510-W-GP an ideal choice for constructing indoor distributed Wi-Fi
networks.
The AP5510-W-GP offers both wired and wireless network connections, and is
applicable to hotels, apartments, and offices.
Figure 2-157 shows the appearance of the AP5510-W-GP.

WLAN
Figure 2-157 Appearance of the AP5510-W-GP
Table 2-193 describes interfaces on the AP5510-W-GP.
1 Anti-theft Accommodates a captive screw.

screw
2 UART Used only for O&M commissioning.

seconds.

NOTE
When the AP uses the DC power supply, use a power
adapter for power supply; otherwise, the AP may be
damaged.
5 GE4 to GE1 Connects to the downlink wired Ethernet.
6 OPTICAL Connects to uplink optical fibers.

WLAN
LED Indicator
The AP5510-W-GP has one indicator on the front, as shown in Figure 2-158.
Indicator

or



WLAN

or

Hz)

state.

every
online if it works in Fit AP
management mode. The indicator
remains in this state before the AP
successfully goes online.
● The AP works in Fit AP
management mode and fails to go
online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Indicators on the side of the AP5510-W-GP are shown in Figure 2-159.

WLAN
PON indicator
LOS indicator
Table 2-195 Indicator description

Indicator Color Status Description
PON indicator Green Steady on The PON indicator

is steady on and
the LOS indicator
is off: The optical
network terminal
(ONT) has set up
a connection with
an optical line
terminal (OLT).

WLAN
Fast blinking ● The PON

indicator is
blinking fast
and the LOS
indicator is off:
The ONT is
setting up a
connection
with an OLT.
● The PON
indicator is
blinking fast
and the LOS
indicator is
slowly blinking:
The receive
optical power
is out of the
receive
sensitivity
range.
- ● The PON
indicator is off
and the LOS
indicator is
slowly blinking:
No optical
fiber is
connected, or
no optical
signal is
available.
● The PON
indicator is off
and the LOS
indicator is
steady on: The
optical
network unit
(ONU) is
forbidden by
the OLT, or the
transmit
optical power
is abnormal.

WLAN
Blinking slowly The PON and LOS

indicators are
slowly blinking: A
hardware
exception occurs
on the ONU.
LOS indicator Red For the indicator meanings, refer to

the description of the PON indicator
above.
NOTE
● Fast blinking: once every 0.5s (2 Hz)
● Slowly blinking: once every 2s (0.5 Hz)
Table 2-196 provides basic specifications of the AP5510-W-GP.

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 38.5 mm x 86 mm x 150 mm (1.52 in. x 3.39

s
Weight 0.3 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory
Flash 64 MB NOR FLASH
Power Power input DC: 12 V ± 5 %

specification
s Maximum 14.2 W
power NOTE
Environment Operating ● -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C to 40°C

m.

temperature

humidity

WLAN
Item Description

pressure
02352GRC AP5510-W-GP mainframe(11ac Wave 2, indoor, 2x2 dual

bands, built-in smart antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation

WLAN
Table 2-197 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Screw
● Warranty card
● SN label
● Power adapter

WLAN
equipment.

ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN
60mm

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Connect cables. Insert a single-mode optical fiber with a diameter of 3 mm

into the OPTICAL port at the rear of the AP, and coil the fiber, as shown in the
following figure. The fiber can be routed out from the cable outlet at the
bottom. For details, see 2.6.2.6 Cable Connection.
a
b

WLAN
● When securing an M4 screw into a junction box, do not distort the mounting
bracket. If longer screws are required onsite, the customer needs to prepare them
by themselves.
● There are two grooves on the right side of the device. You can align the protruding
part on the mounting bracket with the middle of the two grooves, as shown in the
circle in the figure below, to quickly align the AP with the mounting bracket.

follows:
following figure. For details, see 2.27.2.6 Cable Connection.

WLAN
desktop stand.
b
a
● The desktop stand is separately purchased.

● It is recommended that all cables threaded through the hole at the lower part of the
desktop stand for the purpose of elegance.
screws.
M4
1 N•m


WLAN
a
b
by themselves.
part on the mounting bracket with the middle of the two grooves, as shown in the
circle in the figure below, to quickly align the AP with the mounting bracket.

WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m


WLAN
by themselves.
part on the mounting bracket with the middle of the two grooves, to quickly align
the AP with the mounting bracket.

WLAN


screws.

WLAN
M4
0.2 N•m
3. Install the cables, device, and anti-theft screws. For details, see steps 3, 4, and
5 in 2.27.2.5.3 Junction Box (86 mm) Mounting.

screws.
M4
0.2 N•m
see steps 3, 4, 5, and 6 in 2.27.2.5.4 Junction Box (118 mm) Mounting.

WLAN
Figure 2-161 describes the cable connections.
Figure 2-161 Appearance of the AP5510-W-GP
1 2 3 4

No. Inter Cable or Description
face Device
1 UART - Used only for O&M commissioning.

Port
2 DC DC power When the AP uses the DC power supply, use a

12V cable power adapter for power supply; otherwise, the
AP may be damaged.
3 GE4 Network Connects to the downlink wired Ethernet.

to cable
GE1
4 OPTI Optical Connects to uplink optical fibers.

CAL fiber

WLAN
● ·Only optical fibers with a diameter of 3 mm can be coiled on the rear of the device.
When fixing a device, ensure that the fiber has been coiled on the fiber management
tray at the rear of the device to prevent the fiber from being clamped, which may affect
signals.
● Before coiling the fiber, it is recommended that a fiber distance of 60 cm to 80 cm be
pulled for reservation.

No. Check Item



WLAN
No. Check Item

2.27.4 Logging In to the ONT
The AP5510-W-GP has ONT capabilities. You can log in to it through a browser.
● Logging in to the ONT in Fat AP mode: Connect a user terminal to any
downlink port (GE1 through GE4) on the device or to the WLAN where the
ONT locates, enable the terminal to automatically obtain an IP address, and
log in to the ONT through a browser.
● Logging in to the ONT in Fit AP/Cloud AP mode: Connect a user terminal to
any downlink port (GE1 through GE4) on the device, configure an IP address
on the same network segment as the ONT for the terminal, and log in to the
ONT through a browser.
Table 2-201 lists default parameters for logging in to the ONT.
Table 2-201 Default parameters for logging in to the ONT
Parameter Default Value
IP address 192.168.18.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
User name Epuser
Password userEp

WLAN
Logging In to the ONT in Fat AP Mode

Step 1 Configure the terminal to automatically obtain an IP address.
Step 2 Connect a user terminal to the ONT in either of the following ways:
● Connect a user terminal to any downlink port (GE1 through GE4) on the ONT.
● Within the coverage of the AP, search for the WLAN with the SSID of
HUAWEI-XXXX on the terminal. XXXX specifies the last four digits of the AP's
MAC address. You can access the WLAN directly.
Step 3 On the terminal, open a browser, enter the login IP address of the ONT in the
address box, and press Enter.
Step 4 Enter the user name and password on the login page to log in to the ONT.
----End
Logging In to the ONT in Fit AP/Cloud AP Mode

Step 1 Connect a user terminal to any downlink port (GE1 through GE4) on the ONT.
Step 2 Configure the IP address of the terminal to be on the same network segment as
the default IP address of the ONT, for example, 192.168.18.x/24 (192.168.18.100
recommended, 192.168.18.1 excluded).
Step 3 On the terminal, open a browser, enter the login IP address of the ONT in the
address box, and press Enter.
Step 4 Enter the user name and password on the login page to log in to the ONT.
----End

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
may fail.

WLAN
Replace the power adapter with a normal one. If the device is powered on,
the original power adapter is faulty. Contact technical support personnel or
Huawei agent and ask them to replace the power adapter.
device.


The AP6050DN and AP6150DN support 4×4 MU-MIMO and feature high
reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and
configuration, and real-time management and maintenance. In compliance with
IEEE 802.11ac, the AP6050DN and AP6150DN support a theoretical rate of up to
2.53 Gbit/s, greatly improving user experience.
The AP6050DN and AP6150DN provide highest-quality wireless services for mobile
office, high-density scenarios, elementary education, and higher education. They
provide flexible distribution options in different environments.
Table 2-202 describes the appearances of the AP6050DN and AP6150DN.
The actual device appearance may be different from the following device appearance; these
differences will not affect device functions.

WLAN
Table 2-202 Appearances of the AP6050DN and AP6150DN
Model Appearance
AP605
0DN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AP615
0DN
8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


seconds.

WLAN


Ethernet.

8 Antenna Connects an antenna to the AP to send and receive

port wireless signals. The port type is RP-SMA-K. The port
is applicable only to an AP that supports external
antennas.
supply.
The AP6050DN and AP6150DN provide only one indicator, as shown in Figure
2-162.

Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Item Description

s
Weight 1.3 kg
System 512 MB DDR3L

memory
FLASH 16 MB NOR FLASH + 128 MB NAND FLASH

s 802.3at

power USB port)
consumption NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
02351RKT AP6050DN mainframe (11ac Wave 2, indoor, 4x4 dual

bands, built-in antenna, USB)

WLAN
02351UQH AP6150DN mainframe (11ac Wave 2, indoor, 4x4 dual

bands, external antenna, USB)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-206 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Antennas
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label
● Antennas are provided only in the carton of the AP6150DN.

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN

ovens.
those on APs.
● Remove the protective film on the surface before installation to prevent electrostatic
discharge.
● The installation of the AP6150DN is used as an example.

WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.

WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

b
a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

b
a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.
Table 2-208 describes cable connections (the AP6150DN is used as an example).

WLAN
4 1 2 3 4

Device


using PoE power supply. The network cable
length cannot exceed 100 m.

may be damaged.
4 Antenna Connects an antenna to the AP to send and

receive wireless signals. The port type is RP-SMA-
K. The port is applicable only to an AP that

WLAN
other.
● By default, the USB port is disabled. You can enable it using the web platform or CLI. For
details, see the configuration guide in the AC product documentation.
Connecting Antennas
the RF ports on the AP, tighten the nuts (with a torque of 0.8 N m), and adjust
antenna angles as required.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m

WLAN
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.
No. Check Item



cramped firmly.




WLAN


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

(AP6750-10T)

The AP6750-10T has the following advantages:
● 2.4G 2x2 MIMO + 5G 2x2 MIMO+ 5G 4x4 MIMO
● High security

WLAN

In compliance with 802.11ac, the AP6750-10T can provide gigabit access for
wireless users, greatly improving wireless user experience. Additionally, the
AP6750-10T supports Bluetooth location with the built-in Bluetooth module
The AP6750-10T provide basic 802.11n/ac access through 2.4G + 5G for electronic
classrooms in elementary education, high-density scenarios, shopping malls, and
supermarkets. The AP6750-10T can be flexibly deployed in different environments
and can work in hybrid mode (AP + bridge).

Figure 2-168 shows the appearance of the AP6750-10T.
Figure 2-168 Appearance of the AP6750-10T
Table 2-210 describes interfaces on the AP6750-10T.

Ethernet.
3 USB port Connects to a USB flash drive or an IoT module.
4 GE0/PoE_IN 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired


seconds.

WLAN
supply.
● For power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution

The AP6750-10T provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-169.

or
Indicat - White Steady Default status after power-on.

or on The AP is just powered on and the

WLAN

or
- White Steady Software startup status.

on After the system is reset and starts
after uploading the software, the indicator
blinkin blinks white once. Until the software is
g once uploaded and started, the indicator
remains steady white.
- White Blinkin Running status.

g once ● The system is running properly, the
Hz)
Blinkin Running status.

g once The system is running properly, the
state.
- White Blinkin Alarm.

g once ● The software is being upgraded.
every
0.25s ● After the software is loaded and
(4 Hz) started, the AP requests to go online
if it works in Fit AP or cloud-based
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

The following table provides basic specifications of the AP6750-10T.

WLAN
Item Description
Physical Dimensions 47 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm (1.85 in. x 8.66 in. x

specifica (H x W x D) 8.66 in.)
tions
Weight 1.2 kg
System ● 512 MB DDR3L 16-bit SDRAM

memory ● 4 MB NOR FLASH + 128 MB Nand Flash

specifica ● PoE power supply: in compliance with IEEE
tions 802.3at
Maximum 19.3 W (excluding the output power of the USB port

power or IoT card port)
consumption NOTE
The actual maximum power consumption depends on local
laws and regulations.
Environ Operating ● -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C to +50°C

ment temperature ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature decreases by 1°C
specifica and altitude every time the altitude increases 300 m.
tions
temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure

02352NAM AP6750-10T mainframe(11ac Wave 2,indoor,triple-

radio,built-in smart antenna,2*GE,USB,BLE)


WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-212 Tools


WLAN


WLAN

● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label
If a PoE adapter or a DC power adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For
PoE adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.


WLAN
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
If antennas are embedded into APs, the deployment distance requirements on the antennas
are those on APs.
Remove the protective film on the surface before installation to prevent electrostatic
discharge.
● The wall can bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and mounting
bracket without damage. When the total weight of the device and mounting bracket is
less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the wall must be greater than or equal
to 50 N.
● When the tightening torx of a screw reaches 3.5 N·m, the screw still properly works,
1. Attach the mounting bracket against the wall and adjust its position properly.
Mark positions of the mounting holes with a marker, as shown in the
following figure.

WLAN
2. Use a 6 mm drill bit to drill 35 mm to 40 mm deep holes in the marked

three expansion screws into the expansion tubes.
4. Connect and properly sort cables. For details, see 2.29.2.6 Cable Connection.
5. Align the rubber feet of the AP over the mounting slots on the mounting

WLAN
After the device is installed, ensure that the ejector lever is springs back in place. Ensure
that the installation space meets the specified requirements to facilitate future
maintenance.
In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using an M3x12
screw with a torque of 0.5 N m. This prevents the AP from falling off due to vibrations. In
normal scenarios, you do not need to install this screw.

must be greater than or equal to 50 N.
1. Determine the model of the T keel. The following figure shows the
specifications of the T keel supported by the mounting kit. The following uses
a flat-edge T-rail of 24 mm as an example.
The mounting bracket must be installed on the main T-rail with a strong bearing
capacity.
2. Partially tighten the M3x6.2 set screw to the T-rail bracket.

WLAN
3. Slide the T-rail bracket into the mounting bracket according to the sequence
shown in the figure.
1. T-rail bracket a 2. T-rail bracket b
4. Secure the M3x8 screw through hole 24 marked in the figure, and secure T-
rail bracket a. The T-rails of 15 mm and 38 mm correspond to holes 15 and 38
on the mounting bracket, respectively.
5. Insert the T-rail bracket a into the T-rail, and slide the bracket b along the slot
until the T-rail is tightened.
6. Secure the M3x8 screw through hole 24 marked in the figure, and secure T-
rail bracket b. Tighten the M3x6.2 set screw for installing the bracket.

WLAN
● After the set screw is tightened, the mounting bracket may be deformed. This is
normal and does not affect the AP use.
8. Align the rubber feet of the AP over the mounting slots on the mounting
● After the device is installed, ensure that the ejector lever is springs back in place. Ensure
that the installation space meets the specified requirements to facilitate future
maintenance.
● In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using an
M3x12 screw with a torque of 0.5 N m. This prevents the AP falling off due to vibrations.
Remove the security screw. Hold the AP securely. Press the ejector lever and slide
the AP out of the mounting bracket to unlock the AP.

WLAN
When removing an AP, do not pull out the AP directly. Otherwise, the cables and connectors
may be damaged.

Figure 2-173 Appearance of the AP6750-10T

Device
1,2 Network cable ● CAT5e cables or higher must be used. The

length of a network cable cannot exceed 100 m.

WLAN

Device

may be damaged.
Guide to Making Drip Loops


WLAN

corners is 1 mm.

No. Check Item





WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP7030DE and AP9330DN)

● The AP7030DE is deployed indoors and feature high reliability, high security,
simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration, and
real-time management and maintenance.
Huawei indoor APs are especially applicable to places with simple building
structure, small size, dense users, and high capacity demands, such as small-
size conference rooms, bars, and leisure centers. They can be flexibly deployed
according to surrounding environment.
● The AP9330DN supports smart distributed antenna system technology and
can provide dual-band coverage for multiple rooms. With this technology, one
AP9330DN can cover six rooms with double streams for each room. Deployed
indoors, the AP provides comprehensive service support capabilities and
features high reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic
AC discovery and configuration, and real-time management and maintenance.
It provides high quality wireless services for industries, such as education,
healthcare, and hotels. The AP9330DN provides flexible distribution options in
different environments.
Figures in Figure 2-174 and Figure 2-175 show the appearance of AP7030DE and
AP9330DN.

WLAN
Figure 2-174 Appearance of AP7030DE
Console GE1/PoE GE0/PoE DC 12V
2 5 3 4 1 6
Table 2-216 describes interfaces on AP7030DE and AP9330DN.

WLAN
Table 2-216 Interfaces on AP7030DE


AP.

if you hold down the button more
than 3s.
3 GE1/PoE 10/100/1000M bit/s interface: connects

to the wired Ethernet. The interface
can connect to a PoE power supply to
provide power for the AP. PoE power
supplies on two Ethernet ports are
supported.

provide power for the AP. PoE power
supplies on two Ethernet ports are
supported.
5 Console Console interface: connects to a

maintenance terminal for AP
7 Antenna port Connects a 2.4 GHz/5 GHz antenna to

the AP to send and receive wireless
signals.Uses an RP-SMA-K connector
(outside thread, central pin) and
connects to feeder cables in rooms. An
AP9330DN has a total of 12 such
ports.
supply.
The following table describes indicators on the AP7030DE and AP9330DN.

WLAN
Table 2-217 Description about the single indicator and SYS indicator
Default Green Steady The AP is just powered on and the software

status on is not started yet.
after
power-on
Software Green Steady After the system is reset and starts

startup on after uploading the software, the indicator blinks
status blinking green once. Until the software is uploaded
once and started, the indicator remains steady
green.
Running Green Blinking ● The system is running properly, the

status once Ethernet connection is normal, and STAs
every 2s are associated with the AP.
(0.5 Hz) ● The system enters the Uboot CLI.
Blinking The system is running properly, the Ethernet

once connection is normal, and no STA is
every 5s associated with the AP. The system is in low
(0.2 Hz) power consumption state.
Alarm Green Blinking ● The software is being upgraded.

once ● After the software is uploaded and
every started, the AP requests to go online on
0.25s (4 the AC and maintains this state until it
Hz) goes online successfully on the AC
(before the CAPWAP link is established).
● The AP fails to go online on the AC (the
CAPWAP link disconnects).
Fault Red Steady A fault that affects services has occurred,

on such as a DRAM detection failure or system
software loading failure. The fault cannot be
automatically rectified and must be rectified
manually.

WLAN
Table 2-218 Basic specifications of the AP7030DE

Item Description

Weight 1.1 kg


specifications ● PoE power: in compliance with IEEE
802.3at
Maximum power 19 W
consumption NOTE

specifications temperature 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure

Item Description

Weight 1.3 kg


WLAN
Item Description

specifications ● PoE power: in compliance with IEEE
802.3at
Maximum power 19 W
consumption NOTE


temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
02358398 AP7030DE Mainframe(11ac,Smart AP

Indoor,3x3 Double Frequency,Built-in Smart
Antenna,Up to 1.9Gbps data rate,No AC/DC
adapter)
02358399 AP7030DE Bundle(11ac,Smart AP Indoor,

3x3 Double Frequency,Built-in Smart
Antenna,Up to 1.9Gbps data rate,AC/DC
adapter)
02350CFC AP9330DN Mainframe(11ac,Distributed AP

Indoor,Double Frequency,12 Ports,External
Antenna,No AC/DC adapter)
02350CFD AP9330DN Bundle(11ac,Distributed AP

Indoor,Double Frequency,12 Ports,External
Antenna,AC/DC adapter)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-220 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label
● The type and quantity of items in the packing carton varies according to the device model.
● If a PoE adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For PoE adapter models, see
6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.

WLAN

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
Cons
ole
GE1/
PoE
GE0/
PoE
DC
12V
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

a
c

WLAN
Cons
ole
GE1/
PoE
GE0/
PoE
DC
12V

c
the AP.

WLAN
Figures in Figure 2-180 and Figure 2-181 show the appearance of AP7030DE and
AP9330DN.
Figure 2-180 Appearance of AP7030DE
4 1 2

3
3 4 1 2 3
Table 2-222 describes cable connections of AP7030DE and AP9330DN.

WLAN

1 Network cable ● CAT5e cables or higher must be

used.
● Ensure that the AP is connected to
the Ethernet using the Ethernet
cable that works properly. If the
fail to work. Before connecting an
Ethernet cable to the AP, use the
cable test tool to check whether the
cable is qualified. If the cable is
2 DC power adapter ● The AP supports the PoE power

supply and DC power supply.
● To connect the AP to a DC power
source, use the power adapter
delivered with the AP; otherwise,
the AP maybe damaged.
3 RF cable Uses an RP-SMA female connector and

connects to the feeder cable in rooms.
An AP9330DN has a total of twelve
such ports.
4 Ground cable Grounds the AP. The M4 connector of

the ground cable is connected to the
AP and the other connector is
connected to the protection ground.
● The AP7030DE and AP9330DN use a metal shell, which may induce lightning stroke and
surge due to improper Ethernet cable deployment. Therefore, the AP7030DE and
AP9330DN must be grounded to avoid electric shock.
● When PoE and power adapter power supplies are available, the devices are
preferentially powered by the power adapter.
● The AP9330DN can use only a 5 m or 10 m feeder and a box antenna, but cannot use a
non-Huawei feeder.
adapter supports the maximum power consumption of the AP. Otherwise, the AP may
restart due to insufficient power.

WLAN
cables.
Pay attention to the following points when installing RF cables
The AP9330DN is delivered with 240 series super-flexible feeder cables whose
length is 5 m, 10 m. No feeder cables longer than 20 m are provided. The longer
the feeder cable, the weaker the signal strength within the antenna coverage
range. The cabling method in the following figure is recommended. The feeder
cable should be as short as possible. Bend radius requirements: > 30 mm.
Room Room Room
Indoor Indoor Indoor

antenna antenna antenna
Short feeder cable Short feeder cable
Long feeder cable

AP9330DN
Long feeder cable
Short feeder cable Short feeder cable
Indoor Indoor Indoor

antenna antenna antenna
Room Room Room
An unused antenna port needs to be connected with the RF load of 50Ω to

prevent radio interference. Huawei offers the RF load of 50Ω for you to purchase,
the BOM is 27110089.
Pay attention to the following points when installing ground cable

WLAN

between them.
terminal.
1. Cut the ground cable into a proper length and use the M4 OT terminal to
connect to the AP. The OT terminal used to connect to the ground terminal
depends on site requirements.
To tighten the screws with a torque on the ground bar,

● M4: 1.4N m.
● M6: 4.8N m.
● M8: 12N m.
2. The equipment functions properly when the ground resistance is less than 10
ohms.
Connecting the
ground bar

WLAN
Security lock
Lock hole

corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item



cramped firmly.


WLAN
No. Check Item


The AP7030DE supports the DC power supply and PoE power supply. You can
select the power supply mode as required.
Checking Before Power-on

on the AP:
supply.
● The PoE power supply device is well grounded if the AP uses the PoE power
supply.
Indicator Status


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP7050DE)
The AP7050DE supports 4×4 MU-MIMO, provides comprehensive service support

capabilities, and features high reliability, high security, simple network
deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration, as well as real-time
management and maintenance, which meets network deployment requirements.
The AP complies with the 802.11ac Wave 2 protocol and can provide up to 2.53
Gbit/s theoretical bandwidth for wireless users, greatly improving user experience.
The AP7050DE can provide high-performance wireless service for large- to

medium-sized enterprises in high-density scenarios such as mobile office,
elementary education, and higher education scenarios. The AP can be deployed
flexibly based on site environments.
Figure 2-182 shows the appearance of the AP7050DE.
Figure 2-182 Appearance of the AP7050DE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 2-224 describes interfaces on the AP7050DE.

WLAN


seconds.

power.

4 Ground Connects the AP to a ground cable.

screw
6 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000M port: connects to the wired Ethernet.

The port can connect to a PoE power supply device
to provide power for APs.
supply.
The AP7050DE provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-183.

WLAN

Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-226 provides basic specifications of the AP7050DE.
Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H 53 mm x 220 mm x 220 mm (2.09 in. x 8.66

s
Weight 1.3 kg


s 802.3at
Maximum 24 W (excluding the output power of the USB

power port)
consumption NOTE

WLAN
Item Description

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50082932 AP7050DE Mainframe(11ac wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual

Band,smart Antenna,Bluetooth,USB)
50082933 AP7050DE-USA Mainframe(11ac wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual

Band,smart Antenna,BT,USB)
2.31.1.5 Removing an AP

c

WLAN
the AP.
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-227 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● OT terminal
● DC power adapter (optional)
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3


WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
Figure 2-188 Appearance of the AP7050DE
1 2 3 4

WLAN

Device

of 2.5 W power.
2 Ground cable Connects the AP to the ground.

● The service network cable cannot be connected
to the console port; otherwise, the AP may be
damaged when using PoE power supply. The
network cable length cannot exceed 100 m.

may be damaged.
other.


WLAN
Connecting the Ground Cable (Optional)

Use ground screws and ground cables to ground the AP. The ground cables need
to be prepared on site. The M4 OT terminal is used to connect to the AP and M6
OT terminals to the ground bar. The type of OT terminals can also be determined
according to site surveys. Cut the cable into the required length according to site
conditions.
Tighten the OT terminal for the AP with a torque of 1.4 N•m. The tightening
torque for the ground bar varies according to the OT terminals used.
● M4: 1.4 N•m
● M6: 4.8 N•m
● M8: 12 N•m
between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.
No. Check Item



WLAN
No. Check Item

cramped firmly.





faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP7050DN-E)

The AP7050DN-E has the following advantages:
● 4x4 MU-MIMO
● High security
In compliance with IEEE 802.11ac Wave 2, the AP7050DN-E supports a theoretical
rate of up to 2.53 Gbit/s. In addition, it has 2.5GE upstream ports, greatly
improving wireless user experience.
The AP7050DN-E provides high quality wireless services for scenarios such as
education and large campuses. It provides flexible distribution options in different
environments.

WLAN
4
2 3 5 6 7 8
Table 2-231 describes interfaces on the AP7050DN-E.


power.

seconds.

4 Ground Connects the AP to a ground cable.

screw

WLAN
5 GE/PoE_OUT 10/100/1000M port used to connect to the wired

Ethernet. The port can supply PoE power to
downlink devices, such as pico base stations.
NOTE
● The GE/PoE_OUT port provides the maximum power of
45 W, and complies with the 802.3af and 802.3at
protocols.
● To supply power to a pico base station through the GE/
PoE_OUT port, disable Wi-Fi supply on the pico base
station first.
6 2.5GE/ 100/1000/2500M port used to connect to the wired

PoE_IN Ethernet. The port can connect to a PoE power
supply to provide power for APs, and supports UPoE
input.
● When UPoE power input is used, connect the
interface to a Huawei switch that supports UPoE
output.
● When DC power input is used, connect the
interface to an AC or upper-layer switch.
NOTE
If the port works in 100M mode, it cannot be connected to
remote devices working at a rate of 100 Mbit/s.
● The AP supports the following power supply modes: UPoE power supply and DC power
supply.
The AP7050DN-E provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-190.

WLAN
Indicator

or



Hz)

WLAN

or

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 2-233 provides basic specifications of the AP7050DN-E.

Item Description

s
Weight 1.47 kg


WLAN
Item Description
Power Power input ● DC: 48 V ± 2.4 V

s 802.3at/bt
Maximum ● DC/802.3bt power supply: 30.6 W

power (excluding the output power of the USB
consumption port or PoE_OUT port)
● 802.3at power supply: 24.3 W (The USB
and PoE_OUT functions are unavailable.)
NOTE

m.
NOTE
The operating temperature ranges from 0°C to 40°C
when the AP is installed together with a pico base
station.

temperature

humidity

pressure
02350PKF AP7050DN-E Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Enhanced AP Indoor,

4x4 Double Frequency,USB Port,Support Poe out, Built-in
Antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-234 Tools


WLAN

WLAN
Start
Determine the
Install an AP and connect

cables
Connect to a Pico

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
If an AP and a pico base station are separately installed, skip the connection to the
pico base station.
● AP device
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
If a hose clamp or a DC power adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For DC
power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN

equipment.


ovens.
those on APs.
Mounting APs on a wall requires sheet metal mounting brackets and expansion
screws. The procedures are as follows:

WLAN
70mm
85mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
four expansion screws into the expansion tubes.

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

the sheet metal mounting bracket and then press the AP downwards to
secure the AP on the bracket.

the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque of 3 N•m).

WLAN
A ceiling must be able to bear a static load of at least 12 kg to support AP installation.
90mm
1. Ceiling tile 2. Screw bracket 3. M6x35 screw

a
b

WLAN
Ensure that the AP is correctly installed on the mounting bracket and there is 200 mm
space above and around the AP for maintenance.
2.32.2.5.3 Installing the Device on a U-rail
1. Remove two ceiling tiles around the U-rail (1). Use M6x80 screws (3) to fix
the screw bracket (2) and the mounting bracket (4) onto the U-rail (with a
tightening torque of 3 N•m).
M6x35 screws can work for a U-rail no higher than 30 mm.
2
1
3
a
b

WLAN
Ensure that the AP is correctly installed on the mounting bracket and there is 200 mm
space above and around the AP for maintenance.
An AP can be installed on a pole using screws or a hose clamp. The pole must
have a diameter of 48 mm to 114 mm and a thickness of at least 2.5 mm. If the
outer diameter of a pole is larger than 75 mm, use a hose clamp for installation
(with a tightening torque of 3 N•m).
UP
When fixing the sheet metal mounting bracket, ensure that the arrows on the label point
upwards.
Installing an AP Using Screws

1. Determine the installation location of an AP and use an M6x80 screw (1) and
a screw bracket (2) to fix the metal mounting bracket onto a pole (with a
tightening torque of 1.2 N•m).
the bracket and hang the AP on the mounting screws. Push the AP downward
to secure the AP on the mounting screws.

WLAN
Installing an AP Using a Hose Clamp

1. Determine the installation location of an AP and use a hose clamp to fix the
metal mounting bracket onto a pole.
clamp to open it.
b c
M6
5N•m
the bracket and hang the AP on the mounting screws. Push the AP downward
to secure the AP on the mounting screws (with a tightening torque of 1.2
N•m).

WLAN
2.32.2.6 Installing an AP and a Pico Base Station Together
An AP and a pico base station cannot be installed together on a concrete ceiling.

1. Use a screw (1) to fix a pico mounting bracket (2) on a connecting plate (3)
(with a tightening torque of 1.2 N•m).
1
3
2
2. Insert the connecting plate into the guide rail of the AP mounting bracket
until you hear a click. Verify that the connecting plate is securely installed by
attempting to pull it out. Connect one end of a network cable to the GE/
PoE_OUT port on the AP (1) and lead the other end of the network cable
through the hole on the pico mounting bracket (2).
● The AP supplies PoE power to the pico base station through this network cable.
● To supply power to a pico base station through the GE/PoE_OUT port, disable Wi-Fi
supply on the pico base station first.

WLAN
22
3. Insert the other end of the network cable into the PoE input port on the pico
base station, hang the shaft of the pico base station on the hook of the
mounting bracket, and push the bottom of the pico base station until you
hear a click.

WLAN
4. Secure the anti-theft screws on the mounting brackets of the AP and pico
base station (with a tightening torque of 1.2 N•m).

WLAN
3 2 1

Device

may be damaged.

WLAN

Device

● The service network cable and UPoE input
cable cannot be connected to the console port.
using UPoE power supply.
● PoE_IN network cables must meet the following
requirements:
– Do not exceed 100 m when no external
device is connected to the AP (no PoE-OUT).
– Use PoE_IN network cables with the
resistance of 12.5 ohm when an external
device is connected to the AP (with
PoE_OUT):
– Do not exceed 100 m when an 802.3af
device is connected to the AP.
– Do not exceed 75 m when an 802.3at
– Do not exceed 54 m when a pico base
station (45 W) is connected to the AP.
– Use PoE_IN network cables with the
resistance of 10 ohm when an external
device is connected to the AP (with
PoE_OUT):
– Do not exceed 95 m when an 802.3at
– Do not exceed 70 m when a pico base
● PoE_OUT network cables must meet the
following requirements:
– Do not exceed 25 m when an 802.3at device
is connected to the AP.
– Do not exceed 0.5 m when a pico base

WLAN

Device

NOTICE
Do not insert a PoE input cable into the GE/PoE_OUT
port.
3 Ground cable Connects the AP to the ground.

of 2.5 W power.
● The AP is powered by either the DC power supply or UPoE power supply.


Use ground screws and ground cables to ground the AP. The ground cables need
to be prepared on site. The M4 OT terminal is used to connect to the AP and M6
OT terminals to the ground bar. The type of OT terminals can also be determined
according to site surveys. Cut the cable into the required length according to site
conditions.
Tighten the OT terminal for the AP with a torque of 1.4 N•m. The tightening
torque for the ground bar varies according to the OT terminals used.
● M4: 1.4 N•m
● M6: 4.8 N•m
● M8: 12 N•m

WLAN

between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.
more details, see Installation Checklist in the appendix.

No. Check Item


cramped firmly.




WLAN


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.


The AP7052DN and AP7152DN have the following advantages:
● 4x4 MU-MIMO
● High security

WLAN

In compliance with IEEE 802.11ac, the AP7052DN and AP7152DN support a
theoretical rate of up to 3.46 Gbit/s, greatly improving wireless user experience.
The AP7052DN and AP7152DN provide highest-quality wireless services for mobile
office, high-density scenarios, elementary education, and higher education. They
can be flexibly deployed in different environments.

Model Appearance
AP705
2DN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN
Model Appearance
AP715 10
2DN
9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
Table 2-239 describes ports on the AP7052DN and AP7152DN.



seconds.


6 5/2.5GE/ 100M/1000M/2.5G/5G port that connects to the

PoE_IN wired Ethernet and supports PoE input.
8 Radio port Connects an antenna to an IoT card through a radio

cable.

WLAN
9 2.4G/5G Connects a 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz antenna to the AP to

send and receive wireless signals. The port type is
RP-SMA-K. The port is applicable only to an AP that
10 5G Connects a 5 GHz antenna to the AP to send and

receive wireless signals. The port type is RP-SMA-K.
The port is applicable only to an AP that supports
external antennas.
supply.
The AP7052DN and AP7152DN provide only a single indicator, as shown in Figure
2-194.
Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Item Description

s
Weight ● AP7052DN: 1.68 kg
● AP7152DN: 1.7 kg
System 512 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3at/bt
Maximum ● DC/802.3bt power supply: 33 W (excluding

power the output power of the USB port)
consumption ● 802.3at power supply: 25.5 W (The USB
5/2.5GE/PoE_IN decreases to 2.5 Gbit/s. The
IoT card power is lower than 0.5 W.)
NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure

WLAN
02351KDV AP7052DN Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual-

Band,IoT Expansion,Built-in Antenna)
02351KEA AP7052DN-USA Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual-

Band,IoT Expansion,Built-in Antenna,United States
dedicated)
02351KDX AP7152DN Mainframe(11ac Wave2,Indoor,4X4 Dual-

Band,IoT Expansion,External Antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-242 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.
2.33.2.5 Installing an IoT Card
The AP provides an IoT slot for installing an ANT or RFID card based on customer
requirements.
1. Hold the buckle on the bottom cover of the AP, and remove the cover and
plastic plugs. The number of rubber plugs to be removed depends on the
number of radio cables.
rubber plugs

WLAN
Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove the cover. Insert the flat-head screwdriver under the
cover buckle and lever the buckle.
2. Place an IoT card in the slot and tighten the card using M2.5x6 screws (with a
tightening torque of 0.3 Nm).
3
1 2
1. AP 2. IoT card 3. M2.5x6 screws

3. Connect an IoT antenna with the MMCX connector of an IoT card, and slide
the IoT card cover to secure the IoT card. When installing the IoT card cover,
insert the protrusion on the cover into the opening on the AP. Then press the
protrusion until you hear a click sound.

WLAN
● The diagonal size of a hexagon SMA connector must be less than or equal to 8 mm;
otherwise, the cable cannot be installed.
● The ANT card has one radio port, and the RFID card has two.

56 mm
85 mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

b
a

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

WLAN

a
c
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm

WLAN
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

a
c

WLAN
2.33.2.6.4 Installing an AP into a Ceiling
An AP can be installed in a removable or irremovable ceiling. For details, see

Installing an AP in a Removable Ceiling and Installing an AP in an
Irremovable Ceiling.
● This mode is not applicable to the AP with external antennas (including IoT card antennas
and AP antennas).
● You need to purchase a plastic enclosure, mounting bracket, and other accessories
separately. The part number is 21242880.
● A ceiling needs to bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and mounting
bracket without damage. When the total weight of the device and mounting bracket is less
than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the ceiling must be greater than or equal to 5
kg.
● The screws provided for ceiling-mounting of APs are 30 mm long and can be used to fix an
AP on a ceiling no thicker than 15 mm. To install APs on thicker ceilings, you need to
purchase longer screws.
Installing an AP in a Removable Ceiling

1. Remove a ceiling tile, draw the AP mounting position on the ceiling tile using
an opening mold, and cut an opening.
2. Use M4x30 screws to tighten the mounting bracket, ceiling tile, and clamp 1
to the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm).

WLAN
1
2
3 4
1. Ceiling tile 2. Clamp 1 3. Mounting bracket 4. M4x30 screws
3. Install the ceiling tile. For details, see Connect the cables. For details,
see2.33.2.7 Cable Connection.
b
a
Ensure that the AP's network interfaces point to the same direction as the spring clip of the
mounting bracket. Otherwise, installation cannot continue.
5. Install the plastic enclosure. Ensure that the clamping hook of the enclosure
points to the same direction as the AP's network interfaces. Push the
enclosure vertically until the enclosure surface is aligned with that of the AP
(you can hear a click).

WLAN
Installing an AP in an Irremovable Ceiling

1. Draw the AP mounting position on the ceiling tile using an opening mold and
cut an opening.
2. Use clamp 1 to align with the dent of the opening on the ceiling tile and
mark the two holes in the middle of clamp 1. Drill two holes with a diameter
of 5 mm on both sides of the opening on the ceiling tile. Use four M4x30
screws to tighten clamps 1 and 2 to the ceiling tile (with a tightening torque
of 1.2 Nm).
1 2
1. Ceiling tile 2. Clamp 1 3. Clamp 2 4. M4x30 screws
3. Install the mounting bracket, cables, AP, and enclosure. For details, see steps
2, 3, 4, and 5 in Installing an AP in a Removable Ceiling.

WLAN

c
uninstall the AP.

Model Appearance
AP705
2DN
1 2 3

WLAN
Model Appearance
AP715 6
2DN
5 1 2 3 5

Device

Cables.

may be damaged.

WLAN

Device
4 RF cable Connects an antenna to an IoT card through a

radio cable.
5 Antenna Connects a 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz antenna to the AP to

send and receive wireless signals. The port type is
N-type female. The port is applicable only to an
AP that supports external antennas.
6 Antenna Connects a 5 GHz antenna to the AP to send and

receive wireless signals. The port type is N-type
female. The port is applicable only to an AP that
● No priorities are distinguished for DC and PoE power supply modes, DC and GE/PoE_IN
support HSB.
● Two PoE channels have no priority and can serve as HSB for each other when they have the
same input power type.


Distance

(UTP)

WLAN

Distance

100 m, this network
switches:
● S5720-28X-PWH-LI-
AC
● S6720-32C-PWH-SI-
AC
● S6720-32C-PWH-SI
NOTE
200 m.

30 m of cables is
bundled in 6-a-1
mode.)
bundled.)
● 100 m (Each cable is
bundled separately.)
CAT5E STP 100 m

WLAN
poses high risks.
Connecting Antennas
the 2.4G/5G RF ports on the AP, tighten the nuts (with a torque of 0.8 N m), and
adjust antenna angles as required.
Do not connect the antennas delivered in the installation accessory package of the AP to 5G
antenna interfaces. Otherwise, the AP and antennas may be damaged. The 5G antenna
interfaces can be connected only to remote antennas through feeder cables.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN


1 mm.

WLAN
No. Check Item




faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AP7060DN)

The AP7060DN adopts next-generation technologies. It supports 4x4 MU-MIMO
on the 2.4 GHz band and 8x8 MU-MIMO on the 5 GHz band. The AP provides
comprehensive service support capabilities, and features high reliability, high
security, simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration,
as well as real-time management and maintenance, which meets network
deployment requirements. The AP7060DN complies with 802.11ax and can provide
up to 6 Gbit/s theoretical bandwidth for STAs, greatly improving user experience.
The AP7060DN provides highest-quality wireless services for mobile office, high-
density scenarios, elementary education, and higher education. They provide
flexible distribution options in different environments.
When working in cloud mode, the AP7060DN needs to cooperate with the Agile
Controller-Campus.

8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 2-248 describes ports on the AP7060DN.

WLAN


seconds.

5 10 GE/ 100M/1000M/2.5G/5G/10G port that connects to

PoE_IN the wired Ethernet and supports PoE input.
6 GE 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

Ethernet.
8 IoT extended Connects to an IoT module.

port
supply.
2.34.1.2 IoT Module

Figure 2-200 shows the appearance of an IoT module.
Figure 2-200 Appearance of an IoT module

3

WLAN
4
5
5
No. Description
1 External SMA antenna interface of the IoT

module
2 Rubber plug.
3 IoT expansion interface

NOTE
This interface is defined by Huawei and can be
shared by signal transmission and power supply.
4 IoT card slot.
5 Antenna buckle.
Table 2-249 lists physical specifications of an IoT module.
Table 2-249 Physical specifications of an IoT module

Item Description
Dimensions (H x W x 45.7 mm x 218.0 mm x 91.0 mm

D)

WLAN
Item Description
Weight ● MT600-ESL: 380.6 g

● MT600-AM: 373.6 g
● MT600: 368 g
Maximum power ● MT600-ESL: 1 W

consumption ● MT600-AM: 0.735 W
● MT600: 0.3 W
Operating temperature ● -60 m to +1800 m: -10°C to +50°C

and altitude ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature decreases by 1°C
every time the altitude increases 300 m.
Operating humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Working band ISM band 2.4 GHz to 2.4835 GHz

NOTE
This working band is applicable only to the MT600-ESL and
MT600-AM.
Indicator

WLAN

or



Hz)

r state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Table 2-251 provides basic specifications of the AP7060DN.
Item Description

s
Weight 1.8 kg
System 2 GB DDR4
memory

s 802.3bt/at
Maximum 30 W (excluding the output power of the USB

power port or IoT card port)
consumption NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
02351TYR AP7060DN mainframe (11ax, indoor, 2.4G 4x4 + 5G 8x8

dual bands, built-in antenna, 10GE+GE, USB, IoT slot, BLE)

WLAN
50083891 IoT module, MT600 (universal module)
50083593 IoT module, MT600-ESL(2400~2483.5MHz frequency, ESL,

built-in antenna)
50083595 IoT module, MT600-AM(2400~2483.5MHz frequency,

asset management, built-in antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-252 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label
● (Optional) IoT module
– MT600-ESL/MT600-AM: equipment, screw plug, and quick start guide
– MT600: equipment, screw plug, screw, antenna, and quick start guide

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN

ovens.
those on APs.
2.34.2.5 Installing an IoT Card (MT600)
There are two IoT slots in an MT600, which can accommodate the single-slot or
dual-slot card. Depending on card characteristics, an IoT card can be installed in
one-cable per card or two-cable per card mode. Users needs to install IoT cards
onsite as required.
One-Cable per Card

This installation mode is applicable to single-radio IoT cards (single-slot or dual-
slot).
1. Open the upper and lower covers of an IoT module, as shown in the following
figure.
2. Slide the card into the slot, as shown in the figure. Secure the card using four
M2 screws.
M2
a
0.08N•m
b

WLAN
A dual-slot card is used as an example. If a single-slot card is used, install it in the left
slot shown in step 2, and you only need to tighten the two screws.
3. Insert an antenna into the clips on both sides of the shell, fasten the antenna,
and insert and fasten a radio cable into the corresponding radio port.
a
Antenna clip
b
otherwise, the radio cable cannot be installed.
● The radio cables within the shell must be arranged in sequence to prevent them from
being pressed during the installation of the upper and lower shells.
4. Close the upper and lower shells of the IoT module, and tighten the shells
using four ST2.6X10 torx screws with a tightening torque of 0.4 N•m.
The tightening torque cannot exceed 0.4 N•m. Otherwise, thread stripping may occur.

WLAN
Two-Cable per Card

This installation mode is applicable to dual-radio IoT cards (single-slot or dual-
slot).
1. Open the upper and lower covers of an IoT module, as shown in the following
figure.
2. Slide the card into the slot, as shown in the figure. Secure the card using two
M2 screws.
M2
a 0.08N•m
For a dual-slot dual-radio IoT card, secure the four screws in the corresponding slots.
3. Insert an antenna into the buckles on both sides of the shell, insert the radio
cable into the corresponding radio port, and fasten the cable.

WLAN
a
b
a
c c
otherwise, the radio cable cannot be installed.
● The radio cables within the shell must be arranged in sequence to prevent them from
being pressed during the installation of the upper and lower shells.
4. Close the upper and lower shells of the IoT module, and tighten the shells
using four ST2.6X10 torx screws with a tightening torque of 0.4 N•m.
The tightening torque cannot exceed 0.4 N•m. Otherwise, thread stripping may occur.
Installing an External Antenna

To install an external antenna, insert a radio cable into the slot and lead it out
from the shell, as shown in the figure. Ensure that the cable connector is aligned
with the hole on the shell. The installation materials for external antennas need to
be purchased separately.

WLAN
2.34.2.6 Installing an IoT Module
The AP7060DN can expand IoT functions through IoT modules. Install an IoT
module as follows:
1. Push the latch on the AP and remove the protective cover.
latch
2. Install the IoT module to the AP in the direction shown in the following figure.
3. Use a T8 screwdriver to tighten the AP and the IoT module through two long
bolts. The tightening torque is 0.7 N•m. Insert the two screw hole plugs to the
screw holes.

WLAN
56 mm
85 mm

WLAN

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m


WLAN
b
a
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
c

c

WLAN
the AP.

4
1 2 3

Device


WLAN

Device
cannot be connected to the console port. PoE
input cable cannot be connected to the GE port.
Cables.

may be damaged.
4 IoT expansion Accommodates an IoT module.

interface
No priorities are distinguished for DC and PoE power supply modes.

WLAN

Distance

(UTP)

100 m, this network
switches:
● S5720-28X-PWH-LI-
AC
● S6720-32C-PWH-SI-
AC
● S6720-32C-PWH-SI
NOTE
200 m.

30 m of cables is
bundled in 6-a-1
mode.)
bundled.)
Not recommended due
to high risk
CAT5E STP 100 m

Connecting UTP network
cables to 5GE interfaces
poses high risks and is
not recommended.
10GE CAT6A F/UTP 100 m

WLAN

Distance
CAT6A STP 100 m
CAT7 100 m
poses high risks.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m

WLAN
● M8: 12 N m
between them.
terminal.

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item




WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AirEngine 5760-10)

About This Chapter
The AirEngine 5760-10 has the following advantages:
● High security
In compliance with 802.11ac, the AirEngine 5760-10 can provide gigabit access for
The AirEngine 5760-10 provide basic 802.11b/g/n/a/ac/ax access through 2.4G
+ 5G for electronic classrooms in elementary education, high-density scenarios,
shopping malls, and supermarkets. The AirEngine 5760-10 can be flexibly
deployed in different environments and can work in hybrid mode (AP + bridge).

Figure 2-207 shows the appearance of the AirEngine 5760-10.

WLAN
Figure 2-207 Appearance of the AirEngine 5760-10
Table 2-257 describes interfaces on the AirEngine 5760-10.

2 USB port Connects to a USB flash drive or an IoT module.


seconds.
supply.

WLAN

The AirEngine 5760-10 provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 2-208.

or
Indicato - White Steady Default status after power-on.

r on The AP is just powered on and the
- White Steady Software startup status.

once blinks white once. Until the software is
remains steady white.
- White Blinkin Running status.

g once ● The system is running properly, the
Hz)
Blinkin Running status.

g once The system is running properly, the
state.

WLAN

or
- White Blinkin Alarm.

g once ● The software is being upgraded.
every
Hz) started, the AP requests to go online
if it works in Fit AP or cloud-based
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

Table 2-259 provides basic specifications of the AirEngine 5760-10.

Item Description

Weight 1.05 kg
System memory ● 1024MB DDR4 16bit

● 16MB NOR FLASH +128MB NAND FLASH

specifications ● PoE power supply: in compliance with
IEEE 802.3at/af

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum 15.8W (excluding the output power of the

power USB port or IoT card port)
consumption NOTE

specifications temperature ● 1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature
decreases by 1°C every time the altitude
increases 300 m.

temperature

humidity

pressure

02352UBR AirEngine 5760-10 mainframe (11ax, indoor, 2x2 dual

bands, built-in smart antenna, GE, USB, BLE)

Safety Precautions

WLAN
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 2-260 Tools


WLAN



WLAN
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label
If a PoE adapter or a DC power adapter is required, you need to purchase it separately. For
PoE adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.

user terminals.

WLAN
residents.

ovens.
If antennas are embedded into APs, the deployment distance requirements on the antennas
are those on APs.
Remove the protective film on the surface before installation to prevent electrostatic
discharge.
● The wall can bear the weight of four times the total weight of the device and mounting
bracket without damage. When the total weight of the device and mounting bracket is
less than 1.25 kg, the load-bearing capability of the wall must be greater than or equal
to 50 N.
● When the tightening torx of a screw reaches 3.5 N·m, the screw still properly works,

WLAN
1. Determine the installation position. Mark the position of hole H.

three expansion screws into the expansion tubes.
4. Connect and properly sort cables. For details, see 2.35.2.6 Cable Connection.
5. Install the AP vertically into the mounting bracket and slide it downwards
until you hear a click. The installation is complete.

WLAN
● After the device is installed, press the lever vertically to the mounting bracket.
M3x12 screws with a torque of 0.5 N m. This prevents the AP from falling off due to
vibrations. In normal scenarios, you do not need to install these screws.

must be greater than or equal to 50 N.
1. Measure the width of a T-rail. The common widths of 15 mm, 24 mm, and 38
mm correspond to the holes 15, 24, and 38 on the mounting bracket,
respectively. The following uses a flat-edge T-rail of 24 mm as an example.

WLAN
The mounting bracket must be installed on the main T-rail with a strong bearing
capacity.
2. Partially tighten the M3X6.2 security screw to the T-rail bracket.
3. Slide the T-rail bracket into the mounting bracket according to the sequence
shown in the figure.
1. T-rail bracket a 2. T-rail bracket b
4. Secure the M3X8 screw through hole 24 marked in the figure, and secure T-
rail bracket a. The T-rails of 15 mm and 38 mm correspond to holes 15 and 38
on the mounting bracket, respectively.
5. Insert the T-rail bracket a into the T-rail, and slide the bracket b along the slot
until the T-rail is tightened.

WLAN
6. Secure the M3X8 screw through hole 24 marked in the figure, and secure T-
rail bracket b. Tighten the M3X6.2 security screw for installing the bracket.

8. Install the AP vertically into the mounting bracket and slide it downwards
until you hear a click. The installation is complete.
● After the device is installed, press the lever vertically to the mounting bracket.
M3x12 screws with a torque of 0.5 N m. This prevents the AP from falling off due to
vibrations. In normal scenarios, you do not need to install these screws.

WLAN
Remove the security screw. Hold the AP securely. Press the ejector lever and slide
the AP out of the mounting bracket to unlock the AP.
When removing an AP, do not pull out the AP directly. Otherwise, the cables and connectors
may be damaged.

Figure 2-212 Appearance of the AirEngine 5760-10

WLAN

Device
1 Network cable ● CAT5e cables or higher must be used. The

length of a network cable cannot exceed 100 m.

may be damaged.


WLAN

corners is 1 mm.

No. Check Item




WLAN
No. Check Item



faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 3 Outdoor Access Points
3 Outdoor Access Points
About This Chapter

3.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP8050TN-HD)
3.6 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP8130DN-W)


Huawei AP8030DN and AP8130DN are the latest-generation 802.11ac outdoor
access points (APs) that support 3x3 MIMO. The APs are physically hardened and
feature enhanced outdoor coverage performance. They support 2.4 GHz and 5
GHz frequency bands, comply with IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac, and can work as
wireless bridges. The APs can provide services simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz and
5 GHz frequency bands to support more access users. They provide comprehensive
service support capabilities and feature high reliability, high security, simple
network deployment, automatic AC discovery and configuration, and real-time
management and maintenance, which meets requirements of outdoor
deployment.
Huawei AP8030DN and AP8130DN comply with IP67 dustproof and waterproof
protection standards, applicable to coverage scenarios (for example, squares,
pedestrian streets, and amusement parks) and bridging scenarios (for example,
wireless harbors, data backhaul, video surveillance, and train-to-ground backhaul).

WLAN
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 show the appearance of the AP8030DN and
AP8130DN.
Figure 3-1 AP8030DN appearance
*(3R( *( 6)3
:LUHOHVV
:LUHOHVV
6<6
*KLG[RZ
)UTYURK
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
3 4 5 6 8 9 10
*(3R( *( 6)3

:LUHOHVV
:LUHOHVV
6<6
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
*& **& **% **$ *% *$
1 2 3 4 5 6 2 7 7 2 1
*KLG[RZ
)UTYURK
8 9 10
Table 3-1 Descriptions of interfaces

1 5G antenna Connects a 5 GHz antenna to the AP

interface to send and receive wireless signals.
The port type is N-type female.
2 Ground screw for Connects the AP to the ground point

the surge of an external surge protective device.
protective device

WLAN

4 Device ground Connects a ground cable to the AP.

screw
5 GE1 10/100/1000M bit/s interface: connects

can not connect to a PoE power supply
to provide power for the AP.
6 SFP Optical port that supports the 100M/

1000M optical module.
7 2.4G or 5G Connects a 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz antenna

antenna interface to the AP to send and receive wireless
signals. The port type is N-type
female.
8 Console Console: Console interface

and restarts the AP if you hold down
the Reset button for more than 3
seconds.
NOTE
The Reset button is protected by a
waterproof screw. Before pressing the
Reset button, remove the waterproof
screw. Keep the screw properly and install
it again after pressing the Reset button.
● The 2.4G/5G antenna port works at the 2.4 GHz band by default. To switch the working
band of the port to 5 GHz, run the frequency or radio-frequency command.
● The AP8130DN has six antenna ports: 2.4G/5G-A, 2.4G/5G-B, 2.4G/5G-C, 5G-A, 5G-B,
and 5G-C. When the number of antennas is less than 6, connect the antennas to the
antenna ports in the order of 2.4G/5G-A or 5G-A, 2.4G/5G-B or 5G-B, and then 2.4G/5G-
C or 5G-C.
● The AP8130DN offers two internal DB9 ports, which have similar functions as external
GE ports. In device usage, you are advised to connect the device through the GE ports
but not the DB9 ports.
There is a scald warning label attached on the device, warning you not to touch
the device after the device has been operating for a long time.

WLAN
The AP8030DN and AP8130DN provide multiple indicators: SYS indicator, Link/ACT
indicators, and Wireless indicators. The following tables describe indicators on the
AP8030DN and AP8130DN.
W ireless1
W ireless0
GE1
SYS
Link/ACT1
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT0
SYS Indicator
Table 3-2 Descriptions about the SYS indicator

or
Green Steady Default status after power-on.

Green Steady Software startup status.

System once blinks green once. Until the software is
SYS indicato
r
Green Blinking Running status.

Hz)

WLAN

or

state.
Green Blinking Alarm.

every
online.
to go online.
Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Link/ACT Indicators
Link/ACT indicators consist of Link/ACT0, Link/ACT1, and Link/ACT2, showing link
status of interfaces GE0/PoE, GE1, and SFP respectively.
Table 3-3 Description about the Link/ACT indicators
LINK Green Steady The system is running properly, the Ethernet

on connection is normal, and no data is being
transmitted.
ACT Green Blinking The system is running properly, the Ethernet

connection is normal, and the AP is
transmitting data. The indicator blinks more
quickly when more data is being
transmitted.

WLAN
Wireless Indicators
Wireless indicators consist of Wireless0 and Wireless1, showing wireless link status
of the 5 GHz and 2.4/5 GHz radio interfaces respectively.
Table 3-4 Description about the Wireless indicator in traffic volume mode
Color Status Description
Green/yellow Off Radios are disabled, and no STA is

connected to the AP.
Green/yellow Steady on The AP has STAs connected to the 2.4

GHz radio or 5 GHz radio, but no data
is being transmitted.
Green Blinking The AP has STAs connected to the 2.4

GHz radio and is transmitting data.
The indicator blinks more quickly
when more data is being transmitted.
Yellow Blinking The AP has STAs connected to the 5

Green/yellow Blinking The AP has STAs connected to both

alternatively the 2.4 GHz radio and 5 GHz radio.
Table 3-5 Description about the Wireless indicator in signal strength mode
Green/yellow Off The AP is not transmitting or receiving

data or the signal strength is
extremely low.
Blinking once The AP is transmitting or receiving

every 2s (0.5 Hz) data normally, and the signal strength
is low.

every 0.25 data normally, and the signal strength
seconds (4 Hz) is medium.
Steady on The AP is transmitting or receiving

data normally, and the signal strength
is high.

WLAN
When the WDS/Mesh function is enabled on an AP, the blinking frequency of its Wireless
indicator indicates the receive signal strength on the WDS/Mesh connection by default.
After you connect an AP to a WDS/Mesh network, you can run the wifi-light { signal-
strength | traffic } command on the AC to specify whether the Wireless indicator blinking
frequency indicates the receive signal strength or service traffic rate.wifi-light signal-
strength:
● If the Mesh function is enabled on the AP, the blinking frequency of the Wireless
indicator reflects the weakest signal strength of all neighboring APs.
● If WDS is enabled on an AP, the blinking frequency of the Wireless indicator reflects
the strength of signals received from a WDS AP.
● If the AP works in leaf mode, the blinking frequency of the Wireless indicator
reflects the strength of signals received from a middle AP.
● If the AP works in middle mode, the blinking frequency of the Wireless indicator
reflects the strength of signals received from a root AP.
● If the AP works in root mode, the blinking frequency of the Wireless indicator
reflects the weakest signal strength of middle APs.
wifi-light traffic: allows the Wireless indicator to reflect the service traffic volume on the
radio.
When an AP functions as a Fat AP, the Wireless indicator of the AP cannot reflect the signal
strength.

Table 3-6 and Table 3-7 provide basic specifications of the AP8030DN and
AP8130DN.
Item Description

Weight 3.6 kg

● 64 MB Flash
Power Power input PoE power supply in compliance with

specifications IEEE 802.3at

consumption NOTE
Environment Operating -60 m to 1800 m: -40°C to +65°C


temperature

WLAN
Item Description

humidity
IP rating IP67
Wind resistance Up to 149 MPH

pressure

Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H x 100 mm x 290 mm x 260 mm (3.94 in.

specifications W x D) x 11.42 in. x 10.24 in.)
Weight 4.0 kg

● 64 MB Flash


consumption NOTE


temperature

humidity
IP rating IP67

pressure

WLAN
02350ALD AP8030DN Mainframe(11ac,General AP

Outdoor,3x3 Double Frequency,Built-in
Antenna)
02359462 AP8130DN Mainframe(11ac,General AP

Outdoor,3x3 Double Frequency,External
Antenna)
02350RHK AP8130DN Mainframe(11ac,General AP

Antenna,United States dedicated)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 3-8 Tools
Phillips screwdriver ESD gloves Slip-proof glove

WLAN
Marker Hammer drill Claw hammer
Diagonal pliers Wire stripper RJ45 crimping tool
Cable cutter Network cable tester Multimeter
Ladder Utility knife Level
Long measuring tape Adjustable wrench Torque wrench
Safety belt Safety helmet Anti-skid shoes
Waterproof tape Insulation tape Scissors

WLAN
Inner hexagon wrench Optical power meter -

(M4 and M6)
Figure 3-3 shows the flowchart for installing an AP8130DN.
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device

WLAN
● PG connector
● M4x14 hexagon socket head cap screw
● Expansion bolt
● Hose clamp
● OT terminal
● Casting Adjustable-degree solid
● Warranty card
● SN label
● The sheet metal mounting bracket of the AP8030DN supports angle adjustment.
The AP8030DN and AP8130DN can be installed against a pole or a wall. The AP
must be installed by professional installation personnel, and the installation
position is determined according to the site survey.
Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5 show dimensions of the AP8030DN and AP8130DN.

WLAN
290 100
*
*(3R(
*(
260 /LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
6<6
:LUHOHVV
:LUHOHVV
6)3
**

290
100
*
*(3R(
*(
260 /LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
6<6
:LUHOHVV
:LUHOHVV
6)3
**
The AP8030DN and AP8130DN have the same space requirements. Figure 3-6
shows space requirements for installing an AP8130DN.

WLAN
Figure 3-6 Space requirements for installing an AP8130DN (unit: mm)
≥500
≥200
0 ≥200
00
≥1
'HIDXOW
≥500
● Do not install the AP in the place with high temperature, dust, noxious gas, or
unstable voltage, or in the place near flammable or explosive materials and
interference sources such as a large radar station, radio station, and
transformer station.
interference, such as other APs, antennas, and other radio communication
devices. For details, see Table 3-9.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN

Outdoor ● If antennas are mounted to different poles in back-to-back

installation mode, the horizontal distance between them should be at
least 1.5 m.
● If antennas are mounted to the same pole facing the same
direction, the vertical distance between them should be at
least 5 m.
● The antennas should be placed at least 2 km away from the
4G signal tower of the carrier.
High-density Regardless of restrictions of EIRP and FCC standards and the

stadiums number of 5G channels:
● If the antennas are installed at a height less than 20 m, you
are advised to leave at least 12 m between 2.4G antennas
and 4 m between 5G antennas.
● If the antennas are installed 20 m or higher from the
ground, you are advised to leave at least 16 m between
2.4G antennas and 4 m between 5G antennas.
Considering restrictions of EIRP and ETSI standards but not the

number of 5G channels:
those on APs.

WLAN
mounting bracket without damage.
● When the tightening torx of a screw reaches 12 N m, the screw still properly works,
Wall mounting requires use of the mounting bracket and matching expansion
bolts.
● Installing an AP8030DN
● When fixing the sheet metal mounting bracket, ensure that the arrows point upwards on the
label.
● When installing the device on the mounting bracket, ensure that arrows on the mounting
bracket point upward and the device logo is upside up.
Installing an AP8030DN
There are two types of sheet metal mounting brackets for the AP8030DN. The new sheet metal
mounting bracket will gradually replace the old one. The delivered one may be the new type or
the old type, depending on actual situations. The new type of sheet metal mounting bracket is
used as an example here.
● Adjustment range of horizontal and vertical angles for the old type of sheet metal mounting
bracket: ± 30°
● Adjustment range of horizontal and vertical angles for the new type of sheet metal
mounting bracket: ± 40°
1. Fix the wall-side mounting bracket to the wall, adjust the installation position,
and use the marker to mark the drilling positions where expansion bolts are
installed, as shown in the following figure.
118 mm

positions and hammer the expansion bolts into the installation holes until the
flat washers are completely attached to the wall. Then, remove the nut, spring
washer, and flat washer in order.

WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
3. Hang the wall-side mounting bracket on the expansion bolts and use a
wrench to fasten the flat washers, spring washers, and nuts in order.
M6
5 N•m
4. Use four M4x14 hexagon socket head cap screws to fasten the AP-side
mounting bracket to the AP.
M4
1.4 N•m
5. Remove the topmost screw from the wall-side mounting bracket, hang the
AP-side mounting bracket onto the topmost screw, and tighten the screw until

WLAN
the screw passes through the hole of the horizontal scale plate (the screw
should not be too tight).
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
6. Loosen the two screws in the horizontal direction, adjust the horizontal and
vertical angles of the device using the scale plate, and tighten all screws.
75 mm
45 mm
Usually, the device can be fixed by installing two expansion bolts at diagonal positions.

WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
5. Hang the AP with the AP-side mounting bracket to the wall-side mounting
bracket and tighten the screws to secure the AP.
M6
5 N•m
3.1.2.5.2 Pole Mounting
An outdoor AP must be installed on a pole with a diameter of 48 mm to 114 mm

and the difference between the outer and inner diameters should be at least 2.5
mm.

WLAN
label.
There are two types of sheet metal mounting brackets for the AP8030DN. The new sheet metal
mounting bracket will gradually replace the old one. The delivered one may be the new type or
the old type, depending on actual situations. The new type of sheet metal mounting bracket is
used as an example here.
● Adjustment range of horizontal and vertical angles for the old type of sheet metal mounting
bracket: ± 30°
● Adjustment range of horizontal and vertical angles for the new type of sheet metal
mounting bracket: ± 40°
1. Determine the AP installation position and attach the pole-side mounting

bracket on the pole using the hose clamp.
a. Use the M6 hex torque screwdriver to loosen screws on the hose clamp
and lift the lid.
b. Slide the hose clamp through the hole of the mounting bracket, attach it
to the pole, and close the hose clamp.
c. Close the lid.
d. Use the hex torque screwdriver to tighten the screws.
b
c
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
3. Remove the topmost screw from the pole-side mounting bracket, hang the
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
4. Loosen the two screws in the horizontal direction, adjust the horizontal and

WLAN
Mounting an AP on a vertical pole
and lift the lid.
c. Close the lid.
b c
M6
5 N•m
M4
1.4 N•m
3. Hang the AP with the AP-side mounting bracket to the pole-side mounting

WLAN
M6
5 N•m
Mounting an AP on a horizontal pole

The procedure for installing the AP against a horizontal pole is similar to the
procedure for installing the AP against a vertical pole.
3.1.2.6 Connecting Cables

WLAN
Figure 3-7 AP8130DN external cable arrangement

Feed line Feed line Feed line Feed line
Optical fiber Network cable

Feed line Feed line
When connecting cables, take waterproof measures on the following parts: See the
corresponding cable installation guide for the detailed procedure.
● Connection joints of the feeder cable connector (if a surge protective device is used,
take waterproof measures on the connection joint of the antenna and surge protective
device as well as that of the feeder cable and surge protective device.)
● The network cable and optical fiber use waterproof PG connectors and do not need to
be wrapped using tapes.
3.1.2.6.1 Connecting RF Cables
RF cable deployment requirements

● You must connect a 50 ohm RF load to an idle antenna interface to prevent
radio interference, and wrap the RF load with insulation tape and waterproof
tape. Huawei offers 50 ohm RF loads for you to purchase. Huawei offers the
RF load of 50Ω for you to purchase, the BOM is 27110001.

WLAN
● Wrap the RF cable using one-layer PVC insulation tape, three-layer

waterproof adhesive tape, and then three-layer PVC insulation tape.
● When connecting to RF cables, the requirements of bend radius are (1 inch =
25.4 mm):
– RG-8U RF cable: > 150 mm
– 1/2" RF cable: > 50 mm
– 7/8" RF cable: > 250 mm
NOTICE
Tighten the nut of the AP's RF connector with a maximum torque of 1.2 N m.
RF cable connections
1. Antenna interfaces of the AP provide a 5 KA surge protection capability.
Generally, no additional surge protective device needs to be installed, and the
RF cables are directly connected to the antenna interfaces.
Feeder Waterproof
cable tape
2. If a higher surge protection capability is required, the customer can purchase

a surge protective device. When installing the surge protective device, ensure
that it is connected to a ground cable.

WLAN
Surge protection Feeder Waterproof Grounding

device cable tape cable
RF cable waterproofing
1. Wrap a layer of PVC insulation tape around the cable connector from bottom
to top. The tape must cover the entire cable connector.
2. Wrap three-layer waterproof tape over the PVC insulation tape. Wrap the
waterproof tape from bottom to top, from top to bottom, and then from
bottom to top. Wrap each layer of tape tightly.
3. Wrap three-layer PVC insulation tape over the waterproof tape. Wrap the PVC
insulation tape from bottom to top, from top to bottom, and then from
4. Bundle cable ties at both ends of the tape.
PVC insulation tape

Waterproof adhesive tape
● When wrapping the waterproof tape, stretch the tape evenly until the tape turns twice
its original length. When wrapping the PVC insulation tape, do not stretch the tape.
● Wrap each layer of tape tightly and neatly, and ensure that each layer of tape overlaps
more than 50% of the preceding layer.
● Ensure that the side with adhesive tape is covered on the wrapped tape.
● When cutting off the cable tie, reserve an extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm.

WLAN
3.1.2.6.2 Connecting Optical Fibers and Network Cables
Connecting optical fibers
The device can transmit upstream data over optical fibers. The optical fiber is connected to the
device using fiber connectors (purchased independently).
The following figure shows components of an optical fiber connector.
Figure 3-8 Components of an optical fiber connector
(1) Optical fiber (2) Support (3) Rubber ring (4) External connector shell
1. Select an optical cable of a proper length based on onsite cabling.

2. Remove the waterproof block from the rubber ring of the connector, as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 3-9 Removing the waterproof block

WLAN
3. Assemble the connector on the optical fiber.

a. Assemble the external connector shell and support, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-10 Assembling the connector (1)
b. Put the rubber ring on the optical fiber and insert it into the support in
compliance with the direction indicated on the ring, as shown in the
following figure.
Ensure that the arrow on the rubber ring points to the support.
4. Remove the sealing cover of the optical fiber port on the device and insert the
optical fiber into the port. Turn the support to find the correct optical fiber
installation slot and push the support forward (together with the rubber ring)
until the optical fiber is installed to the correct position. Rotate the external
connector shell clockwise until the red ring is not visible, as shown in the
following figure.

WLAN
Figure 3-12 Connecting optical fibers
NOTICE
● Connect the optical fiber correctly; otherwise, the optical fiber may be
damaged.
● Bundle the optical fibers with binding tapes every 1 m.
Connecting network cables

1. Use a shielded straight-through cable (CAT5E or higher) with a diameter of
6.8 mm. Cut the cable into a proper length based on the distance between
the AP and the PSE device, strip the cables on both ends, and crimp the wires
into RJ45 connectors.
2. Make a network cable onsite according to pin assignment in Table 3-10.
Otherwise, the communication quality is affected even if devices can be
connected.
Table 3-10 Pin assignment
X1 Pin Wire Color X2 Pin
1 White and orange 1
2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8

WLAN
Actually, APs use shielded straight-through network cables, which are connected in the
same way as unshielded network cables.
3. Put the network cable through waterproof PG connectors. Connect the RJ45
connector to the ETH/PoE interface on the AP and secure the waterproof PG
connector. See figures b, c, and d.
Figure 3-13 Connecting network cables
a b c d
a b c d
● Ensure that the RJ45 connector is correctly connected to the AP. Otherwise, the
network cable may be damaged. Before removing the network cable from the AP,
remove the waterproof PG connector first and then remove the RJ45 connector.
● If a PoE adapter is used in outdoor scenarios, it must be installed in a waterproof
box.
● Tighten the component b of the PG connector to the AP with a tightening torque
of 2.5 N m, and the component d to the component b with a tightening torque of
1.8 N m.
● The waterproof PG connector adapts to a network cable with a diameter of 6.8
mm.
3.1.2.6.3 Connecting Ground Cables
interference, and electrostatic charges. Outdoor APs support built-in surge
protection on all interfaces, but the surge protection works only when the outdoor
APs are grounded.

WLAN
Requirements for laying out ground cables

between them.
terminal.
Ground cable connections


● M4: 1.4N•m.
● M6: 4.8N•m.
● M8: 12N•m.
2. After the ground cable is connected, verify that the electrical resistance
between the ground terminal and ground point is less than 5 ohms on a
multimeter. The grounding resistance in an area with a high earth resistance
rate should be less than 10 ohms.
Connecting the
ground bar

WLAN
Grounding shielded network cables

Using shielded network cables can improve surge protection performance of the
AP. To connect the cable, cut the shield layer open, connect the cable to the
ground clip, and wrap the cable with waterproof and ESD tapes.
3.1.2.6.4 Installing Outdoor Antennas
Two types of outdoor antennas are available: directional outdoor antenna and
omnidirectional outdoor antenna. Omnidirectional antennas can be directly
installed on APs.
Installing a directional outdoor antenna against a pole

Pay attention to the following points when installing a directional antenna:
1. An outdoor antenna must be installed on a pole with a diameter of 30 mm to
50 mm and the thickness must be at least 2.5 mm. A 50 mm diameter pole
made of round steel is usually used.
2. Weld the lightning rod on the top of the antenna pole.
3. Install the antenna pole on a parapet or concrete bed on the roof of the
building.
4. Use a 40 mm x 4 mm flat steel to connect the antenna pole to an earth mat.
5. Secure the directional outdoor antenna on the pole with an antenna support.
6. Keep the pole vertical to the ground during the installation.
See Figure 3-14 below for how a directional outdoor antenna is installed on a
pole.
● If the roof of the building is surrounded by parapets of no less than 1.2 m
high, fix the pole on a parapet with expansion screws, and then fix the
directional outdoor antenna on the pole with an antenna support.
● If the roof of the building is surrounded by parapets of less than 1.2 m high,
fix the pole on a parapet and on the ground with expansion screws, and then
fix the directional outdoor antenna on the pole with an antenna support.

WLAN
● If there is no parapet around the roof, fix the pole on the ground or a
concrete bed with expansion screws and steel wires, and then fix the
Figure 3-14 Installing a directional outdoor antenna against a pole

Lightning rod
Antenna support
Outdoor
directional Pole
antenna
Flat steel Steel wire

Parapet
Connected to Concrete
the earth mat bed
Parapet height > 1.2 m Parapet height < 1.2 m No parapet
Figure 3-15 shows outdoor AP installation scenarios. The distance between 5 GHz
antenna and 2.4 GHz antenna should be more than 0.5 m.
Figure 3-15 Outdoor AP installation scenarios

Lightning
rod
5GHz
antenna
RF cable >0.5m
2.4GHz
antenna
RF cable AP
Ultra-5 cable
AC Power
100V~240V
Ground wire
PoE adapter
Installing an omnidirectional outdoor antenna against a pole

Pay attention to the following points when installing an omnidirectional antenna:
2. The top of pole must be aligned with the hose clamp at the bottom of the
antenna.

WLAN
3. The antenna must be installed at a proper height to provide sufficient signal

coverage, and the top of the antenna must be within the 45 degrees
protection angle of the lightning rod.
4. Do not weld a lightning rod directly on the antenna pole (there should not be
metal subjects within 1 m around an omnidirectional antenna). Instead,
install an independent lightning rod between two omnidirectional antenna
poles. Adjust the height of the lightning rod to ensure that the
omnidirectional antennas are covered in the protection angle.
5. The distance between two omnidirectional antennas should be more than 0.5
m.
Figure 3-16 shows installation of an omnidirectional outdoor antenna.
Figure 3-16 Installing an omnidirectional outdoor antenna
Lightning rod
Protection
angle
Omnidirectional >1.0m
antenna
Hose clamp
Antenna pole
If antennas are installed on a metal pole such as a steel pole, you do not need to install a
lightning rod, as shown on the right in Figure 3-16.
Installing Omnidirectional Outdoor Antennas on an AP

Figure 3-17 shows installation of omnidirectional outdoor antennas on an AP.
Figure 3-17 Installing omnidirectional outdoor antennas on an AP

WLAN
● When installing an antenna, tightly hold the antenna connector and tighten it using a
torque wrench. The recommended tightening torque is 0.8 N m to 1.0 N m.
● After the antenna is secured, it is normal that some screw threads are left out.
Console/RSS I
Default
Security lock
Lock hole

1 mm.
3.1.2.8 Checking the AP After Installation
Table 3-11 shows the items to be checked after AP installation is complete. For

WLAN
Table 3-11 AP installation checklist
No. Check Item
1 The AP is installed by strictly following the design draft. The

2 The AP is securely installed.
3 Waterproof caps are installed on idle interfaces and securely

fastened.

cramped firmly.



10 PG connectors of network cables and optical fibers are secured

fastened as required.
After the AP is powered on, observe indicators on the AP to determine the system

faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.
device.
3.1.4.2 An Optical Interface Cannot Turn Up
Fault Description
Possible Causes

WLAN

requirements.
speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------


WLAN
Context
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure


WLAN

Huawei AP8050DN and AP8150DN support 2x2 MIMO and offer enhanced
outdoor coverage performance. The ruggedized APs can provide services
simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands to support more access
users, complies with 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac wave2, and can work as wireless bridges.
In addition, the AP8050DN and AP8150DN provide comprehensive service support
capabilities and feature high reliability, high security, simple network deployment,
automatic AC discovery and configuration, and real-time management and
maintenance, which meets requirements of outdoor deployment.
Huawei AP8050DN and AP8150DN comply with IP68 dustproof and waterproof
protection standards, applicable to coverage scenarios (for example, squares,
pedestrian streets, and amusement parks) and bridging scenarios (for example,
wireless harbors, data backhaul, video surveillance, and train-to-ground backhaul).
AP8150DN.
GE0/PoE GE1 SFP
CONSOLE
Defa ult
Link/ACT0
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT1
Wireless0
Wireless1
SYS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GE0/PoE GE1 SFP
CONSOLE
Defa ult
2.4G/5G-A 2.4G/5G-B
Link/ACT0
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT1
Wireless0
Wireless1
SYS
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9

WLAN
5G-B 5G-A
10 2 10

antenna interface to the AP to send and receive wireless
signals. The port type is N-type
female.The port is applicable only to
an AP that supports external antennas.

protective device

input.
4 Device ground Connects the device to a ground cable.

screw
5 GE1 10/100/1000M port that connects to

the wired Ethernet.

7 CONSOLE Connects to a maintenance terminal

management.

button more than 3 seconds.
NOTE

WLAN

interface to send and receive wireless signals.
The port type is N-type female.The
port is applicable only to an AP that
The 2.4G/5G antenna port works at the 2.4 GHz band by default. To switch the working
band of the port to 5 GHz, run the frequency command.

Link/ACT0
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT1
Wireless0
Wireless1
SYS
SYS Indicator

or
System Green Steady Default status after power-on.

SYS indicato on The AP is just powered on and the
r software is not started yet.

WLAN

or


Hz)

state.

every
online.
to go online.
Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Link/ACT Indicators

WLAN


transmitted.

transmitted.
Wireless Indicators
of the 2.4/5 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces respectively.






WLAN

extremely low.

is low.


is high.
strength:
radio.
strength.

WLAN

Item Description

Weight ● AP8050DN: 2 kg
● AP8150DN: 1.95 kg
System memory 256 MB DDR3L
FLASH 4 MB NOR FLASH + 128 MB NAND

FLASH

Maximum power 18 W
consumption NOTE


temperature

humidity
IP rating IP68

pressure
50083261 AP8050DN-USA Mainframe(11ac

wave2,outdoor,2X2Dual Band,Built-in
Antenna)
50083204 AP8050DN Mainframe(11ac wave2,outdoor,

2X2Dual Band,Built-in Antenna)

WLAN
50083263 AP8150DN-USA Mainframe(11ac

wave2,outdoor,2X2Dual Band,External
Antenna)
50083205 AP8150DN Mainframe(11ac wave2,outdoor,

2X2Dual Band,External Antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 3-18 Tools

WLAN

WLAN

(M4 and M6)
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device

WLAN
● PG connector
● Expansion bolt
● Hose clamp
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label
● The sheet metal mounting bracket of the AP8050DN supports angle adjustment.
● Only one PG connector is delivered in the carton. If more PG connectors are required,
purchase them separately.
Outdoor APs can be installed against a pole or a wall. The AP must be installed by
professional installation personnel, and the installation position is determined
according to the site survey.
Space requirements are the same for installing an AP8050DN and an AP8150DN.
Figure 3-27 uses the AP8150DN as an example to illustrate installation space
requirements.
Figure 3-26 shows dimensions of an outdoor AP.

220 100
2.4G/5G-A
GE0/PoE
GE1
220
SYS
Link/ACT0
SFP
Link/ACT1
Link/ACT2
Wireless0
Wireless1
2.4G/5G-B

WLAN
≥500
≥200
Defa ult
≥200
0 0
10
CONSOLE
≥
≥500
residents.
equipment.

WLAN


least 1.5 m.
least 5 m.


those on APs.

WLAN
Mounting kits and expansion bolts are required to install the AP on a wall.
● When fixing the sheet metal mounting bracket, ensure that the arrows point upwards on
the label.
The angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8050DN supports a vertical and horizontal
angle adjusting range of ±40°.
118 mm


WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m
M4
Defa ult
1.4 N•m
CONSOLE

WLAN
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
6. Loosen the M6 screw in the vertical direction, adjust the horizontal and
75 mm
45 mm

WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
5G -A
5G -A 5G-B
5G-B
Defa ult
Defa ult
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
M4
1.4 N•m
5G -A
5G -B
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
5 N•m

mm.

WLAN
● When fixing the sheet metal mounting bracket, ensure that the arrows point upwards on
the label.
The angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8050DN supports a vertical and horizontal
angle adjusting range of ±40°.

clamp to open it.
b
c
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
M4
Defa ult
1.4 N•m
CONSOLE
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
clamp to open it.

WLAN

b c
M6
5 N•m
5G -A
5G -A 5G-B
5G-B
Defa ult
Defa ult
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
M4
1.4 N•m

WLAN
5G -A
5G -B
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
5 N•m

5G -A
5G -B
Defa ult

WLAN

Feed line Feed line
Network cable
Optical fiber
Feed line Feed line
● The AP8050DN has no antenna ports, and requires no radio cable connection.
● When connecting cables, take waterproof measures on connection joints of the feeder
cable connector. (If a surge protective device is used, take waterproof measures on the
connection joint between the antenna and surge protective device as well as that
between the feeder cable and surge protective device.) Use waterproof PG connectors
for the network cable and optical fiber, without the need to wrap the cables with tapes.
For detailed waterproof measures, see the corresponding cable installation guide for the
detailed procedure.
● To facilitate installation, you are advised to install the network cables first and then the
ground cable and antennas.


WLAN

25.4 mm):
– 1/2" RF cable: > 50 mm
– 7/8" RF cable: > 250 mm
NOTICE
Feeder Waterproof
cable tape


WLAN

PVC insulation tape


WLAN


WLAN

following figure.
following figure.
connector shell clockwise until the red ring is not visible
NOTICE
damaged.

WLAN

1. Use a shielded straight-through cable (CAT5E or higher). Cut the cable into a
proper length based on the distance between the AP and the PSE device, strip
the cables on both ends, and crimp the wires into RJ45 connectors.
connected.

2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
a b c d
a b c d

WLAN
box.
1.8 N m.
● The waterproof PG connector adapts to a network cable with a diameter of 6 mm.
APs are grounded.

between them.
terminal.


● M4: 1.4N•m.
● M6: 4.8N•m.
● M8: 12N•m.

WLAN

Connecting the
ground bar

installed on APs.


WLAN

building.
pole.

Lightning rod
Antenna support
Outdoor
directional Pole
antenna

Parapet
the earth mat bed

WLAN

Lightning
rod
5GHz
antenna
RF cable >0.5m
2.4GHz
antenna
RF cable AP
Ultra-5 cable
AC Power
100V~240V
Ground wire
PoE adapter

antenna.
m.

WLAN
Lightning rod
Protection
angle
antenna
Hose clamp
Antenna pole
● If antennas are installed on a metal pole such as a steel pole, you do not need to install
a lightning rod, as shown on the right in Figure 3-36.


WLAN
-A
5G
CONS
OLE
Defa ult
-B
5G
Security lock
Lock hole

1 mm.
No. Check Item


fastened.

cramped firmly.


WLAN
No. Check Item





faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.

WLAN
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.

WLAN
speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------

Context
NOTICE

WLAN

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

(AP8050DN-S)
Huawei AP8050DN-S supports 2x2 MIMO and offer enhanced outdoor coverage
performance. The ruggedized APs can provide services simultaneously on the 2.4
GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands to support more access users, complies with
802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac wave2, and can work as wireless bridges. In addition, the
AP8050DN-S provide comprehensive service support capabilities and feature high
reliability, high security, simple network deployment, automatic AC discovery and
configuration, and real-time management and maintenance, which meets
requirements of outdoor deployment.
Huawei AP8050DN-S comply with IP68 dustproof and waterproof protection

standards, applicable to coverage scenarios (for example, squares, pedestrian
streets, and amusement parks) and bridging scenarios (for example, wireless
harbors, data backhaul, video surveillance, and train-to-ground backhaul).

WLAN
GE0/PoE GE1 SFP
CONSOLE
Defa ult
Link/ACT0
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT1
Wireless0
Wireless1
SYS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

input.

screw

the wired Ethernet.


management.

NOTE

WLAN
The AP8050DN-S provides multiple indicators: SYS indicator, Link/ACT indicators,

and Wireless indicators. The following tables describe indicators on the
AP8050DN-S.

Link/ACT0
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT1
Wireless0
Wireless1
SYS
SYS Indicator

or


System
SYS indicato Green Blinking Running status.
Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Link/ACT Indicators


transmitted.

transmitted.
Wireless Indicators
of the 2.4/5 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces respectively.

WLAN






extremely low.

is low.


is high.

WLAN
strength:
radio.
strength.
Item Description

Weight 2 kg

FLASH

Maximum power 18 W
consumption NOTE


WLAN
Item Description

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP68

pressure
50083262 AP8050DN-S Mainframe(11ac

wave2,outdoor,2X2Dual Band,Built-in
Antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.

WLAN
Tool Preparation
Table 3-28 Tools


WLAN

(M4 and M6)
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● AP device
● PG connector
● Expansion bolt
● Hose clamp
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label
● The sheet metal mounting bracket of the AP8050DN-S supports angle adjustment.
● Only one PG connector is delivered in the carton. If more PG connectors are required,
purchase them separately.
The AP8050DN-S can be installed against a pole or a wall. The AP must be

installed by professional installation personnel, and the installation position is
determined according to the site survey.
Figure 3-45 shows dimensions of the AP8050DN-S.

WLAN
Figure 3-45 Dimensions of an AP8050DN-S (unit: mm)

220 100
GE0/PoE
GE1
220
SYS
Link/ACT0
SFP
Link/ACT1
Link/ACT2
Wireless0
Wireless1
Figure 3-46 shows space requirements for installing an AP8050DN-S.
Figure 3-46 Space requirements for installing an AP8050DN-S (unit: mm)
≥500
≥200
Defa ult
≥200
0 00
CONSOLE
≥1
≥500

WLAN
residents.
equipment.

least 1.5 m.
least 5 m.


those on APs.

WLAN
label.
● The angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8050DN-S supports a vertical and
horizontal angle adjusting range of ±40°.
118 mm


WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m
M4
Defa ult
1.4 N•m
CONSOLE

WLAN
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m

mm.
label.
● The angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8050DN-S supports a vertical and

clamp to open it.

WLAN
b
c
M6
5 N•m
M4
Defa ult
1.4 N•m
CONSOLE

WLAN
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
Figure 3-47 AP8050DN-S external cable arrangement
Network cable
Optical fiber

WLAN
● When connecting cables, the network cable and optical fiber use waterproof PG
connectors and do not need to be wrapped using tapes.


WLAN

following figure.
following figure.

WLAN
NOTICE
damaged.

1. Use a shielded straight-through cable (CAT5E or higher). Cut the cable into a
proper length based on the distance between the AP and the PSE device, strip
the cables on both ends, and crimp the wires into RJ45 connectors.
connected.

2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8

WLAN
a b c d
a b c d
box.
of 2.5 N•m, and the component d to the component b with a tightening torque of
1.8 N•m.
APs are grounded.


WLAN
between them.
terminal.


● M4: 1.4N•m.
● M6: 4.8N•m.
● M8: 12N•m.
Connecting the
ground bar


WLAN

CONS
OLE
Defa ult
Security lock
Lock hole

1 mm.

WLAN
No. Check Item


fastened.

cramped firmly.





WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.
device.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes
requirements.
speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------


WLAN
Context
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN

module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

(AP8050TN-HD)

WLAN

The AP8050TN-HD supports 2x2 MIMO and offers enhanced outdoor coverage
performance. The ruggedized AP complies with IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2
and can provide services simultaneously on three radios on the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
frequency bands to support more access users. The AP8050TN-HD meets outdoor
network deployment requirements with the following advantages:
● High security
The AP8050TN-HD supports IP68 dustproof and waterproof protection, and is
applicable to high-density coverage scenarios such as stadiums, outdoor sports
grounds, and stations.
Figure 3-58 shows the appearance of the AP8050TN-HD.
Figure 3-58 Appearance of the AP8050TN-HD

lt
fa u
De
E
OL
NS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 3-32 describes interfaces on the AP8050TN-HD.

WLAN


NOTE
waterproof screw. Before pressing the Reset
button, remove the waterproof screw. Keep
the screw properly and install it again after
pressing the Reset button.

for AP configuration and management.


the wired Ethernet.

screw

input.
The AP8050TN-HD provides multiple indicators: SYS indicator, LINK/ACT

indicators, and WIRELESS indicators. The following tables describe indicators on
the AP8050TN-HD.

WLAN
SYS Indicator

or



Hz)

System Hz) system is in low power consumption
SYS indicato
state.
r
every
online.
to go online.
Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
LINK/ACT Indicators
LINK/ACT indicators consist of LINK/ACT0, LINK/ACT1, and LINK/ACT2, showing
link status of interfaces GE0/PoE, GE1, and SFP respectively.

transmitted.

transmitted.
WIRELESS Indicators
WIRELESS indicators consist of WIRELESS0 and WIRELESS1, showing wireless link
status of the 2.4/5 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces respectively.






WLAN

extremely low.

is low.


is high.
strength:
radio.
strength.
Table 3-37 provides basic specifications of the AP8050TN-HD.

WLAN

Item Description

Weight 3.23 kg

FLASH

specifications IEEE 802.3at/af
Maximum power ● 802.3at power supply: 19.4 W

consumption ● 802.3af power supply: 12.95 W
NOTE


temperature

humidity
IP rating IP68

pressure
50083481 AP8050TN-HD Mainframe(11ac

Wave2,outdoor,Triple-Radio,Built-in
Antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 3-38 Tools

WLAN

(M4 and M6)

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● PG connector
● Expansion bolt
● Hose clamp
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
The AP8050TN-HD can be installed against a pole or a wall. The AP must be

Figure 3-60 shows dimensions of the AP8050TN-HD.
Figure 3-60 Dimensions of an AP8050TN-HD (unit: mm)

320 100
320
Figure 3-61 shows space requirements for installing an AP8050TN-HD.
Figure 3-61 Space requirements for installing an AP8050TN-HD (unit: mm)
≥500
≥200
0 ≥200
00
≥1
≥500

WLAN
residents.
equipment.

least 1.5 m.
least 5 m.


those on APs.

WLAN
label.
● The angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8050TN-HD supports a vertical and
118 mm
2. Use an 8.5 mm drill bit to drill 45 mm to 50 mm deep holes in the drilling


WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45mm~50mm
M6
5 N•m
M4
Defa ult
1.4N•m
CONSOLE

WLAN
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
M8
5N•m
12N•m

mm.
label.
● The angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8050TN-HD supports a vertical and

clamp to open it.

WLAN
b
c
M6
5 N•m
M4
Defa ult
1.4N•m
CONSOLE

WLAN
Defa ult
CONSOLE
M6
M8
5N•m
12N•m
Figure 3-62 AP8050TN-HD external cable arrangement
Network cable
Optical fiber

WLAN
● When connecting cables, the network cable and optical fiber use waterproof PG
connectors and do not need to be wrapped using tapes.


WLAN

following figure.
following figure.

WLAN
NOTICE
damaged.

1. Use a shielded straight-through cable (CAT5E or higher) with a diameter of 6
mm. Cut the cable into a proper length based on the distance between the AP
and the PSE device, strip the cables on both ends, and crimp the wires into
RJ45 connectors.
connected.

2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
connector to the Ethernet interface on the AP and secure the waterproof PG

WLAN
a b c d
a b c d
box.
1.8 N•m.
APs are grounded.


WLAN
between them.
terminal.


● M4: 1.4N•m.
● M6: 4.8N•m.
● M8: 12N•m.
CONSOLE Defa ult
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the


WLAN
CONSOLE Defa ult
Security lock
CONSOLE Defa ult

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item


fastened.

cramped firmly.





WLAN


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.

WLAN
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.
speed.

WLAN

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------

Context
NOTICE


WLAN

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure


The AP8082DN and AP8182DN support 4x4 MIMO and offer enhanced outdoor
coverage performance. The ruggedized APs support wireless bridges, comply with
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2, and can provide services simultaneously on the
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands to support more access users. The AP8082DN
and AP8182DN meet outdoor network deployment requirements with the
following advantages:
● High security
Huawei AP8082DN and AP8182DN have 5GE/2.5GE uplink ports. The AP8082DN
and AP8182DN support PoE out. Huawei AP8082DN and AP8182DN also have a
built-in Bluetooth module providing the Bluetooth location function.
The AP8082DN and AP8182DN support IP68 dustproof and waterproof protection,
and are applicable to coverage scenarios such as squares, pedestrian streets, and
amusement parks.

WLAN
AP8182DN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN

1 GE/PoE_OUT 10/100/1000M port that connects to

output.
2 5GE/PoE_IN 100M/1000M/2.5G/5G port that

connects to the wired Ethernet and
supports PoE input.

screw


management.

8 2.4G/5G Connects a 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz antenna

to the AP to send and receive wireless
signals.The port type is N-type
9 DUAL-BAND/5G Connects a 5 GHz antenna to the AP

to send and receive wireless
signals.The port type is N-type
● The 2.4G/5G antenna port works at the 2.4 GHz band by default. To switch the working
band of the port to 5 GHz, run the frequency command.
● After using the CONSOLE and Default interfaces, secure a protection cover using a
screw to protect the interfaces against water. The tightening torque of the screw is 0.6
N·m.
There is a scald warning label attached on some devices, warning you not to touch

WLAN
The AP8082DN and AP8182DN provide multiple indicators: SYS indicator,

LINK/ACT indicator, WIRELESS indicator, and DUAL-BAND PORT indicator. The
following tables describe indicators on the AP8082DN and AP8182DN.
● The AP8082DN does not provide the DUAL-BAND PORT indicator.

SYS Indicator

or


System
SYS indicato Green Blinking Running status.
Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
LINK/ACT Indicators
LINK/ACT indicators consist of LINK/ACT0, LINK/ACT1, and LINK/ACT2, showing
the link status of interfaces 5GE/PoE_IN, GE/PoE_OUT, SFP respectively.
The AP Green Steady The Ethernet connection is normal, and no

serves as on data is being transmitted. The PoE OUT
a PSE to function is available.
supply
power to Blinking The Ethernet connection is normal, and the
PDs AP is transmitting data. The indicator blinks
through more quickly when more data is being
the transmitted. The PoE OUT function is
PoE_OUT available.
port. Yellow Steady The Ethernet connection fails, and the PoE
on OUT function is unavailable.
Off The Ethernet connection fails, and the PoE

OUT function is available.
Blinking The Ethernet connection fails, and the PoE

OUT function is faulty.

WLAN
The AP Green Steady The Ethernet connection is normal, and no

does not on data is being transmitted.
provide
the PoE Blinking The Ethernet connection is normal, and the
OUT AP is transmitting data. The indicator blinks
function more quickly when more data is being
to supply transmitted.
power to
PDs.
WIRELESS Indicators
WIRELESS indicators consist of WIRELESS0 and WIRELESS1, showing the wireless
link status of the 2.4/5 GHz and DUAL-BAND/5G radio interfaces respectively.






extremely low.

WLAN

is low.


is high.
strength:
radio.
strength.
DUAL-BAND PORT Indicator

The DUAL-BAND PORT indicator shows the wireless link status of DUAL-BAND/5G
radio interfaces.
Table 3-47 Description about the DUAL-BAND PORT indicator

Green Steady on The dual-band port function is enabled,

and the port is working on dual bands.
Off The dual-band port function is disabled,

and the port is working on a single
band.

WLAN

Item Description
Technical Dimensions Φ165 mm × 387 mm

specifications (height x
diameter)
Weight 3.9 kg
System memory 1 GB DDR4

FLASH

specifications IEEE 802.3at/bt
Maximum power ● 802.3bt power supply: 45 W

consumption (excluding the output power of the
PoE_OUT port, 5GE and SFP are
mutually exclusive.)
● 802.3at power supply: 25.5 W (The
PoE_OUT function and GE/
POE_OUT ports are unavailable,
5GE and SFP are mutually
exclusive.)
NOTE


temperature

humidity
IP rating IP68

pressure

WLAN
02351KQB AP8082DN Mainframe(11ac

Wave2,Outdoor,4X4 Dual-Band,Built-in
Antenna)
02351KQC AP8182DN Mainframe(11ac

Wave2,Outdoor,4X4 Dual-Band,External
Antenna)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 3-49 Tools


WLAN

WLAN

(The wrench is 200 mm
long or longer, M4 and
M6)
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● AP device
● PG connector
● Expansion bolt
● Hose clamp
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label
● The mounting bracket of the AP8082DN supports angle adjustment.

Outdoor APs can be installed against a pole or a wall. The AP must be installed by
professional installation personnel, and the installation position is determined
according to the site survey.
The recommended installation space is the same for the AP8082DN and
AP8182DN. The following uses the default configuration of the AP8182DN as an
example to describe installation space requirements, as shown in Figure 3-76.
Table 3-50 shows dimensions of an outdoor AP.
Table 3-50 Dimensions of the AP

Produ Confi Dimensions (unit: mm)
ct gurat
Mode ion
l
AP80 Defau 387

82DN lt
config
uratio
Φ165
n 168.5

WLAN

ct gurat
Mode ion
l
With 531
an
enclos
ure
AP81 Defau 387

82DN lt
config
uratio Φ165
n 168.5
Direct
ly
conne
cted
to 677
omni
directi
onal
anten
nas,
witho
ut an
enclos
ure
Direct
ly
conne
cted 796
to
omni
directi
onal
anten
nas,
with
an
enclos
ure

WLAN

ct gurat
Mode ion
l
Confi
gured
with 631
remot
e
anten
nas,
with
an
enclos
ure
≥500
≥200
≥200
0
00
≥1
≥500
residents.

WLAN

equipment.


least 1.5 m.
least 5 m.


those on APs.

WLAN
label.
● The length of the M6 inner hexagon screwdrivers must be greater than or equal to 200 mm.
● The adjustment range of the angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8082DN is as
follows:
● Without an enclosure: The adjustment range of the vertical angle is ±30°, and that of
the horizontal angle is ±40°.
● With an enclosure: The adjustment range of the vertical angle is -20° to +30°, and that
of the horizontal angle is ±40°.
● For details about how to install an enclosure, see 3.5.2.5.3 Installing an Enclosure for an
AP.
118 mm


WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m
M4
1.4 N•m

WLAN
The AP is of the cylinder shape. It is recommended that this step be performed in the
package.
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
75 mm
45 mm

WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
package.
1
M6
5 N•m

mm.

WLAN
label.
● The length of the M6 inner hexagon screwdrivers must be greater than or equal to 200 mm.
● The adjustment range of the angle-adjustable mounting bracket for the AP8082DN is as
follows:
● Without an enclosure: The adjustment range of the vertical angle is ±30°, and that of
the horizontal angle is ±40°.
● With an enclosure: The adjustment range of the vertical angle is -20° to +30°, and that
of the horizontal angle is ±40°.
● For details about how to install an enclosure, see 3.5.2.5.3 Installing an Enclosure for an
AP.
clamp to open it.
b
c
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
package.
M6
M8
5 N•m
12 N•m
clamp to open it.

WLAN
b c
M6
5 N•m
M4
1.4 N•m
package.

WLAN
M6
2
1
5 N•m
3.5.2.5.3 Installing an Enclosure for an AP
Enclosure Classification
You need to separately purchase enclosures based on AP models. Table 3-52 lists
mappings between enclosures and AP models.
Table 3-52 Mappings between enclosures and AP models

AP Applicable Enclosure Matching Enclosure Type
Model Scenario
AP8082D With an 1 1. Top enclosure (part

N enclosure number: 21203905)
2. Cabling enclosure
(part number:
21203906)
3. Whip antenna
enclosure (part
number: 21203907)

WLAN
AP Applicable Enclosure Matching Enclosure Type

Model Scenario
AP8182D Configured
N with whip
antennas,
with an
enclosure
3
Configured
with
remote
antennas,
with an
enclosure
Installing an Enclosure
● To install enclosures (21203905 and 21203907) for an AP: Clasp two hooks on
the enclosure into notches on the device end.

WLAN
● To install an enclosure (21203906) for an AP: Buckle two parts of the

enclosure, thread cables through it, and clasp two hooks on the enclosure into
notches on the device end.
b
a
a
Uninstalling an Enclosure
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to pry open the enclosure from the gap on the
front of the AP.

WLAN
2. If the enclosure is still on the AP, use the flat-head screwdriver to pry the
spring outward from the notch on the rear of the AP and then remove the
enclosure.

WLAN
Feed line
Feed line
Network cable Optical fiber
● The AP8082DN has no antenna ports, and requires no radio cable connection.
● When connecting cables, take waterproof measures on the following parts: See the
● Connection joints of the feeder cable connector.
● The network cable and optical fiber use waterproof PG connectors and do not
need to be wrapped using tapes.
● •Do not insert a PoE input cable into the GE/PoE_OUT port.


WLAN

25.4 mm):
– 1/2" RF cable: > 50 mm
– 7/8" RF cable: > 250 mm
NOTICE
Antenna interfaces of the AP provide a 5 KA surge protection capability.The RF
cables are directly connected to the antenna interfaces with a tightening torque of
10.8 N m.
Feeder Waterproof
cable tape

WLAN
PVC insulation tape


WLAN


following figure.

WLAN
following figure.
NOTICE
damaged.

1. Use a shielded straight-through cable (CAT5E or higher) with a diameter of 6
mm. Cut the cable into a proper length based on the distance between the AP
and the PSE device, strip the cables on both ends, and crimp the wires into
RJ45 connectors.

WLAN

connected.

2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
connector to the Ethernet interface on the AP and secure the waterproof PG
a b c d
a b c d

WLAN
box.
1.8 N•m.
APs are grounded.

between them.
terminal.


● M4: 1.4 N•m.
● M6: 4.8 N•m.
● M8: 12 N•m.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the

AP. To ground a shielded network cable, perform the following operations:
1. Remove the shield layer of the shielded network cable.
2. Connect the cable to the ground clip.
3. Wrap the cable with waterproof and ESD tapes.

WLAN
its original length.
installed on APs.
Installing a Directional Outdoor Antenna Against a Pole

building.
pole.

WLAN

Lightning rod
Antenna support
Outdoor
directional Pole
antenna

Parapet
the earth mat bed

Lightning
rod
5GHz
antenna
RF cable >0.5m
2.4GHz
antenna
RF cable AP
Ultra-5 cable
AC Power
100V~240V
Ground wire
PoE adapter
Installing an Omnidirectional Outdoor Antenna Against a Pole

antenna.

WLAN

m.
Figure 3-85 Installing an omnidirectional outdoor antenna against a pole
Lightning rod
Protection
angle
antenna
Hose clamp
Antenna pole


WLAN
Security lock

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item


fastened.

cramped firmly.





WLAN


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.

WLAN
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.
speed.

WLAN

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------

Context
NOTICE


WLAN

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

(AP8130DN-W)
The AP8130DN-W supports 3x3 MIMO. The AP is physically hardened and features
enhanced outdoor coverage performance. It supports 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
frequency bands, complies with IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac, and can work as wireless
bridges. The AP can provide services simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
frequency bands to support more access users. It provides comprehensive service
support capabilities and features high reliability, high security, simple network
management and maintenance, which meets requirements of outdoor
deployment.
The AP8130DN-W complies with IP67 dustproof and waterproof protection

standards, applicable to coverage scenarios (for example, squares, pedestrian
streets, and amusement parks) and bridging scenarios (for example, wireless
harbors, data backhaul, video surveillance, and train-to-ground backhaul).
Figure 3-92 shows the appearance of the AP8130DN-W.

WLAN
Figure 3-92 AP8130DN-W appearance
*(3R( *( 6)3
:LUHOHVV
:LUHOHVV
6<6
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
*& **& **% **$ *% *$
1 2 3 4 5 6 2 7 7 2 1
*KLG[RZ
)UTYURK
8 9 10
Table 3-55 describes interfaces on the AP8130DN-W.

interface to send and receive service signals. The
5 GHz band can be expanded to the
4.9 GHz band.

protective device
3 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000M interface: connects to

input.
4 Device ground Connects a ground cable to the AP.

screw
5 GE1 10/100/1000M interface: connects to

the wired Ethernet. The interface
cannot connect to a PoE power supply
to provide power for the AP.


antenna interface to the AP to send and receive service
signals. The 5 GHz band can be
expanded to the 4.9 GHz band.

WLAN

seconds.
NOTE
● The AP8130DN-W offers two internal DB9 ports, which have similar functions as
external GE ports. In device usage, you are advised to connect the device through the GE
ports but not the DB9 ports.
● For antenna ports that support 2.4G-to-5G switchover, switch the radio to 5 GHz and
then run the wideband enable command to expand the radio to the 4.9 GHz band. For
5 GHz antenna ports, you can directly run the wideband enable command to expand
the radio to the 4.9 GHz band.
The AP8130DN-W provides multiple indicators: SYS indicator, Link/ACT indicators,

AP8130DN-W.

W ireless1
W ireless0
GE1
SYS
Link/ACT1
Link/ACT2
Link/ACT0

WLAN
SYS Indicator

or



Hz)

System 5s (0.2 STA is associated with the AP. The
SYS indicato Hz) system is in low power consumption
r
state.

every
online if it works in Fit AP mode.
The indicator remains in this state
online.
● The AP works in Fit AP mode and
fails to go online.
Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.

WLAN
Link/ACT Indicators


transmitted.

transmitted.
Wireless Indicators
of the 5 GHz and 2.4/5 GHz radio interfaces respectively.






WLAN

extremely low.

is low.


is high.
strength:
radio.
strength.
Table 3-60provide basic specifications of the AP8130DN-W.

WLAN
Item Description

Weight 4.0 kg

● 64 MB Flash


consumption NOTE


temperature

humidity
IP rating IP67

pressure
02350VLY AP8130DN-W Mainframe(11ac,General AP

Antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 3-61 Tools

WLAN

(M4 and M6)
Figure 3-93 shows the flowchart for installing an AP.

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● PG connector
● Expansion bolt
● Hose clamp
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
The AP8130DN-W can be installed against a pole or a wall. The AP must be

Figure 3-94 shows dimensions of the AP8130DN-W.
Figure 3-94 Dimensions of an AP8130DN-W (unit: mm)

290
100
*
*(3R(
*(
260 /LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
/LQN$&7
6<6
:LUHOHVV
:LUHOHVV
6)3
**
Figure 3-95 shows space requirements for installing an AP8130DN-W.

WLAN
Figure 3-95 Space requirements for installing an AP8130DN-W (unit: mm)
≥500
≥200
0 ≥200
00
≥1
'HIDXOW
≥500
residents.
equipment.

WLAN


least 1.5 m.
least 5 m.


those on APs.

WLAN
Wall mounting requires use of the mounting bracket and matching expansion
bolts.
label.

WLAN
1 2
Ø8
90Ǆ
45 mm ~ 50 mm
M6
5 N•m

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
5 N•m

mm.

WLAN
label.

and lift the lid.
c. Close the lid.
b c
M6
5 N•m
M4
1.4 N•m

WLAN
3. Hang the AP with the AP-side mounting bracket to the pole-side mounting
M6
5 N•m


WLAN
Figure 3-96 AP8130DN-W external cable arrangement

Feed line Feed line Feed line Feed line
Optical fiber Network cable

Feed line Feed line
When connecting cables, take waterproof measures on the following parts: See the
● Connection joints of the feeder cable connector (if a surge protective device is used,
take waterproof measures on the connection joint of the antenna and surge protective
device as well as that of the feeder cable and surge protective device.)
● The network cable and optical fiber use waterproof PG connectors and do not need to
be wrapped using tapes.


WLAN

25.4 mm):
– 1/2" RF cable: > 50 mm
– 7/8" RF cable: > 250 mm
NOTICE
Feeder Waterproof
cable tape


WLAN

PVC insulation tape


WLAN


WLAN

following figure.
following figure.
connector shell clockwise until the red ring is not visible, as shown in the
following figure.

WLAN
Figure 3-101 Connecting optical fibers
NOTICE
damaged.

1. Use a shielded straight-through cable (CAT5E or higher) with a diameter of
6.8 mm. Cut the cable into a proper length based on the distance between
the AP and the PSE device, strip the cables on both ends, and crimp the wires
into RJ45 connectors.
connected.
2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8

WLAN
a b c d
a b c d
box.
1.8 N m.
● The waterproof PG connector adapts to a network cable with a diameter of 6.8
mm.
APs are grounded.

WLAN

between them.
terminal.


● M4: 1.4N•m.
● M6: 4.8N•m.
● M8: 12N•m.
Connecting the
ground bar

WLAN

installed on APs.

building.
pole.

WLAN

Lightning rod
Antenna support
Outdoor
directional Pole
antenna

Parapet
the earth mat bed
Figure 3-104 shows outdoor AP installation scenarios. The distance between 5

GHz antenna and 2.4 GHz antenna should be more than 0.5 m.

Lightning
rod
5GHz
antenna
RF cable >0.5m
2.4GHz
antenna
RF cable AP
Ultra-5 cable
AC Power
100V~240V
Ground wire
PoE adapter

antenna.

WLAN

m.
Lightning rod
Protection
angle
antenna
Hose clamp
Antenna pole


WLAN
Console/RSS I
Default
Security lock
Lock hole

1 mm.

WLAN
No. Check Item


fastened.

cramped firmly.





faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

WLAN

requirements.
speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------


WLAN
Context
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
– Figure 3-108 shows the locking clip on an MPO connector. The locking
clip is released automatically when you pull the MPO connector.
module safely.
3-111 shows an optical module with a tab latch. The tab latch is released
when you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Rail Transit Access Points
4 Rail Transit Access Points
About This Chapter


(AP9130DN)

Huawei AP9130DN is the latest-generation 802.11ac vehicle-mounted dual-band
AP that supports 3x3 MIMO. It uses industrial anti-vibration M12 sockets, complies
with EN50155 vehicle-mounted electronic equipment standards, and supports 50
ms fast switchover, meeting train-to-ground backhaul network deployment
requirements.
Figure 4-1 shows the appearance of the AP.

WLAN
Table 4-1 describes interfaces on the AP9130DN.


2 GE1 10/100/1000M bit/s interface: connects

can't connect to a PoE power supply to
4 2.4G Connects a 2.4G antenna to the AP to

send and receive wireless signals. The
port type is N-type female.
5 5G Connects a 5 GHz antenna to the AP

to send and receive wireless signals.
The port type is N-type female.
6 Ground screw for Connects a ground cable to the AP.

the AP

seconds.
8 DC 110 V power interface

WLAN
supply.
The AP9130DN provides multiple indicators: SYS indicator, Link/ACT indicators,

AP9130DN.
Table 4-2 Description about the SYS indicator

after
power-on

WLAN

green.


Alarm Green Blinking The software is being upgraded.

once
every
0.25s (4
Hz)

manually.


transmitted.

transmitted.


WLAN




Table 4-5 Basic Specifications

Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H x W x D) 86.1 mm x 375 mm x 260

specifications mm
Weight 4.5 kg

Power specifications Power input ● DC power supply: 110 V

rated voltage; voltage
range: 77 V to 137.5 V
● PoE power: in
802.3at
NOTE
The AP does not support AC
power supply. If AC power
supply is required, use a PoE
adapter. Ensure that the
installation position of the
PoE adapter meets
requirements.

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum power 21.5W (110V DC)

consumption 20.1W (PoE)
NOTE
The maximum power
consumption depends on
local laws.

+1800 m to +5000 m:
Temperature decreases by
1°C every time the altitude
increases 300 m.

condensing)
IP rating IP30
02350ALE Assembling Components,AP9130DN-

FAT,AP9130DN-FAT,AP9130DN
Mainframe(FAT AP,11ac,On Board,3x3
Double Frequency,External Antenna)
Safety Precautions

WLAN

carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 4-6 Tools

WLAN

(M4 and M6)
Figure 4-2 shows the flowchart for installing an AP9130DN.

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● OT terminal
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
The AP9130DN is installed in a rack on a train. The installation must be performed

by professional personnel, and the installation position is determined by the site
survey.
Figure 4-3 shows space requirements for installing an AP9130DN.
residents.
equipment.

WLAN

Vehicle ● There should be at least a 5 m distance between antennas.

mounting ● The antennas should be placed at least 5 m away from the
4G antennas of the carrier.
Trackside ● At the same trackside, antennas with the same direction

installation should be placed at least 50 m away from each other, and
co-located antennas facing opposite directions should be
placed at least 20 cm from each other.
● The height difference between trackside antennas and
vehicle-mounted antennas does not exceed 0.5 m.
4.1.2.5.1 Rack Mounting on a Train
Fix the vehicle-mounted AP to a rack using mounting brackets on both sides of

the chassis and a tray.
1. Use M4x12 Phillips pan-head screws to fix the front and rear mounting
brackets to the AP, with a tightening torque of 1.2 N.m
2. Fix the tray on the rack using M6 panel screws and floating nuts, with a
tightening torque of 3 N.m.
3. Fix the AP to the tray, with the front mounting bracket of the AP fastened to
the rack using M6 panel screws and floating nuts and the rear mounting
bracket to the tray using M4x12 Phillips pan-head screws.
Figure 4-4 shows installation of an AP.

WLAN
Figure 4-4 Installing an AP in a rack

M4
1.2N•m
M6
3N•m
Leave certain space at the front of the AP for cabling. The tray is used to improve the AP's
anti-vibration performance. Use anti-vibration screws if necessary.
4 1 3 5 2 1
Table 4-8 describes cable connections of AP9130DN.
Table 4-8 Cable connections of AP9130DN
1 5 GHz antenna Connects a 5 GHz antenna to the AP

cable to transmit and receive service signals.

WLAN
2 2.4 GHz antenna Connects a 2.4 GHz antenna to the AP

cable to transmit and receive service signals.
3 DC power adapter ● The AP supports the PoE power

supply and DC power supply.
● To connect the AP to a DC power
source, use the power adapter
delivered with the AP; otherwise,
the AP maybe damaged.
4 Ground cable Grounds the AP. The M4 connector of

the ground cable is connected to the
AP and the M6 connector is connected
to the protection ground.
5 Network cable ● CAT5e cables or higher must be

used.
● Ensure that the AP is connected to
the Ethernet using the Ethernet
cable that works properly. If the
fail to work. Before connecting an
Ethernet cable to the AP, use the
cable test tool to check whether the
cable is qualified. If the cable is
● The AP9130DN's M12 power and signal cables need to be made onsite.
● When PoE and power adapter power supplies are available, the devices are preferentially
powered by the power adapter.
Pay attention to the following points when installing antennas

● Antennas need to be installed by qualified personnel. An AP can only use the
antennas delivered with it.
25.4 mm):
– 1/2" RF cable: > 50 mm
– 7/8" RF cable: > 250 mm

WLAN
● When the RF connector of an AP becomes loose, tighten it with a maximum

torque of 1.2N•m.
4.1.2.6.1 Making Power and Signal Cables

The M12 power and signal cables of the AP9130DN need to be made onsite.
Appearance of cable connectors

Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-6 show appearance of a M12 power cable connector and
a M12 signal cable connector respectively.
Figure 4-6 M12 power cable connector
Figure 4-7 M12 signal cable connector

WLAN
Procedure
● The AP9130DN's M12 power cable must be made according to pin instructions
on the AP9130DN panel; otherwise, the AP9130DN shell may carry electricity,
causing personal safety accidents.
● Before making the power cable, ensure that the power cable is not connected
to a power source.
Making an M12 Power Cable

1. Lead the power cable through the bottom and middle sockets in correct
sequence.
2. Peel about 20 mm of the sleeve off the cable.
3. Peel about 5 mm of insulation coating off each cable wire.
4. Lead cable wires through conduits of the connector in correct sequence.

M12 power cable: connect the positive terminal (+), negative terminal (-),
and ground terminal (identified by the ground symbol) correctly according to
instructions on the AP9130DN panel. If the power plug has only the positive
and negative pins, you only need to connect the positive terminal (+) and
negative terminal (-).

WLAN
NOTICE
● pin1(+) of the M12 cable wire must connect to the positive terminal of the
power source and pin3(-) to the negative terminal. For example, if a
3*0.75mm^2 power cable is used, connect the brown wire to the positive
terminal, blue wire to the negative terminal, and the yellow-green wire to
the ground terminal.
● The wire colors may vary according to local regulations and customer
requirements.
5. Use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties and tighten the nut.
6. Secure the cable.
NOTICE
Before connecting a power cable to the AP9130DN, ensure that the AP9130DN is
reliably grounded.
Making an M12 Signal Cable

1. Lead the signal cable through the bottom and middle sockets in correct
sequence.
2. Peel about 35 mm of the sleeve off the cable and then about 11 mm of
insulation coating. Use the metal foil to wrap the root of the exposed shield
layer and cut off the protruding shield layer.
3. Open the wire cover. Insert wires into correct wire holes based on their color
until the wires are near the tail of the wire cover (deviation within 3 mm).

WLAN
4. Use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties and tighten the nut.
5. Tighten the middle socket and the connector and then tighten the bottom
and middle sockets.
Lock hole Security Lock

WLAN

1 mm.

No. Check Item


fastened.

cramped firmly.





WLAN
After the AP installation is complete, observe indicators on the AP to determine

4.1.3.1 Logging In to the Device Using STelnet/Telnet
You can log in to the device using STelnet V2 or Telnet to configure, manage, and
maintain the device in the CLI.
● By default, only the STelnet V2 service is enabled on the device.

● Telnet has security vulnerabilities. You are not advised to enable the Telnet service.
Device connections are classified into wired and wireless connections.
● In versions earlier than V200R007C20, Fat APs support wired connections.

● In V200R007C20 and later, Fat APs support both wired and wireless
connections.
Before logging in to the device, complete the following tasks:
● Power on the device.

● Prepare network cables used to connect device interfaces for wired
connections. No network cable is required for wireless connections.
The following table lists the default configuration of the device. You are advised to
change the default user name and password on your first login.
Table 4-10 Default configuration of the device
Parameter Default Setting
User name admin
Password admin@huawei.com
IP address ● Wired connection: 169.254.1.1

● Wireless connection: 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask ● Wired connection: 255.255.0.0


WLAN
SSID HUAWEI-XXXX, applicable to wireless

connections of Fat APs (XXXX specifies
the last four bits of the AP's MAC
address.)
Wireless password None, applicable to wireless

connections of Fat APs
The following example uses the default parameters and is used for reference only.
Wired Connection Mode

Step 1 Use a network cable to connect a PC to any network port of the AP or that of the
switch on the same network segment as the AP.
Step 2 Assign the PC with an IP address on the same network segment as the default IP
address of the device so that the PC and device are reachable to each other.
By default, the IP address of the device is 169.254.1.1. The default user name and
password are admin and admin@huawei.com. Configure an IP address on
169.254.1.x/24 (excluding 169.254.1.1) for the PC, and you can log in to the device
in wired mode.
Step 3 Start the CLI on the PC and access the IP address 169.254.1.1 of the device using
STelnet V2.
Step 4 Enter the user name and password as prompted to log in to the user interface.
----End
Wireless Connection Mode

Step 1 By default, STAs search for the WLAN HUAWEI-XXXX within the wireless signal
coverage of a Fat AP. STAs can access the WLAN without entering the password. If
the SSID and password have been configured, use the specified SSID and password
to set up a wireless connection.
Step 2 Start the CLI on the STA and access the IP address 192.168.1.1 of the device using
STelnet V2.
Step 3 Enter the user name and password as prompted to log in to the user interface.
----End
Method of Obtaining Upgrade and Configuration Documentation

To perform subsequent upgrades and configurations after login to the device, visit
Huawei enterprise technical support website http://support.huawei.com/
enterprise and search for product documentation by keyword. The search method
is described as follows:
● Upgrade: Search for Fat AP upgrade guide, and refer to the upgrade guide in
the documentation of the correct version.

WLAN
● Configuration: Search for Fat AP product documentation, and refer to the

configuration guide in the documentation of the correct version.
4.1.3.2 Logging In to the Device Through the Web System
A Fat AP has a built-in web system. You can use a web browser to log in to the
device to configure, manage, and maintain the device on a graphic user interface
(GUI).
Device connections are classified into wired and wireless connections.
● In versions earlier than V200R007C20, Fat APs support wired connections.

● In V200R007C20 and later, Fat APs support both wired and wireless
connections.

● Prepare network cables used to connect device interfaces for wired
connections. No network cable is required for wireless connections.
The following table lists the default configuration of the device. You are advised to
change the default user name and password on your first login.
Table 4-11 Default configuration of the device
User name admin
IP address ● Wired connection: 169.254.1.1

Subnet mask ● Wired connection: 255.255.0.0

SSID HUAWEI-XXXX, applicable to wireless

connections of Fat APs (XXXX specifies
the last four bits of the AP's MAC
address.)
Wireless password None, applicable to wireless

connections of Fat APs
The following example uses the default parameters and is used for reference only.
Wired Connection Mode

Step 1 Use a network cable to connect a PC to any network port of the AP or that of the
switch on the same network segment as the AP.

WLAN
Step 2 Assign the PC with an IP address on the same network segment as the default IP
address of the device so that the PC and device are reachable to each other.
By default, the IP address of the device is 169.254.1.1. The default user name and
password are admin and admin@huawei.com. Configure an IP address on
169.254.1.x/24 (excluding 169.254.1.1) for the PC, and you can log in to the device
in wired mode.
Step 3 Open the browser on the PC, enter http://IP address in the address box, and press
Enter to log in. Select a language for the web system, enter the default user name
and password, and click Login to enter the web system home page.
----End
Wireless Connection Mode

Step 1 By default, STAs search for the WLAN HUAWEI-XXXX within the wireless signal
coverage of a Fat AP. STAs can access the WLAN without entering the password. If
the SSID and password have been configured, use the specified SSID and password
to set up a wireless connection.
Step 2 Open the browser on the STA, enter http://IP address in the address box, and
press Enter to log in. Select a language for the web system, enter the default user
name and password, and click Login. The web system home page is displayed.
----End

4.1.3.3 Logging In to the Device Through the Console Port

● Prepare a console cable.
● Prepare terminal simulation software.
If your PC's operating system provides terminal simulation software (like HyperTerminal in
Windows 2000/XP), you do not need to install additional terminal simulation software. If the PC
runs on an operating system without terminal simulation software (like Windows 7), install
third-party terminal simulation software on the PC by referring to the user manual or online
help.

WLAN
Step 1 Use a console cable to connect the PC to the console port of the device.
Step 2 Start terminal emulation software on the PC, create a connection, and set
communication parameters as follows:
● Baud rate (B): 9600
● Data bits (D): 8
● Parity (P): None
● Stop bits (S): 1
● Flow control (F): None
Step 3 Press Enter and set a password of console as prompted, and use the password to
log in to the user view. (The following information is only for reference.)
Please configure the login password:
Info: A plain text password is a string of 8 to 16 case-sensitive characters and must be a combination of at
least two of the follow
ing: uppercase letters A to Z, lowercase letters a to z, digits, and special characters. A cipher text password
contains 56 or 68 ch
aracters.
Enter password:
Confirm password:
----End


faults.
Fault Description

WLAN
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN


The AP9131DN and AP9132DN are the latest-generation 802.11ac Access Points
(APs) that work on dual frequency bands. They support 3x3 MIMO, use industrial
anti-vibration M12 ports, comply with EN50155 vehicle-mounted electronic
equipment standards, and support 50 ms fast switchover, meeting train-ground
backhaul network deployment requirements.

WLAN
Table 4-12 Appearance of the AP9131DN and AP9132DN

Produc Appearance
t
Model
AP913
1DN
6 7
1 2 3 4

WLAN
Produc Appearance
t
Model
AP913
2DN
6 7
1 2 3 4
Table 4-13 Interfaces on the AP9131DN and AP9132DN


AP.
2 GE0/PoE 10/100/1000 Mbit/s M12 interface:

connects to the wired Ethernet. The
interface can connect to a PoE power
supply to provide power for the AP.

WLAN
3 GE1 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical

interface: requires an optical fiber
module and connects to the wired
Ethernet.
NOTE
The GE1 interface of the AP can have a
1000 Mbit/s copper transceiver module
installed. The module is purchased by
customers.

management.
5 2.4G/5G Connects a 2.4 GHz/5 GHz antenna to

the AP to send and receive wireless
signals. The port can transmit 2.4 GHz
and 5 GHz radio signals
simultaneously. The port type is QMA
female.
6 Default Reset button. After removing the

waterproof block (screw), hold down
the button more than 3s to restore
factory settings.
7 Ground screw for Connects the device to a ground cable.

the surge
protective device
8 2.4G Connects a 2.4G antenna to the AP to

send and receive wireless signals. The
port type is QMA-female.
supply.

● Indicators of the same type have the same state meanings.

WLAN
Figure 4-8 Indicators on the AP9131DN and AP9132DN
SYS Indicator
Table 4-14 Description about the SYS indicator


after
power-on

green.


WLAN

Alarm Green Blinking ● The software is being upgraded.

once ● After the software is uploaded and
every started, the AP working in Fit AP mode
0.25s (4 requests to go online on the AC and
Hz) maintains this state until it goes online
successfully on the AC (before the
CAPWAP link is established).
● The AP working in Fit AP mode fails to go
online on the AC (the CAPWAP link
disconnects).

manually.
Link/ACT Indicators
Link/ACT indicators consist of Link/ACT0 and Link/ACT1, showing link status of
interfaces GE0/PoE and GE1 respectively.


transmitted.

transmitted.

WLAN
Wireless Indicator






extremely low.

is low.


is high.

WLAN
strength:
radio.
strength.
Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H x 40 mm x 180 mm x 100 mm (1.72 in. x

specifications W x D) 7.09 in. x 3.94 in.)
Weight 1.2 kg

● 32 MB Flash
Power Power input ● DC: rated voltage 48 V; voltage

specifications range: 33.6 V to 60 V
● PoE power supply: in compliance
with IEEE 802.3at
Maximum power ● Compartment coverage scenarios:

consumption 17.5 W
● Trackside single-5G scenarios: 12.5
W
NOTE

WLAN
Item Description
Environment Operating -60 m to +1800 m:

specifications temperature ● -40°C to +65°C (trackside 5G
backhaul)
● -40°C to +55°C (vehicle-mounted
dual-band coverage)
1800 m to 5000 m: Temperature

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure

Part Description
Number
02350FHH AP9131DN Mainframe(11ac,On Board,Double Frequency,External

Antenna)
02350JSC AP9131DN Bundle(FAT AP,11ac,On Board,Double

Frequency,External Antenna)
02350JSA AP9132DN Mainframe(11ac,On Board,Double Frequency,External

Antenna)
02350JSB AP9132DN Bundle(FAT AP,11ac,On Board,Double

Frequency,External Antenna)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 4-19 Tools

Flat-head screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Protective gloves
Slip-proof glove ESD gloves Adjustable wrench

WLAN
Optical power meter Torque spanner -
Figure 4-9 shows the process for installing the AP9131DN and AP9132DN.
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● OT terminal
● Dust-proof cushion

WLAN

● Warranty card
● SN label
The AP9131DN and AP9132DN can be installed on vehicles or in trackside

network cabinets. Their installation positions are determined by site surveys. You
can use the mounting brackets (optional) delivered with the AP or customize the
mounting brackets, depending on the site survey results.
Customize the mounting brackets according to the sizes shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-10 Positions and sizes of mounting holes on the side of the AP (unit:
mm)
4-M4 Depth 4.0
Hole depth 5.0
Symmetry
15.0
15.0±0.2
100.0±0.2 37.5
2-M4 Depth 6.0

Hole depth 7.0
70.0 37.0

WLAN
NOTICE
● The diameter of installation holes is 5 mm to facilitate use of M4 screws.

● When the APs are installed on vehicles, ensure that the holes on the mounting
brackets match the installation holes at the target positions to prevent
unnecessary or non-compliant hole drilling.
dew, and humidity, and take protective measures to prevent water from flowing
● When determining the installation position, expose the indicators so that they
can be observed easily.

Vehicle ● There should be at least a 5 m distance between antennas.

mounting ● The antennas should be placed at least 5 m away from the
4G antennas of the carrier.
Trackside ● At the same trackside, antennas with the same direction

installation should be placed at least 50 m away from each other, and
co-located antennas facing opposite directions should be
placed at least 20 cm from each other.
● The height difference between trackside antennas and
vehicle-mounted antennas does not exceed 0.5 m.
4.2.2.5.1 Installing an AP on a Vehicle
The AP9131DN and AP9132DN can be installed in a vehicle-mounted cabinet or

against a compartment wall using mounting brackets on both sides. The mounting
brackets need to be customized according to the site survey results. For the
detailed specifications, see 4.2.2.4 Determining the Installation Position.
Step 1 Use four M4 screws to fix a mounting bracket to each side of the AP.

WLAN
Figure 4-11 Fixing the mounting brackets

M4
1.4N•m
Step 2 Use four M4 screws, flat washers, spring washers, and nuts to fix the AP to a tray
on the vehicle-mounted cabinet or compartment wall. The following figure shows
how to fix an AP to a tray.
Figure 4-12 Fixing the AP
M4
1.4 N•m
The thickness of the tray and car's inner wall is no less than 3 mm.
----End

WLAN
4.2.2.5.2 Installing an AP in a Trackside Network Cabinet
The AP9131DN and AP9132DN can be installed in a trackside network cabinet

using mounting brackets. You can use the mounting brackets delivered with the
AP or customize the mounting brackets based on site survey results. For the
detailed specifications, see 4.2.2.4 Determining the Installation Position.
The installation of the AP9132DN is used as an example here. You are advised to
install one mounting bracket to the rear of the AP.
Step 1 Use two M4 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the rear of the AP.
Figure 4-13 Fixing the mounting bracket
M4
1.4 N•m
Step 2 Select proper holes and use two M4 screws to fix the AP into the network cabinet.

WLAN
Figure 4-14 Fixing the AP
M4
1.4N•m
----End
4.2.2.6.1 Connecting Cables
Figure 4-15 shows cable connections (the AP9132DN is used as an example).

WLAN
Figure 4-15 AP9132DN cable connections
1 2 3 4

1 DC power adapter Phoenix terminals used to connect to

DC power cables.
2 Network cable M12 interface used to connect to a

PoE power supply to provide power for
the AP.
Cat 5e shielded network cables or
3 Optical fiber Interface used to connect to the wired

Ethernet. The interface must be
installed with an optical fiber module.
4 Console cable RJ45 interface used to connect to a

maintenance terminal for AP

WLAN
5 2.4G or 5G QMA female interfaces used to

antenna cable connect a 2.4G or 5G antenna to the
AP to send and receive service signals.
The interfaces can transmit 2.4 and 5
GHz radio signals simultaneously.
6 Ground cable Ground terminal used to ground the

AP through the ground screw. The M6
OT terminal is used to connect to the
AP and M8 OT terminal to the ground
bar. The type of OT terminals can also
be determined according to site
surveys.
7 2.4 GHz antenna QMA female interfaces used to

cable connect a 2.4G antenna to the AP to
send and receive service signals. Only
the AP9132DN supports the interface.
● Before the installation, take ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap
or ESD gloves.
● The 2.4G/5G antenna port of the AP9132DN works at the 5 GHz band by default. To enable
the port to transmit 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio signals simultaneously, run the antenna-
output command.
Connecting RF Cables
Use RF cables to connect APs to antennas. The cabling requirements are as
follows:
● Before delivery, feeder interfaces of the device are covered with dust caps.
Remove the dust caps before connecting the feeder cables.
● After the device installation is complete, cover the unused feeder interfaces
with dust caps.

WLAN
● The bending radius of the RF cable must be greater than or equal to ten
To remove an RF cable, hold the QMA-J connector tightly and pull the RF cable, as
Connecting Optical Fibers
Invisible laser beams will cause eye damage. Do not look into bores of optical
modules or connectors of optical fibers without eye protection.
Insert the optical fiber connector into the GE1 socket. The cabling requirements
are as follows:
● Optical fibers routed in a cabinet/rack must be protected by a corrugated
pipe. The bend radius of an optical fiber must be 20 times larger than its
diameter. Generally, the bend radius of optical fibers should be no less than
40 mm.
connector.
● Install dust plugs on unused optical interfaces.

Make M12 connectors for network cables and connect the network cables to the
GE0/PoE interfaces. The equipment functions properly when the ground resistance
is less than 10 ohms.
When connecting the M12 connector of the cable to the device, secure the nut 2
first and then screw the nut 1 clockwise with a tightening torque of 0.4 N•m.
1 2
The cabling requirements are as follows:

● The bend radius of a ground cable must be greater than or equal to five times
the cable diameter.

WLAN
Connecting Ground Cables

Make ground cables onsite and use screws and the ground cables to ground the
AP. Use the M6 OT terminal for the AP and M8 OT terminal for the ground bar.
The type of OT terminals can also be determined according to site surveys. Cut the
cable into the required length according to onsite situations.
Use the tightening torque of 3 N•m to tighten the OT terminal for the AP. The
● M4: 1.4 N•m
● M6: 4.8 N•m
● M8: 12 N•m
M6
3N•m

● The bend radius of a ground cable must be greater than or equal to five times
the cable diameter.
between them.
4.2.2.6.2 Assembling M12 Connectors
The M12 connectors of the AP9131DN/AP9132DN need to be purchased

separately and assembled onsite.
Appearance of the M12 connectors

Figure 4-16 shows the appearance of the M12 connectors.

WLAN
Figure 4-16 M12 Connectors
Figure 4-17 shows the structure of the M12 connectors.
Figure 4-17 Structure of the M12 connectors
1 2 3 4
1. Connector 2. Wire cover 3. Middle socket 4. Bottom socket
Procedure
1. Lead the shielded network cable through the bottom and middle sockets in
correct sequence (do not tighten the bottom and middle sockets together).
2. Peel about 35 mm of the sleeve off the cable. Use the metal foil to wrap the
root of the exposed shield layer and cut off the protruding shield layer.
35mm
3. Open the wire cover. Insert wires into correct wire holes based on their color
until the wires are near the tail of the wire cover (deviation within 3 mm).

WLAN
4. Use diagonal pliers to cut off redundant cable ties and tighten the cover.
≤3mm
5. Secure the connector (before securing the wire cover on the middle socket,
ensure that the planes marked in the following figure are parallel to each
other).

WLAN
b a
a. Tighten the middle socket and connector with a torque of 1 N m.
b. Tighten the bottom and middle sockets with a torque of 2 N m.
To disassemble an M12 connector, remove the bottom socket first and then the middle socket.
details, see Installation Checklist in the appendix.
No. Check Item


cramped firmly.




WLAN
After the AP installation is complete, observe indicators on the AP to determine

● Do not frequently power on and off an AP.

● The PoE input and DC power input can be configured in hot standby mode. You can also use
either one as required.


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

WLAN
requirements.
speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------


WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 5 Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Access Points
5 Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Access Points
About This Chapter
5.1 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AD9430DN-12)

5.2 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AD9430DN-24)
5.3 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AD9431DN-24X)
5.4 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (R230D)
5.7 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (R250D-E)
5.8 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (R251D and R251D-E)

(AD9430DN-12)
The AD9430DN-12 is a central access point (AP) used in Huawei agile distributed
Wi-Fi solution. It can be installed in corridors. It supports PoE power supply and
can be connected to multiple remote units (RUs) deployed indoors, which greatly
extends the coverage range, enhances flexibility in planning and deployment, and
reduces the engineering construction costs. The central AP manages the RUs and
processes services in a centralized manner. The RUs process radio signals
independently. Such a distributed architecture further improves the wireless access
capability, creating optimal service experience for users.

WLAN
Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the AD9430DN-12.
Figure 5-1 Appearance of the AD9430DN-12

1 8 5 4
9 2 3 1
6 7
Table 5-1 describes ports on the AD9430DN-12.
Table 5-1 Ports on the AD9430DN-12
1 GE0-GE11 Downlink network ports connecting to the RUs or

lower-layer switch. These ports support 10M/
100M/1000M auto-sensing and PoE output.
2 GE12/UPoE Uplink network port that supports 10M/100M/

1000M auto-sensing and UPoE input.
● When UPoE power input is used, connect the
port to a UPoE power adapter or Huawei
switch that supports UPoE output.
● When DC power input is used, connect the port
to an AC or upper-layer switch.
3 GE13 Uplink network port connecting to an AC or

upper-layer switch. This port supports 10M/100M/
1000M auto-sensing.
4 Security slot Connects to the security lock to fix the device to

an immovable object around.
5 Console port RJ45 port used to connect to a maintenance

terminal for AP configuration and management.

WLAN

7 Micro SD card Connects to a Micro SD card to extend the storage

slot space of the AP. The SD 2.0 standard is supported.
You are advised to use Toshiba, Panasonic, and
SanDisk Micro SD cards.
8 Default button Restores factory settings and restarts the device if

you hold down the button more than 3 seconds.
● The AP supports the following power supply modes: UPoE power supply and DC power
supply.
LED Indicator
The AD9430DN-12 provides the following indicators:
● System indicator: reflects running status of the device.
● Downlink interface indicators: reflect data transmission and PoE output status
of downlink network interfaces.
● USB indicator: reflects data transmission status of the USB flash drive.
● The actual indicator color may vary according to temperature.

● The USB indicator is located inside the panel. The indicator turns on after the AP is powered
on and connected to a USB flash drive.

WLAN
Figure 5-2 System indicator

Indicator

or


Hz)

state.

WLAN

or

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Figure 5-3 Downlink interface indicators
Downlink interface indicators
Table 5-3 Description of downlink interface indicators

Green Steady The network interface is connected, and no data is

on being transmitted.

WLAN
Green Blinking The network interface is connected, and data is being

transmitted.
Yellow Steady The network interface is not connected and the PoE out
on function is disabled.
Yellow Blinking The network interface is not connected and the PoE out
function fails.
The device stops providing PoE power due to errors such
as installing an incompatible PD.
— Off The network interface is not connected and the PoE out
function is enabled.
Figure 5-4 USB indicator (reserved)
USB indicator

Item Specification

s
Weight 0.8 kg
System ● 1 GB DDR3
memory ● 4 MB NOR Flash
● 512 MB NAND Flash

WLAN
Item Specification
Power Power input ● DC (rated voltage: 48 V; input voltage

specification range: 46 V to 57 V)
s ● UPoE (complies with Huawei standards)
NOTE
To ensure that the device works normally, use the
power adapter delivered with the device.
Maximum 16.2 W (excluding PoE and USB output power)

power
consumption

specification temperature ● 1,800 m to 5,000 m: The highest operating
s and altitude temperature reduces by 1°C every time the
altitude increases by 300 m.
NOTE
● Operating temperature of the UPoE power
adapter: -20°C to 60°C
● Operating temperature of the DC power
adapter: 0°C to 40°C

temperature

humidity

pressure
Part Description
Number
02350LEC AD9430DN-12Mainframe(2GE ,12 GE Port)
02350RAK AD9430DN-12Mainframe(FAT AP,2GE,12 GE Port)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-5 Tools


WLAN

(M4 and M6)
The following figure shows the installation flowchart.

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● Central AP
● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label
The packing list in the document is for reference only.

WLAN
The AD9430DN-12 can be installed in corridors. The installation position depends

on the site survey result. Leave at least 200 mm clearance at two sides and rear of
the device for heat dissipation and cable connections.
equipment.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Connect the cables. For details, see 5.1.2.6 Connecting Cables.

WLAN
b
a
● To prevent liquids from flowing inside the device, install the device on the wall according to
the figure, with the side without interfaces upwards.
● In a scenario with heavy vibrations, tighten the AP to the mounting bracket using M4x30
or equal to 5 kg.

WLAN

1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
c

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.

WLAN
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket

a
c

WLAN

c
the AP.
● To avoid electric shock, do not power on the device before you finish installing
the device and connecting cables.
● PoE input is forbidden on GE0 to GE11 (PoE_OUT) ports to prevent device
damage.
The following figure shows cable connections of the AD9430DN-12.

WLAN
Figure 5-8 Cable connections of the AD9430DN-12

1 4
5 2 3 1
6 7
Table 5-6 Cable connections of the AD9430DN-12

No. Cable or Device Description
1 Network cable Connects to the RUs or lower-layer

switch. CAT5e network cables or higher
must be used, which cannot exceed 100
meters. For details about the RUs that
can be connected using such network
cables, seeTable 5-7.
2 Network cable CAT5e network cables or higher must

be used.
● When UPoE power input is used,
connect the port to a UPoE power
adapter. The cable cannot exceed 50
meters.
● When a UPoE switch is used for
power input, only Huawei UPoE
switches are supported and the
network cable cannot exceed 50 m.
● When DC power input is used,
connect the port to an AC or upper-
layer switch. The cable cannot
exceed 100 meters.
3 Network cable Connects to an AC or upper-layer

switch. CAT5e network cables or higher
must be used, which cannot exceed 100
meters.

WLAN
4 Serial cable Connects to a maintenance terminal for

AP configuration and management. The
interface type is RJ45.
5 DC power cable Connects to a DC power supply.
6 USB flash drive Connects to a USB flash drive to extend

the storage space of the AP. The USB
2.0 standard is supported.
NOTE
To ensure compatibility between USB flash
drives and devices, use Huawei-certified USB
flash drives (listed in Table 5-8) to
configure the Huawei devices.
7 Micro SD card Connects to a Micro SD card to extend

the storage space of the AP. The SD 2.0
standard is supported. You are advised
to use Toshiba, Panasonic, and SanDisk
Micro SD cards.
Table 5-7 Table 2 Number of RUs managed by an AD9430DN-12

Networ R R240D R25 R450D R250D-E R251D-E
king 2 0D/
Scenari 3 R25
o 0 1D
D
Direct 1 6 6 4 (powered 12 (powered 4 (when the

connecti 2 (powered by PoE from locally RU has PoE
on by PoE the central through a out disabled
from the AP) power and is
central adapter) powered by
AP) NOTE PoE from the
The R250D-E central AP)
12 12 (powered can be
(powered locally directly
locally through a connected to
through a power an
power adapter) AD9430DN-1
2 only
adapter) through a
power
adapter.

WLAN
Networ R R240D R25 R450D R250D-E R251D-E

king 2 0D/
Scenari 3 R25
o 0 1D
D
Indirect 2 24 24 24 24 24
connecti 4
on
(connect
ing to
RUs
through
a PoE
switch)
or ESD gloves.
● The device supports UPoE input and DC power input. You can use either of the power supply
modes.
● Do not use an AD9430DN-12 to supply PoE power to different RU models simultaneously;
otherwise, the RUs may have insufficient power and fail to work properly.


vendors.
other vendors.

WLAN

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

WLAN

between them.
terminal.
Lock hole
Security Lock

corners is 1 mm.

WLAN

No. Check Item



The device supports the DC power supply and UPoE power supply. You can select
the power supply mode according to your network requirements.
Check Before Power-on

After the installation is complete, check the following items before powering on
the device:
● The device is correctly connected to the power adapter if it uses the DC power
supply.
● The UPoE power supply device is well grounded if the device uses the UPoE
power supply.
● Do not frequently power on and off the device.

● The device supports UPoE input and DC power input but does not support power backup.
You can use either of the power supply modes. If the device is connected to UPoE and DC
power supplies at the same time, do not disconnect the device from any power supply;
otherwise, the device may restart unexpectedly.
Indicator Status
After the AP installation is complete, observe the indicators to check the system

WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(AD9430DN-24)
The AD9430DN-24 is a central access point (AP) used in Huawei agile distributed
Wi-Fi solution and can be installed in the weak-current well, equipment room, and
corridors. It supports PoE power supply and can be connected to multiple remote
units (RUs) deployed indoors, which greatly extends the coverage range, enhances
flexibility in AP planning and deployment, and reduces the engineering
construction costs. The central AP manages the RUs and processes services in a
centralized manner. The RUs process radio signals independently. Such distributed
architecture further improves the wireless access capability, creating optimal
service experience for users.
Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the AD9430DN-24.
Figure 5-9 AD9430DN-24 appearance

2 3

MODE
1 4 5 6
7 8

WLAN
Table 5-10 describes interfaces on the AD9430DN-24.

1 MODE MODE button: switches the working

mode of indicators.
2 10/100/1000BASE Twenty-four downlink network

-T Ethernet interfaces that supports 10M/100M/
electrical ports 1000M auto-sensing and PoE output.
3 Combo ports Four uplink combo ports. The electrical

and optical ports are multiplexed as
combo ports, and only one of them
can work at a time.The electrical ports
support 10M/100M/1000M auto-
sensing, and the optical ports support
100M/1000M optical modules.

if you hold down the button more
than 3s.
5 Console port RJ45 port: connects to a maintenance

terminal for AP configuration and
management.
6 USB port USB port: connects to a USB flash

drive to transfer the configuration and
upgrade files. The USB2.0 standard is
supported.
7 Ground point Connects the device to the ground.
8 AC power jack Connects to the power supply through

an AC power cable.
LED Indicator
Figure 5-10 shows the indicators on the AD9430DN-24 front panel.

WLAN
Figure 5-10 Indicators on the AD9430DN-24 front panel
HUAWEI 0 1 2 3 4
1 PWR
2 SYS
STAT
SPED
PoE
345
MODE
AD9430DN-24
7 7 7 8
HUAWEI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
PWR
SYS
STAT 24 25 26 27
SPED
PoE
CONSOLE
MODE
AD9430DN-24 Default
Table 5-11 describes indicators on the AD9430DN-24 front panel.
Table 5-11 Description of indicators on the AD9430DN-24 front panel

Button
1 Power supply Green ● Off: The device is powered off.

indicator: PWR ● Steady on: The power module is
working properly.
2 System status - Off: The system is not running.

indicator: SYS
Green ● Fast blinking (4 Hz): The system
is starting.
Red Steady on: After registering, the

system does not operate properly, or
been generated.
3 Status mode Green ● Steady on: The service port

indicator: indicators work in status mode
STAT and show the link connection
states and link activity on ports.
● Off: The status mode is not
selected.

WLAN

Button
4 Speed mode Green ● Steady on: The service port

indicator: indicators show the port speed.
SPED After 45 seconds, the service port
to the status mode.
● Off: The speed mode is not
selected.
5 PoE mode Green ● Steady on: The service port

indicator: PoE indicators show the PoE status.
to the status mode.
● Off: The PoE mode is not
selected.
6 Mode - ● When you press this button once,

switching the service port indicators change
button: MODE to speed mode and show the
speed of service ports.
second time, the service port
third time, the STAT indicator
turns green and the service port
mode.
NOTE
If you do not press the MODE button
within 45 seconds, the service port
indicators restore to the default mode.
In this case, the STAT indicator is steady
green, and the SPED and PoE indicators
are off.

WLAN

Button

● Electrical
ports: The
ports are
numbered
from
bottom to
top and left
to right,
starting
with 0.
● Optical
ports: Each
optical port
has a
correspondi
ng
indicator
above it.
8 USB indicator Reserved
Table 5-12 Description of service interface indicators in different modes


has been shut down.
receiving data.

has been shut down.
● Steady on: The port is operating
at 10/100 Mbit/s.
● Blinking: The port is operating at
1000 Mbit/s.

WLAN
PoE Green ● Off: The port does not provide

PoE power.
● Steady on: The port is providing
PoE power.
● Blinking: The power of the PD
exceeds the power supply
capability of the port or exceeds
the threshold. Or the PD does not
comply with PoE.
Table 5-13 Basic Specifications
Item Description
Technical Dimensions (H 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 312 mm

s
Weight 4.4 kg
System ● 1 GB DDR3
memory ● 16 MB NOR Flash
● 2 GB SD card
Power Power input ● Rated voltage: 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60

specification Hz
s ● Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to 264 V
AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Maximum 435 W (device power consumption: 55 W, PoE:

power 380 W)
consumption

s by 1°C every time the altitude increases by
300 m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP20

pressure

WLAN
Part Description
Number
02350KGF AD9430DN-24 Mainframe(4 GE Combo Port,24 GE Port)
02350NSS AD9430DN-24 Mainframe(FAT AP,4 GE Combo Port,24 GE Port)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-14 Tools

WLAN
The following figure shows the process for installing the device.

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End
● Central AP
● Ground cable (with OT terminals)
● AC power cable
● Screws
● Rubber pads
● Warranty card
The AD9430DN-24 can be installed in the weak-current well and equipment room,
or against walls in the corridors. The installation position depends on the site

WLAN
survey result. Leave at least 50 mm clearance at two sides and rear of the device
for heat dissipation and cable connections.
equipment.
Mounting APs on a wall requires sheet metal mounting brackets and expansion
screws. The procedure is as follows (expansion bolts need to be prepared by
customer):
Step 1 Use M4 screws to fix the mounting brackets on both sides of the AP.

WLAN
Figure 5-12 Installing mounting brackets
M4
1.2N•m
Step 2 Attach the AP against the wall and adjust its position to keep the network ports
facing the ground. Mark positions of the mounting holes with a marker.
Step 3 Drill holes on the wall and install expansion bolts.
Figure 5-13 Installing expansion bolts
a b
Ø8
45mm-50mm
1. Use an φ8 drill bit to drill holes in the marked positions.

expansion bolts.
3. Remove the nut, spring washer, and flat washer.
Step 4 Secure the device on the wall and fasten the flat washers, spring washers, and
nuts in order.

WLAN
Figure 5-14 Fixing the device

M6
5N•m
Step 5 Connect the device to the nearest ground point using a ground cable.
----End
5.2.2.5.2 Installing the Device in a Cabinet/Rack
The AD9430DN-24 is 1 U (44.45 mm) high and can be installed in a 19-inch

cabinet (floating nuts and M6 screws need to be prepared by customer). To ensure
good heat dissipation, reserve at least 1 U space above and below the device.
Ensure that the cabinet has sufficient space for device installation.
M4
1.2N•m
Step 2 Install four floating nuts on the front mounting rail.

WLAN
1U
Step 3 Fix the device in a 19-inch cabinet using floating nuts and four M6 screws.
Figure 5-17 Installing the device into a cabinet
----End
Before installing the device on a desk, ensure that the desk is flat and properly
grounded. Do not place other objects on the device.

WLAN
1
2
Step 1 Slowly turn the chassis upside down, and then attach four rubber pads in the
Step 2 Turn the chassis over and gently place the chassis on the desk.
Step 3 (Optional) Install a security lock to the security slot on the side of the chassis (the
security lock needs to be prepared by customer).
----End
The following figure shows cable connections of the AD9430DN-24.
Figure 5-19 Cable connections

1 2 3 4

MODE
5 6

WLAN
Table 5-15 Cable connections of the AD9430DN-24

1 Network cable Twenty-four 10M/100M/1000M auto-

sensing ports for downlink data
transmission (connecting to the RUs or
lower-layer switch). These ports support
PoE power supply. CAT5e network
cables or higher must be used, which
cannot exceed 100 meters. For details
about the RUs that can be connected
using such network cables, see Table
5-16.
2 Optical fiber/Network Four combo ports used for uplink data

cable transmission (connecting to the AC or
upper-layer switch). The electrical and
optical ports are multiplexed as combo
ports, and only one of them can work
at a time.
● The optical port needs to have an
optical module installed (the optical
module needs to be purchased
separately). Install dust plugs on idle
optical ports.
● The electrical ports are connected to
Ethernet cables. CAT5e network
cannot exceed 100 meters.
3 Console cable RJ45 port used to connect to a

maintenance terminal for configuration
and management.
4 USB flash drive Connects to a USB flash drive to

transfer the configuration and upgrade
files.
5 Ground cable Connects the device to the ground cable

through the ground screw.
6 AC power cable Connects to an AC power supply.

WLAN
Table 5-16 Table 2 Number of RUs managed by an AD9430DN-24
Networking R230D/R240D/ R250D-E R251D-E

Scenario R250D/R251D/
R450D
Direct connection 24 24 (when the RU 24 (when the RU

has PoE out has PoE out
disabled and is disabled and is
powered by PoE powered by PoE
from the central from the central
AP) AP)
12 (when the RU 12 (when the RU

enabled and is enabled and is
AP) AP)
24 (powered -
locally through a
power adapter)
Indirect 48 48 48
connection
(connecting to
RUs through a
PoE switch)
or ESD gloves.
● The number of RUs connected to an AD9430DN-24 is determined by the total PoE output
power of the central AP and the total power consumption of RUs.


WLAN
Insert the optical fiber connectors into the optical ports. The cabling requirements
are as follows:

40 mm.
connector.
● Install dust plugs on idle optical ports.
Connects to a USB Flash Drive

To ensure compatibility between USB flash drives and devices, use Huawei-
certified USB flash drives (listed in the following table) to configure the Huawei
devices.

vendors.
other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

other vendors.

WLAN

other vendors.
Connecting Ground Cable

device. Use the M6 OT terminal for the device and M8 OT terminal for the ground
bar. The type of OT terminals can also be determined according to site surveys.
Cut the cable into the required length according to onsite situations.
Use the tightening torque of 3 N m to tighten the OT terminal for the device. The
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m
● The bending radius of a ground cable must be greater than or equal to five
between them.
Connecting Power Cables
To avoid electric shock, do not power on the device before you finish installing the
device and connecting cables.
Connect the device to an external power supply system using the AC power cable.

WLAN

Lock hole Security Lock

corners is 1 mm.
No. Check Item


cramped firmly.


WLAN
No. Check Item


After the installation is complete, observe indicators to determine the system

Do not frequently power on and off a device.


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
● The power supply is faulty.
device.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.
speed.

optical fiber.
optical interface.

WLAN

#
combo-port copper
#
Return
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------


WLAN
Context
NOTICE

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.

WLAN
you pull it.
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

WLAN

(AD9431DN-24X)

The AD9431DN-24X is a central AP used in Huawei agile distributed Wi-Fi
solution. It supports PoE power supply and can be connected to multiple remote
units (RUs) deployed indoors. The central AP and RUs are connected through
network cables, which greatly extends the coverage range, enhances flexibility in
AP deployment and planning, and reduces the engineering construction costs. The
central AP manages the RUs and processes services in a centralized manner. The
RUs process radio signals independently. Such distributed architecture further
improves the wireless access capability, creating optimal service experience for
users.
The AD9431DN-24X is recommended for environments with complex wall
structures and high-density rooms, such as schools, hotels, hospitals, and office
meeting rooms. Signals are transmitted through network cables without
attenuation. The RUs are deployed indoors and provide comprehensive signal
coverage.
Figure 5-25 shows the appearance of the AD9431DN-24X.
Figure 5-25 Appearance of the AD9431DN-24X

1 2 3 4 5
HUAWEI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR
RPS
SYS
STAT
SPED 0 1 2 3
CONSOLE
STCK
PoE
MODE
AD9431DN-24X 10G/1G
Default
~100-240V;50/60Hz;7 A
+12V;10A
-53.5V;15A
6 7 8
LE
CONSO
4
23 24
21 22 3
19 20
17 18 2
15 16
13 14 1
Default
11 12
9 10
7 8
5 6
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4
10G/1
G
PWR
RPS
SYS
STAT
SPED
9
STCK
PoE
-24X
AD9431DN
MODE
Table 5-19 describes ports on the AD9431DN-24X.

WLAN
1 10/100/1000BASE Twenty-four downlink network ports

-T Ethernet that support 10/100/1000Mbit/s auto-
electrical ports sensing and PoE output.
2 SFP+ Four 10GE optical ports that support

the 100M/1000M/10GE optical module
and high-speed cables (1 m, 3 m, or 5
m).


management.
5 USB Connects to a USB flash drive to

files. The USB2.0 standard is
supported.
6 Ground point Connects the device to a ground cable.
7 RPS power jack Connects to the power supply through

a DC power output port on the
RPS1800 chassis for power supply
backup.
8 AC power jack Connects to the power supply through

an AC power cable.
5.3.1.2 RPS1800 Power Supply
Appearance
Figure 5-26 shows the appearance of an RPS1800 power supply.
Figure 5-26 Appearance of an RPS1800 power supply

WLAN
Function
The RPS1800 is a redundant power supply that ensures seamless failover if the
internal power module of a central AP fails. The RPS1800 can detect the failure of
the internal power module on a connected central AP and immediately supply
power to this switch. The switch can continue operating without a restart.
The RPS1800 has the following features:
● For AD9431DN-24X PoE central AP, the RPS1800 supports the 6:1 power cold
redundancy mode.
– If the RPS1800 has no 870 W PoE power module, it provides the same
functions for PoE central APs as it does for non-PoE central APs.
– If the RPS1800 has 870 W PoE power modules installed, it provides power
redundancy for the system and PoE power modules of PoE central APs
but does not provide PoE power supply for the central APs.
– The RPS1800 can provide PoE power redundancy for only one central AP
at a time. It requires only one 870 W PoE power module when using 220
V power input and requires two 870 W PoE power module when using
110 V power input.
The 870 W PoE power modules and RPS cables are not hot swappable.
The RPS1800 only provides power redundancy for central APs and cannot power on a
switch directly.
Application
The RPS1800 can be deployed on various networks to ensure non-stop operation
of the networks. Figure 5-27 and Figure 5-28 show different deployments of the
RPS1800.
When an RPS1800 uses the same external power supply system as the connected
central APs, it can prevent service interruption caused by failures of the central
APs' internal power modules. When an RPS1800 uses a different external power
supply system than the connected central APs, it can prevent service interruption
caused by failures of central APs' internal power modules and external power
supply system. Therefore, this deployment is more reliable.

WLAN
Figure 5-27 Same external power supply system for RPS1800 and connected
central APs
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6
~100-240V;50/60Hz;16 A
OUTPUT1 -53.5V/15A;12V/12.5A OUTPUT2 -53.5V/15A;12V/12.5A OUTPUT3 -53.5V/15A;12V/12.5A OUTPUT4 -53.5V/15A;12V/12.5A OUTPUT5 -53.5V/15A;12V/12.5A OUTPUT6 -53.5V/15A;12V/12.5A
TOP
~100-240V;50/60Hz;7A
+12V;10A
-53.5V;15A
Figure 5-28 Different external power supply systems for RPS1800 and connected
central APs
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6
~100-240V;50/60Hz;16 A
TOP
~100-240V;50/60Hz;7A
+12V;10A
-53.5V;15A
If one of central APs connected to the RPS1800 encounters an internal power

module failure, the RPS1800 provides seamless failover for the central AP. Then
the RPS1800 does not provide power backup for the other central APs connected
until the internal power module of the faulty switch is recovered or replaced.
If more than one connected central AP has an internal power module failure, the
RPS1800 preferentially provides power for the central AP connected to port 1. If
the central AP connected to port 1 has an internal power module failure when the
RPS1800 is providing power for a central AP connected to another port, the
RPS1800 immediately stops supplying power for this central AP and starts
providing power to the central AP connected to port 1.

WLAN
If the RPS1800 has 870 W PoE power modules installed, it can provide PoE power
for PoE central APs.s
Panel Description
Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-30 show the appearance of an RPS1800 power supply.
Figure 5-29 Front view of an RPS1800 power supply

1 2
RPS1800
PWR TEMP FAN
OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6
Figure 5-30 Rear view of an RPS1800 power supply

3 4 5
~100-240V;50/60Hz;16 A
1. RPS 2. Two swappable 3. 4. Six DC output 5. AC power

power power module Ground ports socket
indicators slots screw
NOTE NOTE
The DC output The AC power
NOTE
ports connect to socket connects to
870 W PoE power
switches through an AC power
modules can be
RPS cables. source through an
installed in the
RPS1800 power
slots.
cable.
Table 5-20 describes the indicators on the panel of an RPS1800 power supply.
Table 5-20 Indicators on the panel of an RPS1800 power supply
Indicator Color Description
PWR Green Steady on: The power input is in normal range.
- Off: The switch is powered off.
TEMP Green Steady on: The temperature is in normal range.
Red Steady on: The temperature is out of range.
FAN Green Steady on: The fan module runs properly.

WLAN
Indicator Color Description
OUTPUT Green Steady on: The RPS power supply is in cold

backup state.
Blinking: The RPS power supply is providing
power.
Yellow Steady on: The RPS power supply is providing

power for one or more switches and is
therefore unavailable to supply power for more
switches.
Specifications
Table 5-21 describes technical specifications of an RPS1800 power supply.
Table 5-21 Technical specifications of an RPS1800 power supply

Item Description Description (with Description (with
(Without Power One Power Module Two Power Modules
Modules Installed) Installed) Installed)
Dimensio 442.0 mm x 310.0 mm x 43.6 mm

ns (W x
D x H)
Weight 4.0 kg 5.5 kg 7.0 kg
Operatin 0°C-50°C (at 0-2000 m altitude)

g
temperat
ure

temperat
ure
Relative 5% RH to 95% RH, noncondensing

humidity
Airflow Air flows in through the DC output ports side and flows out through
direction the power module side.
Rated 220/110 V AC, 50/60 Hz

input
voltage
Input 200 V AC to 240 V AC (220 V rated voltage input)/100 V AC to 120

voltage V AC (110 V rated voltage input), 50/60 Hz
range

WLAN
Item Description Description (with Description (with

(Without Power One Power Module Two Power Modules
Modules Installed) Installed) Installed)
Input 12 A
current
Maximu 12 V: 11.5 A ● 12 V: 11.5 A ● 12 V: 11.5 A

m output ● -53.5 V: 15 A ● -53.5 V: 15 A
current (input voltage output per port
range: 200 V AC (input voltage
to 240 V AC) range: 200 V AC
to 240 V AC)
● -53.5 V: 15 A
output per port
(input voltage
range: 100 V AC
to 120 V AC, two
870 W PoE power
modules required)
Maximu 12 V: 140 W ● 12 V: 140 W ● 12 V: 140 W

m output ● -53.5 V: 800 W ● -53.5 V: 1600 W
power (input voltage (input voltage
range: 200 V AC range: 200 V AC
to 240 V AC) to 240 V AC)
● -53.5 V: 800 W
(input voltage
range: 100 V AC
to 120 V AC, two
870 W PoE power
modules required)
Part 02353857
number
Each interface of the RPS provides a maximum of 140 W power for the device and 800 W
PoE power for PDs.
Indicator
Figure 5-31 shows the indicators on the AD9431DN-24X front panel.

WLAN
Figure 5-31 Indicators on the AD9431DN-24X front panel
3 21 9 9 10
HUAWEI 0 1 2 3 4 5
PWR
RPS
SYS
4 STAT
SPED 4
CONSOLE
STCK
PoE
MODE
5 67 AD9431DN-24X Default
8
3 21 9 9 10
HUAWEI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR
4
RPS
SYS
STAT
SPED 0 1 2 3
CONSOLE
STCK
PoE
MODE
AD9431DN-24X Default
5 67
10G/1G
Table 5-22 describes indicators on the AD9431DN-24X front panel.
Table 5-22 Description of indicators on the AD9431DN-24X front panel

Button
1 PWR: internal - Off: The switch is powered off.

power supply
indicator Green Steady on: The switch is powered
on.
Yellow Steady on: The built-in power

module is faulty, and the switch is
powered by the RPS system.
2 RPS: RPS - Off: No RPS is connected to the

power supply central AP.
indicator
Green ● Steady on: The RPS is in cold
standby state.
● Blinking: The RPS is providing
power for another device.

WLAN

Button
Yellow ● Steady on: The RPS is in alarm

state. (No 870 W PoE power
module is available in the
RPS1800 or the RPS1800 cannot
provide power supply to the local
central AP at this time.)
● Blinking: The RPS is providing
power for the central AP and the
built-in power module of the
central AP is faulty.

status
indicator Green ● Fast blinking: The system is
starting.
● Slow blinking: The system is
running normally.
Red Steady on: The system does not

work normally after registration, or
been generated.
4 STAT: status Green ● Off: The status mode is not

indicator selected.
● Steady on: The status mode
(default mode) is selected. If the
status mode is selected, the
service port indicator shows the
port link or activity state.
5 SPED: speed Green ● Off: The speed mode is not

indicator selected.
● Steady on: The speed mode is
selected. If the speed mode is
selected, the service port
indicator shows the port speed
state. After 45 seconds, the
service port indicators
automatically restore to the
status mode.
6 STCK: stack Reserved

indicator

WLAN

Button
7 PoE: PoE Green ● Off: The PoE mode is not

indicator selected.
indicators show the PoE status.
to the status mode.
8 MODE: mode - ● When you press this button once,

switch button the service port indicators change
to the speed mode and show the
speed of each service port.
second time, the service port
indicators change to the stack
mode and show the stack ID of
the local switch.
third time, the service port
fourth time, the service port
mode, and the STAT indicator
turns green.
If you do not press the MODE
button within 45 seconds, the
service port indicators restore to the
default mode. In this case, the STAT
indicator is steady green, the SPED
and PoE indicators are off, and the
STCK indicator is off or blinking
green.

WLAN

Button

● GE
electrical
ports: The
ports are
numbered
from
bottom to
top and
left to
right,
starting
with 0.
● 10GE
optical
ports:
Arrowhead
s show the
positions of
ports.
10 USB indicator Reserved
Table 5-23 Description of service interface indicators in different modes


has been shut down.
receiving data.

has been shut down.
● Steady on: The port is operating
at 10/100 Mbit/s.
● Blinking: The port is operating at
1000 Mbit/s.

WLAN
PoE Green ● Off: The port does not provide

PoE power.
● Steady on: The port is providing
PoE power.
● Blinking: The power of the PD
exceeds the power supply
capability of the port or exceeds
the threshold. Or the PD does not
comply with PoE.
Table 5-24 provides basic specifications of the AD9431DN-24X.
Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 43.6 mm × 442 mm × 310 mm

s
Weight 4.3 kg
System 512 MB DDR3

memory
Power Power input ● Rated voltage: 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60

specification Hz
s ● Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to 264 V
AC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Maximum 410 W (device power consumption: 30 W, PoE

power out: 370 W)
consumption

s by 1°C every time the altitude increases by
300 m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP20

WLAN
Item Description

pressure
Part Description
Number
50083101 AD9431DN-24X Mainframe(24 Ethernet 10/100/1000 ports,4 10

Gig SFP+,PoE+,370W POE AC support)
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation

WLAN
Table 5-25 Tools


WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End
● Central AP
● Ground cable (with OT terminals)
● AC power cable
● Screws
● Rubber pads
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
The AD9431DN-24X can be installed in the weak-current well and equipment

room, or against walls in the corridors. The installation position depends on the
site survey result. Leave at least 50 mm clearance at two sides and rear of the
device for heat dissipation and cable connections.
equipment.
Mounting APs on a wall requires sheet metal mounting brackets and M6
expansion screws. The procedure is as follows (M6 expansion bolts need to be
prepared by customer):

WLAN
M4
1.2 N•m
Step 2 Attach the AP against the wall and adjust its position to keep the network ports
facing the ground. Mark positions of the mounting holes with a marker.
Step 3 Drill holes on the wall and install M6 expansion bolts.
Figure 5-34 Installing M6 expansion bolts
a b
Ø8
45mm-50mm
1. Use an φ8 drill bit to drill holes in the marked positions.

expansion bolts.
3. Remove the nut, spring washer, and flat washer.
Step 4 Secure the device on the wall and fasten the flat washers, spring washers, and
nuts in order.

WLAN
Figure 5-35 Fixing the device

M6
5N•m
----End
5.3.2.5.2 Installing the Device in a Cabinet/Rack
The AD9431DN-24X is 1 U (44.45 mm) high and can be installed in a 19-inch

cabinet (floating nuts and M6 screws need to be prepared by customer). To ensure
good heat dissipation, reserve at least 1 U space above and below the device.
Ensure that the cabinet has sufficient space for device installation.
M4
1.2 N•m
E
SOL
CON
3
ult
Defa
2
24
23
22 1
21
20 /1G
19 10G
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Step 2 Install four floating nuts on the front mounting rail.

WLAN
1U
Step 3 Fix the device in a 19-inch cabinet using floating nuts and four M6 screws.
Figure 5-38 Installing the device into a cabinet
CONSOLE
4
23 24 3
21 22
19 20 2
17 18
15 16 1
14 Default
13
11 12
9 10
7 8
6 G
5 10G/1
3 4
1 2
----End
Before installing the device on a desk, ensure that the desk is flat and properly
grounded. Do not place other objects on the device.

WLAN

HUA
WE
PWR I
RPS
1
2
SYS 3
4
STAT
5
SPED 6
STCK 7
8
PoE 9
10
11
12
MOD
E 13
14
AD943 15
16
1DN 17
-24X 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
4
10G
/1G
CON
SOLE
Defa
ult
a
b
CONSOLE
4
23 24
21 22 3
19 20
17 18 2
15 16
13 14 1
Default
11 12
9 10
7 8
5 6
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4
10G/1
G
PWR
RPS
SYS
STAT
SPED
STCK
PoE
4X
AD9431DN-2
MODE
Step 1 Slowly turn the chassis upside down, and then attach four rubber pads in the
Step 2 Turn the chassis over and gently place the chassis on the desk.
Step 3 (Optional) Install a security lock to the security slot on the side of the chassis (the
security lock needs to be prepared by customer).
----End
The following figure shows cable connections of the AD9431DN-24X.
Figure 5-40 Cable connections

1 2 3 4
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PWR
RPS
SYS
STAT
SPED 1 2 3 4
CONSOLE
STCK
PoE
MODE
AD9431DN-24X 10G/1G
Default
~100-240V;50/60Hz;7 A
+12V;10A
-53.5V;15A
5 6 7

WLAN
1 Network cable Twenty-four 10M/100M/1000M auto-

sensing ports for downlink data
transmission (connecting to the RUs or
lower-layer switch). These ports support
PoE power supply. CAT5e network
cannot exceed 100 meters. For details
about the RUs that can be connected
using such network cables, see Table
5-27.
2 Optical fiber ● Four 10GE SFP+ ports used for uplink

data transmission (connecting to the
AC or upper-layer switch).
● Insert copper transceivers or high-
speed cables (1 m/3 m/5 m) into
optical ports. The copper transceivers
and high-speed cables must be
purchased separately.
● Install dust plugs on idle optical
ports.
3 Console cable Connects to a maintenance terminal for

AP configuration and management.
4 USB flash drive Connects to a USB flash drive to

files.
5 Ground cable Connects the device to a ground cable.
6 RPS cable Connects to the power supply through a

DC power output port on the RPS1800
chassis for power supply backup.
7 AC power cable Connects to an AC power supply.
Table 5-27 Table 2 Number of RUs managed by an AD9431DN-24X

R450D
Direct connection 24 24 (when the RU 24 (when the RU

disabled and is disabled and is
AP) AP)

WLAN

R450D
12 (when the RU 12 (when the RU

enabled and is enabled and is
AP) AP)
24 (powered -
locally through a
power adapter)
Indirect 48 48 48
connection
(connecting to
RUs through a
PoE switch)
or ESD gloves.
● The number of RUs connected to an AD9431DN-24X is determined by the total PoE output
power of the central AP and the total power consumption of RUs.


WLAN
Insert the optical fiber connectors into the optical ports. The cabling requirements
are as follows:

40 mm.
connector.
● Install dust plugs on idle optical ports.
Connecting Ground Cable

device. Use the M6 OT terminal for the device and M8 OT terminal for the ground
bar. The type of OT terminals can also be determined according to site surveys.
Cut the cable into the required length according to onsite situations.
Use the tightening torque of 3 N m to tighten the OT terminal for the device. The
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
Connecting Power Cables
To avoid electric shock, do not power on the device before you finish installing the
device and connecting cables.
Connect the device to an external power supply system using the AC power cable.

WLAN

CONSOLE
4
23 24
21 22 3
19 20
17 18 2
15 16
13 14 1
Default
11 12
9 10
7 8
5 6
HUAWEI 1 2 3 4
10G/1
G
PWR
RPS
SYS
STAT
SPED
STCK
PoE
4X
AD9431DN-2
MODE

1 mm.
No. Check Item


WLAN
No. Check Item

cramped firmly.



After the installation is complete, observe indicators to determine the system


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
● The power supply is faulty.

WLAN
device.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
requirements.
speed.

WLAN

optical fiber.
optical interface.
#
combo-port copper
#
Return
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Connector Type :LC
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Vendor Name :HUAWEI
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
RX loss of signal
RX power low

WLAN
-------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage(V) :3.29
-------------------------------------------------------------

Context
NOTICE


WLAN

module.

● Dust caps
● Dust plugs
● Alcohol swab
Procedure

WLAN
module safely.
you pull it.

WLAN
hear a click.
the optical module.
Follow-up Procedure

(R230D)

The R230D is a remote radio unit (RRU) used in Huawei agile distributed Wi-Fi
solution, recommended for environments with complex wall structures and a high-
density of rooms, such as schools, hotels, apartments, and office meeting rooms.
Huawei R230D uses an 86 mm plate in compliance with international standards
and can be easily installed into a junction box in a room. It is equipped with a
built-in antenna and a hidden indicator; therefore, installation of the RRU does not
affect indoor decorations and designs. It also has an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac
wireless module and can be connected to wireless terminals, such as the laptops,
tablets, and smartphones. 802.3af standards compliance makes cable routing
easier for the R230D.
Figure 5-46 shows the appearance of the R230D.

WLAN
Figure 5-46 Appearance of the R230D
1
2
Table 5-29 describes interfaces on the R230D.
Table 5-29 Interfaces on the R230D

1 Default Reset button used to

restore factory settings
and restart the R230D if
you hold down the
button more than 3
seconds.
2 ETH/PoE 10/100 Mbit/s auto-

sensing network
interface used to connect
to the central AP and
supports PoE power
input. Cat 5e network
cables or higher must be
used, which cannot
exceed 100 meters.
LED Indicator
The R230D provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 5-47.

WLAN
Figure 5-47 Indicator on the R230D
Indicator
Table 5-30 Description of the indicator on the R230D

Indicato - Green Steady Default status after power-on.

r on The AP is just powered on and the


Hz)

WLAN

state.

every
established).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 5-31 Basic specifications of the R230D

Item Description
Technical specifications Dimensions (H x W x D) 26 mm x 120 mm x 86

mm (1.02 in. x 4.72 in. x
3.39 in.)
Weight 0.1 kg

Power parameters Power input ● PoE power supply in

802.3af

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum power 5.1 W

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.
Environment Operating temperature -60 m to 1800 m: 0°C to

specifications and altitude 40°C
1,800 m to 5,000 m: The
highest operating
temperature reduces by
1°C every time the
altitude increases by 300
m.

condensing)
Part Number Part Description
50082748 Broadband Network Terminal,R230D,

1*RJ45,11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency
Safety Precautions

WLAN
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-32 Tools

WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End
● Remote radio unit
● Screws (including the plastic expansion tubes)
● Warranty card

WLAN

● SN label
equipment.

ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN
5.4.2.5.1 Installing the AP on a Wall or Ceiling
Installing the AP on a wall or ceiling requires expansion screws delivered with the
AP. The procedure is as follows:
should be 60 mm).
60mm
2. Drill holes in the marked positions and install the plastic expansion tubes.

WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
a. Use a 6 mm drill bit to drill holes in the marked positions.

3. Insert the network cable into the ETH/PoE interface at the rear of the device.
(Category 5 enhanced cables or higher must be used. The length of the cables
cannot exceed 100 m.) Open the front cover of the device and align screws on
both sides with the plastic expansion tubes. Secure the device using the
Phillips or torx security self-tapping screws (a torx security screw has a
security pin in the center to prevent theft and can be tightened by a T20 torx
security screwdriver which needs to be prepared separately by customers).
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
4. Close the cover.
5.4.2.5.2 Installing the AP in an 86-type Box
Installing the R230D in an 86-type box requires expansion screws delivered with
the AP. The procedure is as follows:

WLAN
2. Connect the network cable to the ETH/PoE interface.
3. Open the front cover of the device and align screws on both sides with the
screw holes in the 86-type box. Secure the device using Phillips or torx
security machine screws (a torx security screw has a security pin in the center
to prevent theft and can be tightened by a T20 torx security screwdriver which
needs to be prepared separately by customers).
M4 M4
1N•m 1N•m
4. Close the cover.

WLAN

No. Check Item





WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.
device.

WLAN

(R240D)

The R240D is a remote radio unit (RRU) used in Huawei agile distributed Wi-Fi
solution, recommended for environments with complex wall structures and high-
density rooms, such as schools, hotels, apartments, and office meeting rooms.
Huawei R240D uses an 86 mm plate in compliance with international standards
and can be easily installed into a junction box in a room. It is equipped with a
built-in antenna and a hidden indicator; therefore, installation of the RRU does not
affect indoor decorations and designs. It also has an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac
wireless module and can be connected to wireless terminals, such as the laptops,
tablets, and smartphones. 802.3af/at standards compliance makes cable routing
easier for the R240D.

Top view Side view
1 2
DC 12V
Bottom view
3 4
Table 5-35 describes interfaces on the R240D.

WLAN
Table 5-35 Interfaces on the R240D


connects to a traditional
PSTN.
2 GE/PoE 10/100/1000 Mbit/s

interface: used to
connect to the central AP
and supports PoE power
input.
3 ETH0 to ETH3 10/100 Mbit/s interface:

Ethernet.
Seen from the bottom,
the four Ethernet
interfaces are ETH0,
ETH1, ETH2, and ETH3
from left to right.

connects to a POTS
phone or modem device.

restarts the device if you
6 DC 12 V Connects a 12 V power
adapter to the AP.
supply.
LED Indicator
R240D provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 5-50.

WLAN
Figure 5-50 Indicator on the R240D
Indicator
ETH0 ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 Phone



Indicato
r
Hz)

state.

WLAN

Alarm
established).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 5-37 Basic specifications of the R240D

Item Description
Technical specifications Dimensions outside the 25 mm x 140 mm x 86

wall (H × W × D) mm (0.98 in. x 5.51 in. x
3.39 in.)
Dimensions inside the 16.5 mm x 51.5 mm x

wall (H × W × D) 63.5 mm (0.65 in. x 2.03
in. x 2.50 in.)
Weight 0.2 kg

● 32 MB Flash
Power specifications Power input ● 12 V ± 10%

● PoE power: in
802.3af/at

WLAN
Item Description
Maximum power 8.7 W

consumption NOTE
The actual maximum
power consumption
regulations.
Environment Operating temperature -60 m to +1800 m: 0°C

1800 m to 5000 m:

condensing)
50082735 Broadband Network Terminal,R240D,5*RJ45,

2*RJ11,11ac, 2*2 Double Frequency
50083139 R240D Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double

Safety Precautions

WLAN
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-38 Tools

Phillips screwdriver ESD gloves Diagonal pliers
RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter Wire stripper
Network cable tester Multimeter Torque spanner

WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

● Remote Radio Unit

● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label
Figure 5-52 shows dimensions of the R240D.

WLAN
Figure 5-52 Dimensions of the R240D (unit: mm)
When determining the device installation position, comply with the following
rules:
equipment.
● Indoor devices are usually mounted on a wall or ceiling using sheet metal

ovens.

WLAN
those on APs.
When installing the device, keep away from heavy current to prevent potential hazard to people
or damage to the device.

2. Connect the network cable to the GE/PoE interface and the phone cable to
3. Install the device that has cables properly connected to the 86-type box, as

WLAN
It is recommended that the length of the cable in the 86-type box should be smaller
than 130 mm. You are advised to connect cables according to the figure.
4. Align the screw holes at the right and left of the device with the screw holes
on the box and secure the device on the box with a screwdriver.
5. Close the panel to complete installation.

WLAN
from each other.)
60mm
83.5mm
match the M4 screws, customers need to prepare the fastening screws by
themselves.
M4
0.2 N•m

WLAN
of the AP with the screw holes on the mounting bracket, and secure theAP on
the mounting bracket with machine screws.
M4
1 N•m
5. Close the panel.

WLAN
Installing the Device on a wall or ceiling requires sheet metal mounting brackets
as follows:
1. Determine the target area on a wall or ceiling, attach the sheet metal
mounting bracket against the wall, and mark positions of the mounting holes
with a marker.
2. Drill holes at the marked positions and install the plastic expansion tubes.

WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
a. Use a 6 mm drill bit to drill holes at the marked positions.

3. Use the flat washer and self-tapping screws to fasten the mounting bracket to
the wall or ceiling. If the device is installed against the wall, ensure that UP
arrowhead faces upwards.
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
of the AP with the screw holes on the mounting bracket, and secure the AP
on the mounting bracket with machine screws.
M4
0.2 N•m
6. Close the panel.
Figure 5-53 shows interfaces of the R240D.

WLAN
Figure 5-53 Interfaces of the R240D
1 2
Upper layer
network
Table 5-40 shows cable connections of the R240D.

1 Phone cable Connects the uplink

phone interface to the
traditional PSTN.

interface to the
upstream PSE Ethernet
interface.
CAT5e cables or higher
must be used.

interface to the terminal.
CAT5 cables or higher
must be used.
4 Phone cable Connects the

downstream phone
interface to the
traditional phone (POTS
phone) or modem
equipment.

WLAN
● The Ethernet cable must work properly; otherwise, the device may fail to be powered on
or cannot run properly. Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the AP, use the cable test
tool to check whether the cable is qualified. If not, replace the cable.
● When PoE and power adapter power supplies are available, the device is preferentially
powered by the PoE.

No. Check Item





WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(R250D)

The R250D in Huawei Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Solution is applicable to scenarios
with high-density rooms and complex wall structures, such as schools, hotels,
hospitals, and office meeting rooms. Huawei R250D uses an 86 mm plate in
compliance with international standards and can be easily installed into an 86–
type box in a room. It is equipped with a built-in antenna and a hidden indicator;
therefore, installation of the R250D does not affect indoor decorations or designs.
It also has an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2 wireless module and can work on
both 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz frequency bands. It supports PoE power supply, and can
be directly connected to a central AP and deployed in a room. The central AP and
the R250D are connected through network cables, which greatly extends the
coverage range, enhances flexibility in AP deployment and planning, and reduces
the engineering construction costs.
1 2 3
Table 5-42 describes ports on the R250D.

WLAN
Table 5-42 Ports on the R250D

1 Default Reset button: restores factory settings and restarts the

device if you hold down the button more than 3
seconds.
3 GE0/ 10/100/1000M port: connect to the central AP and

PoE_IN supports PoE power input.
Indicator
The R250D provides only one indicator, as shown in Figure 5-55.
GE1
Indicator

WLAN




Hz)

r state.

Alarm
established).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 5-44 provides basic specifications of the R250D.

WLAN
Table 5-44 R250D Basic specifications

Item Description

s
Weight 0.2 kg

Power Power input PoE power supply: in compliance with IEEE

specification 802.3af/at
s
Maximum 10.1 W
power NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50082920 R250D Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double

50083236 R250D-USA Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double


WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-45 Tools


WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote Unit
● Screw
● Warranty card
● SN label
equipment.

ovens.

WLAN
those on APs.
Installing the device on a wall or ceiling requires expansion screws. The procedures
are as follows:
should be 60 mm).
60mm


WLAN
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

4. Open the front cover of the device, align screws on both sides with the plastic
expansion tubes, and use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two screws.
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
GE1

WLAN
ST2.5
GE1
0.16N•m
GE1
2. Connect the network cable to the GE0/PoE_IN interface.

WLAN

screws.
M4
1N•m
GE1
ST2.5
GE1
0.16N•m
GE1

WLAN

Device
1 Network ● CAT5e cables or higher must be used.

cable ● The length of a cable cannot exceed 100 m.
● The Ethernet cable must work properly; otherwise,
the device may fail to be powered on or cannot run
properly. Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the
R250D, use the cable test tool to check whether the
cable is qualified. If not, replace the cable.
NOTICE
Do not insert a PoE input cable into the GE1 port.


WLAN

No. Check Item





faults.

WLAN
Fault Description
Possible Causes
mode.
device.

(R250D-E)

The R250D-E in Huawei Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Solution is applicable to scenarios
hospitals, and office meeting rooms. Huawei R250D-E uses an 86 mm plate in
compliance with international standards and can be easily installed into an 86–

WLAN
type box in a room. It is equipped with a built-in antenna and a hidden indicator;
therefore, installation of the R250D-E does not affect indoor decorations or
designs. It also has an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2 wireless module and can
work on both 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz frequency bands. It supports PoE power supply,
and can be directly connected to a central AP and deployed in a room. The central
AP and the R250D-E are connected through network cables, which greatly extends
the coverage range, enhances flexibility in AP deployment and planning, and
reduces the engineering construction costs.
Figure 5-58 shows the appearance of the R250D-E.
Figure 5-58 Appearance of the R250D-E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 5-49 describes ports on the R250D-E.

devices to extend the storage space of the device.
The USB2.0 standard is supported.

seconds.


WLAN


supply.
LED Indicator
The R250D-E provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 5-59.
Indicator
GE1/PoE_OUT GE2 GE3 GE4 Pass Through

WLAN




Hz)

r state.

Alarm
established).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 5-51 provides basic specifications of the R250D-E.

WLAN
Table 5-51 R250D-E Basic specifications
Item Description

s
Weight 0.26 kg


s 802.3af/at

power USB port and PoE_OUT port)
consumption NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50082922 R250D-E Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double

50083237 R250D-E-USA Mainframe(11ac,2x2 Double


WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-52 Tools

WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End

WLAN
● Remote Unit
● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label
equipment.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.
Pass Through port.

WLAN
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT

screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
UT GE2
GE1/PoE_O
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_

WLAN


WLAN
60 mm

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/PoE
_OUT
mounting bracket.

WLAN
b
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/PoE_O
UT
M4×35 screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE

WLAN
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
or equal to 5 kg.

as follows:
the ceiling tile.

WLAN
1 2
60 mm
mounting bracket.
M4×35 screws.

WLAN
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
ST2.5
GE1/P
oE_O
UT
GE2
GE3
GE4
Pass
Throug
h
0.16 N•m
from each other.)

WLAN
60 mm
83.5 mm
themselves.
M4
1 N•m
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
mounting bracket.

WLAN
b
Pass
Throu
gh GE
1/P oE_O
UT
M4×35 screws.
M4
1 N•m
ough
Pass Thr
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE

WLAN
ST2.5
rough
Pass Th
GE4
GE3
GE2
_OUT
GE1/PoE
0.16 N•m
h
Pass Throug
GE4
GE3
OUT GE2
GE1/PoE_
Figure 5-61 Appearance of the R250D-E
1 2 3 4 5

WLAN

Device
1 DC power When the device uses the DC power supply, use a

adapter power adapter for power supply; otherwise, the
device may be damaged.

devices to extend the storage space of the device.
The USB port supports the USB 2.0 standard and a

ports.
100 m.
● The GE1/PoE_OUT port supports PoE output
and provides a maximum of 10 W power
output.
NOTICE
● When the GE1/PoE_OUT port is used for PoE output,
longer than 20 m.
● The GE1/PoE_OUT port complies with the category
PoE_OUT port.

100 m.
● If the R250D-E needs to connect to the Ethernet, ensure that the Ethernet cable is
working properly. If the Ethernet cable is not working properly, the R250D-E may fail to
be powered on or fail to work. Before connecting an Ethernet cable to the R250D-E, use
the cable test tool to check whether the cable is qualified. If the cable is unqualified,
replace it.
● The R250D-E is powered by either the DC power supply or PoE power supply.
● When the R250D-E works in 802.3af power supply mode, the USB port and PoE_OUT
USB port and PoE_OUT port have power output.

WLAN

No. Check Item




WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(R251D and R251D-E)
Huawei R251D and R251D-E are remote units (RUs) used in Huawei agile
distributed Wi-Fi solution. The RU is recommended for environments with complex
wall structures and high-density rooms, such as schools, hotels, hospitals, and
office meeting rooms. The RUs can be easily installed in junction boxes (86
mm/120 mm/118 mm) without damaging indoor decoration. The RUs have an
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave 2 wireless module and can work on both 5 GHz
and 2.4 GHz frequency bands. The RUs can receive PoE power supply, and are
deployed in rooms and connected to a central AP. The central AP and RUs are
connected through network cables, which greatly extends the coverage range,
enhances flexibility in AP deployment and planning, and reduces the engineering
construction costs.
Table 5-56 shows the appearance of the R251D and R251D-E.
Table 5-56 Appearance of the R251D and R251D-E
Model Appearance
R251D
1 3 4 5 6 7

WLAN
Model Appearance
R251D
-E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 5-57 describes ports on the R251D and R251D-E.
1 Captive Accommodates a captive screw.

screw hole NOTE
Tighten an M3x4 crosshead screw into the device to
prevent the device from dropping. If the anti-theft function
is required, tighten an M3x4 torx screw (instead of an
M3x4 crosshead screw) into the device using a T9 torx
security screwdriver. The tightening torques of the two
screw types are both 0.15 N•m.


seconds.

4 R251D: GE4 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

Ethernet.
R251D-E: 10/100/1000M port that connects to the wired

GE4/ Ethernet and supports PoE output.
PoE_Out

WLAN

Ethernet.

For power adapter models, see 6.9 Power Adaptation Solution.
LED Indicator
The R251D and R251D-E provide only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 5-62.
Indicator

or

Indicato on

WLAN

or


Hz)

state.

every
online.
to go online.
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 5-59 provides basic specifications of the R251D and R251D-E.

WLAN

Item Description
Physical Dimensions (H 32.5 mm x 86 mm x 150 mm (1.28 in. x 3.39

s
Weight 0.25 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory
Power Power input PoE power supply:

specification ● R251D: in compliance with IEEE 802.3af
s
● R251D-E: in compliance with IEEE 802.3at
Maximum ● R251D: 11.5 W

power ● R251D-E: 11.5 W (excluding the output
consumption power of the USB port and PoE_OUT port)
NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity

pressure
50083575 R251D Mainframe(11ac Wave 2, 2x2 dual bands, smart

antenna)
50083571 R251D-E Mainframe(11ac Wave 2, 2x2 dual bands, smart

antenna, USB port)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-60 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Determine the

connect cables
Power on the device
End
● Remote Unit
● Screws
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN

equipment.

ovens.
those on APs.

WLAN
60 mm

Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm

WLAN
ST3.5
1.2 N•m
Cable Connection.

WLAN
a
b

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.

as follows:
are both 0.54N m.

WLAN

WLAN

follows:

desktop stand.
b
a

WLAN
screws.
M4
1 N•m

a
b

WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m

WLAN

b
a

WLAN



WLAN
screws.
M4
0.2 N•m

screws.

WLAN
M4
0.2 N•m
Table 5-62 Appearance of the R251D and R251D-E

Model Appearance
R251D
2 3 4

WLAN
Model Appearance
R251D
-E
1 2 3 4

Device



WLAN

Device

ports.
100 m.
● The GE4/PoE_Out port of the R251D-E supports
PoE output and provides a maximum of 13.6 W
power output.
● If the R250D-E needs to connect to the
Ethernet, ensure that the Ethernet cable is
working properly. If the Ethernet cable is not
working properly, the R250D-E may fail to be
powered on or fail to work. Before connecting
an Ethernet cable to the R250D-E, use the cable
test tool to check whether the cable is qualified.
NOTE
● Do not insert a PoE input cable into the GE4/PoE_Out
port.
● When the GE4/PoE_Out port of the R251D-E is used
for PoE output, the network cable inserted in this
port cannot be longer than 40 m.

● The GE0/PoE_In port supports PoE input.
100 m.
● R251D-E: When it works in 802.3at power supply mode, the USB port and PoE_OUT port
have only one power output.


WLAN

No. Check Item





WLAN

faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

WLAN

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN

(R450D)

The R450D in Huawei Agile Distributed Wi-Fi Solution is applicable to scenarios
hospitals, and office meeting rooms. Installing the RU in settled mode does not
affect indoor decorations or designs. It also has an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ac Wave
2 wireless module and can work on both 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz frequency bands. It
supports PoE power supply, and can be directly connected to a central AP and
deployed in a room. The central AP and the R450D are connected through
network cables, which greatly extends the coverage range, enhances flexibility in
AP deployment and planning, and reduces the engineering construction costs.
1 2 3 4
Table 5-65 describes ports on the R450D.

WLAN

seconds.


supply.
Indicator
The R450D provides only a single indicator, as shown in Figure 5-65.
Indicator

WLAN




Hz)

r state.

Alarm
established).
- Red Steady Fault.

rectified manually.
Table 5-67 provides basic specifications of the R450D.

WLAN
Item Description

s
Weight 0.41 kg
System 256 MB DDR3L

memory

s 802.3af/at
Maximum 12.1 W
power NOTE

m.

temperature

humidity
IP rating IP41

pressure
50083140 R450D Mainframe(11ac wave2,indoor,2X2Dual Band,Built-

in Antenna,1*GE Port)

WLAN
Safety Precautions
carefully.
Tool Preparation
Table 5-68 Tools

WLAN

WLAN
Start
Unpack the device
Determine the

connect cables

to the lock hole
Power on the device
End
● AP device
● Warranty card
● SN label

WLAN
Celling
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
≥200 mm
Wall
≥200 mm
Floor
user terminals.
residents.

WLAN


ovens.
those on APs.


WLAN
56 mm
85 mm
Ø6
90Ǆ
35 mm ~ 40 mm
ST3.5
1.2 N•m

WLAN
or equal to 5 kg.


WLAN
1
2
47 mm
M4
1.4 N•m
3

a
b

WLAN
0.6 mm ≤ t ≤ 1.0 mm
24 mm ≤ w ≤ 29 mm
T-rail.
3
1
4
M4
1.4 N•m

bracket


WLAN
a
b

WLAN

c
the AP.
1 2

WLAN

Device


may be damaged.

WLAN
M4
1.4 N•m
M6
Connecting the
● M4: 1.4 N m
● M6: 4.8 N m
● M8: 12 N m

between them.
terminal.

WLAN


1 mm.
No. Check Item




WLAN
No. Check Item


faults.
Fault Description
Possible Causes

adapter may fail.
faulty.

WLAN

or is faulty.
power supply mode.
damaged).

powered on.
normal.
adapter.

WLAN

powered device.
the device.
incorrectly set.

WLAN
Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide 6 Appendix
6 Appendix
About This Chapter
6.1 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and Installation

6.2 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device Operation
6.3 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications
6.4 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables
6.5 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules
6.6 Appendix G Fault Tag
6.7 Installation Checklist
6.8 Guide to Making Drip Loops
6.9 Power Adaptation Solution
6.10 Installation Guide for Power Supply Surge Protectors
6.11 AC Login
6.12 AP Login
6.1 Appendix B On-site Cable Assembly and

Installation
6.1.1 Cable Assembly Precautions
Checking the Appearance of Cables

● If the cable jacket or insulation is visibly dirty, clean it before assembly.
● If the jacket or insulation of a cable has visible damage, irreparable scuffing,
or other defects, do not use the cable.

WLAN
● If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.

● If the cable jacket or insulation cracks after the cable is bent or twisted,
discard this cable and check whether other cables have the same problem. If
other cables have the same problem, replace these cables.
Checking the Appearance of Connectors

● Do not use connectors with visible defects, damage, rust or scuffing.
● Do not use connectors if their shells or pins have exposed part or uneven
plating, or their pins are lost, broken, or bent.
● Do not use connectors that have dirt on their pins or in their jacks or if there
are conductors between pins or between pins and the shell.
Precautions for Assembly

● Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the methods
given here during assembly.
● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Take the following precautions when cutting or stripping cables:
– Make cables slightly longer than necessary.
– Coil cables longer than 2 m (6.56 ft) after cutting. Bind and fasten the
coils using bundling ropes. The inner diameters of the coils should be
larger than 20 times the outer diameters of the cables.
– When stripping the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers
(braid or aluminum foil), insulation, core conductors, and other jackets
that do not need to be stripped.
– After assembling cables, cut all visible cross sections of jackets to ensure
that the cross sections are arranged neatly.
– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Terminate
exposed conductors in a timely way after stripping off insulation so that
the surface of the conductors does not become oxidized.
● Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or
connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are
crimped. They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.
The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may be different. The
figures in this document are for your reference only.
6.1.2 Assembling Power Cables

WLAN
6.1.2.1 Assembling a DC 2-Pin Round Connector (A)
Context
Figure 6-1 shows the components of DC 2-PIN round connector A.
Figure 6-1 Components of DC 2-pin round connector A
1. Enclosure 2. Shield circle 3. Clip 4. Socket 5. Nut
Procedure
Step 1 Bind a cable tie, separate the socket and nut, and install them on the cable, as
Figure 6-2 Installing the nut on the cable
Step 2 Strip the cable as shown in Figure 6-3.

WLAN
Figure 6-3 Stripping the cable
Step 3 Open the clip and correctly insert the core wires to the negative and positive
holes, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Inserting core wires
Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the crimping screw in "+" hole, rotate the
connector by 180 degree, and tighten the crimping screw in "-" hole, as shown in
Figure 6-5.

WLAN
Figure 6-5 Tightening the crimping screws
Step 5 Close the clip and tighten the screw to compact the shield layer, as shown in
Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Compacting the shield layer
Step 6 Pre-tighten the socket and enclosure and use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten
the socket with the tightening torque no less than 1.2 N•m, as shown in Figure
6-7.
Figure 6-7 Tightening the socket
Step 7 Pre-tighten the socket and nut and use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the nut
with the tightening torque no less than 1.2 N•m, as shown in Figure 6-8.

WLAN
Figure 6-8 Tightening the nut
Step 8 Use a multimeter to check the connectivity of the 2-pin round connector's cable
components, as shown in Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9 Checking connectivity
The connectivity meets standards if the following conditions are met:
● Positive and negative holes of the connector are not short-circuited.

● The metal enclosure and connector's holes are not short-circuited.
● The cable shield layer is properly connected to the metal enclosure.
● Core wires are properly connected to the connector's holes.
Step 9 If devices are installed outdoor, wrap three layers of PVC insulation tape around
the connector for protection, as shown in Figure 6-10.
NOTICE
Ensure that proper quantity of the PVC insulation tape is used for wrapping the
connector, facilitating the connector uninstallation in later maintenance.

WLAN
Figure 6-10 Wrapping PVC insulation tape
----End
6.1.2.2 Assembling a DC 2-Pin Round Connector (B)

This topic describes how to assemble a DC 2-pin round connector (B) and key
operations.
Context
Table 6-1 lists power cables connected to the active antenna unit (AAU).
Table 6-1 AAU power cable

AAU Side Cable Commonly-Used Colors Used in
Colors Britain
DC round RTN (+) Black or brown Blue

waterproof
connector NEG (-) Blue Gray
The color and appearance of cables in this topic are for reference only. The cable color and
appearance vary depending on countries and regions.
Figure 6-11 shows components of the DC round waterproof connector.

WLAN
Figure 6-11 Components of the DC round waterproof connector
1. Enclosure 2. Socket 3-1. Clamping jaw 1 3-2. Clamping jaw 2 4. Nut
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the diameter of the cable to be installed. If the diameter is larger than
14 mm, replace the clamping jaw, as shown in Figure 6-12. During the
replacement, connect the clamping jaw boss to the groove inside the socket and
ensure that the clamping jaw is completely installed in the socket, as shown in
Figure 6-13.
● Power cables supported by clamping jaw 1: 2 x 12 AWG, 2 x 4 mm2, and 2 x 6 mm2

● Power cables supported by clamping jaw 2: 2 x 8 AWG and 2 x 10 mm2
Figure 6-12 Replacing clamping jaws
1. Clamping jaw 1 2. Clamping jaw 2

WLAN
Figure 6-13 Correct operation for replacing a clamping jaw
1. Groove 2. Boss
Step 2 Reserve the cable length at the assembly end, bind the plastic cable tie, install the
nut, clamping jaw, and socket on the cable and pre-tighten them, as shown in
Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 Pre-tightening
1. Cable 2. Plastic cable tie
Step 3 Use the stripping ruler card to measure required lengths, strip the outer jacket (48
mm) on the head of the cable to be connected and the outer jacket (17 mm) of
each core wire, twist the shield layers into one strand, as shown in Figure 6-15.
NOTICE
● The stripping ruler card is delivered with the components of the connector.
● Cut the padding using diagonal pliers.
● Gently strip the insulation sheath to avoid damage to the conductor metal.
● Ensure that the edge of core wires is not split.

WLAN
1. Shield layer
Step 4 Connect the cable NEG (-) (gray in Britain and blue in other countries) to - end of
the connector and cable RTN (+) (blue in Britain and black/brown in other
countries) to + end of the connector. Tighten two crimping screws using the
Phillips screwdriver and compact the cable with tightening torque 1.4 N•m, as
Figure 6-16 Tightening the crimping screws
Step 5 After the cables are assembled, pull the cables slightly to check whether the
connections are secure. If the cable slides outward or the wire of the cable is
exposed outside the hole for the cable, remove the cable, cut the split wires, and
then strip the jacket and install the cable again.
Step 6 Twist the shield layers into one strand and insert it into the shield slot, tighten the
tail screw, and fasten the shielded layer with tightening torque 1.4 N•m, as shown
in Figure 6-17.

WLAN
Figure 6-17 Compacting the shield layer
1. Shield layer
Cut the extra shield layer using the diagonal pliers.
Step 7 Tighten the socket and enclosure until the red line on the socket is invisible, as
Figure 6-18 Tightening the socket and enclosure
Step 8 Pre-tighten the nut and socket and further tighten the nut using a torque wrench
(opening width: 28 mm), as shown in Figure 6-19.

WLAN
Figure 6-19 Tightening the nut
Step 9 Use a multimeter to check the reliability of cable components, as shown in Figure
6-20.
Figure 6-20 Checking reliability
NOTICE
● Ensure that the short circuit does not occur between the positive and negative
holes of the connector.
● Ensure that the short circuit does not occur between the metal enclosure and
connector's positive and negative holes.
Step 10 If devices are installed outdoor, wrap three layers of PVC insulation tape around
the connector for protection, as shown in Figure 6-21.

WLAN
Figure 6-21 Wrapping PVC insulation tape
NOTICE
Ensure that proper quantity of the PVC insulation tape is used for wrapping the
connector, facilitating the connector uninstallation in later maintenance.
----End
6.1.2.3 Assembling the OT Terminal and Power Cable
Context
Figure 6-22 shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.

WLAN
Figure 6-22 Components of an OT terminal and a power cable
A. Heat-shrinkable tubing B. Bare crimping terminal C. Insulation D. Conductor
Procedure
Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a length of
insulation coating C to expose the conductor D of length L1, as shown in Figure
6-23. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 6-2.
Figure 6-23 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)
NOTICE
● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, the value of L1 is 1
mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

WLAN
Table 6-2 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the
value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 Cross-Sectional Value of L1
Sectional (mm(in.)) Area of Conductor (mm(in.))
Area of (mm2(in.2))
Conductor
(mm2(in.2))
1 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.015) 11 (0.43)
1.5 (0.002) 7 (0.28) 16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)
2.5 (0.004) 7 (0.28) 25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)
4 (0.006) 8 (0.31) 35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)
6 (0.009) 9 (0.35) 50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)
If you are proficient in assembling OT terminals and power cables, you can obtain the value
of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.
Step 2 Put the heat-shrinkable (A) tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in
Figure 6-24.
Figure 6-24 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal
Step 3 Put the OT terminal B onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the OT
terminal is in good contact with the insulation coating C, as shown in Figure 6-24.
NOTICE
After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor, or L2 in Figure 6-24, must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).

WLAN
Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 6-25.
The shapes of crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.
Figure 6-25 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (OT terminal)
Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing (A) toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26 Heating the heat shrink tubing (OT terminal)
NOTICE
Stop heating the shrink tubing when the connector is securely locked in the shrink
tubing. Do not heat the shrink tubing too long as this may damage the insulation
coating.
----End

WLAN
6.1.2.4 Assembling the JG Terminal and Power Cable
Context
Figure 6-27 shows the components of a JG terminal and a power cable.
Figure 6-27 Components of a JG terminal and a power cable
A. JG terminal B. Heat-shrinkable C. Insulation layer of a power D. Conductor of a power

tubing cable cable
Procedure
Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L, as
shown in Figure 6-28. The recommended values of L are listed in Table 6-3.
NOTICE
● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimping terminal is not provided by Huawei, you can adjust the
value of L as required.
Figure 6-28 Stripping a power cable (JG terminal)

WLAN
value of L
Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm(in.))
(mm2(in.2))
16 (0.025) 13 (0.51)
25 (0.039) 14 (0.55)
35 (0.054) 16 (0.63)
50 (0.077) 16 (0.63)
Step 2 Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal, as shown in Figure
6-29.
Figure 6-29 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimping terminal
Step 3 Put the bare crimping terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the
bare crimping terminal is in good contact with the insulation of the power cable,
as shown in Figure 6-29.
Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 6-30.
Figure 6-30 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimping terminal and the
conductor (JG terminal)

WLAN
Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing toward the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then use a heat gun to heat the tube, as shown in Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG terminal)
----End
6.1.2.5 Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable
Context
Figure 6-32 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.
Figure 6-32 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable
A. Cord end terminal B. Insulation layer of a power cable C. Conductor of a power cable
Procedure
Step 1 Strip a part of the insulation to expose the cable conductor with a length of L1, as
shown in Figure 6-33. The recommended values of L1 are listed in Table 6-4.

WLAN
NOTICE
When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
Figure 6-33 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)
value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 Cross-Sectional Value of L1
Sectional (mm(in.)) Area of Conductor (mm(in.))
Area of (mm2(in.2))
Conductor
(mm2(in.2))
1 (0.002) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.015) 15 (0.59)
1.5 (0.002) 10 (0.39) 16 (0.025) 15 (0.59)
2.5 (0.004) 10 (0.39) 25 (0.039) 18 (0.71)
4 (0.006) 12 (0.47) 35 (0.054) 19 (0.75)
6 (0.009) 14 (0.55) 50 (0.077) 26 (1.02)
Step 2 Put the cord end terminal onto the conductor, and ensure that the conductor is
aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in Figure 6-34.
NOTICE
After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).

WLAN
Figure 6-34 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor
Step 3 Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35 Crimping the cord end terminal and the conductor
Step 4 Check the maximum width of the tubular crimped terminal. The maximum width
of a tubular crimped terminal is listed in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Maximum width of a tubular crimped terminal
Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Crimped

Terminal (mm2(in.2)) Terminal W1 (mm(in.))
0.25 (0.0004) 1 (0.04)
0.5 (0.0008) 1 (0.04)
1.0 (0.0015) 1.5 (0.06)
1.5 (0.0023) 1.5 (0.06)
2.5 (0.0039) 2.4 (0.09)
4 (0.006) 3.1 (0.12)
6 (0.009) 4 (0.16)

WLAN
Cross-Sectional Area of Tubular Maximum Width of Crimped

Terminal (mm2(in.2)) Terminal W1 (mm(in.))
10 (0.015) 5.3 (0.21)
16 (0.025) 6 (0.24)
25 (0.039) 8.7 (0.34)
35 (0.054) 10 (0.39)
----End
6.1.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables
6.1.3.1 Assembling the Shielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable
Context
Figure 6-36 shows the components of an RJ45 connector and a shielded Ethernet
cable.
Figure 6-36 Shielded RJ45 connector and cable
A. Jacket of connector B. Metal shell of connector C. Wire holder of D. Plug of

connector connector
E. Jacket of Ethernet F. Shield layer of Ethernet G. Twisted-pair wires -

cable cable

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Fit the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37 Fitting the jacket of the connector onto the Ethernet cable
Step 2 Remove a 30 mm (1.18 in.) long section of the jacket, cut off the nylon twine
inside the jacket, and cut a no more than 5 mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the jacket, as
NOTICE
● When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer of
the twisted-pair cable.
● When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the
twisted-pair cable.
Figure 6-38 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))
Step 3 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable. The shield layer is covered by the
metal shell, as shown in Figure 6-39.

WLAN
Figure 6-39 Fitting the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable
Step 4 Fit the metal shell onto the twisted-pair cable until the shield layer is covered
completely. Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the aluminum foil shield
layer and ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted-pair
cable is about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 6-40.
Figure 6-40 Removing the shield layer of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))
Step 5 Lead the four pairs of twisted-pair wires through the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 6-41 and Figure 6-42. Ensure that the colored wires are in the correct
location in the cable.
Figure 6-41 Leading wires through the wire holder

WLAN
Figure 6-42 Cable locations in a wire holder
Step 6 Align the four pairs of cables in the holder, as shown in Figure 6-43. The
connections between the wires and the pins are shown in Figure 6-44 and listed
in Table 6-6.
Figure 6-43 Four pairs of cables on a wire holder

WLAN
Figure 6-44 Connections between wires and pins
Table 6-6 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as
an example)
Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color
1 White-Orange
2 Orange
3 White-Green
4 Blue
5 White-Blue
6 Green
7 White-Brown
8 Brown
Step 7 Cut off the surplus cables along the lower edge of the wire holder, as shown in
Figure 6-45.

WLAN
Figure 6-45 Cutting off surplus cables
Step 8 Put the connector body onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°, as
Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.
Figure 6-46 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder
Step 9 Push the metal shell toward the connector body until the wire holder and the
connector body are engaged completely. Crimp the connector, as shown in Figure
6-47.
Figure 6-47 Crimping the connector

WLAN
Step 10 Push the jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered. This
completes the assembly of one end of the cable, as shown in Figure 6-48.
Figure 6-48 Pushing the metal shell
Step 11 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 10.
----End
6.1.3.2 Assembling an Optimized Shielded RJ45 Connector and SFTP

Network Cables
Context
This topic describes how to assemble an optimized shielded RJ45 connector with a
Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) straight-through network cable as an
example. The connector has a cable support rack but does not have a metal
jacket. Such a connector can be used for crimping CAT. 6 network cables.
Figure 6-49 shows the shielded RJ45 connector.

WLAN
Figure 6-49 Shielded RJ45 connector
1: Core 2: Aluminum 3: Braid 4: Outer 5: RJ45 6: Load 7: Cable

wires foil shield jacket connector bar support rack
Procedure
Step 1 Strip 20 mm outer jacket off the network cable, peel off the braid shield
backward, and cut off the aluminum foil and protection band, as shown in Figure
6-50.
NOTICE
Ensure that the shielded layer is intact when stripping outer jackets off the
network cable.
Keep the cable insulation intact when stripping the shielded layer.

WLAN
Step 2 Arrange core wires in the order of colors shown in Figure 6-51 and fix the cable
support rack to the bottom of the core wires.
Figure 6-51 Core wire order
Step 3 Hold the arranged core wires and route them through the load bar, as shown in
Figure 6-52. Table 6-7 shows the mapping between the core wires and pins of the
connector.

WLAN
Figure 6-52 Routing the core wires through the load bar
Table 6-7 Mapping between core wires and pins

Pin ID Core Wire Color
1 White-orange
2 Orange
3 White-green
4 Blue
5 White-blue
6 Green
7 White-brown
8 Brown
Step 4 After routing core wires through the load bar, move the load bar to the bottom to
connect to the cable support rack, and neatly cut the edge cables, as shown in
Figure 6-53.

WLAN
Figure 6-53 Neatly cutting edge cables
Step 5 Insert the load bar into the RJ45 connector, as shown in Figure 6-54.
Figure 6-54 Inserting the load bar into the RJ45 connector
NOTICE
Cables must be inserted into the bottom of the connector, which can be checked
on the side or front end face of the connector.
Step 6 Use the crimping tool to crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 6-55. Use
cutting pliers to neatly cut braid shields exposed out of the connector along the
load bar, as shown in Figure 6-56.

WLAN
Figure 6-56 Neatly cutting braid shields
Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to assemble the optimized shielded RJ45 connector
on the other end of the network cable.
----End
6.1.3.3 Assembling an Integrated Shielded RJ45 Connector and SFTP

Network Cables
Context
This topic describes how to assemble an integrated shielded RJ45 connector with a
Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) straight-through network cable as an
example. The connector does not have a cable support rack or metal jacket.
Figure 6-57 shows the integrated shielded RJ45 connector.

WLAN
1: Core wires 2: Aluminum foil 3: Braid shield 4: Outer jacket 5: RJ45 connector
Procedure
Step 1 Strip 20 mm outer jacket off the network cable, peel off the braid shield
backward, and cut off the aluminum foil and protection band, as shown in Figure
6-58.
NOTICE
Ensure that the shielded layer is intact when stripping outer jackets off the
network cable.
Keep the cable insulation intact when stripping the shielded layer.

WLAN
Step 2 Arrange the twisted pair wires in the order of colors shown in Table 6-8 and cut
the wire ends neatly with 12 mm core wires left, as shown in Figure 6-59.
Figure 6-59 Core wire order
Table 6-8 Mapping between core wires and pins
1 White-orange
2 Orange
3 White-green
4 Blue

WLAN
5 White-blue
6 Green
7 White-brown
8 Brown
Step 3 Route the arranged core wires through the RJ45 connector, as shown in Figure
6-60.
Figure 6-60 Routing core wires through the connector
Step 4 Use the crimping tool to crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 6-61.
Step 5 Neatly cut braid shields exposed out of the connector along the load bar, as

WLAN
Figure 6-62 Neatly cutting braid shields
Step 6 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to assemble the integrated shielded RJ45 connector
on the other end of the network cable.
----End
6.1.3.4 Assembling a Shielded RJ45 Connector and an FTP Network Cable
Context
This topic describes how to assemble a shielded RJ45 connector and File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) network cable and related notes.
Figure 6-64 shows the shielded RJ45 connector.
Figure 6-63 Connector jacket

WLAN
Figure 6-65 Cable
A: Connector B: Connector C: Core wires of the D: Aluminum foil used as E: Network

jacket twisted pair the network cable shield cable jacket
Procedure
Step 1 Route the network cable through the connector jacket, as shown in Figure 6-66.
Figure 6-66 Routing the network cable through the connector jacket
Step 2 Strip 20 mm outer jacket off the cable and cut off the nylon layer inside the
jacket, as shown in Figure 6-67.
NOTICE
Ensure that the aluminum foil used as a shielded layer is intact when stripping
outer jackets off the twisted pair cable.

WLAN
Figure 6-67 Stripping the outer jacket
Step 3 Pull outward the shielded aluminum foil and cut off the PET membrane and
ground cables along the end face of the outer jacket, as shown in Figure 6-68.
Figure 6-68 Cutting off the PET membrane and ground cables
Step 4 Arrange the twisted core wires according to color order shown in Figure 6-69. Use
cutting pliers to neatly cut the front end of the twisted pair, as shown in Figure
6-70. Figure 6-71 shows pin arrangement of each contact of the connector.

WLAN
Figure 6-69 Mapping between colors and pins
Figure 6-70 Neatly cutting the twisted pair
Figure 6-71 Pin arrangement of the connector
Step 5 Insert the arranged four twisted pair cables into the connector, as shown in Figure
6-72.

WLAN
NOTICE
● Cables must be inserted into the bottom.

● The aluminum foil must keep intact after cables are inserted into the
connector.
Figure 6-72 Inserting cables into the connector
Step 6 Use the crimping tool dedicated for FTP network cables to crimp the connector
and neatly cut the aluminum foil along the end face of the connector, as shown in
Figure 6-73.

WLAN
Step 7 Move the connector jacket to the connector body to wrap the connector shell, as
Figure 6-74 Wrapping the connector shell
Step 8 Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 to assemble the shielded RJ45 connector on the
other end of the network cable.
----End
6.1.3.5 Assembling an Unshielded RJ45 Connector and Ethernet Cable
Context
Figure 6-75 shows the components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable.

WLAN
Figure 6-75 Components of an unshielded RJ45 connector and cable
A. Plug of connector B. Jacket C. Twisted-pair wires
Procedure
Step 1 Remove a 16-mm (0.63 in.) long section of the jacket, as shown in Figure 6-76.
NOTICE
When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation of the twisted-
pair cable.
Figure 6-76 Removing the jacket of a twisted-pair cable (unit: mm (in.))
Step 2 Align the four pairs of wires and cut the ends neatly, as shown in Figure 6-77. The
connections between the wires and the pins are listed in Table 6-9.

WLAN
Figure 6-77 Connections between wires and pins (unit: mm (in.))
Table 6-9 Connections between wires and pins (using a straight-through cable as
an example)
Matching Pins of Wires Wire Color
1 White-Orange
2 Orange
3 White-Green
4 Blue
5 White-Blue
6 Green
7 White-Brown
8 Brown
Step 3 Feed the cable into the plug, and crimp the connector, as shown in Figure 6-78.
When inserting the cable, check from the side or bore of the plug to ensure that the cable
is completely seated in the plug.

WLAN
Step 4 To complete the assembly of the other end, repeat steps 1 to 3.
----End
6.1.3.6 Checking the Appearance of Contact Strips
Context
● To ensure proper contact between the crimped wires and the wire conductors,
the heights and sizes of the contact strips must be standard and the same.
● The contact strips must be parallel to each other, with an offset of less than
± 5°. The top margin of a strip must be parallel to the axis of the connector,
with an offset of less than ± 10°.
● To ensure conductivity, the surface of the contact strips must be clean.
● The contact strips must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic
separators must remain intact and be aligned.
● The contact strip blade must extend beyond the ends of the wires. The ends
of the wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45. The distance
between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check whether the
contact strips are of the same height. The height should be 6.02 ± 0.13 mm (0.237
± 0.005). If a measuring tool is not available, you can compare the connector with
a standard connector. Figure 6-79 shows an unqualified piece, and Figure 6-80
shows a qualified piece.
All unqualified pieces must be crimped again.
Figure 6-79 Contact strips of different heights

WLAN
Figure 6-80 Contact strips of the same height
Step 2 Hold an RJ45 connector and turn it 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal
contact strips. Figure 6-81 shows an unqualified piece.
Figure 6-81 Unparallel contact strips of different heights
Step 3 Check whether the contact strips are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt
cannot be removed, replace it with a new RJ45 connector. Figure 6-82 shows an
unqualified piece.
Figure 6-82 Dirt on a contract strip
Step 4 Check whether the contact strips and the plastic separators are well aligned and
intact. If a separator is skewed and cannot be fixed, replace it with a new RJ45
connector. Figure 6-83 shows an unqualified piece.

WLAN
Figure 6-83 Skewed plastic separators
Step 5 Hold the connector with the side facing towards you, and check whether you can
see the cross-sections of the wires. Ensure that the ends of the wires are in good
contact with the edge of the RJ45, and that the contact strip blade extends
beyond the ends of the wires and is crimped with the wires. If not, replace the
connector. Figure 6-84 shows an unqualified piece.
Figure 6-84 Wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45
----End
6.1.3.7 Testing the Connection of Assembled Cables
Context
Huawei provides two types of Ethernet cables: straight-through cables and
crossover cables.
● Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used

to connect terminals such as a computer or switch to network devices. Table
6-10 lists the connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

WLAN
Table 6-10 Connections of core wires in a straight-through cable

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted or Not
1 2
2 2 Orange Twisted
1 1 Orange-White
6 6 Green Twisted
3 3 Green-White
4 4 Blue Twisted
5 5 Blue-White
8 8 Brown Twisted
7 7 Brown-White
● Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to

connect terminals such as two computers or switches. Table 6-11 lists the
connections of core wires in a crossover cable.
Table 6-11 Connections of core wires in a straight crossover cable

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted or Not
1 2
6 2 Orange Twisted
3 1 Orange-White
2 6 Green Twisted
1 3 Green-White
4 4 Blue Twisted
5 5 Blue-White
8 8 Brown Twisted
7 7 Brown-White
Figure 6-85 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.
Figure 6-85 Pins of an RJ45 connector

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Feed both connectors of the cable into the ports of the cable tester.
Step 2 After the connectors are properly inserted, turn on the tester. If the indicators from
1 to G turn on simultaneously, you can infer that the pins work normally and the
wires are correctly connected.
Turn the switch to the S position to slow down lighting of the indicators so that you can see
the indicators more clearly, as shown in Figure 6-86.
Figure 6-86 Testing the conduction and connections of wires
Step 3 Gently shake the connector and repeat Step 2 to check whether the metal contact
strips are in good contact with the core wires and Ethernet ports, as shown in
Figure 6-87.

WLAN
Figure 6-87 Checking the reliability
The procedure for testing a crossover cable is the same as that for testing a
straight-through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators turn on,
which depends on the wire connections of a crossover cable.
The Ethernet cable is qualified if the indicators turn on in the following sequence:
At the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of
1-8-G. At the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the
sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.
If the indicators do not come on in this sequence, the Ethernet cable is
unqualified.
If a tester is not available, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as shown in
Figure 6-88.
Figure 6-88 Testing the connection of an Ethernet cable

WLAN
----End
6.1.3.8 Common Network Cable Faults and Preventive Measures
Table 6-12 lists common network cable faults and preventive measures.
Table 6-12 Common network cable faults and preventive measures

Symptom Cause Preventive Measure
● The device cannot be A network cable has Before using network

powered using PoE. high resistance or is too cables purchased from
● The device restarts long. other suppliers, use a
frequently. multimeter or other
tools to measure cable
● A large number of resistance. If the
error packets exist on resistance of a network
the device or services cable does not comply
are interrupted. with the quality
requirement of the PoE
standard, as shown in
Table 6-13, replace the
network cable.
Non-standard network Before making a network

cable connectors cause cable, use a standard go-
poor contact with device no go gauge to test the
interfaces. connectors purchased
from other suppliers.
Replace the connectors if
they do not comply with
the standard.
Wires in a network cable After a network cable is

are connected to wrong made, use a conduction
pins. tester to measure cable
connectivity. For test
details, see 6.1.3.7
Testing the Connection
of Assembled Cables.

WLAN
Symptom Cause Preventive Measure
A network cable When testing a network

connector is not crimped cable with a conduction
securely, causing poor tester, gently shake the
contact between the cable connector and
network cable and pins check whether indicators
in the connector. on the conduction tester
are in normal state. If
indicators 1 to G turn on
in a wrong sequence,
remake the network
cable.
The following methods are often used to test network cable resistance, and the
test criteria are listed in Table 6-13:
● Use a network cable tester (high-end cable tester of Fluke) to measure

network cable resistance.
● Connect multimeter probes to two ends of each wire in a network cable and
check the resistance value on the multimeter.
● Connect a network cable to an AP. Use a multimeter to test the resistance
between pins 1 and 2 (or between pins 3 and 6, 4 and 5, or 7 and 8) on the
other end of the cable. The cable's DC resistance approximately equals a half
of the displayed value.
Table 6-13 PoE standard requirements for network cable quality
Standard Total
Resistance of
a Network
Cable
802.3af ≤ 20 ohms
802.3at Maximum PD power ≤ 20 ohms

consumption < 12.95 W
Maximum PD power ≤ 12.5 ohms

consumption < 25.5 W
If an AP is connected to a switch or AC (excluding ACU2), you can run the virtual-

cable-test command on the switch or AC to check network cable connectivity. For
details, see the virtual-cable-test command in the command reference.
6.1.4 Assembling Feeders

WLAN
6.1.4.1 Assembling the Straight Male Coaxial N Connector and the 1/2''
Feeder
Context
Figure 6-89 shows the components of an N coaxial connector and a 1/2" feeder
cable.
Figure 6-89 Components of an N coaxial connector and a 1/2" feeder cable
A. Body of B. Back shell of C. O-ring seal D. Heat-shrink tubing

connector connector
E. Cable jacket F. Outer conductor of G. Inner conductor of H. Insulation layer of

feeder cable feeder cable feeder cable
Procedure
Step 1 Cut the feeder cable, as shown in Figure 6-90.
Figure 6-90 Cutting a feeder cable (unit: mm)

WLAN
NOTICE
● Ensure that the feeder cable is cut with reference to the guide in the package
box of the connector.
● After you cut the feeder cable, ensure that the cross-section of the outer
conductor is smooth, intact, and round.
● Ensure that the feeder cable is cut at the wave crest of the outer conductor.
● The inner conductor must be beveled, as shown in Figure 6-90.
Step 2 Use a brush to remove the dirt on the cross-section of the feeder cable.
Step 3 Feed the feeder cable into the heat-shrink tubing, and cover the outer conductor
of the feeder cable with the O-ring seal, as shown in Figure 6-91.
Figure 6-91 Installing the heat-shrink tubing and the O-ring seal
Step 4 Put the back shell of the connector onto the feeder cable. Tighten the back shell
to the end of the feeder cable, as shown in Figure 6-92.
Figure 6-92 Putting the back shell of the connector onto the feeder cable
Step 5 Mount the body of the connector onto the feeder cable so that the inner
conductors of the connector and feeder cable are connected. Use a spanner (27
N•m to 30 N•m torque recommended) to fasten the body and back shell, as

WLAN
Figure 6-93 Fastening the body and back shell
Step 6 Push the heat-shrink tubing towards the connector, as shown in Figure 6-94.
Then, heat the tube.
Figure 6-94 Assembled N connector
Step 7 After the components are assembled, install the connector, as shown in Figure
6-95.

WLAN
Figure 6-95 Installing the connector
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After a type N connector is made, perform the short-circuit test using a
multimeter as follows:
1. Use the multimeter to test the conductivity between signal pins of the type N
connector and signal wires of the radio cable. If they are not conductive, re-
assemble the radio cable.
2. Use the multimeter to test the conductivity between the metal shell of the
type N connector and base wires of the radio cable. If they are not conductive,
re-assemble the radio cable.
3. Test the conductivity between the metal shell signal pins of the type N
connector. If they are not conductive, re-assemble the radio cable.
4. Test the conductivity between signal wires of the radio cable and the metal
shielding ground cable. If they are conductive, re-assemble the radio cable.
6.1.4.2 Assembling a Straight Male Coaxial N Connector and an RG8U Feeder
Context
Figure 6-96 shows the coaxial N connector and RG8U feeder.

WLAN
Figure 6-96 Coaxial N connector and RG8U feeder
A: Connector body B: Lining C: Clip D: Nut
E: Cable jacket F: Shielded layer of G: Aluminum foil of H: Insulation medium

the feeder the feeder of the feeder
I: Internal conductor of the - - -

feeder
Procedure
Step 1 Strip the feeder with the length shown in Figure 6-97.
NOTICE
Ensure that the shielded layer F is intact after the stripping.

WLAN
Figure 6-97 Stripping the feeder
Step 2 Route the Cable jacket (E) through the nut (D), as shown in Figure 6-98.
Figure 6-98 Installing the nut
Step 3 Install the clip (C) on the Cable jacket (E) and move the clip until the clip is close
to the Cable jacket, as shown in Figure 6-99.
Figure 6-99 Installing the clip
Step 4 Peel off the shielded layer (F) to the direction of the clip (C) so that the aluminum
foil (G) is exposed, as shown in Figure 6-100.

WLAN
Figure 6-100 Peeling off the shielded layer
Step 5 Install the lining (B) on the feeder and tightly crimp the shielded layer (F) of the
feeder, as shown in Figure 6-101.
Figure 6-101 Installing the lining
Step 6 Cut off the aluminum foil (G) and insulation medium (H) along the end face of
the lining (B). Ensure that the length of the conducting line inside the feeder is 4.5
mm, as shown in Figure 6-102.
Figure 6-102 Cutting off the aluminum foil and insulation medium of the feeder
Step 7 Use the file to taper the internal conductor (I) of the feeder, as shown in Figure
6-103.

WLAN
Figure 6-103 Tapering the internal conductor of the feeder
Step 8 Use a brush to remove impurities from the cross section of the feeder, as shown in
Figure 6-104.
Figure 6-104 Clearing impurities
Step 9 Insert the half-finished part into the main body of the connector (A) and rotate
the nut (D) and the connector's main body until you cannot rotate further, as

WLAN
Figure 6-105 Installing the connector's main body
Step 10 Use a wrench to fix the nut (D) to connector's main body (A) with recommended
tightening torque 15 N•m, as shown in Figure 6-106.
Figure 6-106 Fixing the nut to the connector shell body
Step 11 Figure 6-107 shows the effect drawing after the assembling is complete.
Figure 6-107 Effect drawing of the straight male coaxial N connector
----End

WLAN
6.1.5 Installing Cable Accessories
6.1.5.1 Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories
Tools
Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and follow the installation
procedure described here.
The illustrations in this document may differ from actual situations, but the installation
methods are the same. For example, in this document, the adapters of cable connectors
have separate interfaces. In the actual situation, the adapters may have interfaces fixed on
equipment.
Bending Radius
Unless otherwise specified, bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet the
requirements listed in Table 6-14.
Table 6-14 Bending radius of cables or fibers
Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)
Ordinary cable In normal cases, R ≥ 2d. When the

cable is connected with a connector, R
≥ 5d.
Fiber R ≥ 40 mm (1.57 in.); Bending angle >

90°
The letter d indicates the diameter of a cable or fiber.
Precautions for Installation

● Hold terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables themselves when
installing or removing cable components.
● Do not insert a connector forcibly when the connector is blocked. Use a
dedicated tool to pull out the connector. Install the connector again after you
check that the pins are inserted properly.
● Before tightening screws on cable connectors, ensure that the connectors are
properly connected to their adapters. Tighten the screw with appropriate force
using a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver instead of bare hands or an electric
screwdriver. If the screw cannot be screwed into the tapped hole, determine
the reason and try again. Do not apply too much force, or the screw or
adapter may be damaged.

WLAN
● When removing densely aligned cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated

pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
● Do not twist, bend, stretch, or extrude fibers during installation.
● Cover the idle fiber connectors with dust caps. Remove the dust caps before
using the fiber connectors.
Requirements for Cable Routing

● To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable through-holes or install
protective rings in the holes.
● To ease the connection and to avoid stress, keep cable joints slack. After
connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple interfaces, keep
the cables slack to avoid generating stress.
● Bind or clean cables gently because cable distortion affects signal quality.
● Keep cables away from moveable components such as doors.
● Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
● To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power
modules separately.
6.1.5.2 Installing Power Adapters
6.1.5.2.1 Installing the OT Terminal
Procedure
● Install an OT terminal.
a. Align the hole of the OT terminal (conductor upward) with a connecting
hole, as shown in Figure 6-108.
Figure 6-108 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole
When you install an OT terminal, the crimping sleeve is installed as shown in

Figure 6-109, where A is correct and B is incorrect.

WLAN
Figure 6-109 Installing an OT terminal, showing the orientation of

crimping sleeve
b. Place the spring washer and flat washer in turn, mount a matching screw,
and fasten it clockwise, as shown in Figure 6-110.
Figure 6-110 Installing two terminals back to back
NOTICE
Ensure that the OT terminal is not in contact with other terminals or

metal components.
c. Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown
in Figure 6-111.

WLAN
Figure 6-111 Installed OT terminal
● Install two OT terminals on a post.

Before you install two OT terminals on a post, ensure that the two terminals
can be installed on the post and that the electrical connecting pieces have a
large contact area. Two OT terminals can be installed using any of these
methods:
– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in
Figure 6-112.
– Cross the two terminals, as shown in Figure 6-113.
Figure 6-112 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle

WLAN
Figure 6-113 Crossing two terminals
NOTICE
If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the
bigger one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed on a post.
● To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.
----End
6.1.5.2.2 Installing the Cord End Terminal
Procedure
Step 1 Hold a cord end terminal upright and place it on a terminal jack, as shown in
Figure 6-114. To ensure bump contact and dense connection, place the plain side
of the terminal outwards.
Figure 6-114 Placing a terminal on a terminal jack vertically

WLAN
Step 2 Insert the terminal into the jack vertically, and turn the screw clockwise to fasten
the terminal, as shown in Figure 6-115.
Figure 6-115 Feeding the terminal into the jack
NOTICE
● Ensure that the exposed section of the terminal is less than 2 mm (0.079 in.) in
length.
● Do not press the insulation of the terminal.
● Insert only one terminal into one jack.
Step 3 Move the cable slightly and ensure that it is securely connected.
Step 4 Before you remove a cord end terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.
----End
6.1.5.2.3 Installing a 2-Pin Round Connector and a DC Power Cable

This topic describes how to install a 2-pin round connector and a DC power cable
and related notes.
Context
Figure 6-116 shows the 2-pin round connector with a DC power cable.
Figure 6-116 2-pin round connector and a DC power cable

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Waterproof cables to be connected.
1. Wrap a layer of PVC tape from the bottom top, with the later covering one
third of the previous one, as shown in Figure 6-117.
Figure 6-117 Wrapping the PVC tape
2. Wrap three layers of waterproof insulation tape on each connector, first from
bottom up, then from top down, and finally from bottom up, as shown in
Figure 6-118. After wrapping each layer of the tape, use your hands to tightly
press the tape.
Figure 6-118 Wrapping three layers of the waterproof insulation tape
Figure 6-119 Waterproof insulation tape

WLAN
3. Wrap three layers of PVC tape, first from bottom up, then from top down, and
finally from bottom up, as shown in Figure 6-120. After wrapping each layer
of the tape, use your hands to tightly press the tape.
Figure 6-120 Wrapping three layers of the PVC tape
4. Tightly bind the PVC tape at the ends of the wrapping section, and cut off
excessive cable ties.
After a cable tie is tightly bound, cut the tie at a distance if 3 mm to 5 mm from the
clip in outdoor scenarios and directly cut the tie at the clip in indoor scenarios.
Step 2 Fix the DC power cable connector to the PWR port, as shown in Figure 6-121.
Ensure that positive and negative polarities are correct during the installation.

WLAN
Figure 6-121 Installing the round connector
NOTICE
Use the outdoor binding strap to bind cables under the DC power cable connector
for weight bearing, preventing the DC power cable connector from being pulled.
Reserve the proper cable length between the binding point and the PWR port.
----End
6.1.5.3 Installing Ethernet Adapters
6.1.5.3.1 Installing a Shielded Ethernet Connector

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female
connector, as shown in Figure 6-122.
Figure 6-122 Holding the male and female shielded connectors
Step 2 Insert the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 6-123.
Figure 6-123 Feeding the male shielded connector into the female shielded
connector
Step 3 When you hear a click, the cable connector is completely inserted in the port. (The
clip on the cable connector pops up to fix the connector in the port.) Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected, as shown in Figure
6-124.

WLAN
Figure 6-124 Installed shielded Ethernet connector
Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector,
Figure 6-125 Removing a shielded Ethernet connector
----End
6.1.5.3.2 Installing an Unshielded Ethernet Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female
connector, as shown in Figure 6-126.

WLAN
Figure 6-126 Holding the male and female unshielded connectors
Step 2 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 6-127.
Figure 6-127 Feeding the male connector into the female unshielded connector
Step 3 A crisp click indicates that the connector is locked by the locking key. Pull the
connector slightly and ensure that it is securely connected. Figure 6-128 shows an
installed Ethernet connector.
Figure 6-128 Installed unshielded Ethernet connector

WLAN
Step 4 To remove an Ethernet connector, press the locking key and pull out the connector,
Figure 6-129 Removing an unshielded Ethernet connector
----End
6.1.5.4 Installing Fiber Connectors
Context
NOTICE
● After you remove the dustproof cap, ensure that the fiber pins are clean and
install them as soon as possible.
● When you disassemble fiber connectors, you must use a dedicated tool if the
connectors are densely installed.
6.1.5.4.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors
Procedure
Step 1 Clean the pins of a fiber connector by using lint-free cotton and alcohol.
Step 2 Clean the pins again by using dust-free cotton. If necessary, clean the pins by
using an air gun. Ensure that the pins are free from any fiber or debris.
----End
6.1.5.4.2 Installing an FC Fiber Connector

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the FC connector and store it for future use.
Step 2 Align the core pin of the male connector with that of the female connector, as
Figure 6-130 Aligning the male connector with the female connector
Step 3 Align the male connector with the female connector and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the female connector, as shown in Figure
6-131.
Figure 6-131 Feeding the male connector into the female connector
Step 4 Fasten the locking nut clockwise and ensure that the connector is securely
installed, as shown in Figure 6-132.

WLAN
Figure 6-132 Fastening the locking nut
Step 5 To disassemble an FC fiber connector, loosen the locking nut counterclockwise,

and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 6-133.
Figure 6-133 Disassembling an FC fiber connector
----End
6.1.5.4.3 Installing an LC Fiber Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the LC fiber connector and store it for future use.

WLAN
Step 3 Align the male connector with the fiber adapter and gently push the male
connector until it is completely seated in the fiber connector, as shown in Figure
6-135.
Figure 6-135 Feeding the male connector into the female connector
Step 4 A clicking sound indicates that the male connector is locked, as shown in Figure
6-136.
Figure 6-136 Installed LC connector
Step 5 To disassemble an LC fiber connector, press the locking nut to release the locking
clips from the bore, and gently pull the male connector, as shown in Figure 6-137.

WLAN
Figure 6-137 Disassembling an LC fiber connector
----End
6.1.5.4.4 Installing the SC Fiber Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the SC fiber connector and store it for future use.
Step 3 Feed the fiber connector into the female connector, with your fingers holding the
shell of the fiber connector (not the pigtail). When you hear a click, the fiber
connector is secured by the clips (internal parts, not illustrated in the figure). Pull
the fiber connector gently. If the connector does not loosen, the installation is
complete. See Figure 6-139.

WLAN
Figure 6-139 Installed SC fiber connector
Step 4 To disassemble an SC fiber connector, hold the shell of the connector (do not hold
the fiber) and gently pull the connector in the direction vertical to the adapter.
Unlock the male connector, and then separate it from the shell, as shown in
Figure 6-140.
Figure 6-140 Disassembling an SC fiber connector
----End
6.1.5.4.5 Installing an MPO Connector
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap of the MPO fiber connector and store it for future use.

WLAN
Step 3 Hold the shell labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female
connector until you hear a clicking sound. The male and female connectors are
securely installed, as shown in Figure 6-142.
Figure 6-142 Installed MPO fiber connector
Step 4 To disassemble an MPO fiber connector, hold the shell labeled "PULL" and remove
the male connector, as shown in Figure 6-143.

WLAN
Figure 6-143 Disassembling an MPO fiber connector
----End
6.1.6 Replacing the Mold of the Crimping Tool
Procedure
Step 1 Hold the handles of a pair of COAX crimping tools. Loosen the two fastening
screws counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 6-144.
Figure 6-144 Loosening two fastening screws
Step 2 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools to open the self-locking mechanism.
The jaw of the COAX crimping tools opens automatically, as shown in Figure
6-145.

WLAN
Figure 6-145 Pliers jaw opening automatically
Step 3 Remove the mold from the COAX crimping tools, as shown in Figure 6-146.
Figure 6-146 Removing the mold from the COAX crimping tools
Step 4 Place the mold to be installed into the jaw of the COAX crimping tools and align
the screw holes, as shown in Figure 6-147.

WLAN
Figure 6-147 Installing a new mold in the COAX crimping tool
NOTICE
Keep the short side of the mold inwards and the long side outwards, with the
teeth of the mold aligning from the larger size to the smaller size.
Step 5 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools tightly to match the mold and the
jaw completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 6-148.
Figure 6-148 Aligning the screw holes
Step 6 Hold the handles of the COAX crimping tools with one hand. Tighten the two
fastening screws clockwise. Figure 6-149 and Figure 6-150shows the mold
installed in the COAX crimping tool.

WLAN
Figure 6-149 Mold installed in the COAX crimping tool
Figure 6-150 An installed mold
----End
6.2 Appendix C Environmental Requirements for Device

Operation
6.2.1 Environmental Requirements for an Equipment Room
6.2.1.1 Requirements for Selecting a Site for an Equipment Room

When designing a project, consider the communication network planning and
technical requirements of the equipment. Also consider hydrographic, geological,
seismic, power supply, and transportation factors.
Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire-
proof construction of the equipment room should be designed by specialized

WLAN
construction designers to suit the environmental requirements of devices. The

equipment room should also follow local regulations concerning the industrial
construction, environmental protection, fire safety, and civil air defense.
Construction must conform to government standards, regulations, and other
requirements.
The equipment room should be located in a place free from high temperature,
dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Keep the equipment
room away from significant vibrations or loud noises, as well as power transformer
stations.
The specific requirements for selecting a site for an equipment room are as
follows:
● The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from
heavy pollution sources such as smelting and coal mines. It should be located
at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from moderate pollution sources
such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be located at a
distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources such as
packinghouses and tanyards. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided,
ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources. In
addition, use a high-quality equipment room or protection products.
● The room should be located away from livestock farms, or be upwind of the
livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer warehouse as
the equipment room.
● The equipment room must be far away from residential areas. An equipment
room that is not far away from residential areas must comply with equipment
room construction standards to avoid noise pollution.
● The room should be located far away from industrial and heating boilers.
● The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the seaside or salt
lake. Otherwise, the equipment room should be airtight with cooling facilities.
In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction material.
Otherwise, equipment suitable for wet conditions must be used.
● The doors and windows of the equipment room must be kept closed to
maintain an airtight room.
● Using steel doors to ensure sound insulation is recommended.
● No cracks or openings are allowed on the walls or floors. The outlet holes on
the walls or windows must be sealed. Walls must be constructed such that
they are smooth, wear-resistant, dustproof, flame retardant, sound insulated,
heat absorptive, and have electromagnetic shielding.
● The air vent of the room should be far from the exhaust of city waste pipes,
big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The room should be in the positive
pressure state to prevent corrosive gases from entering the equipment room
and corroding components and circuit boards.
● It is recommended that the room be on or above the second floor. If this
requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the
room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in,) above the maximum flood level.
● The equipment room should be strong enough to resist winds and downpours.
● The room should be located away from dusty roads or sand. If this is
unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must not face
pollution sources.

WLAN
● Do not place air conditioning vents near the equipment so that they blow
directly on the equipment because condensation may be blown into the
equipment.
● Do not use decorative materials that contain sulfur in the equipment room.
6.2.1.2 Equipment Room Layout

An equipment room usually contains mobile switching equipment,
telecommunications equipment, power supply equipment, and other auxiliary
equipment. To ensure easy maintenance and management, place the equipment
in different rooms. Figure 6-151 shows the layout of the equipment room.
Figure 6-151 Layout of the equipment room
The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:

● It should meet requirements for laying out and maintaining communication
cables and power cables.
● It should reduce the cabling distance, which facilitates cable maintenance,
reduces potential communication faults, and maximizes efficiency.
6.2.1.3 Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room

Table 6-15 describes the construction requirements for the equipment room.
Table 6-15 Construction requirements for the equipment room
Item Requirements
Area The smallest area of the equipment room can accommodate the
equipment with the largest capacity.
Net height The minimum height of the equipment room should not be less
than 3 m (9.84 ft). The minimum height of the equipment room
is the net height below overhead beams or ventilation pipes.

WLAN
Item Requirements
Floor The floor in the equipment room should be semi-conductive and

dustproof. A raised floor with an ESD covering is recommended.
Cover the raised floor tightly and solidly. The horizontal
tolerance of each square meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08
in.). If raised floors are unavailable, use a static-electricity-
conductive floor material, with a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 107
ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms. Ground this floor material or raised
floor. You can connect them to ground using a one megohm
current-limiting resistor and connection line.
Load-bearing The floor must bear loads larger than 150 kg/m2 (0.21 bf/in.2).
capacity
Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high
windows and 1 m (3.28 ft) wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and
windows with dustproof plastic tape. Use double-pane glass in
the windows and seal them tightly.
Wall surface Paste wallpaper on the wall or apply flat paint. Do not use
treatment pulverized paint.
Cable trays Use cable trays to arrange cables. The inner faces of the cable
trays must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the
cable trays, and the number, position and dimensions of the
holes must comply with the requirements of device
arrangement.
Water pipe Do not pass service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers through
the equipment room. Do not place a fire hydrant in the
equipment room, but place it in the corridor or near the
staircase.
Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the
partition wall equipment room door. The partition wall can block some outside
dust.
Installation Install air conditioner vents so that the air does not blow directly
position of on equipment.
the air
conditioner
Other Avoid the proliferation of mildew, and keep out rodents (like
requirements mice).

WLAN
Figure 6-152 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room
6.2.1.4 Equipment Room Environment

Dust on devices may cause electrostatic discharge and result in poor contact for
connectors or metal connection points. This problem can shorten the life span of
devices and cause faults.
The equipment room must be free from explosive, conductive, magnetically-

permeable, and corrosive dust. Table 6-16 lists the requirement for dust
concentration in the equipment room.
Table 6-16 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room
Mechanical active Unit Concentration

material
Dust particle Particle /m3 ≤ 3x 104

(no visible dust
accumulated on a
workbench in three
days)
Suspending dust mg/m3 ≤0.2
Precipitable dust mg/m2·h ≤1.5
Description
● Dust particle diameter ≥ 5 µm
● Suspending dust diameter ≤ 75 µm
● 75 µm ≤ precipitable dust diameter ≤ 150 µm
Take the following measures to meet the requirements:

WLAN
● Use dustproof materials for ground, wall, and ceiling construction.

● Use screens on the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows
should be dust-proof.
● Clean the equipment room regularly and clean the air filter monthly.
● Wear shoe covers and ESD clothing before entering the equipment room.
6.2.1.5 Requirements for Corrosive Gases

The room should be free from dusts and corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and
NH3. Table 6-17 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.
Table 6-17 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration
Chemical
active material Unit Concentration
SO2 mg/m3 ≤0.30
H2S mg/m3 ≤0.10
NOx mg/m3 ≤0.50
NH3 mg/m3 ≤1.00
Cl2 mg/m3 ≤0.10
HCl mg/m3 ≤0.10
HF mg/m3 ≤0.01
O3 mg/m3 ≤0.05
Take the following measures to meet the requirements:

● Avoid constructing the room near a place where the corrosive gas
concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.
● Ensure the air intake vent of the room is in the prevailing upwind direction
from any pollution source.
● Place batteries in different rooms.
● A professional service should monitor the corrosive gas conditions regularly.
6.2.1.6 Requirements for ESD Prevention

The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V.
Take the following measures to meet this requirement:
● Train operators about ESD prevention.
● Keep the correct humidity level in the equipment room to reduce the impact
of static electricity.
● Lay out an ESD floor in equipment rooms.

WLAN
● Wear ESD shoes and clothing before entering equipment room.

● Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.
● Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals.
Use ESD worktables.
● Keep non-ESD materials (such as common bags, foam, and rubber) at least
30 cm (11.81 in.) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.
6.2.1.7 Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room

All interference sources, inside or outside the equipment room, can cause
equipment problems with capacitive coupling, inductive coupling, electromagnetic
wave radiation, and common impedance (including grounding system) coupling.
Prevent the interference using these approaches:
● Take effective measures against electrical interference from the power supply
system.
● Do not use the working ground of the equipment as the same ground for
surge protection. Separate them as far as possible.
● Keep the equipment far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar units,
and high-frequency and high-current equipment.
● Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.
6.2.1.8 Requirements for Lightning Proof Grounding

Table 6-18 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.
Table 6-18 Requirements for lightning proof grounding

Item Requirements
Capital ● Use reinforced concrete to construct the equipment room.

construction ● Install a lightning proof device like a lightning rod outside
the room.
● The lightning proof ground shares the same grounding
body with the protective ground of the room.

WLAN
Item Requirements
Power cables ● After the low-voltage power cables are led into the room,
leading in the install the surge protector for the power cables in the AC
equipment voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel
room need to (box). Correctly ground the surge protector nearby.
be equipped ● For an equipment room in urban area, install a power
with a surge supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
protector of no less than 20 kA. For an equipment room that is built
in a suburb and subject to lightning strikes, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 60 kA. For an equipment room that is built in
a mountain area and subject to frequent lightning strikes,
or in a separate high-rise building in a city, install a power
supply surge protector with the nominal discharge current
of more than 100 kA.
● The ground cable of the surge protector should be no
longer than 1 m (3.28 ft).
Grounding for ● Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V
DC power DC power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power
distribution supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The
total ground cable should meet the maximum load of the
equipment.
● The power equipment must have a DC working ground
cable, which can connect the power equipment to the
collective ground cable of the telecommunication site (or
the protective ground bar of the equipment room).
Equipotential ● Properly ground the devices and auxiliary devices in the

connection room such as mobile base station, transmission, switching
equipment, power supply equipment, and cable distribution
frame. Connect all PGND cables to the collective protective
ground bar. Connect all PGND cables in one equipment
room to one protective ground bar.
● Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protective
ground of devices, which means the two share one
grounding network.
● The cable tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal
door or window of the equipment should be grounded for
protection.
General ● Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with
requirements the protective ground of any telecom equipment in the
for grounding equipment room.
● Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
● All ground cables should be as short as possible, and
arranged in a straight line.

WLAN
Item Requirements
Grounding ● The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.

resistance ● The upper end of the grounding body should be at least 0.7
m (2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the
grounding body below the frozen ground.
● Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure
effective grounding.
Routing of ● Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the

signal cable equipment room. All signal cables must be led into the site
underground.
● Use the cables with a metal jacket or place them into a
metal pipe if they come out/in the equipment room.
● Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment
room.
● Signal cables should be deployed on internal walls. Do not
deploy outdoor aerial cables.
● Keep signal cables away from power cables and surge
protection devices.
Collective ● Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground
ground cable cable.
● Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt
measures to prevent electrification corrosion when
connecting different metal parts together.
● Use a copper busbar as the collective ground cable with a
cross-sectional area of no less than 120 mm2 (0.19 in.2), or
use the galvanized flat steel of the same resistance. Insulate
the collective ground cable from the reinforcing steel bars
of the building.
Grounding The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42

lead-in ft) long. Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area
of 40 mm x 4 mm (1.58 in. x 0.158 in.) or 50 mm x 5 mm
(1.97 in. x 0.197 in.).
6.2.2 Requirements for Power Supply
6.2.2.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply

An AC power supply system consists of power mains, uninterruptible power
supplies (UPSs), and self-supplied electric generators. In addition to meeting the
requirements of the server load, the AC power supply must have a simple
connection line, safe operation, flexible scheduling, and easy maintenance.

WLAN
The low-voltage power supply should be 3-phase, 5-wire mode or monophase 3-

wire mode. This AC power supply should be 110 V/220 V, with a frequency of 50
Hz.
The UPS should supply the same power and operate at the same phase as the
power mains. The switching time between the UPS and mains should be less than
10 ms; otherwise, the networking devices will reboot or reset.
For power distribution capacity in the equipment room, both the working current
and fault current of the devices should be considered. Ensure that independent AC
power supplies protect independent devices. Configure the current-carrying
capacity of the protection switch of the equipment room for more than that of the
devices.
Table 6-19 lists the voltage range of the AC power supply for the devices.
Table 6-19 Voltage range of AC power supply

Item Requirements
AC power capacity to -10% to +5% of the rated voltage

support the devices
AC power capacity to -15% to +10% of the rated voltage

support the power
modules and important
buildings
Frequency of alternating -4% to +4% of the rated value

current
Voltage wave shape sine Within 5% of the rated voltage

distortion
The automated electric generator must have a standard interface that supports
telecommunication protocols, remote telecommunication, monitoring, and control.
AC power cables should meet the following specifications:
● AC neutral should have a conductor with the same cross section as the phase
line.
● AC cables should have non-flammable insulation. The layout of AC cables
should comply with local regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms
should comply with local regulations.
6.2.2.2 Recommendations for AC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the AC power supply.
● If the voltage of the power mains that supply power directly to devices
exceeds the rated voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage range that
devices can support, a voltage regulating device or voltage stabilizing device
is required.
● If the mains do not supply power for the device directly, or if the mains
voltage exceeds the rated voltage by -15% to 10% or exceeds the input

WLAN
voltage range of the DC power supply, a voltage regulating device or voltage

stabilizing device is required.
● A UPS or inverter power supply system is required to provide uninterrupted
AC power to support the telecommunication load.
● If abnormalities occur on the mains, telecommunication servers should be
equipped with a self-supplied electric generator to support the key
telecommunication load. The capacity should be not less than 150% to 200%
of the total uninterruptible power supply.
● Storage batteries are usually installed in a parallel connection of two groups.
UPS storage batteries are generally installed in one group. The redundancy
required for the UPS can rely on concatenation or parallel connection. When
an inverter or a UPS is used, the active inverter is determined by the
maximum power and a backup inverter is required.
6.2.2.3 Requirements for DC Power Supply

The equipment room should receive stable and reliable DC power. Deploy the
power equipment near the telecommunications equipment to make the DC feeder
as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation cost, the loop
voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2
V.
● A large-scale enterprise can deploy an independent power supply system on

each floor to supply power to the telecommunications equipment room on
the respective floor.
● A medium-scale enterprise can use a power room and a battery room for
centralized power supply or use distributed power supply systems.
● A small-scale enterprise can deploy an integrated power supply system in its
equipment room but must take measures to prevent corrosive gases released
from batteries from eroding circuit boards of telecommunications equipment.
Table 6-20 lists the specifications for the DC power supply.
Table 6-20 Specifications for the DC power supply
Item Requirements
DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current

capacity to
support the
surge current
Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the

voltage rated value, and the load current is in the range of 5% to
precision 100% of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier
ranges from -46.0 V to -56.4 V, with the regulated voltage
precision less than or equal to 1%.
Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%

amplitude of
switch on/off

WLAN
Item Requirements
Peak noise ≤200 mV

voltage
Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the
response range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.
6.2.2.4 Recommendations for DC Power Supply

The following are recommendations for the DC power supply.
● Use distributed power supply mode. Use multiple DC power supply systems
and put power equipment in multiple locations.
● Adopt a standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage to the
communications equipment within the required range.
● Improve reliability of the AC power supply system to reduce the necessary
capacity of storage batteries. For small offices, increase the capacity of
storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance reliability of the AC power supply
system.
● The total capacity of the high-frequency switching rectifier must satisfy the
power of the communication loading and battery charging. If there are 10 or
fewer active rectifier modules, configure one backup module. If there are
more than 10 active modules, configure one backup module for every 10
active modules.
● Install storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by
the duration for which the storage batteries must supply power. For most
offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for at least one hour.
6.3 Appendix D Equipment Grounding Specifications
6.3.1 General Grounding Specifications

Table 6-21 shows the general grounding specifications.
Table 6-21 General grounding specifications
No. Description
1 The working ground and protective ground, including the shielded

ground and the lightning-proof ground of the cable distribution frame
should share the same grounding conductor.
2 The cable trays, shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors and windows
in the equipment room should be grounded for protection.
3 The metal parts of the equipment which are electrically floating in

normal conditions should be grounded for protection.

WLAN
No. Description
4 The ground cable must be connected securely to the protective ground

bar of the equipment room.
5 Do not use other equipment as part of the ground cable or electrical

connection.
6.3.2 Grounding Specifications for an Equipment Room

The grounding resistance of a comprehensive communication building should be
less than or equal to one ohm. The grounding resistance of an ordinary
communication office should be less than five ohms. The grounding resistance in
an area where the earth resistance rate is high should be less than 10 ohms.
6.3.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices

Table 6-22 lists the equipment grounding specifications.
Table 6-22 Equipment Grounding Specifications

No. Description
1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base

stations, transmission and switching devices, power supply devices) in
the equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect all
protective ground for various devices jointly to a general ground bar, and
then to the same protective ground bar in the room together with the
protective ground (PGND) of the device.
2 The PGND of the equipment is shorted to the copper ground bar

provided by the customer. The short-circuiting cable used should be a
yellow-green plastic insulated cable with a copper core and a cross-
sectional area greater than 25 sq. mm (0.039 sq. in.).
3 There are grounding terminals and grounding lugs at the lower part of
the front door, rear door and side panel of the cabinet, connected to the
grounding terminals of the cabinet framework through connection
cables with cross-sectional area of no less than 1.6 sq. mm (0.002 sq.
in.).
4 Ensure that all metal components of the cabinet conduct well. No

insulating coating should be sprayed on the connection part of the metal
components.

WLAN
No. Description
5 Connect the cabinets in the same row by fastening captive screws and
gaskets on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray any coating into a
rectangular area measuring 30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in. x 1.97 in.) around
the connection hole for a captive bolt. Measures to prevent rust and
corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the gasket and
nut to ensure good electrical contact.
6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are

required to connect the ground busbars (if any) of the cabinets. The
cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 sq. mm (0.009 sq.
in.) and is no more than 300 mm (11.8 in.) long. Connect the two ends
of the short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of
neighboring cabinets and fix them firmly.
6.3.4 Grounding Specifications for Communications Power

Supply
Table 6-23 shows the grounding specifications for communication power supplies.
Table 6-23 Grounding specifications for communication power supplies

No. Description
1 The inlet for the AC power cable at the equipment room should be
equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal
discharge current no less than 20 kA.
2 The protective ground for the power supply and that for communication
equipment share the same grounding conductor. If the power supply and
the equipment are in the same equipment room, use the same
protective ground bar for them if possible.
3 Use a surge protection circuit on the AC power interface.
4 The positive of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V

DC power supply should be grounded at the output of the DC power
supply.
5 The working ground and protective ground of the DC power supply

equipment should use the same grounding conductor with the protective
ground of the switching equipment. If the power supply and equipment
are in the same equipment room, use the same protection ground bar
for them if possible.
6 Add surge protection on the DC power interface.

WLAN
6.3.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

Table 6-24 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.
Table 6-24 Grounding specifications for signal cables
No. Description
1 Equip the cable outdoors with a metal jacket, well grounded at both
ends, or connect the ends of the metal jacket to the protective ground
bar of the equipment room. For cables inside the equipment room,
install surge protection devices at the interface to the equipment. The
PGND cable for the surge protection devices should be as short as
possible.
2 The incoming and outgoing signal cables to and from the office and
unused wires inside the cable should be grounded for protection.
3 The Tone & Data Access (TDA) cable must pass through the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) with surge protective device (SPD) when
going out of the office. The cable's shield layer should be connected to
the protective ground of the MDF. The MDF should use the same
grounding conductor as the cabinet.
4 Do not route signal cables overhead.
6.3.6 Specifications for Laying Out Grounding Cables

Table 6-25 shows the specifications for the ground cable.
Table 6-25 Specifications for laying out ground cables
No. Description
1 The grounding wire should not run parallel to or twist around the signal
cable.
2 Bury ground underground or arrange them indoors. Do not route ground

cables overhead.
3 Do not connect two cables together to extend the PGND cable, or add
any switches or fuses.
4 The PGND cable should be an alternating yellow and green plastic

insulated one with a copper core.
5 The neutral line of the AC power cable cannot be connected to the

protective ground of transmission and communication equipment in the
equipment room.
6 A PGND cable should be as short as possible, with a length of no more

than 45 m (147.64 ft).

WLAN
6.4 Appendix E Engineering Labels for Cables

An engineering label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and
maintenance after the installation. Labels on the cables facilitate correct and
orderly connection of cables, and easy maintenance after installation.
Engineering labels are specialized for power cables and signal cables:
● Signal cables include network cables, optical fibers, and user cables.
● Power cables include the AC power cables and DC power cables.
Fill in labels according to specified requirements to keep consistency of labels in the

equipment room. Make a relevant statement in the self-check report.
6.4.1 Introduction to Labels
6.4.1.1 Label Materials

Features:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
● Color: chalk white
● Material: polyester (PET)
● Ambient temperature: -29°C (-20.2°F) to +149°C (300.2°F)
● Printed by a laser printer and written with a marker
● Pass UL and CSA authentication
6.4.1.2 Type and Structure
Label for Signal Cables

The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure
6-153.

WLAN
Figure 6-153 Label for signal cables
To specify more clearly the position of a cable, use the dividing lines on the label.
For example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the chassis
number, and another one between the chassis number and the slot number. Each
dividing line is light blue (Pantone 656c) and 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm (0.06 in. x 0.02
in.).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixed to the cable, and its size is
1 mm x 2 mm (0.04 in. x 0.08 in.).
The word "TO:" (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label
is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.
Power Cable Label

The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the
cable ties that are attached to the cable. The identification plate has an embossed
area 0.2 mm x 0.6 mm (0.008 in. x 0.02 in.) around (symmetric on both sides), and
the area in the middle is for affixing the label, as shown in Figure 6-154.

WLAN
Figure 6-154 Power cable label
6.4.1.3 Label Printing

The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for
the sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.
Template for Printing

You can obtain a template from the Huawei local office to print labels.
The template is made in Microsoft Word. Follow these instructions to use the
template:

WLAN
● You can modify the contents of the template. Do not change settings of
centered characters, direction, and fonts.
● If many characters need to be filled in, decrease the font size, but make sure
that the printouts are clear and legible.
Merging Cells in the Template

To merge two or more cells, do as follows:
1. Select Edit/Select All.
2. Select Format/Borders and Shading/Borders. Select Box tab and click OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and select the Table/Merge
Cells.
Requirements on the Printer

To print labels, use a laser jet printer of any model. Before printing labels, set up
the page and try printing.
1. Try printing on ordinary paper with both sides blank. Place the blank paper
over the whole page of the label paper, and check whether the page setup
conforms to the label layout.
2. Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and "direction", have
been set correctly.
– If the printout conforms to the sheet of labels, print the labels on the
label paper.
– If the printout does not conform, adjust the page setup and try printing
again until the correct printout is produced.
The method for adjusting the page setup is as follows.
1. Select File/Page Setup.
2. Select Layout and set Header and Footer as 0.
3. Select the Margins tab page. Select Left for Gutter Position and adjust the
values of Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.
If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 6-155 appears before printing, click Ignore
to continue the printing.
Figure 6-155 Warning prompt before printing
After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page
setup is only necessary the first time you use the template to print the labels.

WLAN
Requirements for Feeding the Printer

The label paper consists of two layers and has undergone multiple processing
procedures such as printing and cutting. No matter what model of printer you use,
feed in the labels one page at a time. To avoid jamming the labels, never use the
auto-feed mode.
Feed in the label paper in the correct direction to ensure that the text is printed in
a correct position.
Requirements for the Printed Label

Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:
● All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the
backing layer of the label page.
● Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout,
the dividing lines and the word "TO:" should not be covered by printed
characters.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the word "TO:" when printing the text. Use the space bar to move
the text to the next line.
6.4.1.4 Writing Labels
Writing Tools
To make sure the printouts are clear and legible, use black markers instead of
ball-point pens to write the labels.
If no marker is available, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not
recommended. Compared with ball-point pens, waterproof markers are better.
When writing with a ball-point pen, do not leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.
The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.
Font
For the sake of legibility, use standard block letters and numbers as shown in
Table 6-26 (Times New Roman).
Table 6-26 Standard typeface for handwriting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 A B C D E F G H
I J K L M N O P Q
R S T U V W X Y Z

WLAN
Determine the size of characters based on the number of letters or digits and
ensure that the characters are distinct and tidy.
Placement of text on a label is shown in Figure 6-156.
Figure 6-156 Placement of text on a label
6.4.1.5 Attaching Labels

After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the page and attach it to
the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable. The methods for
attaching labels are described in the following sections.
Label for Signal Cables

● Choose the place to attach labels.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connector on a signal cable. In
special cases (for example, to avoid cable bending or affecting other cables),
other positions are allowed to attach the labels. The rectangular part with
text is attached facing right or downward, as shown in Figure 6-157. The
details are as follows:
– The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
– The identification card should be downward when you lay out the cable
horizontally.
Figure 6-157 Text area of the label
● Procedure for attaching labels

Figure 6-158 shows the methods and procedures for attaching labels.

WLAN
Figure 6-158 Label for signal cables
Power Cable Label

Remove the label from the backing page, and attach it to the identification plate
on the cable tie. The label should be attached to the rectangular flute on the
identification plate, and attached to only one side of the identification plate. The
cable ties are bundled at 2 cm (0.79 in.) from the connectors, and other positions
are allowed in special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bound on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the
finished identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or
on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling, as shown in Figure 6-159. The
details are as follows:
● The identification card is to the right of the cable in vertical cabling.
● The identification card is on the top of the cable in horizontal cabling. Make
sure that the label is facing out.

WLAN
Figure 6-159 Binding the label for the power cable
Cable
TO:
B03
TO:
B03 -48V2
-48V2
Cable
The identification card is on the The identification card is to

top of the cable in horizontal the right of the cable in
cabling. vertical cabling.
6.4.1.6 Contents of Engineering Labels
Contents of Labels for Power Cables

Labels for power cables are affixed on only one side of the identification plates.
On the labels, there is information (the part after the word "TO:") about the
location of the device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control
cabinet, distribution box or power socket.
Contents of Labels for Signal Cables

The two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the
location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 6-160 shows the
information on both sides of the labels affixed to the signal cables.
● Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
● Area 2 (with the word "TO:") contains the location information of the
opposite end of the cable.
● Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Figure 6-160 Printed parts on the label for signal cables
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the
right side of the cable. The side with "TO:" that is facing outside carries the

WLAN
location information of the opposite end; and the other side carries the location
information of the local end.
In other words, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the
information in Area 2 at the other end of the cable.
6.4.1.7 Precautions for Using Engineering Labels

When using labels, pay attention to the following points:
● When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof material, ink-jet printers and
ink pens cannot be used to print and write labels.
● Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are L-shaped. If they are
pasted at incorrect locations or in the incorrect direction, the appearance of
the device is affected.
● Power cable ties should be attached in the same positions on power cables,
with identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineering person who is working on the label.
6.4.2 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers
These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on
the boards in a chassis, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for
optical cables:
● One is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices.
● The other is for the fiber that connects the device and the ODF.
6.4.2.1 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting Devices
Meaning of the Label

Table 6-27 lists information on both sides of the labels affixed to the optical fibers
that connect two devices.
Table 6-27 Information on labels affixed to the fibers between two devices
Content Meaning Example
MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
R/T number numbered from A to Z.
N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
numbered from 01 to 99.
For example, A01 is the cabinet in row A and
column 01.
B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,

number for example, 01.

WLAN
C: physical Numbered in top-down and left-right order

slot number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first slot
at the top left of the chassis.
D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,

interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.
R: Receiving -
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface
Example of the Label

Figure 6-161 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.
Figure 6-161 Sample label on an optical fiber between two devices
The meaning of the label is listed in Figure 6-161.

● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected
to the optical receiving interface 01 in slot 5, chassis 01 in the cabinet in row
A, column 01 in the machine room.
● "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected with optical transmitting interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
6.4.2.2 Labels for the Optical Fibers Connecting the Device and an ODF
Meaning of the Labels

Table 6-28 shows information on both sides of labels attached to an optical fiber
between a device and an optical distribution frame (ODF).

WLAN
Table 6-28 Information on labels affixed to a fiber between a device and an ODF
MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet For example, A01.

R/T number
B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,

number for example, 01.
C: physical slot Numbered in top-down and left-right order

number starting from 01. For example, 01 is the first
slot at the top left of the chassis.
D: optical Numbered in top-down and left-right order,

interface consistent with the port sequence number on
number. the device.
R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface
ODF-MN-B- MN: row M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
C-R/T number and numbered from A to Z.
column N: The cabinet columns from left to right are
number of an numbered from 01 to 99.
ODF
For example, G01 is the ODF of row G and
column 01.
B: row number Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

of the terminal
device
C: column
number of the
terminal
device
R: Optical -
receiving
interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface

Figure 6-162 shows a sample label on an optical fiber.

WLAN
Figure 6-162 Sample label on an optical fiber between the device and the ODF
Meaning of the label in Figure 6-162

● "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is
connected to the optical receiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF
in row G, column 01 in the machine room.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is
connected to optical receiving interface 1 in slot 05, chassis 01 in the cabinet
in row A, column 01 in the machine room.
6.4.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables
Applicable Ranges
The labels can be applied to Ethernet cables.
Label Content
Table 6-29 shows the information on both sides of the labels affixed to Ethernet
cables.
You can also decide the label content based on the actual environment. If the
device is not installed in the cabinet, for example, you can remove the cabinet
number.
Table 6-29 Information on the Ethernet cables
MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row A.
number
B: chassis Numbered in bottom-up order with two

number digits, for example, 01.
C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and

number left-right order. For example, 01.
D: network port Numbered in top-down and left-right orders.

number For example, 01.
MN-Z MN: cabinet For example, B02 is the second cabinet in

number row B.

WLAN
Z: Location Fill in the location number of the terminal

number device on site. If the cable is connected to a
device in a cabinet, specify the serial
numbers of the cabinet, the chassis, and the
Ethernet interface of the device. For example,
B02-03-12. If the cable is connected to the
Network Management Station (NMS),
specify the specific location of the NMS.
The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and devices or
agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to
actual connections. The details are as follows:
● For a network cable connecting a hub and device, the label on the hub end
should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides,
and the serial number on the hub. The label on the device end should indicate
the number of the chassis and cabinet where the device is located. If the
device is a standalone device, provide the specific position of the device.
● For a network cable connecting a hub and an agent or terminal, the label on
the agent or terminal end should contain the serial number of the network
interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the
same as those described in Table 6-29.
● If the hub is a standalone device without a cabinet or chassis, the label should
contain specific location information that identifies the hub.
The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or
terminal, and the location of the standalone device should be specified according
to actual connections.
Label Example
Figure 6-163 shows a sample label on an Ethernet cable.
Figure 6-163 Sample label on an Ethernet cable
Meaning of the label in Figure 6-163.

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that one end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in slot 01, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01
in the equipment room.

WLAN
● "B02-03-01" indicates that another end of the network cable is connected to

network interface 01 in chassis 03 of the cabinet on row B, column 02 in the
equipment room. No slot number is given.
6.4.4 Engineering Labels for User Cables

Attach labels to both ends of a user cable to indicate the locations of the cable on
the device and main distribution frame (MDF).
Meaning of the Engineering Labels for User Cables

Table 6-30 shows the contents of the labels.
Table 6-30 Contents of the engineering labels for user cables

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet For example, A01 is the first cabinet in row
number A.
B: frame Numbered in the bottom-up order with two

number digits, for example, 03.
C: physical slot Numbered with two digits in top-down and

number left-right order. For example, 01.
D: cable number Numbered with two digits in top-down and

left-right order. For example, 01.
MDF-MN-B-C MN: row M: The rows of cabinets from front to back

number and are numbered from A to Z. N: The columns
column number of cabinets from left to right are numbered
of the MDF from 01 to 99. For example, G01 is the MDF
of Row G and Column 01.
B: row number Ranges from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

of the terminal
device
C: column
number of the
terminal device

Figure 6-164 shows a sample label on a user cable.
Figure 6-164 Sample label on a user cable

WLAN
The meaning of the label in Figure 6-164 is as follows:

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to
port 1 in slot 1, chassis 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the
equipment room.
● "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the opposite end of the user cable is
connected to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column
01 in the equipment room.
6.4.5 Engineering Labels for Power Cables
6.4.5.1 Engineering Labels for DC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to the DC power cables that provide power supply for
cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Here, the DC power cables
also include power cables and PGND cables.
The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details of the labels, see Table 6-31.
Table 6-31 Contents of the label

Content Meaning
MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.

B--48Vn B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND N: power socket number, numbered as 1 to 3 in the bottom-
up and left-to-right orders.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the
PGND cabinet.
On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column
number of the power distribution equipment like a control
cabinet and distribution box, and BC identifies the row and
column number of the -48 V connector. If there is no row
number or column number, or the connector can be identified
without them, BC can be omitted. It is unnecessary to identify
the row and column number for BGND and PGND.
The label only carries location information about the destination direction of the
power cable whereas information about the local end is unnecessary. That is, the
label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control
cabinet, or the distribution box. Table 6-31 lists the information on two -48 V
power supplies on the label. The information on other DC voltages, such as 24 V
and 60 V should be given in similar methods.
Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should

WLAN
face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction. For details, see Figure 6-165.
Figure 6-165 Example of the labels for DC power cables
The meaning of the label in Figure 6-165 is as follows:

● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates
that the cable is -48 V DC supply, which is from the eighth connector in row B
of -48 V bus bar in the cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment
room.
● On the distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is
-48 V DC supply, connected to DC power socket 2 in row B, column 03 in the
equipment room.
In the power distribution box or the first power cabinet of a row in a transmission
equipment room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or sometimes "8")
is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are short-
circuited. Therefore, it makes no difference which terminal is connected to them. It
is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution box,
instead of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper
bar. For example, if the label on the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means
that the power cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power
distribution box in row A, column 01 in the machine room. Information on the
labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar way.
6.4.5.2 Engineering Labels for AC Power Cables

These labels are affixed to both ends of an AC power cable that provides AC
power supply to cabinets, including 110/220 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The
110/220 V AC cables and related PGND and BGND cables are covered with an
insulating sheath, so the labels need to contain only the word "AC" and the
cabinet numbers.
The labels for AC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates
on cable ties. For details, see Table 6-32.

WLAN
Table 6-32 Label content

Content Meaning
MN-(B)-ACn MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the
power is led in
B: chassis number, numbered in bottom-up order with two
digits, for example, 01.
n: power port number, numbered as 1 to 3 in bottom-up and
left-to-right order.
Serial number of the socket where the power is led in: the
location of the socket is marked according to the actual
situation. If the sockets can be identified by row numbers and
column numbers, they can be numbered following the same
rule for the cabinets. If the sockets cannot be identified by
rows and columns, specify the detailed locations to avoid
confusion with other sockets.
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment and the
power socket; information about the local end is unnecessary.
Make sure that labels are affixed in the correct direction. That is, after the cable
ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should
face up, and the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same
direction, as shown in Figure 6-166.
Figure 6-166 Labels for AC power cables
Label on the loaded cabinet side Label on the distribution box side
(indicating the position of the cable (indicating the position of the cable
on the power distribution box) on the loaded cabinet side)
Meaning of the label in Figure 6-166.

● On the equipment cabinet side, the label marked "A01-AC1" indicates that
the power cable is connected to the first AC power socket of row A and
column 01 in the equipment room.
● On the power socket side, the label marked "B01-AC1" indicates that the
power cable is connected to the first AC power socket in the cabinet of row B
and column 01 in the equipment room.

WLAN
6.5 Appendix F Guide to Using Optical Modules
The system may fail to obtain information about non-Huawei-certified optical modules or
obtain incorrect information. You are advised to use Huawei-certified optical modules. Obtain
the electronic label of the optical module and contact technical support personnel to confirm
whether it is a Huawei-certified optical module.
Common Faults of an Optical Module

1. An optical module is not completely installed in position.
If the optical module is not completely installed in position and the latch boss
is not secured, the device cannot identify the optical module. After the optical
module works for a long time, it will be ejected under external stress.
2. The optical receptacle on an optical module is contaminated.
If an optical module is not cleaned or protected properly, contaminants may
accumulate on the fiber pin in the optical module. As a result, the coupling
efficiency is reduced, optical signals are cut off, or even worse, the surface of
the fiber pin is damaged permanently.
3. An optical module is burnt.
If high-power optical signals (caused by an optical time domain reflectometer
or self-loop test) are transmitted through an optical module that is used for
long-distance transmission but no optical attenuator is used, the optical
power will exceed the overload power of the avalanche photodiode (APD).
Then the optical module is burnt.
The preceding faults lead to temporary or long-term cut-off of optical signals; or
even cause permanent damages to the optical module, affecting communication
services.
Measures to Prevent a Loosened Optical Module

1. When installing an optical module, insert it in position. If you hear a click or
feel a slight shake, it indicates that the latch boss is secured.
If the latch boss is not secured, the gold finger of the optical module is not in
good contact with the connector on the board. In this case, the link may be
connected but optical signals will be cut off or the optical module will be
loosened when the optical module is shaken or hit.
2. Figure 6-167 shows the release handle on an optical module when it is open
and closed. When inserting the optical module, make sure that the release
handle is closed. At this time, the latch boss locks the optical module. After
the optical module is inserted, try pulling it out to see if it is installed in
position. If the optical module cannot be pulled out, it is secured.

WLAN
Figure 6-167 State of the release handle
Close the release handle Open the release handle
Measures to Prevent Receptacle Contamination

1. Cleaning tissues must be prepared on site. You need to clean the optical
connector before inserting it in the receptacle. This protects the receptacle
against contamination on the surface of the optical connector.
Figure 6-168 Cleaning optical fibers with special cleaning tissues
Place at least three cleaning tissues on the work bench. As shown in Figure 6-168,
wipe the end of an optical connector from left to right or from right to left on a
cleaning tissue, and then move the connector end to the unused part of the cleaning
tissue to continue.
2. Cover an unused optical module with a protective cap to prevent dust, as
Figure 6-169 Installing a protective cap
If no protective cap is available, use fibers to protect the optical module, as


WLAN
Figure 6-170 Using fibers to protect an optical module
3. Cover unused optical connectors with protective caps, as shown in Figure

6-171, and then lay out fibers on the fiber rack or coil them in a fiber
management tray to prevent fibers from being squeezed.
Figure 6-171 Installing a protective cap on a fiber
4. If a receptacle or an optical connector has not been used for a long time and
is not covered with a protective cap, you need to clean it before using it. Clean
a receptacle with a cotton swab, as shown in Figure 6-172. Clean an optical
connector with cleaning tissues.
Figure 6-172 Cleaning a receptacle with a cotton swab
NOTICE
When cleaning a receptacle, insert the cotton swab and turn it slowly in the
receptacle. Do not use too much strength because the receptacle may be
damaged.
5. If optical signals are lost during the operation of a device, use the preceding
method to clean the receptacle or the optical connector. In this manner, the
possibility of contamination can be excluded.

WLAN
Measures to Prevent an Optical Module from Being Burnt

1. Before using an optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR) to test the
connectivity or the attenuation of optical signals, disconnect the optical fibers
from the optical module. Otherwise, the optical module will be burnt.
2. When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator. Do not loosen
the optical connector instead of the optical attenuator.
Precautions
1. The optical connector should be vertically inserted in the receptacle to avoid
damages to the receptacle.
2. Fibers must be inserted into optical modules of the corresponding type. That
is, multimode fibers must be inserted into multimode optical modules, and
single mode fibers must be inserted into single mode optical modules. If a
fiber is inserted into an optical module of a different mode, faults may occur.
For example, optical signals will be lost.
6.6 Appendix G Fault Tag

*Customer name:
Address:
Contact person:
Tel.: Fax:
Category*: □ RMA □ Return □ Analysis
Description
Fault of the Fault
BOM Product Bar Occurring Phenomena Categor Software
Code Description Code* Date* * y No.* Version*
Reasons for Repairing (Category No.):

WLAN
Category No. includes the following eight types:

F001 - Wear out damaged (◊ In warranty Period ◊ Out of warranty period)
F002 - Deployment damaged
F003 - Intransit damaged
F004 - Version upgrade
F005 - Batch replace
F007 - Overdue spare parts inspecting
F008 - Others
F011 - Running circumstance change
Note:
● For optical interface cards returned, the optical interfaces should be covered
with protection caps.
● In general, the analysis card will not be returned to you. If you have any
special requirements, please contact Huawei.
● One Fault Tag should be adapted in one return category, such as RMA/
Return/Analysis.
● The items marked with "*" are the mandatory fields that you must fill in.
6.7 Installation Checklist
Com Applic
pone No. able Check Item
nt Scope
AC Indepe
The air vent of the device is free from blockage to
1 ndent
ensure normal heat dissipation.
AC
Indepe
The power modules are securely installed with their
2 ndent
captive screws tightly fixed.
AC
Indepe
Four rubber pads are attached to specified positions
3 ndent
on the bottom of the AC before it is placed on a desk.
AC
Indepe The AC is secured in the cabinet or rack by rack-

4 ndent mounting brackets or guide rails (or trays), and
AC floating nuts are correctly secured.
The AC card is secured in the cabinet or rack by guide

AC
5 rails or trays, and the guide rails or trays and floating
card
nuts are correctly secured.
AC The AC card is correctly inserted into the device slot

6
card and secured using the ejector lever.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
AC No pins on the backplane are bent when the AC card

7
card is installed.
Indepe
The AC is grounded using a ground cable, meeting
8 ndent
surge protection requirements.
AC
Indepe
When the AC directly connects to APs, location IDs of
9 ndent
the APs are provided at the cable connection points.
AC
PoE The proper PoE switch or power adapter is selected,

Genera
powe 1 meeting AP power supply and onsite environment
l
r requirements.
suppl
y To ensure that the PoE power meets requirements,
Genera the PoE power supply device and APs must be
2
l connected through CAT5E and CAT6E network cables,
and the cable length cannot exceed 100 m.
Genera Labels must be made for the PoE power cable to

3
l identify AP locations.
Genera Leave a 20 cm space between PoE power adapters to

4
l ensure normal heat dissipation.
Genera The PoE switch is correctly grounded with the ground

5
l cable.
Reserve a few downlink network interfaces for the

Genera
6 PoE switch (for example, connect at most 20 APs to a
l
24-port switch) for future capacity expansion.
You are advised to configure dual power modules for

Genera
7 a PoE switch for power redundancy backup and
l
providing power for more APs.
AP The AP installation positions comply with the network

planning report and APs cannot be installed in
Genera environments with strong electrical or magnetic
1
l interference or corrosive materials. If the onsite
environment does not meet requirements, adjust the
AP installation positions properly.
Genera The devices are installed correctly, securely, without

2
l damages or paint peeling. Screws are tightened.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
Leave at least 20 cm space at the cable outlet and

top (convex) of the AP to facilitate commissioning,
maintenance, and heat dissipation. APs that dissipate
Genera
3 heat from the rear must be fixed using mounting
l
brackets in wall mounting scenarios. Ensure that
there is a certain space between the APs and wall to
facilitate heat dissipation.
APs with built-in antennas should be installed in open

Genera areas and there should be no obvious obstruction in
4
l the coverage direction of the main lobe. The main
lobe of built-in antennas faces the top (convex).
Genera The APs and antennas are neatly installed, without

5
l affecting the overall layout of the environment.
Indoor APs are placed far away from windows and in

dry environments with little dust and good
Indoor
6 ventilation. There should be no inflammable
AP
materials in rooms. The indoor temperature and
humidity must be within acceptable ranges.
When being mounted to a ceiling, the APs must be

fixed using the matching mounting brackets. The APs
cannot be hung in the air or placed directly on the
Indoor
7 ceiling. When the APs are mounted to a wall, the
AP
bottom of the APs should be at least 30 mm from the
ground. The APs should be installed in places out of
reach of people.
When two or more APs are installed in the same

Outdoo area, they must be installed in the same vertical or
8
r AP horizontal line with certain spacing greater than 15
mm.
Dustproof, waterproof, and anti-theft measures are

taken and the devices are kept clean. The APs are
secured using the security locks (separately
Genera
9 purchased) based on onsite situations and customer
l
requirements. If APs are placed in a network box,
ensure that the box is well-ventilated, clean, and
dustless, and the ventilation holes are not blocked.
Indoor APs should be mounted on walls with network

ports downwards to prevent device damages caused
by water drops or other liquid. Install the device in a
Indoor
10 site that is free from leaking or dripping water, heavy
AP
dew, and humidity, and take protective measures to
prevent water from flowing into the equipment along
the cable.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
When an outdoor AP is installed against a wall or

Outdoo
11 pole, keep the indicator downwards for easy
r AP
observation.
Use waterproof labels to mark the registration names

Genera of APs on the AC, as well as their channels and IP
12
l addresses. The labels should be attached to the front
of the APs for easy observation.
Record AP installation positions, MAC addresses,

Genera
13 interfaces of uplink PoE switches, and IP addresses
l
(APs use fixed IP addresses) into a table.
The devices required during indoor AP installation,

Indoor
14 such as the splitter, coupler, and antennas are
AP
operated in accordance with specifications.
Genera The APs using a metal shell (with a ground point)

15
l must be properly grounded.
Outdoo Unused radio ports should be installed with 50 Ω RF

16
r AP loads.
Take lightning protection measures on outdoor APs

(the outdoor APs have built-in 5 kV surge protectors.
If customers require a higher surge protection
Outdoo capability on the feeder ports, they can purchase
17
r AP additional surge protective devices, which need to be
separately grounded). The APs should be located in
the protection scope (within a 45-degree angle) of a
lightning rod.
When an AP is mounted to a pole, the distance

Outdoo
18 between the AP and the top of pole should be at
r AP
least 30 cm.
Signa Routes of signal cables comply with the engineering

l Genera design document. The signal cables are correctly
1
cable l connected to facilitate maintenance and capacity
expansion.
Genera Radio ports of an AP are correctly connected to radio

2
l ports A/B/C of antennas.
Signal cable connectors are correctly installed and

Genera securely connected to the device. Wires of each signal
3
l cable are securely cramped in the connectors and
pass connectivity tests.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
Signal cables are orderly routed and not crossed,

Genera twisted, or winded (cables can be crossed at 1 m out
4
l of the cabinet). The bend radius of cables meets
requirements, and the cables are not excessively bent.
Signal cables are not damaged or broken and have

Genera no splices. Sufficient cable length is reserved. The
5
l reserved cables are twined and placed properly to
facilitate subsequent maintenance.
The optical, power, network, and feeder cables are

Indoor
6 bundled using straps (one strap every 0.5 m) and
AP
securely fastened.
The signal cables shall be bundled at even intervals

(about 1000 mm), not too tight or too loose. The
cables shall be bundled properly with cable ties
Outdoo
7 placed in neat order. Cut off redundant cable ties and
r AP
remove burrs from them to avoid injuries. The cables
shall be fixed using fasteners or ageing-resistant
outdoor metal binding straps.
Keep the signal cables away from heat sources and

use heat insulation materials to insulate the cables
Genera
8 from the heat sources. Do not place signal cables on
l
the air vents of the cabinet to avoid affecting subrack
heat dissipation or cable lifetime.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
Pigtail layout should meet the following

requirements:
● Pigtails are not strained or twisted at the bent
parts. They are bundled by binding tape with
appropriate force.
● Pigtails can be pulled back and forth easily inside
the cable tie and are not bent at a right angle.
● Pigtails are not squeezed by other cables or
objects.
● The flange must be fixed.
Genera ● Pigtails are protected with protective tubes or
9
l enveloped in troughs when they are routed outside
the cabinet. The protective tubes are bundled and
processed to prevent cutting.
● The optical fiber cannot be folded or twisted, and
the pigtail cannot be squeezed. The binding
diameter of an optical fiber must be larger than 6
cm.
● The pigtail connection points must be clean and
dustless. Fiber connectors and optical ports that
are not used must be protected with protective
caps or plugs. Cleaning must be carried out in
strict accordance with Huawei tool specifications.
Genera The feeder cables shall not be bent or twisted, with

10
l no copper wire exposed.
The feeder cable connectors comply with

Genera
11 corresponding standards and are correctly connected,
l
without looseness.
The feeder cables, power splitter, coupler, and surge

Genera
12 protective devices are connected correctly and reliably
l
in accordance with specifications.
Strong current and weak current cables are routed

separately. The power cables, ground cables, and
Genera signal cables are bundled and routed separately (with
13
l a spacing of more than 30 mm) to prevent electrical
or magnetic interference. Use shielded cables in
places with strong interference.
When routing cables in walls, place the cables in the

Genera cable troughs or pipes and fix the cables using pipe
14
l straps. For non-metal corrugated pipes, the fixing
distance should be about 1000 mm.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
All outdoor connectors or feeder cable connectors are

properly sealed to prevent water. Wrap the cable
using one-layer PVC insulation tape, three-layer
Outdoo
15 waterproof tape, and then three-layer PVC insulation
r AP
tape. The tape shall be attached evenly and neatly.
The network cables shall be covered with waterproof
PG tubes.
Cable connectors are secured on cables and sealed to

prevent water intrusion. The outlets of cable conduits
Outdoo on a wall are sealed by waterproof and flame-
16
r AP retardant materials. Drip loops meeting the minimum
bending radius requirement are made on the network
cable segment that stretches indoor.
Outdoo Do not deploy cables overhead between two

17
r AP buildings.
Waterproof labels (providing device names and cable

Genera directions) are filled and attached to signal cables
18
l correctly. Each label is attached 20 mm to 100 mm
from the corresponding cable connector.
Surge protection measures are taken in the places

Outdoo where the outdoor APs are installed. The outdoor
19
r AP APs, antennas, and signal cables are deployed within
45-degree protection area of a lightning rod.
The bare wires of network and feeder cables should

Outdoo be covered by the winding pipes, flexible metal
20
r AP conduit, PVC pipes, or galvanization pipes. The cable
outlet and inlet are sealed to prevent dusts.
Anten The installation positions of antennas should comply

Genera
na 1 with the engineering design and antennas should be
l
securely and reliably installed.
There should be no obstacles in the major coverage

Genera direction of antennas. The direction and downlink tilt
2
l of antennas should be adjusted based on the
coverage targets.
Genera There should not be metal subjects within 1 m

3
l around an outdoor omnidirectional antenna.
The azimuth deviation of a directional antenna

Genera
4 should be within 5 degrees and the tilt deviation
l
within 0.5 degree.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
The antennas are fixed using special support that

Outdoo supports installation of surge protection devices and
r shall be located within a 45 degree protection angle
5
antenn of a lightning rod. When an antenna is mounted to a
a pole, the distance between the antenna and top of
the pole should be at least 30 cm.
Outdoo
Take waterproof measures on connectors of the
r
6 antennas and feeder cables and keep the drain holes
antenn
of antennas downwards.
a
The pole used in antenna mounting should meet the

following requirements:
Pole height: ≥ 2000 mm
Outdoo Bottom pole diameter: ≥ 220 mm
r
7 Top pole diameter: ≥ 120 mm
antenn
a Pole thickness: ≥ 6 mm
Depth of foundation: ≥ 1500 mm
The pole deployed outdoors must be reinforced with
hot-dip zinc to prevent water corrosion and rust.
It is recommended that at most three APs or

antennas be mounted to the same pole. The APs or
antennas mounted to the same pole should meet the
Outdoo following requirements:
r ● The vertical distance should be at least 3.5 m
8
antenn between adjacent 2.4G antennas and 2 m between
a adjacent 5G antennas.
● There should be at least 1 m vertical distance
between antennas that work on the same
frequency band and belong to different APs.
Outdoo When outdoor APs use single-polarized antennas, the

r horizontal distance between 2.4G antennas should be
9
antenn at least 1 m and that between 5G antennas should
a be at least 0.5 m.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
If multiple APs are mounted to different poles, the

APs should provide signal coverage in the same
direction or in back-to-back mode to ensure that
Outdoo main lobe of antennas on different APs do not face
r each other.
10
antenn Recommended AP distance:
a
≥ 44 m (APs provide signal coverage in the same
direction)
≥ 6 m (APs provide distance in back-to-back mode)
Powe Genera The female connectors of power cables connecting to

1
r and l the device are fixed using a locking latch.
groun
d Genera The power cables and ground cables are correctly
2
cable l connected.
s Genera The power cables and ground cables are complete
3
l and not spliced.
The excess of power cables or ground cables are

trimmed off without any coils. The power cables
Genera
4 connecting the delivered surge protection boxes and
l
devices cannot be cut. These power cables can be
coiled.
Genera Power cables and ground cable are separated from

5
l the signal cables.
Power cables and ground cables are routed straightly

Genera and properly bundled, with sufficient slack at the
6
l bend part. If the cables are fixed on a sharp
mechanical part, take protection measures.
Genera The equipotential cables between the attaching

7
l cabinets shall be securely connected.
Genera The lugs for the power cables and ground cables are
8
l soldered or crimped securely.
The lugs and bare wires of power cables and ground

Genera cables are tightly wrapped with tubes or insulation
9
l tape without any exposed copper wire. Flat washers
and spring washers are installed correctly.
Genera Labels are filled and attached to power cables and

10
l ground cables correctly.
Genera Power cables deployed outdoors must be covered by

11
l PVC tubes.

WLAN
Com Applic
nt Scope
Optic A single-mode fiber can only be used with a single-

al mode optical module while a multimode optical fiber
Genera
modu 1 can only be used with a multimode optical module.
l
le On most optical modules, the fibers of different types
cannot be used together.
The labels of pluggable optical modules are smoothly

Genera
2 attached and intact, and cannot be covered by the
l
optical modules.
If a short-distance optical fiber is used for a long-

Genera distance optical module, especially in loopback
3
l scenarios, use an optical attenuator to prevent the
optical module from being burnt.
6.8 Guide to Making Drip Loops

To prevent water from flowing into devices along cables, you need to take
waterproof measures, for example, create a drip loop on a cable. As an example,
the following describes how to create drip loops on network cables connected to a
device in different directions.
● When a device is installed in a harsh environment or its ports face upward, follow
outdoor waterproof standards to lay out indoor cables. For details, see "Connecting
Cables" in the AP8030DN&AP8130DN Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide.
● The network cable directions in the description below are relative to an AP.
● If a cable is downward, no drip loop is required.
● The figures in the document are for reference only and may be different from actual
devices.

WLAN
Downward Port, Upward Cable
ǹ
Ķ
≤100mm
≥50mm
Upward Port, Upward Cable
ǹ
≥50mm
≤100mm
Ķ
Horizontal Port, Upward Cable
ǹ
≥50mm
≤100mm
Ķ
Bending Radius Requirements
● The bending radius of a 7/8'' feeder must be more than 250 mm, and that of
a 5/4'' feeder must be more than 380 mm.

WLAN
● The bending radius of a 1/4" jumper, 1/2" super-flexible jumper, and 1/2"
common jumper must be greater than 35 mm, 50 mm, and 127 mm,
respectively.
● The bending radius of a network cable must be greater than or equal to five
times the cable diameter (that is, 50 mm).
6.9 Power Adaptation Solution

Select a suitable power supply mode as required.
DC Power Supply
Table 6-33 Mapping between device models and DC power adapters

Pa Name Vendor Applicable Device
rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 S5700 HUAWEI AC6605

31 Series,ES0W2PSD0150,150W DC
0JF Power Module
D
02 Adapter,0degC,40degC,90V, FSP AD9430DN-12

22 264V,+48V/2.08A AP2050DN,
01 AP2050DN-E
19
AP7050DN-E
R250D-E
02 Adapter,-25degC,50degC,90V, Ktec / HONOR AP2050DN,

22 290V,56V1.07A,C8 AP2050DN-E,
09 AP2051DN,
35 P2051DN-E
AP4051TN
AP6052DN
AP7052DN,
AP7152DN,
AP7052DE,
AP7060DN
R250D-E

WLAN

rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 AC/DC HuntKey / AP1050DN-S

22 Adapter--5degC-45degC-90V-27 SHILONG FUHUA AP4030TN,
08 0V-12V/2A-Europe Standard-DC AP4050DN,
64 inlet AP4050DN-S,
02 AC/DC HuntKey / AP4050DN-E,
22 Adapter--5degC-45degC-90V-27 SHILONG FUHUA AP4050DN-HD,
08 0V-12V/2A-UK Standard-DC AP4051DN,
65 inlet AP4051DN-S,
AP4151DN, and
02 AC/DC HuntKey AP430-E
22 Adapter--5degC-45degC-90V-27 AP4050DE-M,
08 0V-12V/2A-Australia Standard- AP4050DE-M-S,
66 DC inlet AP4050DE-B-S,
02 Adapter,-5degC,45degC,90V, HuntKey / AP3050DE
22 270V,12V/2A SHILONG FUHUA AP5030DN-C
08
AP6050DN and
67
AP6150DN
02 AC/DC HuntKey / AP7050DE
22 Adapter--5degC-45degC-90V-27 SHILONG FUHUA
08 0V-12V/2A-China Standard-DC R450D
68 inlet AirEngine 5760-10
02 AC/DC HuntKey
22 Adapter--5degC-45degC-90V-27
08 0V-12V/2A-Brazil Standard-DC
69 inlet
02 Adapter,-5degC,45degC,90V, HuntKey /
22 270V,12V/2A,India Plug, DC SHILONG FUHUA
08 Plug
70
02 Adapter,-5degC,45degC,90V, - AirEngine 5760-10

22 270V,12V3A,2.1*5.5*9.5 H DC
06 PLUG ("L"),dedicated for Japan
86 Sonet project
02 AC/DC - AP5510-W-GP
00 0V-12V/2A-Europe Standerd-DC
93 inlet

WLAN

rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 AC/DC
00 0V-12V/2A-UK Standerd-DC
94 inlet
02 Adapter,-5degC,45degC,90V,
22 270V,12V/2A,safety RCM,C-
06 Tick,SAA,GEMS
48
02 AC/DC
05 0V-12V/2A-Brazil Standard-DC
57 inlet
02 AC/DC Adapter,-5degC,45degC,
22 90V,270V,12V/2A,US
01 Standard/DC inlet
21
22 270V,12V/2A,India Plug, DC
06 Plug
06
02 Adapter,0degC,40degC,100V,
22 240V,12V/2A,Japan2PIN/C8 /
06 2.1*5.5*9.5 H DC
25 head("L"),dedicated for Japan
Sonet project
22 264V,12V1.5A,2 PIN/2.1*5.5*9.5
09 H PLUG,CCC 2PIN
31
02 Adapter,-5degC,40degC,90V, - AC6508, AC6507S

22 264V,12V/3A,C8/2.1*5.5*9.5 H
09 PLUG,safety PSE/PSB/FCC/ERP5,
47 split from 02220288, Tuning
fork DC output
02 Function Module,DC - AC6805

31 PSU,PDC350S12-B,350W DC
2D Power Module(Back to
VB Front,Power panel side exhaust)

WLAN

rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 Function Module,DC - AirEngine 9700-M

31 PSU,PDC350S12-CB,350W DC
2G Power Module(Back to
CH Front,Power panel side exhaust)
AC Power Supply
Table 6-34 Mapping between device models and AC power adapters

rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 S5700 HUAWEI AC6605

31 Series,ES0W2PSA0150,150W AC
0JF Power Module
A
02 Function Module,AC - AirEngine 9700-M

31 PSU,PAC150S12-R,150W AC
2D Power Module
UY
02 Function Module,AC -
31 PSU,PAC600S12-CB,Function
2F Module,AC PSU,PAC600S12-CB,
FU 600W AC Power Module(Back
to Front, Power panel side
exhaust)
02 Function Module,AC - AC6805, AirEngine

31 PSU,PAC600S12-B,600W AC 9700-M
2D Power Module(Back to Front,
UP Power panel side exhaust)
02 AC/DC power FSP/VAPEL AC6605

13 module--25degC-55degC-90V-2
09 64V-12V/10A,-53.5V/7.1A
83

WLAN
PoE Power Supply
Table 6-35 Mapping between device models and PoE power adapters

rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 Adapter,-40degC~50degC, HuntKey / AP1010SN,

22 90V~264V,54V/0.65A,C8/ SHILONG FUHUA AP1050DN-S
03 RJ45,GE AP2010DN,
69 AP2030DN,
AP2050DN,
AP2050DN-E,
AP2051DN,
AP2051DN-E,
AP2051DN-L-S
AP3010DN,
AP3030DN, and
AP3010DN-V2
AP4030DN,
AP4030DN-E,
AP4030TN,
AP4050DN,
AP4050DN-E,
AP4050DN-S,
AP4051DN,
AP4051DN-S,
AP4051TN,
AP4130DN,
AP4151DNAP430-
E
AP5010DN,
AP5010SN,
AP5030DN,
AP5030DN-C,
AP5030DN-S,
AP5130DN
AP6010SN,
AP6010DN,
AP6050DN,
AP6052DN,
AP6150DN,
AP6510DN,
AP6310SN
AP7030DE,
AP7050DE,
AP7052DE,

WLAN

rt
Nu
m
be
r
AP7052DN,
AP7110DN,
AP7110SN,
AP7152DN
AP8030DN,
AP8050DN,
AP8050DN-S,
AP8050TN-HD,
AP8130DN,
AP8130DN-W,
AP8150DN
AP9330DN
R240D, R250D,
R250D-E, R251D,
R251D-E, R450D
AT815SN
AirEngine 5760-10

WLAN

rt
Nu
m
be
r
02 Adapter,-25degC,60degC,90V, FSP AD9430DN-12

22 264V,56V/1.52A,C8/RI45,POE AP6052DN,
01 ADAPTER AP6510DN
54
AP7030DE,
AP7050DE,
AP7052DE,
AP7052DN,
AP7110DN,
AP7110SN,
AP7152DN,
AP7060DN
AP8030DN,
AP8130DN,
AP8130DN-W,
AP8050DN,
AP8150DN,
AP8050DN-S,
AP8050TN-HD,
AP8082DN,
AP8182DN
AP8030DN,
AP8130DN,
AP8130DN-W,
AP8050DN,
AP8150DN,
AP8050DN-S,
AP8082DN,
AP8182DN
AirEngine 5760-10
02 AC-DC Power,-5degC,45degC, SHILONG FUHUA AT815SN

13 90V,264V,48V/0.42A
11
68
PSE Power Supply

● Switches, ACs, and APs supporting the PoE out function can be used as power
sourcing equipment (PSE) to supply power to connected powered devices
(PDs). Ensure that the PoE out power of a PSE meet requirements of PDs.
● An S5720-14X-PWH-SI-AC (part number: 02350MTV) can supply UPoE power
to AP7050DN-Es.

WLAN
6.10 Installation Guide for Power Supply Surge

Protectors
● Connect an AC surge protector to the inlet of a power distribution box (PDB)
in parallel mode to protect powered devices (PDs) in the box.
● Deploy a PoE surge protector between the PoE ports on the power adapter
and AP through an Ethernet cable. Additionally, ground the PoE surge
protector.
Figure 6-173 Installing a surge protector
6.10.1 Installing an AC Surge Protector

● Utility knife
● Cord end terminal
● Crimping tool
● Yellow green ground cable
Follow these precautions before the installation:

● The power cable has been installed in the cabinet.
● The device installation position in the cabinet is determined and arranged
properly.
● A reliable ground point is available, and 35 mm standard guide rails have
been installed in the cabinet.
● Professional personnel are available for installing and maintaining the AC
surge protector. Before installation, verify that the installation environment is
not powered on and the surge protector is intact. If the surge protector is
damaged or the window is displayed in red, the surge protector cannot work.
If the window is displayed in green, the surge protector is normal.
Background
Figure 6-174 shows the structure of an AC surge protector (part number:
19020062).

WLAN
Figure 6-174 Structure of an AC surge protector
Procedure
Step 1 Connect an AC surge protector to the inlet of a PDB in parallel mode. For the L/N
and PE wiring methods, see Figure 6-175 and Figure 6-176. A cord end terminal
is used as the connector, and the PE connector is reliably grounded.

WLAN
Figure 6-175 Kevin wiring method

WLAN
Figure 6-176 Common wiring method
● It is recommended that the diameter of a cable on the L/N connector be no less than 16
mm2.
● It is recommended that the diameter of the ground cable on the PE connector be
greater than 6 mm2, and the cable length be less than 0.5 m.
● The NC/C/NO connector is used to monitor remote signals and generate alarms. Leave
the connector reserved when it is not used.
Step 2 Fix the AC surge protector. Secure the surge protector through 35 mm standard
guide rails, and fix the surge protector to the PDB by sliding the metal clip, as
Figure 6-177 Fixing an AC surge protector

WLAN
The cable length between a surge protector and its protected device must be greater than 5
m.
----End
6.10.2 Installing a PoE Surge Protector

● Wrench
● Crimping tool
● Bare crimp terminal
● Yellow green ground cable
● Cable tie
Follow these precautions before the installation:

WLAN
● A power adapter has been connected to the power socket.

● A reliable ground point is available.
Background
Figure 6-178 shows the structure of a PoE surge protector (part number:
19020303).
Figure 6-178 Structure of a PoE surge protector
Procedure
Step 1 Deploy a PoE surge protector near the power adapter in a PDB.
Step 2 Connect the PoE surge protector.

1. Connect the Protect port to the adapter using an Ethernet cable.
2. Connect the Surge port to the AP using an Ethernet cable.
3. The PE connector (cord end terminal) is grounded using a yellow green cable.
It is recommended that the diameter of the ground cable on the PE connector be

greater than 4 mm2, and the cable length be less than 0.5 m.

WLAN
Step 3 Fix the power adapter and PoE surge protector using cable strips in the PCB.
----End
6.11 AC Login
6.11.1 Logging In to the AC Through the Console Port
Context
A console cable can connect a PC to an AC. Connect the RJ45 connector of the
cable to the console port of the AC, and connect the DB9 connector to the serial
port of the PC. You can connect the PC to the AC through the console cable. This
section uses PuTTY as an example to illustrate how to log in to the device through
the console port.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the console port of the AC to the COM port of a PC through console
cables.
Step 2 Start PuTTY on the PC.

The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set Connection type to Serial, enter COM1 in Serial line based on the serial port
of the PC, and retain default settings for the other parameters.

WLAN
A PC may have multiple connection interfaces; therefore, the interface connected through
the console cable is selected in this example. Generally, COM1 is selected.
If the console port communication parameters of the device are modified, modify the
communication parameters on the PC accordingly (ensure that the parameter values are
the same) and re-establish the connection.
When you log in to the AC6800V through the console port, set the baud rate to 115200.
Step 4 Click Open.
After the connection is complete, enter the login password and press Enter, and
you can enter commands to configure or manage the device. On the first login,
you have to reset the password.
The password value is a string of case-sensitive characters. It must contain at least two
types of characters, including upper-case and lower-case letters, digits, and special
characters. For details, see the information printed in the screen.
----End
6.11.2 Logging In to the ACU2 from the MPU Through the

Console Port

WLAN
Background
The console port of the ACU2 can be used for:
● Logging in to the ACU2 from a PC using a console cable. The corresponding
user interface view is Console 0.
● Redirecting to the ACU2 through the MPU of the
S7700&S9700&S12700&S9300. The corresponding user interface view is
Console 1.
Networking Requirements
You can log in to the S7700&S9700&S12700&S9300 MPU through the console port
or through Telnet, and run the redirection command. Then redirect the login
process to the console port of the ACU2 as prompted to log, as shown in Figure
6-179.

WLAN
Figure 6-179 Networking of redirection to the ACU2 through the

S7700&S9700&S12700&S9300 MPU
Login Redirection Console

port of the
ACU2
PC

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the S7700&S9700&S12700&S9300 MPU.
Step 2 Run the connect slot slot-num command in the user view.
slot-num indicates the number of the slot where the ACU2 is installed on the
S7700&S9700&S12700&S9300.
The following message is displayed:

******************************************************
* Slot 2 output to mainboard *
******************************************************
Press Ctrl+D to quit
Step 3 Press Enter. The system redirects you to the console port of the ACU2 to log in to
the ACU2.
To return to the S7700&S9700&S12700&S9300 MPU, press Ctrl+D.

To log in to the ACU2 on the backup switch in a CSS, run the local-telnet command on the
master switch MPU to log in to the backup switch, and then run the connect command to
log in to the ACU2.
----End
6.11.3 Logging In to the AC Using STelnet
Context
Before the device is delivered, the STelnet service (port 22) has been configured on
the device. The STelnet interface number is 22, and the default user name and
password are admin and admin@huawei.com, respectively.
● For an AC with a management Ethernet port, such as AC6605, the IP address

169.254.1.1 has been configured for the management Ethernet port before
delivery.
● For an AC without any management Ethernet port, such as AC6005, the IP
address 169.254.1.1 has been configured for VLANIF 1 before delivery, and
service ports have been added to VLAN 1 by default.
The third-party software PuTTY is used as an example here.
Prerequisites
Before logging in to the device for the first time, complete the following tasks:
● Start the device properly.

● Prepare network cables used to connect device interfaces.
● Configure the PC's IP address and subnet mask. The IP address must be on
the network segment 169.254.1.0/24 (excluding 169.254.1.1).

WLAN
Procedure
Step 1 After the device is powered on, connect the PC's network interface to the device
using network cables.
● For an AC with a management Ethernet port, such as AC6605, connect to the
management Ethernet port.
● For an AC without any management Ethernet port, such as AC6005, connect
to any service port.
Step 2 Ping 169.254.1.1 from the PC to check whether the device can be pinged
successfully.
If the ping operation fails, check whether the PC's IP address is correct or replace
the network cable.
Step 3 Use the PuTTY software to log in to the device, enter the device IP address, and
select the SSH protocol type.
Figure 6-180 PuTTY Configuration page
Step 4 Click Open. Enter the user name and password at the prompt, and press Enter.
You have logged in to the device. (The following information is only for reference.)
login as: admin
admin@169.254.1.1's password:
<Huawei>

WLAN
It is recommended that you change the initial user name and password after login.
----End
6.11.4 Logging In to the AC Using Telnet
Context
In V200R005C00 and later versions, upon factory delivery, the Telnet server is
disabled. Before connecting to the device through Telnet from a user terminal,
make sure that the Telnet service is enabled on the device through the console
port or by the STelnet service.
The Telnet protocol poses a security risk, and therefore the STelnet V2 protocol is
recommended.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 6-181, the AC is added to an enterprise WLAN network to
manage APs. The AC is deployed in bypass mode and connects to APs through
SwitchA at Layer 2. GE0/0/1 on the AC and GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 on SwitchA are
Layer 2 Ethernet ports. To allow remote device management, you need to log in to
the AC through the console port and configure the Telnet service.
The following uses AC6605 and AC6005 as an example to describe how to
configure an AC with a management Ethernet port and an AC without any
management Ethernet port, respectively.

WLAN
Figure 6-181 Networking diagram for Telnet service configuration
administrator
VLANIF 200
192.168.1.1/24 PC
SwitchB
RS-232 serial port
Ethernet Console cable
Console port
GE0/0/2 GE0/0/1
SwitchA
GE0/0/3 AC
GE0/0/1
VLANIF 100
192.168.0.1/24
AC6005:GE0/0/8
VLANIF 1
AP
192.168.0.2/24
AC6605:MEth 0/0/1
192.168.0.2/24
WLAN service link

STA Telnet management link
WLAN
Configuration Roadmap
1. Log in to the AC through the console port to configure Telnet.
2. Configure a default route for the AC so that the PC and AC can communicate,
meeting the basic requirement for login using Telnet.
3. Set basic Telnet parameters so that the administrator can log in to the AC
using Telnet.
Procedure

WLAN
Step 2 Log in to the AC through the console port. For the method of login through the
console port, see Logging In to the AC Through the Console Port.
Step 3 Set the device name.
[HUAWEI] sysname AC
Step 4 Enable the Telnet service on the AC.

[AC] telnet server enable
Step 5 Configure a default route for the AC.

[AC] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.1
Step 6 Configure a management IP address for the AC.

● For an AC with a management Ethernet port (such as AC6605):
[AC] interface meth 0/0/1
[AC-MEth0/0/1] ip address 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
[AC-MEth0/0/1] quit
● For an AC without a management Ethernet port (such as AC6005):

a. Configure a management VLAN.
[AC] vlan 1
[AC-vlan1] description admin_VLAN
b. Set the type of the interface that connects AC and SwitchA to trunk. Add
the interface to the management VLAN in trunk mode.
[AC] interface Gigabitethernet 0/0/8
[AC-GigabitEthernet0/0/8] port link-type trunk
[AC-GigabitEthernet0/0/8] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1
[AC-GigabitEthernet0/0/8] quit
c. Configure a management IP address for the AC.

[AC] interface vlanif 1
[AC-Vlanif1] ip address 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
[AC-Vlanif1] quit
Step 7 Set the level of login users 0 to 4 to 15 and set the authentication mode to AAA.
[AC] user-interface vty 0 4
[AC-ui-vty0-4] user privilege level 15
[AC-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode aaa
[AC-ui-vty0-4] quit
[AC] aaa
[AC-aaa] local-user huawei password irreversible-cipher huawei123
[AC-aaa] local-user huawei privilege level 15
[AC-aaa] local-user huawei service-type telnet
Step 8 Verify the configuration.

After the preceding configuration is complete, the administrator can log in to the
AC using Telnet.

WLAN
----End
6.11.5 Logging In to the AC Using a Web Browser
Context
● For an AC with a management Ethernet port, such as AC6605, the IP address
169.254.1.1 has been configured for the management Ethernet port before
delivery.
● For an AC without any management Ethernet port, such as AC6005, the IP
address 169.254.1.1 has been configured for VLANIF 1 before delivery, and
service ports have been added to VLAN 1 by default.
Prerequisites
Before logging in to the device for the first time, complete the following tasks:
● Start the device properly.
● Prepare network cables used to connect device interfaces.
● Configure the PC's IP address and subnet mask. The IP address must be on
the network segment 169.254.1.0/24 (excluding 169.254.1.1).

WLAN
Procedure
Step 2 Open a web browser on a PC, and enter the management address in the format of
https://169.254.1.1 in the address bar. Then press Enter.
If the system prompts that there is a problem with the security certificate, ignore
the prompt and continue your access. The following uses Internet Explorer 11 as
an example. If information shown in the following figure is displayed, select
Continue to this website (not recommended).
Step 3 Set the language, user name, and password, and click Login.
The default user name and password are admin and admin@huawei.com,
respectively. Change the password as prompted at the first login.
The web system home page is displayed. You can manage and maintain the
device. For details, see Web-based Configuration Guide.
----End
6.11.6 Logging In Through a Mini USB Port

Context
Only the AC6605 supports login through the mini USB port.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before logging in to the device through a mini USB port, complete the following
tasks:
● Preparing the mini USB cable
● Preparing the mini USB driver that is compatible with the PC's operating
system

WLAN
To obtain the mini USB driver, visit Huawei technical support website and download
AC6605-MiniUSB-driver.001.zip based on the product model and version. The mini
USB driver supports only Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 operating
systems.
● Enterprise technical support website: https://support.huawei.com/enterprise
● Carrier technical support website: https://support.huawei.com
● Installing the terminal emulation software on the PC
You can use the built-in terminal emulation software (such as the HyperTerminal of
Windows XP) on the PC. If no built-in terminal emulation software is available, use the
third-party terminal emulation software. For details, see the software user guide or
online help.
Configuration Process
Install the mini USB driver on the PC, use the terminal emulation software to log
in through the mini USB port, and configure the device.
Default Settings
Table 6-36 Default settings for the device mini USB port
Transmission rate 9600 bit/s
Flow control mode None
Parity bit None
Stop bit 1
Data bit 8
Procedure
Step 1 Install the mini USB driver.
1. Use a mini USB cable to connect a PC USB port to the mini USB port of the
device.
If you reinstall the mini USB cable or manually terminate the serial connection when
using the mini USB port, open a new serial connection window after the serial
connection is restored. The original serial connection window is invalid.
2. Double-click the driver installation file on the PC and click Next, as shown in
Figure 6-182.

WLAN
Figure 6-182 Running a driver on the PC
3. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next, as shown
in Figure 6-183.

WLAN
Figure 6-183 Accepting the terms in the license agreement
4. Click Change to change the driver directory, and click Next, as shown in
Figure 6-184.

WLAN
Figure 6-184 Specifying the driver directory
5. Click Install and decompress the driver. When the system finishes
decompressing the driver, click Finish, as shown in Figure 6-185.

WLAN
Figure 6-185 Finishing driver decompression
6. Find the DISK1 folder in the specified driver directory, and double-click
setup.exe.
7. Click Next. Select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click
Next to install the driver.
8. Click Finish to finish installing the driver. Right-click My Computer, and
choose Manage > Device Manager > Ports(COM&LPT). The system displays
TUSB3410 Device indicating the driver that has been installed.
If there is no TUSB3410 device in the device manager, reinstall the driver or use
another mini USB cable to connect the device to the PC.
Step 2 Use the terminal emulation software to log in to the device through the mini USB
port.
1. Start the terminal simulation software on the PC. Establish a connection, and
set the connected interface and communication parameters.
A PC may have multiple connection interfaces; therefore, the interface connected

through the mini USB cable is selected in this example.
If the serial interface communication parameters of the device are modified, modify
the communication parameters on the PC accordingly (ensure that the parameter
values are the same) and re-establish the connection.
2. Press Enter until the following information is displayed. Enter the password
and confirm password. (The following information is only for reference.)

WLAN

Info: A plain text password is a string of 8 to 128 case-sensitive characters and must be a combination
of at least two of the follow
ing: uppercase letters A to Z, lowercase letters a to z, digits, and special characters. A cipher text
password contains 56 or 68 ch
aracters.
Enter password:
Confirm password:
– The password entered in interactive mode is not displayed on the screen.

– When you log in to the system again in password authentication mode, enter the
password that is set during the initial login.
You can run commands to configure the device. Enter a question mark (?)
whenever you need help.
----End
6.12 AP Login
6.12.1 Overview of AP Login
APs can work in Fit, Fat, or cloud mode. In most cases, a new AP works in Fit
mode by default. After the first login to an AP, you can switch the AP mode as
required.
Table 6-37 AP mode description
AP Mode Description Application Scenario
Fat Fat APs are independently SOHO or small WLAN

deployed and configured, and
act as enterprise-class wireless
routers or bridges.
Fit Fit APs are managed by an AC Medium- and large-sized

and receive configurations campus WLAN
from the AC. STA access is also
controlled by the AC.
Cloud Deployed in CloudCampus Small- to medium-sized

Solution, cloud APs are WLAN, allowing for flexible
managed by the SDN deployment and low O&M
controller. STA access is also costs
controlled by the SDN
controller.
APs support various connection and login modes. After setting up the network
connection between a client and an AP, you can log in to the AP.

WLAN
Table 6-38 AP connection and login modes

AP Connectio Login Version Description
Mode n Mode Mode Support
Fit Console Console All versions From V200R007C10, the

offline management VAP is
Ethernet STelnet All versions enabled by default after a
cable Fit AP is powered on,
Wireless From allowing for wireless
V200R007C10 connections. After the AP
goes online on the AC, the
disabled and will not be
enabled when the AP goes
offline.
From V200R009C00, the
enabled automatically
when a Fit AP goes offline
from the AC.
Fat Console Console All versions -
Ethernet STelnet All versions

cable
Wireless From
V200R008C10
Ethernet Web All versions

cable
Wireless All versions
Cloud Console Console All versions From V200R007C20, cloud

APs support the offline
Ethernet STelnet All versions management VAP.
cable
Wireless From
V200R007C20
Ethernet Web All versions

cable
Wireless From
V200R007C20
6.12.2 AP First-Time Login

In most cases, a new AP works in Fit mode by default. To switch its working mode,
log in to the AP first. A Fit AP allows for login through STelnet or console.

WLAN
6.12.2.1 Logging In to an AP Through STelnet
Before logging in to a Fit AP through STelnet, connect a terminal to the AP using

an Ethernet cable or in wireless mode to ensure that they are reachable to each
other. Then you can log in to the AP using an SSH client. Table 6-39 lists default
parameters of a Fit AP.
Table 6-39 Default parameters of a Fit AP

Parameter Ethernet Cable Wireless Connection
Connection
SSID N/A hw_manage_xxxx (xxxx

specifies the last four
digits of the AP's MAC
address.)
Wireless password N/A hw_manage
IP address 169.254.1.1 169.254.2.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
User name admin admin
Password admin@huawei.com admin@huawei.com
● In V200R009 or earlier, the default subnet mask of an AP in Ethernet cable connection is

255.255.0.0.
● The default IP address for logging in to the RU in Ethernet cable connection is 169.254.1.2.
Connecting to an AP
● Through an Ethernet cable
You can connect a PC to any network port on an AP or a network port on a
switch reachable to the AP (IP addresses of the PC and AP on the same
network segment).

WLAN
Figure 6-186 Connecting to an AP through an Ethernet cable
GE/PoE_IN
PC AP
Power cord
The PC and AP are directly connected.
GE/PoE_IN
AP PoE switch PC
The PC and AP are connected to network ports

of a switch (on the same network segment).
AC input
GE/PoE_IN
AP
PoE adapter PC
The PC is connected to the AP through a

PoE adapter.
a. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the PC to the AP.

b. Configure the IP address of the PC to be on the same network segment
as the default IP address of the AP, for example, 169.254.1.x/24
(169.254.1.100 recommended, 169.254.1.1 excluded).
● In wireless mode

WLAN
Figure 6-187 Connecting to an AP in wireless mode
Mobile phone
AP
PC
a. Configure the IP address of the terminal to be on the same network

segment as the default IP address of the AP, for example, 169.254.2.x/24
(169.254.2.100 recommended, 169.254.2.1 excluded).
b. Within the coverage of the AP, search for the SSID hw_manage_xxxx on
the terminal. After you enter the correct wireless password, the terminal
can access the WLAN.
Logging In to the AP
Step 1 Start the SSH client software on the terminal and access the IP address of the AP
using STelnet V2.
Step 2 Enter the user name and password as prompted, and log in to the user interface.
login as: admin
Further authentication required
admin@169.254.1.1's password:admin@huawei.com //For information security, characters you entered are
invisible.
Info: Current mode: Fit (managed by the AC). //The current mode is Fit.
Info: You are advised to change the password to ensure security.
<Huawei>
----End
6.12.2.2 Logging In to an AP Through the Console Port
You can connect a terminal to a Fit AP through a console cable, and then log in to
the AP using the terminal simulation software. Table 6-40 lists default parameters
of a Fit AP.
Table 6-40 Default parameters of a Fit AP
Baud rate (B) 9600
Data bits (D) 8

WLAN
Parity (P) None
Stop bits (S) 1
Flow control (F) None
User name admin
Connecting to an AP
You can connect a PC to the console port of an AP through a console cable.
Figure 6-188 Connecting to an AP through a console cable
Console
AP
PC
communication parameters according to Table 6-40.
Step 2 Press Enter, enter the user name and password as prompted, and log in to the
user interface.
You are advised to change the default user name and password upon your first
login.
Login authentication
Username: admin
Password: admin@huawei.com //For information security, characters you entered are invisible.
----End
6.12.2.3 Switching the AP Working Mode
After the first login to an AP, you can switch the AP mode as required. Run the
following commands to switch the AP working mode.

WLAN
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] ap-mode-switch fat //fat indicates the Fat mode, and cloud indicates the cloud mode.
Warning: The system will reboot and start in fat mode of V***R***C**SPC***. Continue? (y/n)[n]:y
Info: system is rebooting ,please wait.................
For details, see Example for Switching a Fit AP with Factory Defaults to the Fat
Mode by One Click.
6.12.2.4 Follow-up Procedure
● Fit AP:
– Upgrade: Search for Fit AP upgrade guide, and refer to the upgrade
guide in the documentation of the correct version.
– Configuration: Search for AC product documentation, and refer to the
● Fat AP:
– Upgrade: Search for Fat AP upgrade guide, and refer to the upgrade
– Configuration: Search for Fat AP product documentation, and refer to
the configuration guide in the documentation of the correct version.
● Cloud AP:
– Upgrade: Search for cloud AP upgrade guide, and refer to the upgrade
– Online configuration: Search for cloud AP product documentation, and
refer to the configuration guide in the documentation of the correct
version.
– Service configuration after APs go online: Search for CloudCampus
Solution, and refer to the deployment guide in the documentation of the
correct version.
6.12.3 AP Regular Login
APs can work in Fat, Fit, or cloud mode. The mode of non-first login to APs varies
depending on the AP mode.
● Fat AP: allows login to the CLI or web platform in wired or wireless mode.
After login to the AP, you can perform service configuration and maintenance.
● Fit AP: goes online on the AC after connecting to the WLAN. Then you can
operate and maintain Fit APs on the AC. If a Fit AP goes offline from the AC,
you can log in to the CLI of the Fit AP for maintenance.
● Cloud AP: goes online on the SDN controller after connecting to the WLAN.
Then you can operate and maintain cloud APs on the SDN controller. If a
cloud AP goes offline from the SDN controller, you can log in to the CLI or
web platform for maintenance.

WLAN
6.12.3.1 Logging In to an AP Through the Web Platform
Applicable Mode
This login mode is applicable to Fat APs and cloud APs.
Before logging in to an AP through the web platform, connect a terminal to the
AP using an Ethernet cable or in wireless mode to ensure that they are reachable
to each other. Then you can log in to the AP using a browser. Table 6-41 lists
default parameters of an AP.
Table 6-41 Default parameters of an AP

Parameter Fat AP Cloud AP
SSID HUAWEI-XXXX (XXXX hw_manage_xxxx (xxxx

specifies the last four specifies the last four
digits of the AP's MAC digits of the AP's MAC
address.) address.)
Wireless password None hw_manage
IP address ● Ethernet cable ● Ethernet cable

connection: connection: 169.254.1.1
169.254.1.1 ● Wireless connection:
192.168.1.1
NOTE
When an AP5510-W-GP
works in Fat mode, the
default IP address for
logging in to the AP
through an Ethernet cable
is 192.168.1.1.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
User name admin admin
Password admin@huawei.com The default password of a

cloud AP is
admin@huawei.com.
After the cloud AP goes
online on the controller,
the password of the
admin user is
automatically changed by
the controller, please log
in with the new password.

WLAN

255.255.0.0.
Connecting to an AP
network segment).
GE/PoE_IN
PC AP
Power cord
GE/PoE_IN
AP PoE switch PC

AC input
GE/PoE_IN
AP
PoE adapter PC

PoE adapter.

b. Configure the PC.
n Logging in to FAT AP: Configure the PC to automatically obtain an IP
address.
n Logging in to cloud AP: Configure the IP address of the PC to be on
the same network segment as the default IP address of the AP, for
example, 169.254.1.x/24 (169.254.1.100 recommended, 169.254.1.1
excluded).

WLAN
Mobile phone
AP
PC
a. Configure the terminal to automatically obtain an IP address.

b. Within the coverage of the AP, search for the WLAN on the terminal. You
can access the WLAN directly or by entering the correct wireless
password.
Step 1 Open the browser on the PC, enter http://IP address or https://IP address in the
address box, and press Enter. The login page is displayed.
Step 2 Select a language for the web platform, enter the default user name and
password, and click Login. The web platform home page is displayed.
For the sake of security, you are prompted to change the password when logging
in to the web platform for the first time. After you change the password, re-log in
to the AP.
----End
6.12.3.2 Logging In to an AP Through STelnet
Applicable Mode
This login mode is applicable to Fit APs, Fat APs, and cloud APs.
Before logging in to an AP through STelnet, connect a terminal to the AP using an
Ethernet cable or in wireless mode to ensure that they are reachable to each
other. Then you can log in to the AP using an SSH client. Table 6-42 lists default
parameters of an AP.

WLAN

Parameter Fit AP Fat AP Cloud AP
SSID hw_manage_xx HUAWEI-XXXX hw_manage_xxxx

xx (xxxx (XXXX specifies (xxxx specifies the
specifies the last the last four digits last four digits of
four digits of of the AP's MAC the AP's MAC
the AP's MAC address.) address.)
address.)
Wireless hw_manage None hw_manage

password
IP address ● Ethernet ● Ethernet cable ● Ethernet cable

cable connection: connection:
connection: 169.254.1.1 169.254.1.1
169.254.1.1 ● Wireless ● Wireless
● Wireless connection: connection:
connection: 192.168.1.1 169.254.2.1
169.254.2.1 NOTE
When an AP5510-
W-GP works in Fat
mode, the default
IP address for
logging in to the
AP through an
Ethernet cable is
192.168.1.1.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
User name admin admin admin
Password admin@huawei. admin@huawei.co The default

com m password of a cloud
AP is
admin@huawei.co
m. After the cloud
AP goes online on
the controller, the
password of the
admin user is
automatically
changed by the
controller, please
log in with the new
password.

WLAN

255.255.0.0.
Connecting to an AP
network segment).
GE/PoE_IN
PC AP
Power cord
GE/PoE_IN
AP PoE switch PC

AC input
GE/PoE_IN
AP
PoE adapter PC

PoE adapter.

b. Configure the PC.
n Logging in to FAT AP: Configure the PC to automatically obtain an IP
address.
n Logging in to FIT AP or cloud AP: Configure the IP address of the PC
to be on the same network segment as the default IP address of the

WLAN
AP, for example, 169.254.1.x/24 (169.254.1.100 recommended,

169.254.1.1 excluded).
Mobile phone
AP
PC
a. Configure the terminal.

n Logging in to FAT AP or cloud AP: Configure the terminal to
automatically obtain an IP address.
n Logging in to FIT AP: Configure the IP address of the terminal to be
on the same network segment as the default IP address of the AP,
for example, 169.254.2.x/24 (169.254.2.100 recommended,
169.254.2.1 excluded).
b. Within the coverage of the AP, search for the WLAN on the terminal. You
can access the WLAN directly or by entering the correct wireless
password.
Step 1 Start the SSH client software on the terminal and access the IP address of the AP
using STelnet V2.
Step 2 Enter the user name and password as prompted, and log in to the user interface.
----End
6.12.3.3 Logging In to an AP Through the Console Port
Applicable Mode
This login mode is applicable to Fit APs, Fat APs, and cloud APs.
You can connect a terminal to an AP through a console cable, and then log in to
the AP using the terminal simulation software. Table 6-43 lists default parameters
of an AP.

WLAN
Baud rate (B) 9600
Data bits (D) 8
Parity (P) None
Stop bits (S) 1
Flow control (F) None
User name Fit AP and cloud AP: admin

Fat AP: None
Password Fit AP and cloud AP:

admin@huawei.com
Fat AP: None (configured when the
user logs in for the first time)
In versions earlier than V200R009C00, when you log in to a cloud AP through the console port,
no default user name or password is available. Upon your first login, configure the login
password.
Connecting to an AP
You can connect a PC to the console port of an AP through a console cable.
Figure 6-193 Connecting to an AP through a console cable
Console
AP
PC
communication parameters according to Table 6-43.

WLAN
Step 2 Press Enter, enter authentication information as prompted, and log in to the user
interface. (The following information is for reference only.)
For a Fit or cloud AP, enter the default user name admin and password
admin@huawei.com.
You are advised to change the default user name and password upon your first
login.
Login authentication
Username: admin
Password:
For a Fat AP, you need to set the console login password upon the first login, and
then log in using this password.
Info: A plain text password is a string of 8 to 16 case-sensitive characters and must be a combination of at
least two of the following: uppercase letters A to Z, lowercase letters a to z, digits, and special characters. A
cipher text password contains 56 or 68 characters.
Enter password:
Confirm password:
----End

WLAN Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WLAN Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WLAN

Hardware Installation and

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

About This Document

Indicates an imminently hazardous

Indicates a potentially hazardous

Indicates a potentially hazardous

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous

NOTE Calls attention to important

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

1.1.4.1.2 The PWR Indicator Is Steady On........................................................................................................................... 67

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

1.2.5 Maintaining the Device................................................................................................................................................. 111

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

1.4.1.2 Power Modules............................................................................................................................................................. 167

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

1.5.3 Replacing an ACU2......................................................................................................................................................... 204

2 Indoor Access Points........................................................................................................... 207

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

2.2.2.8 Powering on the Device............................................................................................................................................ 245

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

2.4.2.8 Powering on the Device............................................................................................................................................ 283

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

2.6.2.5.4 Junction Box (86 mm) Mounting....................................................................................................................... 322

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

2.8.2.3 Unpacking the Equipment........................................................................................................................................ 364

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

2.10.2.2 Installation Flowchart.............................................................................................................................................. 399

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

2.12.1.3 Basic Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 438

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

2.14 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP4050DN).......................................................................... 477

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

2.15.2.9 Checking the Device After Installation.............................................................................................................. 521

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

2.17.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a Ceiling.................................................................................................................... 562

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

2.19.2.3 Unpacking the Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 599

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xviii

2.21.1.4 Ordering Information...............................................................................................................................................643

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix

2.23 Hardware Installation and Maintenance Guide (AP430-E)...............................................................................688

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xx

2.24.2.9 Powering on the AP..................................................................................................................................................730

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi

2.26.2.6 Cable Connection...................................................................................................................................................... 768

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxii

2.28.2.5 Installing the AP........................................................................................................................................................ 808

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii

2.30.2.2 Installation Flowchart.............................................................................................................................................. 847

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiv

2.32.1.3 Basic Specifications................................................................................................................................................... 890

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv

2.33.3 Logging In to the AP................................................................................................................................................... 940

Issue 06 (2019-12-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvi

2.35.2.5.2 Installing the Device on a T-rail........................................................................................................................ 982

3 Outdoor Access Points....................................................................................................... 991